Home

Infinity Help - Berg Liquor Controls

1. August 2010 Change Business Name Change Database Folder Activate Renew by Phone Activate Renew by Fax Activate Renew by Email Enable Disable Equipment Change Price Level Set ECU Time Set Infinity System Time Network Setup ECU Hardware Station Setup Device Settings Sales Station Setup Group Setup Delete Empty Sales Station Groups Broadcast Pending Re program Calibration Align Activator Rings Store Alignment Values Default Alignment Values Show Advanced Choices Units and Accuracy Enter Calibration Mode Exit Calibration Mode Initialize Calibration Values Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 31 Brand Operations gt Container Setup a Category setup Caiegiry Senp Prices and Portions Setup Prices and Portions Generate PLUs Generate PLUs Assign Brands Assign Brands Assign Cocktails Copy Assignments Copy Assignments Portion Size Learn Mode Portion Size Learn Mode Start Pour Test Start Pour Test Exit Pour Test Exit Pour Test Start Free Pour Start Free Pour Exit Free Pour Exit Free Pour Brand List Setup Brand List Setup Brand Wizard Brand Wizard Load Initial Brand List Load Initial Brand List Select Sizes and Price Levels Select Sizes and Price Levels ee op Portion Defaults 8 ize Names gege eier Delete Unassigned Brands Cocktails Size Names Import Prices and Portions Brands Delete Unassigned Brands Cocktails Import Pric
2. cs ssccessesseeeessseeeesenseaneeenssenaeseenanaesnenseanaeensennaesesnaneeseenseaeausnes 242 Retail Usage Report eeEeEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEn 244 Sales by Price Levels X2 Report eccessseeeeeenseeneeeesenneeeeennneeeeensnaaaeenseenaeseenanaeseenanaeaeenseanausasaananees 245 Sales Summary RE Porte s eesteeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeesccnaeeeeeenaeeeeesneeeseseceaesesssnaeeeseseaeeesessaeesensenaeees 246 Sales Totals X1 Re Pport cccsseeseeeesseeeeeeenneneeenseanaesnsnnnaeseenanaeseensaaaesnseanaesaenanaesesnanaeeeenseanaesneaanaeens 247 Usage OM see ree tonnes eters ess Dense ch nee cde ce sade cats aee tee auees nah ccc casecacacen tewes scsuees sectucesccesuensscunueescqanseecencttnemectse 248 Variance RO port cccccceceeessseeneeeeeeenennsseaneeseeeeeenennecnaeaeseeeenaanennaneeseeeesanesneanaeaeseeeeasenqnaeaeseeeeaenesneanaeseenens 249 Exporting Export Report Data ecccceeesessnesneeneeeeeensnneneaneeseseeeeneeneaeaeeeseeeeaanaeneanaeceeeeaenaeneanaaaeceeesasaneseanaeaeseesenennas 250 Let to d ove gC ceeiny ener eet ee ee cee re reer eer eres reece eet ce eet ere eee eer ereeene ert careers 251 New Custom Export seecceeeeeeeesneneeeeeeeeenanneneaneeseeeeeenesneanaeaeseeeeaanasqeanaeseeeeaenseneneaaaeceeeeasneeneanaeaeseenenannas 252 Modify Custom Ex port s1sseeeeeseeeeeeenaeeeeennaee
3. 1 2 3 4 Wu O N Pull down the Pouring menu and click Category Setup Select the Category you want to switch from Click Switch Category Select the category you want to Switch To The switch is performed for every brand that has prices and portions for both the From and To categories If a cocktail qualifies for the switch with the correct category name but doesn t have the same ingredient list for the old and new categories it won t be switched Review the list of brands to receive the switch Each brand listed as being switched will only be switched if the brand s prices and portions are currently assigned to a dispenser Click a communication option These options are provided so you can wait to send the switch later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Click Continue to proceed Wait while the switch is broadcast to the ECU s if you ve selected to send changes August 2010 Switch Category gt Once you ve created additional price portion categories you can switch the price portion category at selected dispensers gt An example of switching would be for an Oktoberfest promotion You can easily switch your brands to pour at Oktoberfest prices All brands with an Oktoberfest category are switched to the new prices Any brands without an Oktoberfest category do not receive the switch When the promotion ends you can switch from Oktobe
4. 2 Click New _ It s essential to specify the First we want to set up an Infinity type ECU correct dispensers in the correct positions for ECUs to control pouring at the dispensers l Select the name of the Network you set up for Infinity ECUs e g Uptown Grill Infinity Type the unique ECU number Uptown Grill s Infinity ECU is numbered 1 The ECU number must match the number setin the ECU itself OR If you don t know the ECU number click Identify to communicate with the network and determine the next available ECU The next numbered ECU that has not been set up will be identified Select the ECU Type Uptown Grill is setting up an Infinity ECU with Laser dispensers Click Continue Click in the Hardware Station field and type a name for this ECU e g Main Bar Choose a hardware station name which helps you easily distinguish this ECU in a selection list when you assign brands run reports or other operations Select the correct Device Type for each Dispenser Number Uptown Grill has a Laser 16 for Dispenser 1 and a Laser 6 for Dispenser 2 Depending on the ECU type you ll see one or more dispenser numbers Type a new Device Name for each Dispenser Number Use meaningful names e g Main Laser 16 or Dining AB 7 to help distinguish your dispensers easily in a list Click OK to save the ECU Wait for all communication with the ECU to finish A message confir
5. Set options on the Selections tabs for this export only See Export File Name Product Type If you don t want an export file to replace an earlier one with the same default file name you should give each export file you create a unique name See variable export name To change the currently displayed File Folder and File Name click Save As after you ve made your choices on all tabs and are ready to export see step 8 below If applicable select columns on the Columns tab Note that all report columns are not available as export columns Click Export Options to view or change your default export options Click Run to export to the folder and filename shown on the Selections tab Wait while the export file is created The time it takes to create the file is determined by the amount of sales activity the number of ECUs in the Station or group and whether you re exporting current or archive data Never turn off or restart your computer while the file is being created or sales data may be lost OR Click Save As to export to a different folder or filename Select the folder to Save in The default folder is the Program Data Berg Infinity folder Type a File name for the file see also Variable Export Name Select the file format in the Save as type field Click Save Wait while the export file is created To delete an export output file 1 Click Delete 2 Select the folder to Look in and click the filena
6. ais Ser nid Rings and Store Alignment Caley Stancers F F secure Smau e Values before calibrating e gt It s helpful to have a partner or H carry a portable computer from ees i dispenser to dispenser when performing the calibration procedure s EEN 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click par tner EE Calibrate see Calibration Overview 2 Select the Equipment Name gt To calibrate by weight set your Uptown Grill is calibrating the Main Laser 16 dispenser we set up Calibration Units Units to grams 3 Click OK before calibrating 4 Click a brand on the dispenser and click Dispenser Calibration If all brands at the dispenser are of similar viscosity choose any one of them Dont choose an especially thick brand Uptown Grill is leaving the cursor at Button 1 Brandy Standara 5 Click Yes 6 Click OK to confirm 7 Go to the Laser 16 dispenser and pour a small portion from the Button you selected into a measuring cup or graduated cylinder Record the amount or weight of the pour Then pour a large portion and record the amount 8 At the computer type the exact amount or weight of the Small Portion and the Large Portion click OK 9 If the values are not within the accuracy range click Yes to re calibrate Repeat steps 6 and 7 as needed When the values are within the accuracy range click OK All brands at the Laser 16 dispenser are now calibrated with the va
7. need for a cocktail are assigned to the gun gt If you re using the Reconciliation Report all ECUs display a tab for PLU Recipes gt If you don t need to create any PLU recipes ignore this tab gt For further information see PLU Recipes and Reconciliation Report 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Assign Cocktails 2 Select the Equipment Name and click OK You can select an ECU or a single Laser dispenser Uptown Grill is assigning cocktails to the Main Bar ECU we set up 3 If you selected an ECU click the tab for the correct Laser dispenser and the correct Cocktail Bank Our Laser 16 dispenser displays on tab A with the Regular Bank selected and the cursor at Button 1 4 Click a cocktail in the list to assign to Button 1 Uptown Grill is using Long Island Iced Tea Standard To quickly jump to a cocktail in the list click anywhere in the list and type the first letter of the cocktail Click lt Assign to put Long Island Iced Tea Standara in the Button 1 position of the regular bank Or drag and drop to the first line The cursor automatically advances to the next button Repeat steps 4 5 for the remaining Button numbers of this dispenser Repeat steps 3 6 for any other Laser dispenser tab 8 Click OK to save the cocktail assignments for all dispenser tabs You won t be able to save a cocktail assignment if the ingredients are not already assigned to the dispenser 9 Select
8. Click OK to save your entries and exit the Calibration Units and Accuracy screen Infinity retains any changes you make to calibration units and accuracy August 2010 Units and Accuracy Perform this task to modify the default calibration units or level of accuracy or the default calibration portion sizes gt A common reason for changing the default calibration unit is the use of metric units on graduated cylinders gt Calibration can be done by weight by using grams as the calibration unit This is considered by many to be the most accurate method of calibrating gt The default level of accuracy is 10 but you may want to change this if you need a higher level of accuracy gt You may want to modify the default calibration portion sizes to pour calibration portions that are exactly the same as your small and large portion sizes Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 167 Infinity Help 168 Enter Calibration Mode To enter calibration mode for one or more dispensers 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Enter Calibration Mode If necessary click Show Advanced Choices in the Calibration menu Select the Equipment Name You ll see all the hardware stations ECUs and dispensers you ve set up 3 Click OK Wait for communication with the device The selected equipment now pours calibration portion sizes and continues to do so until you use Exit Ca
9. Flow Meter only calibration pours are recorded as sales Tap 2 Second generation tap head with portion buttons used on a Dispenser Network Test Pour You may have noticed various entries of Test Pour in your brand list These entries are included in the brand list for your convenience during installation and also to assist Berg in troubleshooting your system Test Pour isn t a specific brand of liquor It s a default brand initially assigned to each dispenser It makes it possible to pour at each dispenser before you ve set up any brands with the software Test pour uses the factory default portion sizes for S R and L When you assign specific brands to each dispenser you replace Test Pour with the chosen brand A different Test Pour is used for Tap 1 dispensers TAP 1 Test Pour Time Range For dispenser networks the time of each pour is recorded Therefore reports can be run against a time range Timeout Value For all POS interfaces Timeout Value is the maximum number of seconds the ECU waits for sales terminal release of a drink code lf you select Pour Without Release or Send After Pour the timeout value becomes irrelevant Berg sets a factory default timeout value for each driver Leave this value set at the default initially typically 3 seconds The ideal Timeout Value may vary from sales terminal to sales terminal If you set it too low drinks may ring at the sales terminal but never pour at Infinity the ECU gives up waiting
10. Infinity Help 120 Set up a Brand for Inventory To set up a brand for Inventory 1 Pull down the Inventory menu and click Brand List Setup SEI Eech 2 Click Show All Options Click Multiple SE 3 On the Basic tab select a Container type the Container Cost Retail gt You need to specify how you Price and Descriptor want each brand tracked using 4 On the Inventory tab type the Par Stock OR Order Point select a Inventory Supplier if different from the one shown and type the Product Code Total Stock can only be entered when you set up anewbrand or in gt See Inventory Overview for help Inventory Check You select whether you want to use Par Stock or Order W under Siet how Point in Inventory Options You can quickly assign one supplier to all nventory works brands or one supplier to all brands in a product type in Supplier Setup gt See Checklist for Inventory 5 On the Stock Room tab if necessary type the Par Stock OR Order Setup to review the order of Point amount Inventory setup tasks You l only see this tab if you ve set up more than one stock room Each brand is listed for every stock room Enter Par Stock or Order Point amounts for the appropriate stock room s for each brand 6 Click OK to save your entries for all brands on all tabs Click Close to exit the screen without saving 7 Click Close to exit the Brand List Setup screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg C
11. Send After Pour means the ECU pours the drink before sending drink Me d Driver Setti information to the sales terminal Memory send Driver settings A l changes or Load a Driver to the 4 Click Continue to send the change to the equipment selected equipment then the Wait while the communication occurs A message informs you when the Se EE j lete 3 P ae eege kes its defaults for that driver 5 Click Close to exit the screen Repeat this procedure when you want to change the pour communication back to its original setting or to try a different setting August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Driver Settings To enter or modify driver settings y Pull down the Interface menu and click Settings Select the Driver that needs new settings To see any drivers in this list you must first activate the driver 3 Click OK The Driver Settings screen displays Depending on your driver you may not have access to tabs for features not supported by your sales terminal 4 On the Options tab select a Pour Communication option Enter a new Timeout Value only if you ve already tested the default one Select Transaction Mode only if you want the bartender to be signed in at the NCR sales terminal s mainframe computer before Infinity will pour On the Options tab select a POS ID Timeout This changes this value for all dispensers using this driver Use ECU Setup POS ID Details to
12. Status Supplier Export Columns for prices and portions export Columns refers to the order of the price portion information in each line of your export file For example in the following sample line from an export file Brand is listed first so it s column 1 Absolut Liquor A 1 0 50 1 00 500 You should enter a number on the Export Prices and Portions screen for each column name specifying the order you want it to appear in your export file There is no pre set correct order Find out if the importing program requires a specific order use your own preference or click Load Defaults to use the Berg default column order If you don t want a column included in your file for example you re not using PLUs enter a zero next to the column name on the Export Prices and Portions screen to indicate the information shouldn t appear in your file The column Brand is required Optional columns are Product Type Price Level Size Portion Portion Price PLU Descriptor Product Code Calibration Defaults and Specific Gravity If you don t want a Product Type column type a zero If you then import the file to another Infinity installation any brands in the file not already in the importing database receive Liquor as the product type If you ve chosen to export prices and portions of only one product type the Product Type column is grayed out If you enter a zero for Portion Portion Price or PLU these entries in your database are not i
13. Stock Room Container Stock Report 228 delete 179 modify 179 rename 179 setup 179 Store configuration settings 255 Store Alignment Values description 156 Supplier delete 178 modify 178 rename 178 setup 178 Switch dispensers to newcategory 136 product type fora brand 112 SC TAP 1 ECU view hardware configuration 69 TAP 1 tap controller calibrate 165 Tap 2 ECU new 84 Tap head flowmeter 93 Tap head only 93 Test Communication Test 101 driver fora station or group 195 Exit Pour Test 150 loopback test 100 memory test forECUs 277 Pour Test 149 schedule 272 Time schedule copy actions 270 create 266 Time date set for ECU 173 set for Infinity system 174 Transfer a license 45 Troubleshooting avoiding problems 330 laser won t pour 337 local network communication 331 modem dip switch setting 336 pouring problems 337 remote network communication 334 report and export problems 342 schedule problems 344 August 2010 software problems 341 U Uninstall Infinity 37 Interface 205 Unit of measure 58 Units and Accuracy Calibration Units and Accuracy 167 Unregister users 53 Unused Brands Cocktails 118 Usage Report 248 User modify 52 remove 53 unregister 53 User register 51 V Variance Report description 249 how to run 214 Version number of EPROM 278 Version Verify 286 Version Verify All 287 Version Verify Run Time 288 View equipment name mapping 70 hardware configuration 69 reports
14. X4 Hourly Sales SS Sales Summary US Usage PL Price Level Changes The following reports can only be run as custom reports under Schedule PP Price and Portion CFG Configuration RU Retail Usage CPU Cost Per Unit PLU PLU REC Reconciliation ST Container Stock AN Cost Analysis BR Brand Information VAR Variance COL Column Selection ORD Order Printout PWR Powr Loss History If you schedule a custom report the rpt abbreviation used is the based on report Report Data Identifies the data to be used when generating the report Some options are not available for all reports Options include Current Reports on all data currently stored at the ECUs or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the ECU s To run this type of report the computer must communicate with the ECU s Most Recent Archive Default Reports on data from the last time you cleared sales at the ECU s This data is stored at the computer in the most recent archive record This was formerly known as Last Z To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s This is the Berg default Weekly Reports on a business week of archive records stored at the computer A business week is defined by the End of Week day The week reported on can be the current week 1 2 or 3 weeks ago The archive records available
15. gt If you re installing drivers in your stations or groups for the first time test the driver gt Do not perform this task while drinks are being poured Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 195 Test a Driver To test a driver you ve loaded to a station or group 1 Load the driver to the station See Load a Driver 2 Pour drinks at the station Verify the correct price is ringing at the sales terminal for each drink poured 3 If the station isn t ringing up drinks properly try to determine the source of the problem Is communication between the ECU and sales terminal failing Check all hardware and cable connections To check the output of the driver use the POSTest utility found on the Infinity installation disk Run E tools postest setup exe where E is your CD drive Are drinks ringing at the sales terminal but at the wrong price Verify you ve entered PLUs into Infinity that match those of the sales terminal Re enter PLUs if necessary If your sales terminal uses modifiers verify you ve entered the modifiers correctly Are you having trouble with timing Check the default options you ve set and adjust them if necessary 4 Once the station is ringing up drinks correctly save any changes you ve made to options and modifiers as your new defaults Load the driver to any remaining stations Test each station individually making any necessary changes Make sure each station is pouring
16. 1 Select the Schedule Log Portion you want to view 2 Click View 3 If prompted click Yes to communicate with any Dispenser Networks to acquire their schedule logs which are stored initially on the Dispenser Network Click No if you do not use Dispenser Network actions or you believe you have all of these logs or you want to skip this communication 4 Wait for the log to display in the View window Use the scroll bars and Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to manipulate the view You can maximize the screen by double clicking the title bar Click Print to print the log 5 Click Close to exit the View screen To print the schedule log without viewing 1 Select the Schedule Log Portion you want to print 2 Click Print 3 If prompted click Yes to communicate with any Dispenser Networks to acquire their schedule logs which are stored initially on the Dispenser Network Click No if you do not use Dispenser Network actions or you believe you have all of these logs or you want to skip this communication 4 Select the printer and print options and click OK To delete the schedule log 1 Select the Schedule Log Portion you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion August 2010 Schedule Log gt The schedule log is a record of all schedule events gt It provides the dates and times schedules are started and stopped and all the schedule actions gt In addition the log notes
17. Charge Cancels means any canceled pours are recorded as full volume full price pours only available with EPROMS 3 00 or later Cancel Pour Sales The full sales value of any canceled pours Calculated using drink prices August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 296 Cancel Volume Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report The number of volume units of canceled drinks or pours Canceled Drinks Drinks not completed and not Sold Canceled Drinks Pours Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Drinks or Pours not completed and not Sold Canceled Sales The full sales value of any canceled drinks Calculated using drink prices Canceled Sales of Drinks Pours Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report The full sales value of any canceled drinks or pours Calculated using drink prices Category Category refers to a set of price levels with prices and portion sizes at each price level You can think of a category as a three dimensional table filled with slots for prices and portions for each price level The Standard category is the basic set of price levels assigned to each brand when it s added to the brand list You can change the name of the category from Standard to anything you choose See Category Setup You can create additional price portion categories for a brand if you need more prices and portions For example you may be having a special event or
18. Click Cancel to stop setting up a sales station 4 Select an entry in the Selection List list and drag and drop to the Current Definition list or click lt Add to move the entry Repeat for all equipment included in this station If you make a mistake select the entry and drag and drop or click Remove gt to move the entry back to the Selection List You can create an empty sales station if you want to make the hardware station assignments later Empty sales stations do not appear in station selection lists when you perform Infinity operations such as enabling disabling stations running reports etc Any empty sales stations are deleted if you close Infinity Select a Driver if necessary See Set Up Sales Station for Interface and Activate Driver for additional help Click OK to save all your entries and exit the screen Click OK to the message about loading drivers if prompted See Load Driver To modify a sales station It s a good idea to clear sales at the ECU s before modifying a sales station if you want the modified sales station s reports to reflect sales only from the date you modified the sales station 1 Select the Sales Station from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Add or remove equipment from the Current Definition and click OK to save your changes To rename a sales station 1 Select the Sales Station from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a uni
19. Diagnosis See CM12 ERROR CMO08 Unit received an invalid price level August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 347 Problem The ECU received a change price level command but the intended price level is out of range This is an unlikely error Remedy Retry Diagnosis debuginf txt ERROR CM10 Unit received an invalid file number Problem ECU cannot return the type of information that the PC has requested Usually this means that the ECU type or version doesn t match the definition in the database You can also get this error if more than one ECU has the same ECU number Remedy See CM12 ERROR CM11 Unit received an invalid record number Problem ECU cannot return the amount of information that the PC has requested Usually this means that the ECU type or version doesn t match the definition in the database It could also mean the dispenser types do not match Remedy See CM12 ERROR CM12 Record overflow Problem ECU has reported that the amount of data requested exceeds the amount that can be returned Usually this means that the ECU type or version does not match the one listed in the database Remedy Try Compare ECU to Database in Diagnostics This will show if the ECU definition differs from the database If differences are noted run Clear and Restore Memory to reset the ECU to the proper type and version This can also result from a corrupted database Run Check Database and Repair Database
20. ERROR INF23 ERROR INF24 ERROR INF25 ERROR INF26 ERROR INF27 August 2010 357 already exists Problem The name or number of the new item that you attempted to create already exists For example every station and group must have a unique name The duplicate name replaces the in the message Remedy Select another name or number Diagnosis Check your existing list of items and their definitions to see if you have them defined the way you want does not exist Problem A file or item does not exist This may be a name that you typed in or a file that normally should exist If the file is missing this may be the result of a improper installation Remedy See GE34 File name is illegal Problem The filename selected is illegal and cannot be used for this operation In some cases this may also mean the file cannot be read or the disk area is corrupt Remedy Choose a legal file name if you have made a typing error In some cases you may be able to repair a corrupt media Diagnosis Run a disk checker on the media being accessed to see if the disk has been corrupted See if you can copy the file directly Berg Infinity is currently running You must shut it down before running another Infinity program Problem You can only run one Infinity program at a time The Infinity program is already running Remedy Exit the Infinity program A schedule is currently running You must exit it before running this function
21. If you used the Communications menu you ll see dispenser network ECUs gt Use Set Addresses to senda in the list Selecting an ECU means your re setting addresses for all devices device address to the actual at the ECU SS equipment 2A If you select an ECU click on Set Current Addresses only If this is gt To crook all te davee checked the lower Address list will only include device names that are already defined If this is unchecked the Address list will contain all legal address letters 2B Select whether or not you want to address more than one device 2C Select the starting address for addressing addresses currently set at a specific ECU see Modify an ECU If you re on the Modify an ECU screen you ll see all the device addresses for the specific ECU In this case select lt All gt to send addresses to all devices at this ECU or select a single device address to send 3 Click OK A message tells you to press the address button on a specific device 4 Go to the equipment and press the flashing button on the correct device When finished the software displays the message for the next device if applicable 5 Repeat step 4 for any other device as prompted 6 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 107 Read Addresses and Versions To read addresses dispenser network devices 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Read Addresses and Versions Read Addre
22. Problem The main schedule can only be a timed schedule and cannot be changed to On Demand Remedy You can create and run as many On Demand schedules as you want as long as they are not named BERG SCH An On Demand schedule cannot be copied over the master schedule Problem The main schedule can only be a timed schedule and cannot be changed to On Demand Remedy H you want this schedule to be the main schedule change it to a timed schedule and then o the copy Current action is not supported for this database Problem The action selected to be modified is not supported by this database Therefore a different default action will be displayed in the Define Action form The schedule being modified may be from a different installation or the installation has been modified in some way since this schedule file was created Examples A schedule with a custom report is modified after all custom reports are deleted A schedule which is used to enable and disable Interface is modified after Interface has been removed Remedy Delete this action replace it with another or restore the state that was present when the schedule was created Custom export does not exist Problem The custom export named in the schedule does not exist The schedule being modified may be from a different installation or the export has been deleted or renamed since the schedule was created Remedy Delete this action replace it with another or change the name of the export file You ma
23. Since sales stations hardware station groups and device names are used in the same way a selection name must not conflict with any other selection name even of another type Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR M61 ERROR M62 ERROR M63 ERROR M64 ERROR M65 ERROR M66 ERROR M74 ERROR M81 ERROR M82 ERROR M94 ERROR M96 ERROR M97 ERROR M98 August 2010 367 Remedy Change the sales station hardware station device name or group name Name is already being used for a Group Name Problem You have tried to create a selection name that is already being used for a group name Since sales stations hardware station groups and device names are used in the same way a selection name must not conflict with any other selection name even of another type Remedy Change the sales station hardware station device name or group name Columns must be consecutive Problem Columns must be numbered 1 2 3 etc with no gaps in the sequence Which field is first is not important and some fields may be skipped entirely by using zero Some fields may also be able to share a column number with another field Remedy Revise column numbers to meet the above criteria Name is already being used for a cocktail Problem A brand you are trying to import already exists in the database as a cocktail name The brand will not be imported Remedy Edit the import file to use a different name for the brand
24. 1 25 Vodk a B 2 25 1 25 Vodka C 2 25 1 25 Coffee Liqueur A 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur B 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur C 1 50 0 75 Daiquiri A 3 50 232 Daiquiri D 3 50 233 Daiquiri C 3 50 234 The method you use depends on the importing program or your preference Either method exports cocktails accurately You specify you re using a Product Type column when you enter a number for its Column order on the Export screen Type a zero if you re not using this column and a blank line appears between cocktail definitions in the export file August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 131 Export Brand Prices and Portions To export brand prices and portions 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Point to Export Prices and Portions and click Brands 2 To export only brands of one type select a Product Type 3 Click Save As to select the File Name and path Select the folder to Save in and the File name you want Specify the file type in the Save as type field and click Save A text file uses a txt extension and can be viewed with any text editor You can specify any Column Separator with this format An Excel file uses a csv extension and can be viewed with Microsoft Excel This format requires a comma Column Separator 4 Select the price portion Category for all brands in the export file See Import Export Category To create a new category for this export type a
25. Berg s default prices and portions are used if you don t set your own You can set your own price and portion defaults 3 different ways 1 Use the Brand Wizard 2 Use this procedure 3 Use the Save as Default button on the Modify Prices and Portions screen gt Setting your own defaults is useful when you have several brands within a product type with the same prices and portions gt Setting your own defaults means new brands added to the brand list will have these defaults as well as any brands to which you assign these defaults gt Defining new default prices and portions does not affect any brands that currently have old default prices and portions Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Size Names To find size names 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Size Names To create a new size name set 1 Click New 2 Type the size name set s unique New Name The name can be up to 31 characters 3 Click Continue to proceed or click Close to exit 4 Type a name for each Size and click OK to save your changes Click Apply to To assign a size name set 1 Select the Size Name Set from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Assign To 4 Select where to assign the size names and click Continue You ll have a chance to choose which Product Type or Descriptor on the next screen 5 Select a Product Type or Desc
26. Click Get Version Number 2 Select the Equipment Name For Dispenser networks you can select the power supply in addition to any other equipment 3 Click Update version in database only if you are sure the the equipment has up to date settings A message will remind you if the EPROM version saved in the database is EPROM Version Use this feature to quickly determine the EPROM version number of selected equipment gt You ll probably only need to do different from the equipment itself the device settings are likely different this if directed by Berg also so it might be better to do a Clear and Restore Memory first personnel 4 Click Run to communicate with the equipment A message indicates the EPROM version number of the selected equipment 5 Click Close to exit August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 279 Rebuild the Database Index Files To rebuild the database index files 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Rebuild Database Index Files Rebuild Index Files 2 Wait for the operation to complete b b An MS DOS window displays with the results gt You ll probably only rebuild 4 Prese any key database index files if directed Mora resulte dieni y to do so by Pag personnel gt You may be directed to perform 4 Press any key The MB DOS window clases this procedure after checking the database for errors Rebuilding index files does not
27. Click a filename 2 Read or write down the detailed descriptions as directed by Berg personnel 3 Click OK to exit the Version Verify screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 288 Version Verify Run Time Description This screen displays a list of any file version numbers that don t match the version numbers Infinity expects You can click any filename to see details of the file If you ve just installed Infinity while other Windows programs were running try re installing Infinity after you ve shut down all other Windows programs If you ve just installed Infinity and the setup program directed you to re boot before running Infinity try re booting and running Infinity again If you ve performed all the installation instructions and Infinity still won t run perhaps there s something wrong with your Infinity disks Call your dealer or Berg personnel with the information from this screen to help troubleshoot the problem How To 1 Click a filename 2 Read or write down the detailed descriptions as directed by Berg personnel 3 Click OK to exit the Version Verify screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Compare ECU to Database To compare an ECU to the database y Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Compare ECU to Database 2 Select the Equipment Name 3 Click OK to begin the test gt If an ECU is having problems Wait while the
28. Columns refers to the order of the price portion information in each line of your import file For example in the following sample line from an import file the Cocktail name is listed first so it s column 1 Margarita Cocktail A 3 00 208 You should enter a number next to each column name on the Import Prices and Portions screen specifying the order it August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 308 appears in your import file Find out the column order used by the exporting program or just look at your import file by opening it in a spreadsheet or text editing program Look at each line and determine in what order the price portion information is listed Is the cocktail brand name listed first If so Cocktail Brand is column 1 Is Price Level next That s column 2 and so on Columns can appear in any order in your file but all lines in the file must use the same column order This means in a cocktail recipe the Cocktail Brand name of ingredients must have the same column number The Cocktail Price and Portion Price of each ingredient must have the same column number If you use Cocktail PLUs your import file may use the same column number for Cocktail PLU and ingredient Portion since one applies only to cocktail lines and the other to ingredient lines Or they may be different columns If any column is not included in your file enter a zero next to the column name on the Import Prices and Portions scr
29. Do you want to remove this brand reference Do you wish to reinitialize this brand_setup record Do you want to remove this brand_setup record Do you wish to reinitialize them Do you want to remove this cocktail reference Do you wish to fix button number Do you wish to delete button Do you want to remove this mix_setup record Do you wish to delete ingredient from cocktail Do you wish to set it to its current owner Do you want to create a brand_setup record Do you wish to reset it to the default value Do you wish to zero out the illegal price and portion Do you wish to delete this ingredient Do you want to delete the duplicate String Overflow Do you want to truncate string Do you wish to set it to an appropriate value Do you wish to create a separate reference Do you want to create it Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 396 Communication CM Warnings Interface ECR Warnings General GE Warnings Infinity INF Warnings Manager M Warnings Report R Warnings Setup S Warnings Schedule SCH Warnings See also Question Messages and Error Messages August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 397 Communication CM Warnings Warning CM100 Charge Cancels is not supported by ECU od Value ignored Problem Charge cancels is not supported by every EPROM version This ECU does not and so the charge cancel setting will be ignored Remedy You may upgrad
30. Go to any tap connected to the ECU in learn mode Select the appropriate glass for a portion size button and press the button to begin the pour The light behind the button goes out and beer continues to pour until you stop the pour Press the same button again to stop the pour If you re not satisfied with the amount poured in the glass discard the contents of the glass and pour again Each time the pour is repeated it erases the data from the previous attempt for that button Repeat steps 5 7 for the other portion size buttons at the tap using the appropriate glass size for each button Repeat steps 5 8 for any other taps you want to define portions for You only need to pour at other taps if you expect to use different glassware at those taps Otherwise you can just define the portions at one tap with learn mode and save them as defaults and load them to taps that pour other brands but use the same portion sizes See Copy Dispenser Assignments 10 Press the cancel button at any tap connected to the ECU when you are satisfied with the amounts poured for all the buttons at the tap s The lights behind the cancel and repeat buttons come back on 11 Click Continue to confirm sending learn mode portion size changes to each tap listed Click Close to exit and lose any learn mode portion sizes for that brand only You ll see a separate confirmation screen for each brand that lists all the taps to receive the learned
31. Infinity still won t run perhaps there s something wrong with your Infinity disks gt Call your dealer or Berg personnel with the information from this screen to help troubleshoot the problem August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 236 Version Verify Description This screen displays a list of any file version numbers that don t match the version numbers Infinity expects You can click any filename to see details of the file You may be directed to do this by Berg personnel when troubleshooting a problem particularly if you ve recently loaded other software and error messages appear when you run Infinity You may help determine if files used by Infinity have been affected by the other software How To 1 Click a filename 2 Read or write down the detailed descriptions as directed by Berg personnel 3 Click OK to exit the Version Verify screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 287 Version Verify All Files Description This screen displays a list of version numbers for every file used by Infinity You can click any filename to see details of the file You may be directed to do this by Berg personnel when troubleshooting a problem particularly if you ve recently loaded other software and error messages appear when you run Infinity You may help determine if files used by Infinity have been affected by the other software To verify version numbers 1
32. Limit the filename to 8 characters The file will be given a SCH extension Schedule Log Portion Entire File is the complete schedule log This could be a large file Its size is determined by your schedule log storage length how old the log is the number of schedules you run how often you start and stop them the number of actions in your schedules etc Weekly is a selected business week of the log A business week is defined by the End of Week day The week can be the current week 1 2 or 3 weeks ago Weeks Ago specifies which week s data to use 0 is the current business week from the first day of the week to yesterday s end of business day 1 is the business week before the current week 2 is the week before that etc Monthly is a selected calendar month of the log The month reported on can be the current month or any month up to a year ago Months Ago specifies which month s data to use 0 is the current month from the first day of the month to yesterday s end of business day 1 is the month before the current month 2 is the month before that etc Date Range is a specific range of business days of the log A business day is defined by the End of Day time Schedule Log Storage Length The Schedule Log is a running history of all events the schedule program attempts It can grow to be quite large so you should delete it as often as you plan to review it Choose a storage length from one day one week one three six or twelv
33. Remedy Choose a different directory and retry Reboot Fix any problems indicated by disk diagnostics Create the desired folder yourself and reinstall Diagnosis Run a disk diagnostic tool like ScanDisk See if you can create a new folder by other means ERROR S04 Conversion failed Problem The final steps to converting the database failed Usually there will be a previous error message displayed before this one Remedy Fix the earlier message Then restore the previous database and reinstall ERROR S05 Error Copying file Problem The file named could not be copied This could be for several reasons If the file is being copied from the setup disk there may be an error on the disk You may not have enough space on hard disk You may be overwriting a file which is in use You may have disk corruption Remedy Fix any disk problems Shut down all other programs Try rebooting Delete unneeded files from your hard drive if you are low on space Diagnosis Run disk diagnostics tools such as ScanDisk Check your disk space ERROR S06 Unable to run database conversion program Error d Problem The database conversion program could not be run It may not be present on the setup disks the work folder or there may be file system problems on your PC The specific error number is given by d Remedy See S05 Diagnosis Call Berg with the error number ERROR S07 Database conversion program completed with errors Problem The part of the setup which
34. The sequence numbers for equipment in the same Sales Station must not overlap gt This screen is only available if you have activated a Micros POS terminal and you have checked the Explicit Sequence Numbers on the Preferences 4 Click OK to save the changes screen 5 Load Driver for all affected ECUs gt Sequence numbers are used by some Micros POS system such as the 3700 8700 and 9700 to allow more than one pouring area to share the same POS terminal For example if a Tap1 and an Infinity ECU were connected to the same POS terminal one of these will use sequence numbers 1 3 and the other will use 4 6 The Micros terminal would be able to distinguish between the two sources gt The Infinity 1544 ECU always uses sequence numbers 1 9 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 204 Generate PLUs To generate consecutive PLUs po sch On N Pull down the Interface menu and click Generate PLUs Select which Product Type and Category of price portion tables you want to view Check Sort by Descriptor to see your brand list sorted by any descriptors you ve set up You re selecting what you want to see in the Price Portion Tables list Select lt All gt to see all your brands listed Select a Price Portion Table and click Add to move it to the Brand PLU Order list Or drag and drop a selection to the list Use Add All to move the entire list You re se
35. This error can also result from a noisy communications line see CM05 Diagnosis If the error is reproducible put the program into diagnostic mode and rerun the operation and send the debuginf txt file to Berg personnel Run Clear and Restore Memory If you get a CM17 this is the wrong ECU type and you must delete the ECU Run Compare ECU from Diagnostics to check ECU type and version ERROR CM30 Unit received a bad parameter Problem The communication request has one or more bad parameters Remedy Retry operation Upgrade software or firmware if necessary Diagnosis Make sure that you are using the most recent software and firmware Put program into diagnostics mode Run the operation again At the error message click on diagnostics button and record the information Forward this info to Berg along with Debuginf txt August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR CM31 ERROR CM32 ERROR CM33 ERROR CM34 ERROR CM35 ERROR CM36 ERROR CM37 ERROR CM38 ERROR CM39 ERROR CM70 ERROR CM71 ERROR CM72 August 2010 349 Request exceeds device limits or capabilities Problem The communication request is asking for a functionality that is not supported or is exceeds the maximums allowed by the intended device Example Referring to size 4 when only three sizes are supported Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 Unit received an illegal request Problem The communication r
36. Type the Starting Time and Ending Time for the repeated action This defines the period of time in which the action will be repeated every Repeat Actions gt If the duration of the Repeat Actions takes longer than the interval time then one or more day S 5 3 Type the repeat Interval and click Minutes or Hours Peped intervals wil ge This is the minutes or hours between each occurrence of the action To gt If the Repeat Actions are avoid contusion the Interval should be set to be longer than the time that it scheduled for the same time as takes to run all of the Repeat Actions a Day Action the Day action s Example if you want to Archive and Clear Sales every hour during the will be run first evenings you might select 6 00 DM as the Starting Time 12 00 AM as the Ending Time and 1 Hour as the Interval 4 Click OK to save the repeat event settings The exact times the action will repeat display identically on all day tabs If the times you see are not what you want you can delete a specific action or click Clear All to remove the actions and start over August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 270 Copy Action To copy a schedule day s actions Method A You can use this method only if the destination day has no z actions Copy Actions 1 From Modify Schedule or New Schedule select the tab for the day of the week to copy 2 Select the tab for the day of the week that should h
37. V W X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary C Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Calculate Retail Price This is a way to automatically calculate the retail price per unit the customer pays for the brand You can select this automatic calculation form the Modify Multiple Brands screen or from the Archive and Clear Sales screen When you select this option form the Modify Multiple Brands screen the current price for the brand is divided by the portion size and is averaged for all sizes price levels and categories You ll see the newly calculated numbers populate the Retail Price per unit column When you select this option form the Archive and Clear Sales screen for all brands that are part of the Archive and Clear Sales the pour sales are divided by the pour volume It is recommended that you use this calculation method only with the Master Group so that all brands are updated at the same time Calibration Calibration is the process of checking and adjusting the amount of beverage poured from each Infinity dispenser Using the calibration process you tell Infinity how long to pour at a specific dispenser to achieve the desired portion size If you are unsure about the need for calibration or the process involved in calibrating an Infinity system see Calibration Calibration Mode With EPROMs 3 0 or greater calibration mode pours are not recorded as sales with the exception of Flow Meter only Tap lines All Bottle Laser
38. You can generate a sequence of PLU numbers with this form gt This quickly assigns a sequence of PLUs to the price portion tables you select and saves time entering PLUs gt If you are using Interface use this feature to quickly assign PLUs in Infinity to match the PLUs at the sales terminal You can also enter PLUs individually for each price portion table Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Uninstall Interface To remove Interface functionality 1 Remove any drivers from ECUs 2 Pull down the Options menu and click Preferences 3 Uncheck Interface and click OK to confirm the message about removing Use this option if you are not any drivers 4 Click OK Wait while the communication occurs The Interface menu option no longer displays in the Infinity main menu Remove Interface using the Interface feature gt This will remove the Interface menu and eliminate all sales terminal Interface functionality gt Note you can also just disable a driver gt You MUST remove all drivers from all ECUs before disabling Interface After disabling Interface you can re enable it at anytime from the Preferences screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Run a Current Sales Report To run a current sales report 1 Pull down the Reports menu and point to Not archived Current Sales Click the name of t
39. You ll see a trash can icon This sets lt None gt as the brand assignment If you dont assign another brand in that position the gun button pourer code or tap will not pour To quickly access prices and portions setup while making dispenser assignments 1 Click the brand in the Brand List you want to modify prices and portions y O N August 2010 Assign Brands gt You should assign brands to specific dispensers after you ve added any new brands to your brand list and set up your prices and portions gt If you have several dispensers that pour similar brands choose a representative dispenser and assign brands to it Then copy the dispenser assignments to other dispensers gt Berg recommends assigning brands to dispensers before calibration so you can calibrate specific brands poured at specific dispensers This is particularly important for brands that may pour at a less than average rate because of their thickness amaretto for instance gt Every All Bottle ID dispenser shares the same set of assigned brands gt You can t remove any brands currently assigned to cocktail recipes You must first either delete the cocktail or change the cocktail recipe gt If you want to change brand assignments after pouring a specific brand or cocktail be sure to clear sales at the ECU first If you change brands without clearing sales first all sales for the first brand will show up on reports
40. change the POS ID timeout for individual dispensers For those drivers that support it you can enter a PLU base to be added to every PLU sent to the sales terminal On the Modifiers tab select a modifier from the Modifier List and click lt Add to move the modifier to the Current Modifier Order list Continue adding modifiers to the Current Modifier Order list to match the modifier order required by the sales terminal The modifier is added to the list above PLU If you want the modifier after PLU select the modifier and drag it to the desired position or use the Up and Down buttons Enter any Transaction or PLU Bookends required by the sales terminal The Begin code signals the start of a transaction or PLU and the End code completes the transaction or PLU 8 On the Size and Price Levels tab type in any Size and or Price Level Modifiers required by the sales terminal Interface accepts modifiers from 1 255 Select Two Valued Modifiers if the sales terminal requires 2 codes for each modifier Select Show Modifiers as Hexadecimal to enter and view the modifiers in hexadecimal rather than decimal format 9 Select Size Placekeeper for Cocktails only if the sales terminal requires it 10 On the Auxiliary Modifiers tab type in any Comp Cancel and or Type Modifiers If the sales terminal requires a PLU increment to signal comp or cancel drinks instead of a modifier enter the increment in the Add to PLU box The increment plus
41. click OK to save the name or click Close to exit without saving See Modify Cocktail Prices and Portions to set up the cocktail recipe 4 Select setup entries for the new brand see Modify a Brand above and click OK to save your changes Click OK even if you didn t make any entries to confirm you want the brand set up that way To rename a brand or cocktail 1 Select the Product Type and Brand Name from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it The newname displays in the Brand Name list To delete a brand or cocktail from the list 1 Select the Product Type and Brand Name from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion August 2010 Brand List gt To save time entering the name of every brand in your system load Berg s brand list using the Brand Wizard or the Load Initial Brand List menu item gt If every brand or cocktail you want to pour is already included on the list you don t need to add any new brands gt The brand list is divided into product types beer cocktail liquor mixer wine and other The brand list can be sorted by descriptor gt To specify the sizes of your containers or add new container names see Container Setup gt When you add a new brand or cocktail to the list standard prices and portions are automatically created for it using
42. individual stations one group that includes all stations is probably sufficient for you gt A Master Group that includes all ECUs is automatically created if you install Infinity with a new database or as an update Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Delete Empty Sales Stations Groups To delete empty sales stations and groups 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Delete Empty Sales Stations Groups 2 Click Yes to proceed with the deletion You won t see a list of the sales station and group names deleted but you can safely perform this operation knowing any sales station or group with assigned equipment wont be touched August 2010 Delete Empty Sales Stations and Groups Use this menu item to quickly delete any sales stations or groups with no assigned equipment gt This is useful after you ve set up all your ECUs stations and groups or after you ve made changes that leave stations or groups empty Any time you exit Infinity this operation will be automatically performed for you Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Broadcast Pending To broadcast pending changes 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Broadcast Pending Broadcast Pending A list of the pending changes displays e g Prices and Portions have not been updated Or you ll see a message that there are no changes t
43. one is automatically replaced August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 197 Show Status To show driver status Pull down the Interface menu and click Show Status 2 Select the Equipment Name where you want to check the driver 4 You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your pice EE hardware stations 3 Click Run software to show the status of eege drivers at a station or group Wait for communication with the selected equipment A confirmation screen displays to show you which driver name and version number is loaded the enable disable status and pour options Click OK after reviewing the driver status Click Close to exit the Show Status screen gt You can quickly find out which drivers are loaded and enabled at the ECUs in the station or group A Sz August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 198 Enable Disable Driver To enable disable a driver po sch Pull down the Interface menu and click Enable Disable Select the Equipment Name where you want to enable disable a driver You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your hardware stations Click Show Actual to communicate with the selected equipment to determine the current driver status Wait while the communication occurs The Unknown field is selected if Show Actual is not selected The
44. order cost you enter here will be divided by the order quantity to determine a new container cost for the brand If you didn t check Calculate Container Cost the order cost has no effect on the container cost 4 Click Print to print a copy of the order 5 Click OK to save any changes and exit Click Close to exit if you haven t made changes To delete an orderr 1 Select the Order from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion button on the Orders screen to enter quantities delivered See How to enter deliveries August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 184 Deliveries To find deliveries 1 Pull down the Inventory menu and Click Deliveries To enter deliveries 1 Select the Order Number of the delivery and click Continue If you did not receive everything in the order and you want to keep the order in your system click Back Order and follow the steps to create a back order below You ll still be able to enter the quantities you did receive 2 Click Show Rooms to expand the order to show amounts for each stock room if you have more than one stock room Uncheck this box to see the totals for the entire order 3 Scroll to review the Order Quantity for each brand Type a new number if the delivery quantity differs from the order To completely cancel an order for any brand not delivered enter zero for its Or
45. recording portions properly If the ECU fails again replace the battery Ifthe ECU does not fail again the CPU board may be defective Memory loss at the ECU may also be caused by dirty AC power The ECU is computer grade equipment and sensitive to erratic power from a circuit shared by other electrical devices Berg strongly recommends that each ECU derive its power from its own dedicated circuit and or via a line filter Dispenser portions become inaccurate gt Switch the assigned brand to Test Pour This brand has a fixed set of portions you can test the dispenser with Remember to switch back to the correct assigned brand when youre done testing gt Are the portion sizes entered accurately at the computer Check the portion sizes for the assigned brands at the price level and size youre trying to pour gt If you have Laser dispensers the simultaneous pouring of the same brand at more than one dispenser can cause minor inaccuracies in portion size gt The magnitude of this potential inaccuracy depends on several factors that are specific to the physical configuration of the system including the number of Laser August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 340 dispensers supplied by a single tubing run the lengths of tubing runs and the size of tubing used gt A jumper setting on the Laser controller board in the ECU can set a lockout feature that prevents the pouring of any
46. remove a license 46 transfer a license 45 List calibration enter portion amount 163 List Calibration 162 Load brand list 114 driver to station or group 194 Log Clear Database Log 284 error 276 schedule 275 Loopback test 100 Management change price level 172 enable disable 171 set ECU time 173 set Infinity system time 174 Manual Enable 93 Memory clear and restore memory ofan ECU 103 test for ECUs 277 Menus of Infinity 30 Modify cocktail ingredients prices and portions 141 custom export 253 ECU 90 ECU Hardware Station 82 group 96 Modify Custom Report description 223 multiple brands 111 multiple prices and portions 139 network 81 schedule 265 single brand prices an portions 138 users 52 Most Recent Report 207 Move an ECU 88 Multiple brand setup 111 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help oe Multiple prices and portions 139 N Names forsizes 117 Network delete 81 modify 81 rename 81 setup 81 setup remote 81 view hardware configuration 69 New custom export 252 custom report 222 ECU 84 ECU by copying another 87 ECU by reading 86 87 ECU Hardware Station number 83 group 96 network 81 schedule 264 O On Demand schedule create 271 Open report files 211 Operations change price level 172 enable disable equipment 171 set ECU time 173 set Infinity system time 174 Options export 65 inventory 63 preferences 61 Reconciliation report 66 r
47. that knows how to communicate with the hardware of your specific sales terminal See Driver Help for specifics on each of the possible driver selections gt In most cases only one sales terminal is activated at a time However There may be circumstances when you are using more than one type of sales terminal or when not all ECUs need to be interfaced gt You must use Sales Stations to indicate where each driver is to be loaded Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 200 Change Pour Communication To change the pour communication option 1 Pull down the Interface menu and click Change Pour Communication 2 Select the Equipment Name where you want to enable disable a driver You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your hardware stations 3 Select the Pour Communication option you want Wait for Release means the ECU sends drink information to the sales Change Pour Communication Use this feature to temporarily change the pour communication option at selected equipment gt Changing this communication terminal and waits for approval release before pouring the drink option can be useful when Pour Without Release means the ECU sends drink information to the sales troubleshooting communication terminal before pouring a drink but doesnt wait for sales terminal approval with the sales terminal fo start the pour gt If you Clear and Restore
48. you don t use price level 3 make sure the price portion PLU entry is zero in the import file itself For example Black Russian Cock tail A 3 50 211 Black Russian Cock tail B 3 50 212 Black Russian Cock tail C 0 0 When limport are my existing prices and portions replaced Imported cocktail prices and portions will replace any existing cocktail prices and portions with the same category name If you want to import with the same category name you may want to store existing configuration August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 125 settings or backup your database before importing If you import cocktail prices and portions with a new category name they become a new set of prices and portions in your database What happens if import a category of prices and portions already assigned to dispensers The imported prices and portions are immediately sent to the ECU s What happens if a cocktail or brand in the import file is not in my database The new cocktail or brand will be added to your brand list using the product type specified in the import file New brands added this way will have no prices or portions listed except when used within the cocktail What happens if the number of sizes and or price levels in the import file is greater than the number set up for my database Any price levels and sizes in the file which exceed the maximum number of sizes and price levels set up for
49. 00 In addition we now remove the ingredient dollars 6 for Absolut and 3 for Rumpleminz Absolut now has 6 on the Infinity side and Rumpleminz has 0 Our final report looks like Vodka 10 00 10 00 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help EH Absolut 6 00 6 00 Rumpleminz 0 00 0 00 Screwdriver 7 50 7 50 Absolut Madness 9 00 9 00 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Retail Usage Report To understand the report Retail Usage This report shows the Retail Price Per Unit Pour Volume and Pour Value for each Brand This report does not distinguish types of pours or number of pours It does not show any actual sales data only the retail value of the volume poured if the unit price is collected for each volume unit poured The end of the report shows the total Pour Volume poured and the total Pour Value for all brands in the station or group Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data s
50. 1 Click the cocktail in the Cocktail List you want to modify prices and portions 2 Click the Prices and Portions Modify shortcut button The Price and Portions Setup screen displays with the Modify Cocktail Assignments screen still in the background Make and save the price portion changes then proceed with cocktail assignments To copy cocktail assignments from one dispenser to other identical dispensers See Copy Assignments O N August 2010 Assign Cocktails gt You should assign cocktails to Laser dispensers after you ve added any new cocktails to the brand list gt A cocktail is a combination of brands so you must be sure to assign brands to the Laser dispenser for the cocktail gt You can assign a cocktail to a Laser dispenser before you enter the cocktail s prices and portions or you can enter the prices and portions first Either way you must be sure the brands in the cocktail s recipe are assigned to the Laser dispenser gt You can assign cocktails to Laser dispensers before or after calibration gt If you have several Laser dispensers that pour similar cocktails choose a representative dispenser and assign cocktails to it Then copy the dispenser gt The number of cocktails you can assign to each cocktail bank is the number of buttons on the Laser gun 6 12 or 16 If you use button 16 switching on a Laser 16 gun you can assign 15 cocktails to each bank You can assign 2
51. 210 W Warning Messages 396 X Xi Report 247 X2 Report 245 X3 Report 233 X4 Report 234 ay ae Z Report 231 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC
52. 408 Schedule SCH Warnings Warning SCH101 lt schedule gt was not properly stopped the last time it was run Problem This schedule was abnormally terminated One or more actions may have been skipped This warning may be followed by SCH205 Warning SCH102 Infinity must be re installed to support the Auto Run or Recovery features The Auto Run folder is Xxx Problem If you have installed Infinity into more than one folder only the most recent install indicated by the folder name in xxx will be able to support auto run and recovery of schedules Remedy If you need to use these features re install Infinity into the folder listed as Program Folder in the about box Warning SCH103 Current settings for Auto Run or Recovery do not point to a valid Infinity program and have been removed Problem This may occur if you have installed more than one copy of Infinity or if you have moved to a different set of Infinity folders or uninstalled Infinity Remedy If your main schedule is Auto Run you must reset the Auto Run checkbox for it You may also need to re install Infinity August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 409 Setup S Warnings 100 109 110 119 170 179 Warning S100 Unable to install auto run scheduling Problem Changes are made to the system to enable the schedule auto run feature These changes failed and you will not be able to use auto run schedules Remedy Reboot and retry if you wish to us
53. 93 Report 209 221 create new custom 222 custom exports 251 delete rdf file 211 export report data 250 modify custom export 253 navigate 210 new custom export 252 open rdf file 211 options 64 print 210 run Column Selection 212 run Reconciliation 220 run Variance 214 save 210 set up Reconciliation 215 set up Reconciliation options 66 view 210 Reports Brand Information Report 225 Column Selection Report 226 Configuration Report 227 Container Stock Report 228 Cost Analysis Report 229 Cost Per Unit Report 230 Current Sales Reports 206 Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report 231 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help as Reports Custom Reports description 221 Detailed Sales X3 Report 233 Dispenser Network Pours 232 Hourly Sales X4 Report 234 how to archive and clear sales Z 208 Laser Guide Report 235 list of all reports 224 Most Recent Report 207 PLU Report 236 Power and Interface Log 237 Price Level Changes Report 239 Price Portion Report 238 Reconciliation Report 240 Reports description 209 Retail Usage Report 244 Sales By Price Levels X2 Report 245 Sales Summary Report 246 Sales Totals X1 Report 247 Usage Report 248 Variance Report 249 Reset dispenser network ECU 108 Restore clear and restore memory ofan ECU 103 full database 258 previous version full database 260 Retail Usage Report 244 Run schedule 273 Ses Sales Sales By Price Levels X2 Report 245 Sales Summary Re
54. A pictorial representation of the gun is shown with the button number or code brand name and the typical portions for that brand After selecting this report you will be prompted for the laser button codes Laser button codes are stickers that are optionally placed on the laser buttons This is easier for some people than using the numbered buttons Cocktails The assigned cocktails are listed alphabetically followed by the sequence of button pushes required to pour that cocktail The button pushes assume that you are not in cocktail mode when you start to pour the cocktail ry o i ou will see a separate page for All Bottle Portions p pag a second laser gun unless it has the same assignments as the first laser gt For help with running the repor This report can only be run as a Current report However the computer see Run a Laser Guide Report does not communicate with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from the computer s database Type of Equipment This report can only be run against hardware stations that include laser guns Laser Guide gt The Laser Guide lists the brands and cocktails that are assigned to each button on the laser gun gt The guide is suitable for placing in the bar area as a reminder for bartenders Finally the typical portion sizes for the all bottle brands are listed There is no detail for individual brands Type of Data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Be
55. Afterwards the schedule will continue on its normal course Remedy Answer Yes to run the actions listed Answer No to skip the listed actions and continue with the regularly scheduled next action Question SCH206 Switching to On Demand will delete all actions except for those currently listed under Sunday Are you sure you want to do this Problem On Demand schedule only have one list of actions Therefore if you are changing a schedule that has multiple actions it is likely you will lose most of those action by switching to On Demand Remedy H this is an existing schedule you may want to answer No and then create a new schedule instead Question SCH207 Do you want to run this test as a simulation Problem Test schedule can be done live or as a simulation Simulation will not actually communicate with any ECU Therefore the test will succeed even when there are communication problems On the other hand the equipment will not actually be affected For example a Z will not clear the ECU Remedy Answer Yes if you do not want to affect or communicate with any equipment Answer No if you want this to be a live test Question SCH208 Running this schedule will remove the auto run attribute from A Are you sure you want to run schedule B Problem Auto run can only be set on a single schedule If you have more than one schedule auto run cannot be supported Remedy Answer Yes if you want to run the schedule anyway Answer No if you want to m
56. Al capensers rave me ereen a gt This is where you can set up F apanta ai system wide dispenser and SE pouring options I D Senge Price Lavette H Show Prees gt It s a good idea to enter your T amp Seeba Reset F Anernate See Enaties system settings before setting 1 buen tes Aternate See Reset up a new ECU so the dispensers will have the system settings gt You can always change settings for a specific device later See Device Settings 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Device Settings 2 Confirm lt System Settings gt displays as the Device Name 3 Click or enter the settings you want to use for your system You ll see every possible setting for every possible device See Description of Device Settings for help with each setting Don t worry about settings not applicable to your system Since Uptown Grill does not allow comp pours we ll just uncheck Complimentary Enable and Complimentary Cocktail Enable Nowcomp pouring is disallowed on all our dispensers 4 Click OK to save 5 Select No communication at this time and click Continue This lets you send the settings later when you re ready to send all setup information to the equipment at the same time August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Quick Start Task 5 New ECU Setup To set up an ECU 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station
57. Archive and Clear Sales Z ECU s Important Considerations You may see a message on this report indicating the ECU s archive number is different from the PC s archive number This message appears whenever there is an archive number mismatch to indicate the potential of lost sales data since the last time the ECU s sales were cleared gt This message is normal for every ECU the very first time its sales are cleared ECU Archive Number 0 Computer s Archive Number 1 gt The message may also be due to performing a Restore Memory at the ECU The first time you clear sales at an ECU after performing a Restore Memory this report will always show 0 as the archive number so that it s clear that the ECU has been reset since the last time its sales were cleared gt If there is a mismatch in the archive number the number in the ECU will be set to match the computer s archive number in order to re synch the ECU and the computer and eliminate the mismatch message on subsequent reports August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 232 Dispenser Network Pours Report To understand the report Dispenser Network Pours This report show the counts stored by a TAP 2 dispenser You will typically only use this report if directed to do so by Berg personnel Dispenser Network Pours gt Go to Diagnostics Debug Mode to be able to see this report in the Advanced Reports list August 2010 Copy
58. Bottle ID Both are referred to as Infinity ECUs but they have different EPROM versions In some cases notably under DEMO you will need to indicate if the Infinity ECU is the type that supports All Bottle ID Remedy Answer Yes if this is a 4 x EPROM and No if this is a 3 x or earlier EPROM Question M304 Some products may have sales present It is suggested that you Archive and Clear Sales before continuing If you continue the sales may be lost or listed under the new assigned product Do you wish to continue Problem Changing brand or cocktail assignments may affect sales currently in the ECU If you haven t already it is best to do a clear and restore Z so that the current sales are associated with their current brand Remedy Answer Yes to continue Answer No to stop this assign so that you can clear sales first Question M305 A brand without a supplier cannot save par stock order point Continuing will set the value to zero Do you want to continue Problem A brand without a supplier is not part of inventory Therefore there is no need to set the par stock or order point Remedy Answer Yes to continue and the par stock order point will be set to zero Answer No to stay on this form Assign a supplier to the brand or set the par stock order to zero before trying to save again Question M306 This dispenser shares settings with another dispenser If you change these settings you will also affect the other dispenser s Do you want to continue
59. Brand Wizard Container Setup ssccesseeeseseeeseeneeseenensenenssenenssensasensassensaseenenseeeenseeesnsneesnseeessseeeesseees 79 Brand Wizard Confirmation eene ENEE E ENEE ENEE EN EEN EN ENEE ENKER EE EE EN saaeeeeeaeeeeeeeoeeeseaeeeseasoneee 80 Setup Network Setup s sseeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesngeeeeeseenaeseeeseaeeeseseaeeesesecuaesesesuaeeeseseaeeesessseaesesssnaeeeesssaneeeenss 81 ECU Hardware Station Setup eege ENEE NEE Ee Ee ge DEE Nee 82 New ECU NUMDG L dE 83 New ECU Setup DEER EE e EE e EE EE EE BEE EE EE Ee EE T 84 Read ECH g ECU DEE 86 Copy GI EGU WE 87 Move an ECU TTT 88 Assign re 0 SS iaiia CECE EERO CREE CCE EEE ECE C EEE EE deeg d eege ENEE deed eege Ee PEST C CECE deed TRE CET ee tree 89 Modify an ECU sccccescesssecesseecueneeseeeeseeneuseeeeeeecseeesaseeusneecuseeeaaeeeesneeceseenseeeceseeeasseeesneeceseeesseesueneesesnenseeesns 90 Set up a Cocktail Pad sscsseeseccsscdeczeccesscccendesesceueteeccesecsenesuentccseuenceuncceacencaent sent cuengecceadesteecuetecessaesceuacemeeeseds 91 Device Gettngs e eeeeeEEeEEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEESEEEEEREEEEEn 92 Description of Device Settings ccseseeeeseeeeeseeeeseneessenenssensensensessensassensasensaseenenseeesnseeeeeseeessseeeessneeeesnees 93 Sales Station Setup ccccesessssseeeeeeeeeensnesseaneeeeeeeeensenesnaeaeeeeeensnneneanaeceseeesaennsaeaeaeseeesssneeneanaeaesees
60. Click OK The name is saved and appears immediately in the Infinity title bar and at the top of all reports Business Name gt During a new install a Business Name is given to each installation The default name for the business will be the folder name but it is advisable to change to a name that reflects the actual business gt This feature is also useful if you are a dealer and want to install Infinity on your own PC to configure for a customer See also Preconfigure Software for Multiple End Users gt You can also change your business name from report options August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Change Database Folder To change your database folder Database Folder 1 Pull down the File menu Click Change Folder 2 Select the new database folder This is the path where your Infinity data is stored Changing this folder does not affect where the Infinity software program is located gt The default database folder is C 3 Click OK ProgramData Berg Infinity August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Change Program Folder To change your program folder 1 Pull down the File menu Click Change Folder You must be in Diagnostic mode to see this menu option Program Folder 2 Select the new program folder This is the path where the Infinity program is stored Changing this folder gt The default program fol
61. Column Selection Report or Runa Reconciliation Report or Runa Variance Report gt For descriptions of each report see Types of Reports For descriptions of report options see Report Options Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help View Print Save Reports To view a report Use these tools 1 2 4 5 6 Scroll bars bottom and right of the report Zoom In and Zoom Out icons on the tool bar 3 Previous Page and Next Page icons on the tool bar These are active when the report has multiple pages Table of Contents icon on the tool bar This helps you to pages in a long report Title bar double click to maximize the screen Portrait Landscape button toggle between these formats To print a report 1 2 3 4 Click the Print icon Select a Printer Name Select the Print range and number of Copies Click OK To save a report to a file 1 2 3 5 Click Save As Select the Save in folder for the report The default folder is the folder of your Infinity programs Type a File name for the report Choose a name to distinguish this report file from other report files You don t need to type the file extension You can also select an existing report file and overwrite it Select a file type from the Save as type list See Report File Types Click Save To open or delete an Infinity report file See Open or Delete Report Files August 20
62. Complimentary Enable allows complimentary pouring at any dispenser Complimentary Reset automatically resets dispensers to full price pouring after a complimentary pour Bartender Price Level Enable enables price level changes at the dispensers Otherwise price level changes can only be made in Infinity or with a schedule Size Bank Reset automatically resets the portion size or bank to regular after every pour Button 16 Enable enables button 16 for switching into and out of cocktail mode for Laser 16 dispensers August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Complimentary Cocktail Enable enable complimentary cocktail pouring at the ECU You must select Complimentary Enable and a Cocktail Mode that permits cocktail pouring first Cocktail Reset automatically resets a Laser dispenser to regular brand pouring after a cocktail pour If you also enable Start in Cocktail Mode this automatically resets to cocktail pouring after a brand pour Manual Enable enables manual pouring at the taps Simultaneous Ingredients means all ingredients in a cocktail pour at the same time This can speed dispensing and aid in mixing the cocktail You must select a Cocktail Mode that permits cocktail pouring first Start in Cocktail Mode means any reset of the equipment will put Laser dispensers in cocktail pouring mode If you also enable Cocktail Reset the dispenser switches back to cocktail pouring after a regular brand pour This option
63. Delete To remove all schedule actions August 2010 Schedule Actions Actions are the tasks you want Infinity to automatically perform with a schedule gt You must specify the action you want and the equipment to receive the action gt All standard reports in the action list use the options set in Report Options except for options for the type of data gt Some reports in the list let you select Current or Most Recent Archive export is Most Recent Archive only gt To use different report options or run a non listed report create a custom report Set Service Mode and Change Price Level actions that take place entirely on Dispenser Networks will be controlled directly by those networks That is the actions are sent to the Dispenser Network and an Infinity schedule does not need to be running in order for these actions to occur Dispenser Network actions are denoted in a schedule by bold typeface Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 267 Infinity Help 268 1 Click Clear All 2 Select a Day to clear or select lt All gt to clear all days 3 Click OK August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 269 Repeat Action To repeat an action at specified intervals in a Time Schedule 1 When you define a schedule action select Repeat instead of a specific day of the week When you click OK to save the Action the Repeat event screen displays 2
64. Each numerical code can be any number from 1 to 255 Modifiers include Bookends Size and Price Level Modifiers Size Placekeeper for Cocktails Comp and Cancel Modifiers and Type Modifiers lf your sales terminal doesn t require modifiers you don t need to worry about them on the Driver Settings screen However you may still be using comp or cancel PLU increments if the sales terminal supports them Name Modify Lists currently registered users Select the name of the user you want to modify Modify Users Accesses the Modify User Informationscreen where you can change a user s name password and or security level Monthly Report Data Reports on a calendar month of archive records stored at the computer The month reported on can be the current month or any month up to a year ago The archive records available depend on the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified month The computer looks for all archive records with dates that match the days in the specified month To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s Months Ago specifies which month s data to use for a Monthly report 0 is the current month from the first day of the month to today 1 is the month before the current month 2 is the month before that etc Most Recent Archive Report Data Reports on data from the last time you cleared sales at the ECU s This
65. Find a good backup and restore it Make sure the store reload disk has the correct serial number Invalid User Name Password combination Problem The user password combination is not valid Remedy Check your spelling and retry If you cannot get in at all use the setup disk to change the password or to turn passwords off entirely Diagnosis Setup can be used to confirm the names of the users but not the passwords Couldn t find Infinity data files Please make sure you are in the right folder or that your BERG INI file is correct Problem The Infinity database is sought in the folder the program runs out of and in the BERG INI file Usually all programs and database files are in the same folder Remedy Reinstall Diagnosis Check that the programs and database files are in the same folder In particular look for the file infdb dbd Open BERG INI found in the Windows directory with a text editor and look for the line starting with DBPATH This should also point to the same folder Unable to recover You will probably need to reboot your computer Problem Parts of the database are locked This may have happened during a previous error Remedy Reboot and retry Can t change drive Problem In trying the locate the database files the software attempted to switch to a different disk drive This attempt failed Check that the database is in the correct location Remedy Reinstall Diagnosis See GE51 Can t open logfile s Problem This er
66. LLC Infinity Help 254 Backup Options To select backup options 1 Select Change Serial Number if you want to type in a different serial number for the configuration settings Backup Options Use this option as a dealer if you are setting up for a customer site and you have a different serial number than the customer This does not gt Changing the serial number change the serial number of the existing database only the serial does not change the serial number of the backup or configuration settings stored in the number of the existing destination folder database only the serial 2 Then type the Current Serial Number and the Destination Serial number of the backup or Number and click Continue configuration settings stored in The current serial number is the serial number of the Infinity program the destination folder you re using The destination serial number should match the customers Infinity database 3 Check whether you want to use the descriptive backup folder 4 Click Continue Click Cancel to exit without changing the serial number This wll also cancel the current operation 5 Ifyou chose to use descriptive backup folders you can change the folder name if you wish Click OK 6 Select the parent folder for the backup or store If you chose to use descriptive backup folders the descriptive folder will be created under the parent folder If not the backup or store will be placed in the folder you sel
67. New ECU Setup screen gt It s essential to specify the correct dispensers in the correct positions for ECUs to control pouring at the dispensers gt All dispensers now have device names and most operations can be performed using a device name gt When you set up a new Infinity ECU with an All Bottle 7 dispenser the default calibration values for high flow pourers are sent to the ECU If you re using standard flow pourers you should enter the correct values before calibrating See Initialize calibration values gt By default all dispensers are included in the lt Default Sales Station gt You can also set up Sales Station from Sales Station Setup gt Additional functionality avalaible from this screen is found in Set up a Cocktail Pad and POS Identification Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e the ECU setup details to the ECU 9 Wait for all communication with the ECU to finish When done the ECU Setup screen displays with a message at the bottom to confirm saving the new ECU See Modify an ECU for help with dispenser network addressing features August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Read an ECU To read an ECU to add it to a network 1 oar to Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station Select the Hardware Station you want to read The ECU you read should be a functioning ECU Click Sho
68. Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Select Sizes and Price Levels Select Sizes and Price Levels 2 Select the Maximum Sizes you want for each product type You re not defining any portion sizes you re selecting the number of i different portion sizes you ll need for each product type task if you loaded the brand list e e with the Brand Wizard 3 Select the Maximum Ingredients you want for a cocktail recipe gt This task lets you modify the 4 Select the Maximum Price Levels you want for each product type DEE y d a level You re not defining any price levels you re selecting the number of price DE SESS ANS ee You don t need to perform this levels you ll need for a particular product type 5 Click OK to save the maximum sizes and price levels and exit the gt This is useful if you never use all screen the sizes and price levels ilable or if you need to 6 If you reduce the number of sizes and price levels a message warns you ava L y increase the sizes and price the highest sizes and price levels are the ones that will be eliminated i f levels available because you ve Click Yes to continue and remove the higher sizes and price levels or added a 1544 Infinity ECU or an No to abort the process All Bottle ID dispenser to your OR system If you increase the number of portion sizes and price levels a message gt Changes to the number of sizes reminds you no prices and portions are a
69. Price for a isplaye price evel l EE 13 Type the correct PLU for the displayed price level if you re using ingredients can be sorted b Interface or the Reconciliation report EE E sorted HN See also Assign PLUs to Brands and Cocktails geserptor 14 Click OK to save your entries on all tabs Click Close to exit without saving gt You must enter a portion size for each cocktail ingredient for the cocktail to be poured correctly gt To set up a new cocktail name see Brand List Setup August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Calculate Portion Prices for Ingredients To have Infinity calculate portion prices for cocktail ingredients 1 On the Price and Portion Defaults screen OR on the Prices and Portions Setup screen OR on the Modify Cocktail Prices and Portions screen select Cocktail as the Product Type 2 Click Calculate Portion Prices 3 Select a calculation method Make Total Portion Prices Equal to Cocktail Price First ingredient portion prices are calculated according to the Use Brand Prices and Portions rules below Then the ingredient prices are pro rated so that the total of all ingredient prices equals the cocktail price for each price level Use Brand Prices and Portions For each ingredient brand its current prices and portions are used to determine the average price per unit for each price level When there is more than one category for a brand the cocktail category
70. Problem The two lasers connected to an Infinity ECU share the same settings You cannot change the settings independently Remedy Answer Yes to continue and change the settings for both dispensers Question M307 xxx is not communicating If a previous attempt at re programming failed and device is still Ready to Program you may continue Do you want to continue Problem You are unable to communicate with the device you are trying to program However if you previously tried to program the firmware in the device and this attempt failed the device is likely still ina Ready to Program mode and is able to retry Remedy Answer Yes to continue Answer No if you believe you have a communication error Question M308 Do you want to copy the calibration values to the other All Bottle ID dispensers now Problem There is more than one All Bottle ID dispenser on your system If you change the calibration values for any brand assigned then those calibration values must be copied to the other All Bottle ID August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Question M309 Question M350 Question M351 Question M352 Question M353 Question M354 Question M355 Question M356 August 2010 387 dispensers since all of them pour the same brands Remedy Answer Yes to do the copy now If you answer No you must broadcast the results later You can use Communications Broadcast Pending If the equipment version doe
71. Software s s nsr1nsrrnnsnnnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn nnne nnnn nnmnnn nnne 13 Quick Start Task 2 Brand Wizard seceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeueceaeueceaeueeeauseeuaueeeuauecuaceasueceusueceaeseeuauseeuaessenane 14 Quick Start Task 3 New Network Setup een 15 Quick Start Task 4 ECO 16 Quick Start Task 5 New ECU Setup sss scssseseessereesseesessensasenensenenseenensneeenseeesnseeeenseeeenseeeseseeeenseeeessneeesaes 17 Quick Start Task 6 Modify Prices and POTONS EEN 19 Quick Start Task 7 Assign Bra id Ses scedsnciennsecutesascasanascetucnssasdsgadeabaaaus caine cn suntndbacaaudaoatvabtasietaniannadteatenaines 20 Quick Start Task 8 Cocktail RecipeS ssssessssnnsnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn nnmnnn mnnn nn annnm nnana 21 Quick Start Task 9 Assign Cocktails sssssseesssereessenesssenenseenenseenensneeensnenensneeensneeenseeeenseeeenseeesnsnenenses 22 Quick Start Task 10 Broadcast Pending Changes een 23 Quick Start Task 11 Dispenser Calbraton een 24 Quick Start Task 12 Make Test Bourse EEN REENEN ENEE REENEN ENEE RENE 25 Quick Start Task 13 Brand Calibration s es ee eeeeee sees seca seca eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeea RE ENEE EREE REENEN REENEN EEN 26 Quick Start Task 14 Archive and Clear Gales ene RENE ENNEN RENE ENEE RENE ENEE REN 27 Quick Start Task 15 Usage ET 28 Quick Start Task 16 Schedule ss11 1 2 151 22 1 222 51 225 5 225 5512222555122205551
72. Station When using a Separate File for Every Station the Reconciliation Options form shows all Sales Stations plus all Hardware stations that are not included in a Sales Station So using Sales Stations is the most natural fit for this feature Sales vs Usage Sales means you ll see Drink information for each brand in the report Usage means you ll see Pour information for each brand Sales Per Volume Sales divided by pour volume Sales Drink Volume Sales divided by drink volume Save Saves modifications made to this user s information Save As Default Use this feature to save a single brand s prices and portions as the new default prices and portions for brands of the same product type You copy to the other brand using Load Defaults Saving as default does NOT change the prices and portions of all brands that currently have default prices and portions However it does mean any new brand you add to the brand list of this product type is assigned the prices and portions you save as default prices and portions Use this feature on the Modify Prices and Portions screen lf you want to copy a brand s prices and portions to multiple brands use the Copy button August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 321 Save as Defaults Save as Defaults saves a copy of your entries on all tabs of the Driver Settings screen It does not send the settings to the ECUs However when you load a driver to th
73. To enable optional features 1 Access Configuration Options 2 Click Features 3 Select the Infinity edition best suited to your needs gt Configure your Infinity ere select a different edition at any time installation to match your needs Includes basic Infinity functions but does not include some report file formats Export Inventory and the Reconciliation report Enterprise Includes everything in the Basic edition with the added ability to save reports in pdf and html formats Export Inventory the Reconciliation report import export prices and portions and design Column Selection reports exports 4 Uncheck Enable Interface if you don t plan to use it This removes the Interface menu and eliminates all sales terminal Interface functionality Note you can also just disable a driver instead of disabling Interface If you ve already loaded drivers to ECUs you MUST remove all drivers from all ECUs before disabling Interface After disabling Interface you can t remove drivers since the menu choice will be gone 5 Click OK to save and exit August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help so Clear Sales To clear sales from the database 1 Access Configuration options 2 Click Clear Sales SEEE 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of all sales records from the computer gt You should clear sales from the 4 Click OK when you ve read the clear sales completion message dat
74. Units of measure for the container 4 Type the new Size of the container The size is the number of units 5 Click OK to save your changes Click Close to exit the screen without saving To rename a container 1 Select the Container from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a container 1 Select the Container from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Container Setup gt You can use the default names or create new names for your containers gt For each container you define you must enter the unit of measure for the container fluid ounces or liters and the size of the container the number of units gt The container names you define here can then be assigned to each brand See Brand List Setup for help assigning container names to each brand gt A default container can be assigned to each product type See Price and Portion Defaults gt Container names appear on a Usage report and are used in Inventory Any bottle sizes you defined in earlier Infinity releases 3 xx will be converted to containers Please check all container sizes if you re upgrading from a previous Infinity release If you delete a container already assigned to a brand a prompt reminds you Click Yes to delete the container or No to keep it If you proceed w
75. You may want to select Pour Without Release if the sales terminal is slowing down the pouring of drinks at a specific station or group If you select this option and communication errors occur between the ECU and sales terminal drinks may pour without being rung up at the sales terminal Pours The number of times poured Includes shots and Infinity defined cocktail ingredients but cocktails are not listed Includes comps but not cancels Price Levels Price levels are tiers of prices and portions that can be defined to accommodate various needs Some owners don t use price levels others use them for switching between happy hour regular and entertainment pricing still others use them to track shift sales You can define the default number of price levels for each product type using the following methods Load the initial brand list using the Brand Wizard Use the Select Sizes and Price Levels menu item Product Code An identifying entry up to 13 characters assigned to a brand as part of Inventory setup Typically this is a code required by a supplier when ordering a brand The product code appears on orders generated by Inventory Product Type The categories Infinity uses to organize the brand list There are 6 product types Beer Cocktail Liquor Mixer Wine and Other Default prices and portions are set for each product type Beer can only be assigned to TAP 1 dispensers Cocktail can only be assigned to Laser dispensers Liquor
76. a list 9 Click OK to save the ECU A message tells you to press the address button on the device you ve assigned to address A O N 10 Go to the equipment you specified for Device Address A and press the flashing button When finished the software displays the message for the next device 11 Repeat step 10 for each device as prompted When all the device addressing is done communication occurs to send all the ECU setup details to the ECU 12 Wait for all communication with the ECU to finish A message confirms saving the new ECU See Modify an ECU for help with dispenser network addressing features August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 9 Quick Start Task 6 Modify Prices and Portions To modify prices and portions Default Prices and Portions gt Until you change them the prices and portions listed are the defaults you set up with Brand Wizard for the product type gt The Standard category is the basic set of price levels assigned to each brand when it s added to the brand list gt See Modify Multiple Brands to modify prices and portions for all brands of a product type on one Save As Deg screen gt If you re using Interface see 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions How to enter PLUs 2 Select a Product Type and select a brand s Prices and Portions and click Modify Uptown Grill is modif
77. access a floppy drive but there is no floppy in the drive or the door to the drive has not been closed This drive or path does not exist Problem The drive or pathname selected does not exist and cannot be used or this operation Often this will be a removable drive without any disk present Remedy Insert a disk or choose a drive and pathname that exists Internal Disk Error Problem Disk error has been detected probably on a floppy Remedy Check disk and repair or try with another floppy Invalid Time Format Reset to previous value Problem The time typed in could not be interpreted as a time Check for mistyping and whether you are using the time format you have defined under Windows Control panel Remedy Retype a valid time Database serial number 1 does not match expected serial number 2 Problem During program startup The serial number of the programs is not the same as the serial number in the database This could be a bad install or an improper restoration of a backup During reload configuration or restore backup The serial number on the disk must match the serial number of the database Unless you are changing the serial number then the serial numbers must match the number you typed in The message will show the found and expected serial numbers Remedy Reinstall Find a good backup and restore it Make sure the store reload disk has the correct serial number Form is still Loaded Problem This error will only be shown whe
78. accuracy for Infinity is a difference of no greater than 10 between the actual pour and the expected pour If a pour has a percentage difference greater than 10 you can choose to pour again You can change the default 10 level of accuracy See Calibration Units and Accuracy High level of accuracy lower percentage numbers require very accurate measuring methods and can be time consuming Berg recommends you do not set accuracy to be lower than 2 However if you want to control how long you do calibration you can set the calibration accuracy to zero percent Unless you pour the exact portions you can repeat the calibration process until you are satisfied Please note that setting accuracy to zero percent does NOT imply that all portions poured after calibration will be 100 accurate Calibration accuracy only affects how close to the targets you have to pour during calibration to automatically end calibration Example of accuracy For example the calibration portion size for TAP 1 is 16 fl oz If you pour at a tap and the pour measures only 14 fl oz the difference between the expected pour and the actual pour is 2 fl oz Figured as a percentage 2 fl oz is 12 5 of the calibration portion size Since 12 5 is greater than the acceptable 10 difference Infinity prompts you to pour again The next pour measures 15 fl oz which has a percentage difference of 6 2 from the expected amount Since 6 2 is within the 10 level of accurac
79. add a head limit can only be set for TAP 1 EPROM of version 3 00 or higher Remedy If you wish to have this feature you will need to upgrade your EPROM Diagnosis If you think this feature should be available check the ECU number You cannot delete rename or change Test Pour Problem The Test Pour brands cannot be modified in any way They exist so there is always a known brand with known portions to test pouring for every ECU type No portions were poured Nothing changed Problem Learn mode was entered but nothing was actually poured Therefore no portions can be learned Diagnosis If you did pour a portion check the ECU number against the ECU that you put into Learn Mode Learn Mode is signified by the lights behind the repeat and cancel button on the tap going out This function cannot be performed There are no qualifying ECUs Problem The function can only be performed on certain types of ECUs If you have none of these ECUs defined in your system then you cannot run this function For example coil alignment is only performed on Infinity ECUs with All bottle 7s This function cannot be performed There are no stations or groups Problem The function you are trying to perform requires a station or group There are currently no station or groups defined Remedy Create stations and or groups that contain the ECUs for which you want to perform the function There must be at least one stock room in the system Operation cannot be completed Proble
80. and ringing up drinks correctly D o August 2010 Test a Driver gt If you re installing drivers in your stations or groups for the first time perform this test to verify communication between your Infinity system and sales terminal s gt It s a good idea to set the Pour Communication option to Pour Without Release for testing You can then reset to Wait for Release or Send After Pour when you ve finished testing Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 196 Remove Driver To remove a driver 1 Pull down the Interface menu and click Remove Driver 2 Select the Equipment Name where you want to remove a driver You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your hardware stations 3 Click Run Wait for communication with the selected equipment A confirmation screen displays to show you which driver name and version number will be removed 4 Click OK to confirm removing the driver Click Cancel to abort the removal process Wait while communication with the ECU s occurs 5 Click Close to exit the Remove Driver screen Remove Driver gt When you remove a driver from a station or group the ECUs in the station or group no longer have the capacity to send drink information to the specific sales terminal associated with the driver gt If you re removing a driver so you can load a different one just load the new driver and the old
81. are trying to reload a previous version the database cannot be the same version as the current It also must be recent enough to be upgradable Remedy If you have the wrong disk insert the correct one in the drive Diagnosis Run DBExam program Unable to change serial number Problem You can change the serial number during some backup operations This has failed and you should not trust the operation Remedy Try again If the failure repeats check for database corruption Diagnosis Run Check Database No automatic correction is possible Problem The Repair Database utility has found an error for which this is not an obvious fix No correction will be made by the utility The nature of error will precede this error message Remedy You may be able to remove the inconsistency by making changes in Infinity The nature of the changes may be suggested by the specific error In some cases this error may not cause any side effects and does not need to be corrected Missing required s s It will be added Problem The repair database utility has a required record is missing Since the contents of the record are known the utility will add this record back into the database regardless of settings selected for repairdb Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR U53 ERROR U54 ERROR U55 ERROR U56 ERROR U57 ERROR U58 ERROR U59 ERROR U60 ERROR U61 ERROR U62 August 2010 Remedy This
82. backup of the database Diagnosis Use database Diagnostics to diagnose any database corruption Unable to add s dd to list Problem A text string could not be added to a list to be displayed to the user The setup media may be in error or there may be a system problem Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 379 Remedy Reboot and retry Diagnosis Check setup media and hard disk for errors ERROR S83 Load Program failed on s error code d Problem The program named by s could not be run It is required for some portion of setup Remedy See S06 ERROR S84 You must have at least four security levels Problem Although you can add and delete security levels you must always define at least 4 security levels Note that you do not need to assign any users to each security level ERROR S85 All security levels must be consecutive No gaps are allowed in the list Problem You can have from 4 to 8 security levels but they must be numbered starting at one There can be no gaps in the list Note that you do not need to assign any users to each security level ERROR S86 Security level s is already being used Problem Each security level must have a unique name At least two security levels have the same name Remedy Change one of the names ERROR S87 Database error d s Problem The database engine has detected an error given by the number and text This may follow a previous error during setup Remedy Run utilities d
83. be specified although it will often be zero The Starting minute must be between 0 and one less than the interval inclusive When the Schedule is run the next time for Repeat Actions is calculated When the Repeat actions have finished the next time to repeat is determined This has two implications One Repeat Actions will never be listed as skipped Two if the duration of the Repeat Actions takes longer than the interval minutes then one or more Repeat intervals will be skipped To avoid confusion the Interval should be set to be longer than the time that it takes to run all of the Repeat Actions If the Repeat Actions are scheduled for the same time as a Day Action the Day action s will be run first Repeat Button The repeat button on TAP 1 controllers can be used to pour repeat drinks or to access four alternate portion sizes Or you can completely disable the repeat button Repeat Enabled enables the repeat button for repeat pours Alternate Size Enabled enables the repeat button to pour alternate portion sizes sizes 5 8 Selecting neither option disables the repeat button Repeat Delay The number of seconds 0 8 9 9 the tap pauses between identical pours Report Abbreviations The rpt abbreviations that appear in the schedule or error log are Z Archive amp Clear Sales x1 Sales Totals August2000 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 317 x2 Sales by Price Level Le Detailed Sales
84. brand prices and portions in the Brand List you want to assign to the selected dispenser button code To quickly jump to a brand in the list click anywhere in the list and type the first letter of the brand name This scrolls the list close to the brand Click lt Assign to assign the selected brand to the selected position on the dispenser Or drag and drop the selected brand to the dispenser button code 8 To remove a brand from a dispenser select the brand and click Remove gt Or drag and drop the selected brand to the brand list This sets lt None gt as the brand assignment If you don t assign another brand in that position the gun button pourer code or tap will not pour 9 Repeat steps 6 7 for the remaining Button Code or Disp numbers on the dispenser tab 10 Repeat steps 5 9 for any other dispenser tab 11 Click OK to save the brand assignments for all dispenser tabs 12 Select a communication option and click Continue These options are provided so you can wait to send the brand assignments later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes 13 Click OK to the message about saved changes 14 Repeat steps 2 13 for another ECU or dispenser To disable buttons codes or tap numbers you don t use 1 Select the button code dispenser 2 Drag and drop the currently assigned brand to the Brand List
85. button to pour in alternate size mode adding four new portion sizes to the existing four For Tap 2 taps you can enable both the alternate size and repeat functions Amount Poured All Bottle and Laser Enter the exact small portion poured in the Small Portion field and the exact large portion in the Large Portion field 1544 Infinity Enter the exact amount poured in the 1544 Portion field TAP 1 Enter the exact amount poured in the Tap 1 Portion field Wait for any foam to settle Archive Date and Time A Column which will show when a pour was archived by an Archive and Clear operation Archive List When you click Show Archives on the Reports or Export screen Archive List displays as a report option and all the Archive Dates for the selected equipment are shown Use the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking to select one or more or all of the archive dates you want to include in the report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Archive Records Archive records for a specific date are only created at the computer when you archive and clear sales Z on that date The archive record storage length is the amount of time the computer keeps archive records This determines what data is available for archive reports If your storage length is 3 months you won t be able to run reports on any data further back than 3 months The archive record storage length is set under Data Storage and
86. by the X4 report In order for the data to be recorded go to Infinity Diagnostics and Clear and Restore Memory to every ECU August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help a Index A Activate driver 199 Activation about 41 by email 44 by fax 43 by phone 42 Activator rings align All Bottle 7 155 Add ahead button 93 Add ahead limit 93 Addresses check 90 identify 90 set 90 Advanced Edition Infinity Features 59 Advanced edition select preference 61 Align Al Botte 7 activator rings 155 Alignment values Set Default Alignment Values 157 Store Alignment Values description 156 Alternate size enabled 93 Alternate size reset 93 Archive and Clear Sales Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report 231 how to archive and clear sales Z 208 Archive records storage length 57 Assign brands to dispensers 144 cocktails to dispenser 146 names to sizes 117 PLU recipe 218 B Back Order 184 Backups backup full database 257 Options 254 reload configuration settings 256 reload previous version configuration settings 259 restore full database 258 restore previous version full database 260 store configuration settings 255 August 2010 Bartender price level enable 93 Basic Edition Infinity Features 59 Basic edition select preference 61 Brand and cocktail pouring 93 Brand pouring only 93 Brand Wizard confirmation 80 container setup 79 default prices and portions 77 introduction 74 product type
87. cable must be placed between the ECU s POS port labeled J902 and the incoming COM port of the PC If you are using pass through mode a second cable and null modem should connect the outgoing com port of the PC and the incoming port of the sales terminal To install 1 Click Install POSTest software after loading the Infinity CD OR Run E l tools postest postest exe where E is your CD drive The latest POSTest can be downloaded from the Berg website 2 Follow the prompts to complete the installation Running POSTEST If you Know the driver that is loaded choose that driver and the rest of the communication parameters will be chosen for you Otherwise you will need to set the baud rate etc If these parameters are not set up correctly then you will either see no data or the data shown will not be accurate Note that choosing a driver only sets up the communication parameters POSTEST does NOT attempt to emulate any driver or sales terminal Once you are satisfied that all of the communication parameters have been set correctly click on Start Monitor Communication data will now be shown in the log window Data that is coming from the ECU is preceded by a double greater than gt gt Data that is being sent to the ECU is preceded by a double less than lt lt When you are done monitoring click on Stop Monitor Software Tools gt Additional software is included on the Infinity CD to assist with installation and trouble
88. can be assigned to Laser or All Bottle dispensers Mixer can be assigned to any dispenser Wine can be assigned to any dispenser Other can be assigned to any dispenser If you select a product type other than All on report options only sales data for that product type appears on reports The Berg default is All Quantity of Stored Data Specifies the amount of sales data stored in archive records at the computer Summary Only saves the amount of sales data found in summary reports and takes up less disk space This is the default Detailed Info saves the amount of sales data found in detailed reports If detailed is not selected you can t run a Detailed Sales X3 Report on archive data only on current or most recent archive data You also can t run a detailed export on archive data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help s6 Glossary R Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary R Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Redial Tries The number of re dials 1 9 if each succeeding attempt fails The default is 3 tries Register Adds the new user to the list of registered users Register Users Infinity offers protected access to the software through user registration passwords and security levels Security is maintained by allowing security option changes only from the Infinity disks with the correct serial number Registered Users Display
89. category for this export type a new Category name 5 Specify the order of the Export Columns by entering Column Numbers for the items Enter a 0 zero for any column you don t want to export 6 Type the Column Separator 7 Remove the check from Export Ingredients if you only want to export the cocktail information name price PLU without any ingredient information 8 Check the Column Headers box if you would like the first line of the export file to give the name of each column 9 If you are exporting PLUs and have specified a PLU base you can add this base to the exported PLUs by checking the box 10 Click Run to export price portion data to the selected file August 2010 Export Cocktail Prices and Portions gt For further help with exporting see About exporting Cocktail Prices and Portions Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 133 Container Setup To find container setup 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and Click Container Setup To set up a new container 1 Click New Type the New Name of the container and click Continue 2 3 Select the Units of measure for the container 4 Type the Size of the container The size is the number of units 5 Click OK to save the container Click Close to exit the screen without saving To modify a container s units or size 1 Select the Container from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Type the new
90. change or delete any setup or sales data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 220 Check the Database for Errors To check the database for errors 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Check Database for Errors 2 Wait for the operation to complete The report viewer displays with the results The file is automatically saved in your database folder with the name dbcheck log You can print the results en aisle ony aeck A as you would any other report database for errors if directed to do so by Berg personnel Database Errors 3 Click Close to exit the View screen The log file was automatically saved so you re not losing it by closing gt It s one of the first steps in diagnosing a problem gt Checking the database for errors may help as it searches for errors in the structure of the database August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Rebuild the Database Delete Chain To rebuild the database delete chain 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Rebuild Database Index Files Rebuild Delete Chain 2 Wait for the operation to complete 1 F gt An MS DOS window displays with the results You ll probably only rebuild p k database index files if directed EE eech ey to do so by Berg personnel More results display gt You may be directed to perform 4 Press any key hi d fter check The MS DOS window closes this
91. cocktails in your database are not imported August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 126 Import Brand Prices and Portions To import brand prices and portions 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Point to Import Prices and Portions and click Brands Import Prices and Portions 2 If appropriate select a Product Type for the import file gt For further help with importing Select a specific product type only if your import file contains brands all of one type For example selecting Beer does not only import the beer see About Importing Brand brands if the file contains other brands Prices and Portions 3 If you select a Product Type you can then select the Container defaults for all new brands imported The current default is shown Click Open to select the Import File Name and path Select the price portion Category for all brands in the import file To create a new category type a new Category name Specify the order of the Columns in the import file by entering a number for each column Enter a 0 zero for any column not included in the import file See Import Columns OR Check Use column headers to determine columns The text of the columns in the import file are used to identify which columns are in which position All columns will be imported This option should only be used when the import file was produced by Infinity 7 Type the Col
92. com boards PCs modems will easily fulfill this requirement Remedy Upgrade your port or PC it is very old ERROR CM22 Port open error d on port d Port may be in use or may not exist Problem Port could not be opened usually for one of the following reasons Port is being used by another program or device The device may be a modem or a mouse Note that some programs will not release the port until they are exited If a program crashed while using the port the port may still think it is being used When running a program in a DOS window the DOS window will hold on to the port even after the program completes until the DOS window is closed This can also mean the port does not physically exist on the computer or is not defined to Windows Remedy Close other programs that are using the port Close DOS windows If these do not work reboot to clear the port Diagnosis Check that you are using the correct port the Com wizard can be used for this ERROR CM23 Tone pulse settings do not match for port d Problem The tone pulse selection on modem network setup does not match your modem settings Remedy Change network setup or the settings on the modem ERROR CM24 Not supported on demo Problem Demo attempts to mimic the operation of the live operation without actually attempting any communication The operation attempted does not have a demo equivalent It cannot be demonstrated ERROR CM25 Only ECU is allowed to communicate with this de
93. curly brackets do not match up or do not contain the strings below they are left intact as part of the file name Any part of the file name that uses date information will use the business date see End of Day grp Equipment Name that the export covers Note some characters may be removed from the Equipment Name if they are illegal in file names dd day of the month e g 13 ddd day of the week short format e g Tue dddd day of the week full name e g Tuesday mm two digit month number e g 10 mmm name of the month short format e g Oct mmmm name of the month full name e g October y day of the year e g 355 yy two digit year e g 06 yyyy four digit year e g 2009 August201000 2 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 327 first number to make the file name unique time format see below A specified time format which includes any combination of the following within curly brackets hh hour nn minutes ss seconds ampm if ampm is not part of the format the 24 hour clock is used Example hhnnampm 0230pm Examples exp ddd txt exptue txt if export is done on Tuesday dd mmm yy txt 130ct06 txt if export is done on Oct 13 2006 dd xxx txt dd xxx txt brackets dont match up Variable Sales Terminal Data File Name You can use the following strings to substitute for the sales terminal data file name These str
94. data is stored at the computer in the most recent archive record This was formerly known as Last Z To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s This is the Berg default August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 31 Name User name up to 19 characters long The user name is case sensitive that is upper and lower case letters must be entered exactly as the user will enter them If you make a mistake backspace or delete to change it Net ECU Disp This column lists the Network s ECU s and dispenser s where a brand is assigned Network Up to 32 ECUs linked together by a single data transmission line Networks can be local hard wired to a computer or remote modem linked to a computer An Infinity system can have multiple networks A network can consist of Infinity network ECUs Tap 1 All Bottle 7 Laser 1544 All Bottle ID or Dispenser Network ECUs Tap 2 but not both types on the same network Network on Modem Additional entry fields appear when you select this option If you are setting up a local network leave Network on Modem unchecked If you are setting up a remote network check Network on Modem New Date Enter the new date using the same format your system is currently using Click the drop down arrow to see a calendar from which to choose your date New Time Enter the new time using the same forma
95. for all reports The options you select for an advanced report are not used in a schedule See Custom Reports to create and save a report with specific options Then include the custom report as an action in a schedule Click Print to run the report and send it to the printer without viewing Make sure your Windows default printer is ready The report is generated and sent to the default printer OR Click View to run the report and view it on the screen Wait while the reportis run The time it takes to run the report is determined by the amount of sales activity and the number of ECUs in the station or group Never turn off or restart your computer while the report is running or sales data may be lost 6 If you view the report on the screen see View Print Save Reports 7 Click Close to exit the View screen To open or delete a report output file rdf See Open or Delete Report Files Wu August 2010 Advanced Reports gt Infinity offers several reports from the Advanced Reports menu including custom reports and the four sales reports available in the Current Sales menu gt It s helpful to run a Current Sales report from this menu if you want to change the options gt You can also open or delete any previously saved Infinity report files from the Reports screen gt You can t archive and clear sales from the Reports screen You must use the Archive and Clear Sales Z menu item gt See also Run a
96. for approval and abandons the pour Setting the Timeout Value lower will not speed up the pouring of a drink after its request It simply describes how long the ECU waits for the sales terminal to respond It does not dictate how fast the sales terminal responds If you repeatedly have problems with drinks ringing at the sales terminal but not pouring on Infinity increase the Timeout Value This should solve the problem If it doesn t you might consider using the Pour Without Release option Timeout Value and the ECR Interface If you re using an ECR compatible driver the Timeout Value is a calculated numerical code representing a particular combination of the Key Press Time and Key Delay Time Use only the specific Timeout Values calculated by Berg The default Timeout Value of 25 70 should work for most sales terminals but you may be able to increase the speed with which the sales terminal rings up drinks by using a lower value To determine an appropriate lower value use the following procedure August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 326 1 Start with the first Timeout Value at the top of the following table and test the interface Key Press Time ms Key Delay Time ms Timeout Value 100 100 25 70 90 90 23 13 80 80 20 56 70 70 17 99 60 60 15 42 50 50 12 85 40 40 10 28 30 30 7 71 20 20 5 14 2 If pours ring correctly go to the next Timeout Value in the table and test the interface a
97. for each change gt For help with running the report see Run an Advanced Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help zo Reconciliation Report To understand the report Reconciliation The Reconciliation report lists Infinity brands no cocktails shows any difference in the sales terminal s sales or implied volume and Infinity s sales or monitored volume and computes any variance If you choose to compare by Volume this report displays the Sold Pour Volume Collected Volume Varianceand Percent Collected Volume and Lost Retail Value for each Brand Name in the selected station or group See Reconciliation Example by Volume If you choose to compare by Sales this report displays the Pour Sales Collected Sales Variance and the Percent Collected Sales for each Brand Name in the selected station or group See Reconciliation Example by Sales The end of the report shows the Totals of all columns for all brands in the station or group Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run and not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a
98. g Beer Group which includes all beer dispensers An ECU can only be in one Hardware Station and only one Sales Station but it can be in as many groups as you choose Hangup Time The number of seconds 2 9 the computer modem waits after hanging up before any other modem operation can occur The default is 2 seconds Header Lines These are lines at the beginning of the import file that don t include price and portion data Typically they include text about the contents of the file and or list the column headings For example if you create a file in Excel with column headings those headings are written in a single line at the beginning of the file It doesn t matter how many header lines your import file has You just need to specify the exact number so those lines are skipped when Infinity copies price portion data to your database Help Displays online help for this screen High Flow Pourer High flow pourers are now the default coded pourers shipped with All Bottle dispensers If you switch from standard flow pourers to high flow pourers you should re calibrate You can speed up the calibration process by entering the correct calibration values for high flow pourers See How to initialize calibration values Hourly Sales Clear Don t Clear Specifies whether or not hourly sales data is deleted from the ECUs after running a Clear Sales report Clear Delete hourly sales data from the ECUs Don t Clear Keep hourly sales data after a Cle
99. good in the ECU In this case you should use Store Alignment Values in Infinity after this operation is complete August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 34 Infinity INF Questions Question INF200 was found but is pending some action Do you want to EXIT it anyway Problem Schedule was started with the EXIT option A running schedule program was found but could not be terminated The caption of the running program is given by Remedy Answer Yes to force the termination of the Schedule program In most cases this will work Answer No if you do not want to interrupt Schedule Diagnosis Click on the Schedule icon to see its current state The initial attempt to EXIT gracefully will not work if the target program is waiting for an answer to a prompt is running a schedule action or is on some other form besides running a schedule or the main form Question INF203 Are you sure you want to delete Problem This is sometimes followed by additional information to help make the choice For example for containers the message will be x is being used If deleted it will be replaced by y Deleting an item is an action that might not be easily recovered In some cases it affects other aspects of the system For example deleting a group name may render some schedules invalid For this reason most deletions will ask the user to confirm Remedy Answer Yes if you wish to delete the item Question INF205 Yo
100. grouped recipe The recipe tells Infinity by any descriptor s you ve defined how much of each cocktail 5 Click Modify ingredient to pour when a Laser 6 On the Define tab select a brand in the Brand List that is an ingredient button is pressed in cocktail in the cocktail mode The brand list can be sorted by descriptor gt Each cocktail s prices and 7 Click lt Replace to add the selected brand to the Current Definition list portions are its standard of the cocktail OR drag the brand and drop it in the list prices and portions e g Black To remove a brand drag it from the Current Definition list OR select it and Russian Standard refers to the click Remove gt standard prices and portions set 8 Repeat steps 5 6 for the remaining ingredients in the cocktail up for the Black Russian cocktail These standard prices and portions include three price levels gt The price of each cocktail 9 Click a Price Level tab that has ingredient prices and or portions you want to change 10 Type the correct Portion for each Ingredient Name listed on the tab The portion size determines the cocktail recipe You don t need to type a decimal if you re entering a whole number e g type 6 for 6 00 fl oz ingredient is an optional entry 11 Type the Ingredient Portion Price for each Ingredient Name or click The total of the ingredient Calculate Portion Prices Beltane eee ino 12 T K E equal the price of the cocktail Type the Cocktail
101. gt Depending on the size of the database a complete backup may require significant space on a hard drive or several disks Perform this procedure regularly if archive sales records are essential to the management of your business gt If you want a complete current copy of your database you need to back it up every time you clear sales at the ECUs or make any changes to configuration and setup data gt If you don t need archive sales records or you use printed reports for your backup records you don t need to perform a full database backup See Store Configuration Settings Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 257 Infinity Help 258 Restore Full Database To restore a full database 1 Pull down the Backups menu Click Restore Full Database 2 Click Change Serial Number if the backup database you want to restore has a different serial number Then type the Store Serial Number and the Database Serial Number The Store Serial Number should match the serial number on the backed up database The Database Serial Number is the serial number of the Infinity program you re using and its database Click Do not show this message again if you never change serial numbers and don t need this step 3 Click Continue 4 Select the folder containing the backup database and click OK Click Yes to confirm the restore procedure Insert the backup disk if necessary Wait while the files are restored I
102. hardware station price level Problem On older EPROMS that do not recognize calibration mode the software forces the unit into Price Level B in order to do any calibration After the calibration the unit is returned to its original price level This restoration of price level failed probably because of a communication error Remedy Fix the communication error and change price level to the desired setting Portions cannot be learned for dispenser d if brand is not set or Tap 1 Test Pour is still assigned Problem Learn mode cannot be used on dispensers without an assigned brand or where Test Pour is assigned Test Pour cannot have its portions changed Remedy Assign the brand that you will use at the dispenser before you run Learn Mode Large pour must be greater than small Neither can be zero Problem During calibration the large recorded pour must be greater than the small Also neither one can be zero Remedy Check the portions that you entered You may also go to calibration units and accuracy and reset the calibration portions There must be at least one P3 Hub on an Dispenser Network ECU Problem The P3 Hub provides power to the Dispenser Network Therefore it must be present Even if you are not using Interface you need to address the P3 Hub Remedy On ECU Setup add a P3 Hub and set its address POS Codes must be consecutive starting at one Problem When using POS ID the POS Codes must start at one and go up to four You canno
103. immediately after the recovery To run an On Demand schedule For help creating a schedule see On Demand Schedule Setup 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules 2 Select the Schedule File 3 Click Run The Schedules screen is replaced by a Running Schedule screen You ll see the current time and the list of actions The schedule commences performing the actions in the order listed When the actions are complete the schedule stops While a schedule action is running you will be locked out from any other function until the schedule action is complete If any schedule actions are missed Run Schedules gt If you run a schedule your PC must be set up to allow uninterrupted service This means at a minimum that your printer must be set to spool print jobs gt You should NOT set your PC to use power saver settings that shut down processing cycles or CPU In particular do not activate System Hibernation Power off or Computer Sleep gt Berg recommends you do not run screen savers when running a schedule Some screen savers have been known to interfere with programs running in the background gt A better solution is to turn off Monitor power after a period of non use see Control Panel Display gt If you selected Auto Run when modifying berg sch you don t have to run the schedule It automatically runs each time Windows starts A user must log on first if you have Windows NT or 200
104. installs or installing from 3 x databases the default containers must be created This failed and the install cannot continue Remedy See S57 Error creating security level Problem For new installs or installing from 3 x databases the default security levels must be created This failed and the install cannot continue Remedy See S57 Unable to find your Infinity folder s which is specified in your BERG INI file Problem In order to start the configuration portion of the setup the setup program attempts to position at the drive and folder of the Infinity directory This attempt failed Remedy Reboot and retry Diagnosis Check that the folder name exists with a valid Infinity installation Unable to change to drive s Problem See S70 Unable to start database operations Error d Problem The database could not be opened to start changes that may be required for configuration setup The specific error number will be displayed This will usually be preceded by a more specific message Remedy See Remedy for first message No Infinity configuration information found Problem See S41 No users in database Nothing to modify or remove Problem You cannot modify or unregister users when none have been defined If you are trying to create a new user choose Register Users You have passwords enabled but you do not have any users defined You must either disable passwords or add users Problem When you turn on passwords you must de
105. is similiar to Berg Generic but runs at 9600 baud and has a simpler data packet Berg Parallel This is the Berg ECR driver It works with all sales terminals that have a Postech or other third party interface board installed ASI Advanced System Inc This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Casio PCR 365 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board ECR supports Direct and Standard PLU Casio TK5100 TK 6000 These selections install an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board ECR supports Direct and Standard PLU Casio QT 2000 Series This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007969 Casio QT 7000 Series This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007969 Use POS software version 3 3 or higher The POS software supports pre checking ClubTrax A product of System Dynamic This selection installs a POS driver Use null modem cable PN 8007020 or Berg cable 8007993 Comtrex PCS 5000 This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This selection installs a POS driver Comtrex Super Sprint This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This selection installs a POS driver Digital Dining This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Future POS This selection installs a POS driver Gamma This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This sele
106. must be consecutive so you can t delete any but the lowest level s Any functions or users assigned to a deleted security level will be reassigned to the lowest available security level 2 Click OK to save your changes To display the Berg default security levels 1 Click Defaults to see the Berg default security levels August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help s Function Security Levels To customize security level functions 1 Access Configuration Options 2 Click Security Function Security Levels gt You can customize which 3 Click Function Security Infinity functions are accessible 4 Using the drop down menus select the security level you want for each at each of your security levels function gt To customize the number and Use the lowest numbered level for your most restricted functions 5 Click Next to see the next screen or Back to return to the first screen 6 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Security Options screen To display the Berg default security levels for each function 1 Click Defaults to see the Berg default security levels names of your security levels see Security List August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Data Storage and Display Options To enter data storage and display options 1 Access Configuration Options 2 Click Data 3 Select the Archive Records Storage Length from the d
107. must be set up in Select an ECU means you l select a network name and the ECU number f the software and the ECU Select Equipment Name means you ll select the hardware station name of number must be set at the ECU Communication Test the ECU before you perform this test 2 If you chose Select an ECU select the name of the Network and the number of the ECU gt You can either select an You can type in the number of an ECU that hasn t been defined in the existing ECU or type the software as long as the ECU is connected to the computer number of an ECU connected to OR the system but not yet set up in software It s a good idea to perform this test on every ECU in a network If you chose Select Equipment Name select the Equipment Name 3 Check Show Error to see an error message when the test discovers a ane after you ve set up the network 4 Click Run to begin the test and before you set up the ECU The communication test commences You ll most likely see near 0 failure in the software or exactly 100 failure If you see failures check the ECU number and baud rate set at the ECU Perform a loopback test to make sure the COM port is working You can also tighten cable connections while the communication testis running and observe any changes in the failure rate 5 lf an Error message window appears click Help to see further information about the error or click OK to close the message window 6 Click Stop to
108. not useful for these dispensers Any product not dispensed by Berg equipment can t be included since only the volume data generated at an ECU is used to track product Initial Setup An Inventory menu appears once you enable the feature in Configuration Options Several Inventory setup tasks should be performed after other Infinity setup tasks including calibration are completed See Checklist for Inventory Setup Physical hventory You ll still need to take a physical inventory of your stock at regular intervals if you want to have the most accurate picture of overall product cost and loss Infinity provides a place to enter the numbers from your physical inventory so the stock amounts will be accurate in the software See Inventory Check Product Loss Whenever you enter physical inventory amounts Infinity can compare those amounts with the amounts from the ECUs volume data and determine the difference or product lost You can run a Cost Analysis report showing the volume of lost product and the retail value of that loss for each brand See Cost Analysis Report Generating Orders To generate an order using the Inventory feature you must first run an Archive and Clear Sales report and then an Inventory Check This gives Infinity a chance to calculate how much your stock has been reduced You can then adjust Infinity s stock amounts using numbers from your own physical inventory Finally Inventory helps you select whic
109. notify you the next time a particular schedule is run All of the skipped actions will be listed You have the option of running those actions immediately or proceeding to the next regularly scheduled action Repeat Actions are never considered skipped If a schedule is not run for longer than a week none of its actions will be considered to be skipped Small Portion Size This is the small portion size All Bottle and Laser dispensers pour when they are in calibration mode You should enter a typical small portion for your system The small portion size must be at least 25 fl oz 7 5 ml and no larger than one third of the large portion size The default August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 324 small portion size is 5 fl oz 15 ml Sold Drinks Shots or Infinity defined cocktails Does not include comps or cancels Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Sold Pour Volume The volume amount of Sold pours Does not include comps or cancels Sold Pours The number of times poured as a Sold pour Includes shots and Infinity defined cocktail ingredients Sold Volume The total number of volume units for Sold drinks Does not include comps or cancels The Sold volume will be listed as 0 for any pre 3 0 Infinity ECUs Sort By Descriptor When a list of brands is displayed it can be sorted by brand name or by its Descriptor By checking the Sort By Descriptor box the current list of
110. number of sizes and price levels 115 set defaults for product type 116 setup 137 setup modify single brand 138 switch dispensers to new category 136 Print reports 210 Product types set default container for 116 set default prices and portions for 116 switch product types 112 Program mode enable 93 Q Question Messages 382 Quick Start archive and clear sales 27 assign brands 20 assign cocktails 22 brand calibration 26 Brand Wizard 14 broadcast pending changes 23 cocktail recipes 21 device settings 16 dispenser calibration 24 install software 13 make test pours 25 modify prices and portions 19 new ECU setup 17 new network setup 15 schedule 29 Usage repot 28 R Read an ECU to add to network 86 Rebuild database delete chain 281 database index files 279 Emergency Rebuild the Database 282 Reconciliation Report create and assign a PLU recipe 218 description 240 example by sales 242 example by volume 241 how to run 220 how to setup 215 PLU Recipes 216 August 2010 417 set up options 66 Register users 51 Reload configuration settings 256 previous version configuration settings 259 previous version full database 260 Remote network setup 81 Remove driver from station or group 196 Remowe a license 46 Rename ECU Hardware Station 82 group 96 network 81 Renewal about 41 by email 44 by fax 43 by phone 42 remove a license 46 transfer a license 45 Repair database 283 Repeat delay 93 Repeat enabled
111. of modifiers or upgrade your EPROM End modifier truncated Problem Older EPROMs stored all of the modifiers that follow the PLU in a single area The combination of modifiers chosen has exceed the maximum length and some modifiers will be lost Remedy Review and reduce the number of modifiers or upgrade your EPROM At least one ECU did not have a driver loaded Problem Most operations involving Interface let the user specify a group or station At least one ECU in the specified group does not have a driver loaded This operation will be skipped for those ECUs but the operation will proceed for all other ECUs Remedy Load the driver into every ECU or create and select a group that contains only those ECUs with Interface These changes require that you reload the Interface driver into affected ECUs Use Load Drivers Problem For certain POS interfaces Setup Sales Station is used to indicate which ECUs share the same POS sales terminal The number of ECUs connected to that sales station changes the attributes of the interface driver Therefore if you change a sales station definition or the sales station to which an ECU is assigned the Interface driver should be reloaded into all ECUs that Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 402 belong to a sales station that has had an ECU removed or added Remedy Use Interface Load Driver and select the name s of the sales stations changed to load the driver and its new attri
112. or delete the cocktail from the database before you import brands Name is already being used for a brand Problem A cocktail you are trying to import already exists in the database as a brand name The cocktail will not be imported Remedy Edit the import file to use a different name for the cocktail or delete the brand from the database before you import cocktails Name is already being used for a Hardware Station Name Problem You have tried to create a selection name that is already being used for a hardware station name Since sales stations hardware station groups and device names are used in the same way a selection name must not conflict with any other selection name even of another type Remedy Change the sales station hardware station device name or group name Name is already being used for a Device Name Problem You have tried to create a selection name that is already being used for a device name Since sales stations hardware station groups and device names are used in the same way a selection name must not conflict with any other selection name even of another type Remedy Change the sales station hardware station device name or group name Product already assigned It cannot be deleted Problem A prices and portion table cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a dispenser Remedy Remove assignment and then delete the table Diagnosis Check the Show Product assignments box to see where this price and portion table is assigned Int
113. performing this task When you delete unassigned brands and cocktails their prices and portions are also deleted gt If you have more than one category for a brand only those price and portion categories that are not assigned are deleted The brand itself is deleted only if all of its price categories are not assigned gt If all price portion tables that use a category name are deleted then the category name will also be deleted August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help me About Importing Brand Prices and Portions Import Prices and Portions Why or when should Import prices and portions gt For how to steps see Import Use Import to save time entering prices and portions at a new Infinity Brand Prices and Portions installation or to quickly change prices and portions at an existing installation Typically you import prices and portions if you ve previously entered them somewhere else For example you may have entered them at another Infinity installation or in a POS system What does it mean to import prices and portions Importing means you tell Infinity to copy the prices and portions saved in a file to your database It means you don t individually enter prices and portions for each brand they are copied in one step from the file How do I get an import file You can create a file by exporting prices and portions from another Infinity installation see Exp
114. portion sizes You can confirm or cancel each brand individually Wait while the changes are communicated to the ECU s 12 Click Close to exit the Learn Mode screen You can refine portion sizes set with learn mode using the procedure outlined in How to setup or modify a brand s prices and portions For example if 10 02 fluid ounces is poured in learn mode you can round it off to 10 fluid ounces to make accounting easier Portion sizes set with Learn Mode are used for all three price levels so it doesnt matter which price level you re on when you pour the portions Portions poured in learn mode are not recorded as sales in the ECU August 2010 Learn Mode Learn mode can help you set up initial portion sizes for TAP 1 controllers gt It is especially helpful when the owner knows the glass or mug he wants to use for a particular button but is not sure of the exact number of fluid ounces in the portion size gt In learn mode you can pour a glass as full as you want and Infinity calculates the volume of the pour and automatically sets up the portion size gt If you use learn mode to set up portion sizes you should assign brands to taps first Learn mode will not work for Test Pour gt You still have to set up prices for the brands poured at TAP 1 ECUs gt Be sure to calibrate your system before using learn mode since the accuracy of your portion sizes is based on your system s calibration gt Learn m
115. pourer upside down and hold in this position until the price level indicator lights change again Tipping the activator ring signals the ECU to read the pourer code and change the indicator lights 13 Repeat steps 11 and 12 for each of the other coded pourers If If a wrong pourer is used for any part of the alignment procedure finish all remaining tilts for that ECU before starting over at step 3 for that ECU just tilting with an empty ring is OK 14 When you ve completed the alignment using all coded pourers the Berg light stops blinking to indicate the procedure for that dispenser is finished 15 Repeat steps 7 14 for every activator ring you want to align 16 Return to the computer and click Cancel to exit the Align Activator Rings screen 17 Import the activator ring alignment values from the ECUs to the computer See Store Alignment Values August 2010 Align Activator Rings gt This procedure is not required for a 1544 Infinity ECU or for All Bottle ID dispensers gt All Bottle activator rings read the subtle electronic signals on each coded pourer to assign the correct price and portion information to a pour gt Aligning the activator rings ensures the rings can recognize each pourer s code gt You should perform the alignment before calibration and any time you make changes to the All Bottle dispenser or the activator ring itself gt Even changing the length of the cable between the ECU and
116. procedure after checking the database for errors gt Rebuilding index files does not change or delete any setup or sales data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 22 Emergency Rebuild the Database To perform an emergency rebuild of the database 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Emergency Rebuild Database Emergency Rebuild 2 Click Yes to confirm the rebuild or No to cancel the process gt You ll probably only rebuild the Wait while the procedure is completed seine database if directed to do so by 3 View the results Berg personnel gt You may be directed to perform this procedure after checking the database for errors gt This procedure is considered emergency because you don t want to perform it unless you ve exhausted other possible solutions gt If you are directed to perform this procedure you ll want to back up your database first because the rebuild may result in a loss of data See Back Up the Full Database 4 Press any key to exit the window August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 283 Repair the Database To repair the database 4 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Repair Database 2 Select a repair option Prompt for each fix prompts you each time an error is found You can then choose to fix the error or not If your database is large or has lots of errors this option can take a lo
117. quicker and 6 Follow the steps outlined in Run Advanced Report to set up this report easier to run your favorite Disregard the steps about running the report See Run a Column Selection reports Report Run a Reconciliation Report or Run a Variance Report for help with customizing these reports 7 Click OK to save the custom report The reportis saved and the newname is added alphabetically to any other custom reports at the top of the report list To run the report now select iton the Custom Reports screen and click View You can also run the report from the Reports screen or include it in a schedule August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 223 Modify Custom Report To modify a custom report 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Custom Reports 2 Click Modify Modify Custom Report 3 Make any modifications to the Based On report You can make changes to any 4 Make any modifications to other report settings See Run Advanced custom export you ve created Report gt If you want to change the name Disregard the steps about running the report See Run a Column Selection Report Run a Reconciliation Report or Run a Variance Report for help with Revort customizing these reports E 5 Click OK to save changes to the custom report of a custom report see Custom August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 224 Types of Reports Curren
118. run the auto run schedule You can also reset the password used by un checking the Auto run box saving the schedule and then rechecking the auto run box File does not exist Problem You have a tried to select a file that does not exist and must exist for this operation Remedy Select an existing file System clock is not working Some actions may have been skipped Problem Schedule reads the PC s system clock in order to determine what day and time it is Any actions that should have been run while the clock could not be read will have been skipped Remedy See INF32 Only the main schedule and On Demand schedules can be run Other schedules can be copied over to the main schedule name BERG SCH in order to run them Problem On demand schedules can be run anytime But only the main time schedule can be run The main schedule is always named BERG SCH Remedy If you have a time schedule you want to run copy it over BERG SCH Or select an On Demand schedule or BERG SCH to run Unknown option Problem An option listed after an action in a schedule file is not recognized Remedy Edit the action to make it legal This schedule file is not the most recent version Some data may be lost Problem This is an earlier version of a schedule file Some information may be lost Remedy Modify the schedule file and save it All schedule files saved from Schedule program will have the correct version inserted Main schedule BERG SCH cannot be changed to On Demand
119. s remembered for future orders but can be changed with each order Other Drinks Pours Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Drinks or Pours not Sold which occurred during cleaning learning or calibration Other Volume The number of volume units poured during cleaning learning or calibration August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 313 Glossary P Q Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U VW XY Z Infinity Menus Glossary P Q Click a letter above to jump Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Par Stock This is the ideal number of containers of the brand you want in your total stock When the number of containers falls below par stock Inventory calculates how many containers should be ordered to reach the par stock amount You select either Order Point or Par Stock as your order method using Inventory Options Password The password is case sensitive You won t be able to read the password on the screen If you make a mistake backspace or delete to change it You can enter the same or different passwords for all users Passwords Enabled You can turn password protection on or off to control access to Infinity software and data Disabling passwords does not delete any registered users It simply disables protected entry to the system and lets anyone use the software Percent Accuracy The percentage of accuracy is the percentage differ
120. see Calculate Portion Prices for Cocktail Ingredients gt If you re using Interface see How to enter PLUs 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions 2 Select Cocktail as the Product Type 3 Select the cocktail s Prices and Portions you want to change and click Uptown Grill is modifying Long Island Iced Tea Standard 4 Scroll down the list of Ingredients and click Vodka Standara Click anywhere in the list and type V to jump closer to Vodka Standara 5 Click lt Replace to put Vodka Standard in the first line of the cocktail definition Or drag and drop to its position 6 Repeat steps 4 5 for Gin Standard Rum Standard Tequila Standard and Triple Sec Standara 7 Click the Price Level A tab The cocktail ingredient prices and portions we set up in Brand Wizard appear by default 8 If necessary type the correct Portion for each Ingredient Name The portion size of each ingredient determines the actual cocktail recipe Uptown Grill is using the Berg defaults 9 Type the Cocktail Price for Price Level A 10 Click OK to save the cocktail recipe 11 Repeat steps 3 10 for each cocktail August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 22 Quick Start Task 9 Assign Cocktails To assign cocktails to Laser dispensers Moy Ell Assign Cocktails ECU Type gt Be sure any ingredients you Laser 464A Laser 1 PLU Rece E Ee
121. so find out what the modifiers are and the order they appear in the drink code You must include the comp and or cancel modifier in the Current Modifier Order list before you can enter the modifiers Comp Drinks The number of shots or Infinity defined cocktails poured using the comp button Not Sold Comp Drinks Pours Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Comp Drinks The number of shots or Infinity defined cocktails poured using the comp button Not Sold Comp Pours The number of times poured as a comp pour Includes shots and Infinity defined cocktail ingredients Comp Sales The sales value of comp drinks shots and Infinity defined cocktails Calculated using drink prices Comp Sales Column Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Comp Sales The sales value of comp drinks shots and Infinity defined cocktails or comp pours Calculated using drink prices Comp Volume The number of volume units for comp drinks Comp Volume Column Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Comp Volume The number of volume units for comp drinks or pours Compare by Sales To compare sales in a Reconciliation report Infinity gets a sales amount for each brand from the sales terminal data file This amount called Collected Sales is compared with the Pour Sales computed by Infinity See Reconciliation Example by Sales For PLU recipes the prices in the cocktail definition are used to imply the number o
122. software has no way of knowing the current enable status of drivers unless it communicates with the equipment The Unknown field may also be selected if drivers in some ECUs in a group you ve selected are enabled and others are disabled Select Enabled to enable the driver in the station or group you have selected OR Select Disabled to disable the driver in the station or group you have selected Click Run to send the enable disable message to the equipment Wait while the communication occurs A message informs you when the procedure is complete 6 Click Cancel to exit the screen August 2010 Enable Disable Driver gt Once you ve loaded a driver to a station or group you can disable it if you need to and then re enable it at any time gt If you want to completely remove the driver from the ECUs in the station or group see Remove Driver gt Each sales terminal interface requires a unique driver You select the appropriate driver for your sales terminal when you activate a driver Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 199 Activate Driver s To select a driver 1 Pull down the Interface menu and click Activate Driver Activate Driver The Activate Driver screen may appear when running Infinity immediately after installing 2 Select the name of your terminal software package or POS system in the Driver List If you find both the sales terminal and the softwa
123. speakers gt Most modems have a speaker As you test the modem you should be able to hear it take the phone line off hook and dial At the network modem you should hear the phone ring and the modem answer and then the carrier tone Check network software setup Verify that the network setup information is entered correctly Communication test If the software is configured correctly test modem communications by running an ECU Communication Test See Communication Test in the ECU Diagnostics section for help with performing the test 1 Run the Communication Test 2 As the test is running monitor the indicator lights on both modems You will need an assistant at the remote location Verify the following status light activity The data or send and receive light should flash on the computer modem The Off Hook light should turn on indicating that the modem is dialing and the Auto Answer August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help light also should turn on On the network modem the Off Hook light should turn on indicating the network is trying to answer and you should then hear a loud screeching static like sound When the modem has successtully answered the Carrier Detect light should turn on at both modems During communication the data or send and receive lights should blink at both modems 3 Stop the test Both modems Off Hook lights should turn off indicating the modems have disc
124. specific brand use Brand List Setup See Set Up a Brand for Inventory 5 Click OK to save the supplier To modify a supplier address 1 Select the Supplier from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Type the new Address 4 Click OK To rename a supplier 1 Select the Supplier from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a supplier 1 Select the Supplier from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion If you delete a supplier already assigned to a brand a prompt reminds you Click Yes to delete the supplier or No to keep it If you proceed with the deletion any brands with the supplier assignment will automatically be assigned the first remaining supplier in the supplier selection list August 2010 Select lt All gt in the Assign To field to assign this supplier to all brands Supplier Setup gt From the Supplier Setup screen you perform all tasks related to setting up suppliers gt Any brands in your list without a supplier are not included in Inventory gt When you set up a supplier you can assign it to a single product type or to all brands You can also assign a specific supplier to a specific brand when you set up the brand for Inventory from Brand List Setup Assigning a supplier to a specific brand from Brand List Setup
125. sure to pour at least was poured The minimum pour amount is Problem See M111 Instead this is the amount measured and entered by the user A device is not present or is not communicating Some functionality will be missing if you continue Problem ON a Clear and Restore normally you want to be able to communicate with all of the devices The device named in the message is not communicating Continuing will produce a an ECU which is not fully restored Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Remedy Fix communication and retry the operation If you want to continue make sure that once communication is fixed run another Clear and Restore ERROR M114 Not all devices were restored Some functionality will be missing Problem If you continued from ERROR M113 this reminder at the end of the Clear and Restore will appear Remedy Once communication is fixed run another Clear and Restore August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 370 Report R Error Messages R00 09 R50 59 R60 69 ERROR R04 Your hard disk may be full can t post sales to the database Problem The archive data cannot be entirely copied to the database One reason is a full disk It is also possible that there are write errors on your hard disk Remedy Check your disk space and remove unneeded files You may also want to change the setting for the length of time that archive data is retained use setup disk Dia
126. than one scheduled report is run on the same date each will overwrite the previous one To prevent this include a dash and to number each report in a given day making the report names unique If you type dd xxx rdf the name of any scheduled report is dd xxx rdf The brackets don t match up and xxx is undefined so no actual information is substituted for the curly brackets Security Code An optional 6 character code that provides an extra level of security particularly for modem communications The characters can be letters or numbers Security Level If you use password protection security levels define which Infinity functions your registered users can access You can create and name up to 8 security levels and you can specify which functions are accessible at each level The Berg default security levels and accessible functions are 1 Dealer Owner access to every available Infinity option 2 Senior Management access to everything except calibration equipment setup utilities and advanced diagnostics 3 Junior Management access only to clear sales and current sales reports price level changes station enable disable options run stop schedules diagnostics 4 Others access only to current sales reports diagnostics These are just defaults You can change the number of levels the names of the levels and or the functions accessible at each level Security List Use this function to customize the number and
127. the Sales column items with the exception of PLU and Size In addition you can select any of the following columns Cost per Unit Margin Potential Pouring Cost Sales per Volume Status Supplier Volume Cost August 2010 Column Selection gt You select which column items appear on this report For help with running this report see run a Column Selection Report gt Run this report selecting either Sales or Usage column items or combine the two by selecting Usage Cocktails gt You must enable the Enterprise edition of Infinity to run this report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Configuration Report To understand the report Hardware Station is the hardware station for this section of the report Network Name is the name of the hardware station s network ECU Num is the number assigned to the ECU EPROM Version is the version number of the EPROM in the ECU Disp Num is the number of the ECU dispenser Disp Type is the type of dispenser Laser 6 Laser 12 Laser 16 All Bottle 7 All Bottle 15 All Bottle ID or Tap Enable Disable is the current state of the dispenser specifying whether it is enabled for pouring or disabled Prce Lvl is the price level currently set at the ECU Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the
128. the ECU as soon as you click OK to enter them gt If you have accumulated sales data run a clear sales report before making major changes to an ECU s setup gt If you want to change pouring options at the ECU see Device Settings gt If you need to change an ECU number or network see Move an ECU Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Set up a Cocktail Pad The Cocktail Pad allows you to define cocktails which combine ingredients from different dispensers The dispenser converter allows you to connect an Infinity ECU to the Dispenser Network You must have version 4 21i or later in order to use cocktails with the All Bottle ID ECU Now you can create all bottle cocktails cocktails including ingredients from laser and all bottle a shot and a beer and beer combinations like a Black and Tan These will all ring up as cocktails and not as individual ingredients 1 Fully set up your Infinity ECU including Device Settings brand assignments and calibration 2 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station 3 Select the Dispenser Network Hardware Station you want to modify 4 Click Modify 5 Add in a Cocktail Pad 6 Add in a Dispenser Converter 7 Choose the Hardware Station name of the Infinity ECU which is connected to the Dispenser Converter 8 Click OK 9 Click OK on the ECU setup screen A message tells you to press the address bu
129. the PLU should not exceed the PLU limit for your driver either 32 767 or 65 535 The comp or cancel modifier should not be included in the Current Modifier Order list if you re using comp or cancel increments Click Show Example after you ve completed the Current Modifier Order list to see an example drink code using modifiers in the order you ve specified Make sure the modifier order meets the requirements of the sales terminal N Wu Wu O N August 2010 Driver Settings gt A driver is a computer file included with Interface software that knows how to communicate with the hardware of your specific sales terminal gt Driver settings include options you can select for Interface s performance and any PLU modifiers that may be required by the sales terminal gt If you want to temporarily change the Pour Communication option see Change Pour Communication gt View an example drink code using the modifier order you ve selected on the Modifiers tab by clicking Show Example Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 202 POS Identification POS Identification is used when dispensers share a POS The P3 Hub POS terminal is identified at the dispenser before a pour It is available only on Dispenser Networks To set up POS Identification 1 2 Put all P3 Hubs which are sharing a set of dispensers in the same Sales Check the POS Identification on the Preferences screen Stat
130. the copy You will not see a category drop down list if you only have one category of prices and portions 3 Click Copy Portions Only if you don t want any prices to be copied and portions you ve selected 4 Click OK to proceed gt Note if you select Copy 5 Select one or more brands in the list using the mouse or space bar Portions Only no prices are Click Select All to select the entire list Click Clear to deselect all choices copied 6 Click Continue to proceed with the copy process gt PLUs are never copied Click Cancel to abort the copy process As soon as you click Continue the copy is performed The screen reverts to the price and portion table you were viewing You ll see a confirmation message Copy complete at the bottom of the screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help WOR Cocktail Prices and Portions To set up or modify cocktail prices and portions 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions 2 Select Cocktail as the Product Type 3 Select a Category if you want to filter the price portion list by category When you enter or change a 4 Cocktail Prices Portions Select the cocktail s Prices and Portions you want to change cocktail s prices and portions If you haven t set up any other price portion categories Standard is the only you also define the cocktail s choice Click Sort by Descriptor to see the cocktail price portion list
131. the installation process To access configuration options any time after software installation 1 Close Infinity if it is currently running 2 Insert the Infinity CD in a CD drive Use the same CD used to install the software or the serial numbers won t match and you won t be able to change any options 3 Click Install Infinity Software Follow the instructions Click Next to continue through the setup process or Back to return toa previous screen Agree to the license agreement and the prompt about correct serial number 4 Click Configure in the Setup type screen 5 Click Next to accept the path of the database If your database is in a different path type it in the entry field or click Browse to select the folder 6 Click Next to verify the operation The Configuration screen appears 7 Enter all your configuration options Click Finish after you ve to exit the setup process and return to Windows For help with the Clear Sales procedure see Howto clear sales from the database 8 Remove the Infinity CD from the CD drive August 2010 Access Configuration gt Configuration options include security options data storage and display options country options units of measure and features gt These options are entered at the time of software installation and can be modified as the need arises You can also clear sales from the database from the Configuration screen Copyright 2009 2010 Ber
132. the settings for this device to make sure than they are the ones you desire Fatal Error Preparing for Infinity Database Problem Before the database could be opened there was some error This is likely a system error Remedy Reboot and retry Run Diagnostics on your PC Shut down other programs Can t open Infinity Database Problem The database could not be opened Sometimes follows DB52 if so see DB52 Database could be corrupted or missing Remedy Reboot and retry Try database repair functions under Diagnostics if diagnostics indicate it Diagnosis Run diagnostics on database Make a full backup of your database and send to Berg Database is locked You may need to reboot your system Problem One or more database files is locked This will happen when the database base is not properly closed possibly from a program crash Remedy Reboot and retry Can t open Logging Database Problem The logging portion of the database cannot be opened Remedy See DB51 The current database is empty Problem The database is present but does not contain any information Even a new install contains some information in the database This is most likely an install that was not completed Remedy Reinstall or restore the last good backup Some database files are missing Problem Infinity has identified that some of the database files are missing This may happen if Infinity files were deleted you tried to copy database files or tried to use a sto
133. this feature you should upgrade your EPROM Cancel modifiers ignored Problem Older EPROMs do not support cancel modifiers This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need this feature you should upgrade your EPROM Type modifiers ignored Problem Older EPROMs do not support type modifiers This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need this feature you should upgrade your EPROM PLU Base increment ignored Problem ECUs such as the 1544 which use an embedded driver instead of a loaded one do not support this feature Remedy Set PLU Base to zero if you want all of your ECUs to send the same PLU numbers Otherwise you must program POS terminal connected to 1544 to accept PLUs without the increment added PLU cancel increment ignored Problem Older EPROMs do not support cancel increments This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need this feature you should upgrade your EPROM PLU comp increment ignored Problem Older EPROMs do not support comp increments This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need this feature you should upgrade your EPROM Start modifier truncated Problem Older EPROMs stored all of the modifiers that precede the PLU in a single area The combination of modifiers chosen has exceed the maximum length and some modifiers will be lost Remedy Review and reduce the number
134. this step for each new ECU stocked from this room 5 To remove an ECU from the stock room select it and click Remove gt or drag and drop the selected ECU to the ECU List 6 Click OK to save your changes Click Close to exit the screen without saving To rename a stock room 1 Select the Stock Room from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a stock room 1 Select the Stock Room from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The system must have atleast one stock room August 2010 Stock Room Setup gt To use Inventory there must be at least one stock room in the system gt Initially the default stock room has all ECUs assigned to it You can keep using this one or change its name or set up additional stock rooms gt Each ECU must be assigned to one and only one stock room gt You should set up a stock room for each location where brands are delivered gt The stock room name is listed on orders to expedite deliveries gt You can specify separate stocking locations on your orders by creating as many stock rooms as you need gt See Inventory Overview for help with understanding how Inventory works gt See Checklist for Inventory Setup to review the order of Inventory setup tasks Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 179
135. to check an ECU address If you leave this unchecked then you ll see dispenser network ECUs in the list Select the Equipment Name Selecting an ECU means you re getting an address for a device at that ECU Click OK Go to the equipment and press the flashing button on the correct device When finished the software displays the address and equipment name for that device w mr OR 2 Check Get ECU Address unchecked if you want to check an ECU address If you check this box then you ll see a list of dispenser networks 3 Select the Network Selecting a network means you re getting an address for an ECU on that network 4 Click OK Go to the ECU and disconnect power Then reconnect power When finished the software displays the ECU number and hardware station name for that ECU Wu August 2010 105 Read Addresses gt This operation can be performed for dispenser network devices only eo Tap 2 gt Use Get Address when you are not sure what the address is for a particular device or ECU Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 1 Set Addresses To set addresses dispenser network devices 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Set Addresses OR Click Set Addresses on Modify an ECU to set addresses for a specific This operation can be performed Set Addresses ECU for dispenser network devices 2 Select the Equipment Name only eo Tap 2
136. to easily distinguish this ECU ina selection list when you assign brands run reports or other operations Select the correct Device Type for each Dispenser Number Depending on the ECU type you ll see one or more dispenser numbers You re specifying which dispenser s are actually connected to the ECU Type a new Device Name for each Dispenser Number The default device name is the network name ECU number dispenser number You can enter a more meaningful name e g LeftLaser 12 or Left Sam Adams Device names are displayed in all lists of equipment assigning brands reports schedules so choose names to help distinguish your dispensers easily Select the Sales Station for each Dispenser Number Click OK to save the ECU Wait for all communication with the ECU to finish When done the ECU Setup screen displays with a message at the bottom to confirm saving the new ECU To set up a dispenser network ECU e g Tap 2 1 2 Wu O N 8 See New ECU Number for help setting up the ECU number Type a Hardware Station name for this ECU The default station name is the network name ECU number Choose a hardware station name which helps you easily distinguish this ECU ina selection list when you assign brands run reports or other operations Select the correct Device Type for each Device Address On dispenser networks a P3 Hub is considered a device as well as Tap 2 taps The addres
137. to have a minimum number of lines Sometimes this occurs because the user indicated there were some header lines to be skipped By skipping these lines there were no more lines left in the file to process Remedy Check that the proper file is being used Reduce the number of header lines if that was entered in error ERROR INF39 Internal Error Ordinal is not in the list of legal values Problem Certain items kept track of by the Infinity program have ordinal values assigned to them that is they have a fixed set or list of values that can be used A reference to an item was made that does not have one of the allowed values This will usually be a program error not a user error August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR INF40 ERROR INF42 ERROR INF43 ERROR INF44 ERROR INF45 ERROR INF46 ERROR INF47 ERROR INF48 ERROR INF49 ERROR INF50 ERROR INF51 August 2010 hence the Internal error designation Remedy Closing the program or rebooting and retrying may allow you to continue Check the last operation you did to see if it was retained Diagnosis Send the database backup and information about what you were doing to Berg You must create a new Group which includes all ECUs in order to proceed with this operation Problem This operation can only be run on the Master Group The software has detected that you do not have the Master Group defined Remedy Create such a gro
138. to the eight possible sizes on TAP 1 taps if alternate sizes are enabled If you don t use alternate sizes don t worry about sizes 5 8 Sizes 1 4 correspond to the four possible portions small regular large and special for 1544 Infinity ECU dispensers You don t need to type a decimal if you re entering a whole number e g type 6 for 6 00 fl oz or 2 for 2 00 Note that for cocktails you re entering default portion sizes and prices for each Ingredient in the cocktail in addition to a default Cocktail Price See cocktail defaults For cocktails you can also use the calculate portion prices feature Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any Price Level tab that has prices and or portions you want to change Since defining new default prices and portions does not affect any brands that currently have old default prices and portions you may want to copy your new defaults to specific brand s in the product type See below To define a default container for this product type select the Container See Container Setup to create different containers or see Set up a Brand for Inventory to assign a container to an individual brand To copy price and portion defaults to brands in the product type 1 Click Copy on the Enter Product Type Defaults screen See Copy Prices and Portions August 2010 Price and Portion Defaults gt Perform this task at any time to modify the default prices and portions for a particular product type gt
139. to type a decimal if you re entering a whole number e g i S leg ifferent portion type 6 for 6 00 fl oz or 2 for 2 00 sizes and price levels you ll see OR is the number you specified in the previous step Click Next to accept the Berg default prices and portions displayed for the product type and price level August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Brand Wizard Brand Names What is this step This step gives you a chance to select which product types of the Berg brand list you want to load You may not need all product types If you didn t select a particular product type on the Brand Wizard Product Types screen you won t be able to select it now Click Back repeatedly if you want to get back to step 2 This step just loads the brand names There s no harm in loading brand names and then not using them You can run Delete Unassigned Brands later If you choose not to load one or more product types in this step any default prices and portions or number of sizes and price levels you ve entered for product types in previous steps of the wizard are still saved A single price table using the defaults is created for each new brand To proceed with the Brand Wizard 1 Select which product types from the Berg brand list you want to load to your computer and click Next August 2010 Brand Wizard gt Click Back at any step of the Wizard to return to a previous screen and mak
140. unclear what was intended when information is entered When this happens Infinity will reset the information on the screen to its previous or expected state Remedy You may need to re enter information August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Warning INF111 By unchecking this box interface will be removed Drivers must be unloaded from all ECUs before removing the Interface feature Problem If you remove Interface with drivers loaded the drivers cannot be unloaded since the menu to do so will be removed from Infinity To re install Interface run a Typical install again or use Options Preferences Remedy H you have not removed all drivers cancel this process and remove all drivers first Then remove interface You can also use Clear and Restore memory to effectively remove drivers Warning INF113 Some of the equipment does not support the operation requested Problem Not all equipment can perform all operations The particular function that you have requested cannot be fulfilled by all of the equipment in the name you selected Warning INF114 Equipment name must not be entirely numeric Problem Equipment names must contain at least one letter Warning INF150 Price Level c is not supported by Network s ECU od Price Level was not changed Problem Different ECUs support different numbers of price levels The price level that you are trying to invoke is not supported by the ECU indicated The price level at this
141. want to enable or disable You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your hardware stations Click Show Actual to communicate with the selected equipment to determine the current status Wait while the communication occurs The Unknown field is selected if Show Actual is not selected The software has no way of knowing the current enable status of equipment unless it communicates with the equipment The Unknown field may also be selected if some equipment within a group you ve selected is enabled and others are disabled Select Enabled to enable the selected equipment OR Select Disabled to disable the selected equipment Click Run to send the enable disable message to the equipment Wait while the communication occurs A message informs you when the procedure is complete Click Close to exit the screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 171 Enable Disable Use this feature to enable or disable equipment in your system gt A hardware station is the smallest component of the system for which you can perform this operation gt You can t enable or disable a single dispenser gt Infinity can automatically perform this task at specified times if you include it ina schedule Infinity Help Change Price Level of Equipment To change the price level of equipment y N o A 6 Pull down the Management menu and point to Operati
142. when the schedule is modified as well as any calibration activity gt The schedule log storage length how long Infinity continues to store events in the log is set under Data Storage and Display Options during software installation gt If you want to see more details about schedule errors see Error Log Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 275 Infinity Help Error Log To find error logs 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Error Log To view an error log 1 Click Open if the Error File name is not displayed Select the file and click Open The name of an error log file matches the name of the schedule it pertains to with a ERR extension 2 Click View 3 Wait for the log to display in the View window Use the scroll bars and Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to manipulate the view You can maximize the screen by double clicking the title bar Click Print to print the log 4 Click Close to exit the View screen To print an error log without viewing 1 Click Open if the Error File is not displayed Select the file and click Open The name of an error log file matches the name of the schedule it pertains to with a ERR extension 2 Click Print 3 Select the printer and print options and click OK To delete an error log 1 Click Open if the Error File is not displayed Select the file and click Open The name of an error log file matches the name of the schedule it p
143. which driver name and version number will be loaded and whether a driver is currently loaded at the selected station or group It also informs you if your default parameters options and modifiers will be loaded at the station or group If you see the wrong driver listed click Cancel and see Activate Driver to select the driver you need If you have activated multiple drivers and you see the wrong one going to the selected sales station see Set Up a Sales Station for Inventory to associate the correct driver Click OK to confirm loading of the driver s after reviewing the list Click Cancel to abort the loading process Wait while communication with the ECU s occurs Click Close to exit the Load Driver screen Note The driver is automatically loaded to an ECU if you Clear and Restore Memory for the ECU if Interface has been properly installed August 2010 Loading a driver at a station or group gives the ECU s the necessary language format to communicate with the sales terminal gt A driver is a computer file included with your Interface software that knows how to communicate with the specific hardware of your sales terminal Each sales terminal interface requires a unique driver You select the appropriate driver for your sales terminal when you activate a driver gt 2 If you said Yes to the automatic loading of drivers when running Infinity after installing Interface you don t need to perform this task
144. will be run on the entire system Answer No if you do not need to archive normally this means that you do not expect that there are any current sales stored inside any ECU In either case the Inventory Check will continue Question R254 Some Total Stock amounts are still zero or are negative Are you sure you want to continue Problem On the Initial Stock or Inventory Check functions it is expected that every total stock amount is a positive value At least one stock amount is still zero or is less than zero Remedy Answer No and enter or correct the remaining stock amounts Or use Delete Unassigned Brands to remove any unassigned brands Or if this is not a brand that will be tracked via Inventory remove the supplier assignment from this brand Diagnosis Information about these brands can be viewed the Brand Information report Question R255 Order Quantity is not sufficient to restock Are you sure you want to continue Problem The Order Quantity when delivered should be enough to bring the total stock for a brand up to the minimum stock amount given by Order Point will list the brand s which do not meet this requirement If there are many brands then just the first few are listed This check is only made on new orders and not if you modify an order later Also this check is skipped for brands that are already on order Remedy Answer No and increase the Order Quantity Or you may answer Yes and continue Diagnosis Information about
145. will be used for the brand prices and portions If the category does not exist for that brand then all prices and portion tables will be averaged This derived price per unitis then multiplied by the ingredient portion amount Use Retail Price per Unit The portion amount of each ingredient is multiplied by the Retail Price per Unit you ve set up for the brand You can enter a Retail Price per Unit when you modify a brand s setup or you can have it automatically calculated on the Modify Multiple Brands screen or after you Archive and Clear 4 Click Continue If you arrived here from Prices and Portion Setup or Price and Portion Defaults the calculated ingredient portion prices are immediately saved If you arrived here from Modify Cocktail the ingredient portion prices are only calculated for the cocktail you re currently modifying Furthermore the portion prices are not saved until you click OK on the Modify Cocktail screen August 2010 142 Ingredient Portion Prices gt Infinity can calculate the ingredient portion price ina cocktail if you would like gt The ingredient portion must be entered before you can do this calculation You can always directly enter the ingredient portion prices when you set up cocktail prices and portions gt There are three methods you can choose to calculate the portion prices gt Depending on the method you must also have entered the cocktail price the brand retail price p
146. you don t need to change anything If you received a partial amount enter the number you received Enter zero for any brand not delivered Entering zero here does not cancel the order for the brand 5 Click Continue The list of back ordered products displays 6 Review the Back Order Quantity and Cost for the products you still need to receive Type a new quantity if needed or click Back to return to the previous screen to edit the Delivered Quantity The initial back order quantity shown is the difference between the quantity from the original order and the delivered quantity you entered on the last screen A zero should be present if the product has been fully delivered You can change the back order quantity to zero if you want to cancel the order for a specific brand Any changes you make on this screen to back order quantities do not affect the delivered quantities you already entered on the previous screen If you realize you need to change the delivered amounts August 2010 Deliveries gt Whenever stock is added to your inventory you should enter the container quantities using the Delivery feature gt To enter a delivery you must know the order number being delivered gt If you didn t receive everything you can still enter what you did receive and keep the order in your system as a back order If you create a back order it s saved with the same order number as the original order Copyright 2009 2
147. you may turn the dispenser off and back on after the clear and restore is complete Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 104 Identify Device To identify which actual device hasa device name 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Identify Device OR Click Identify Device on Modify an ECU to identify devices specific to gt This operation can be performed Identify Device an ECU for dispenser network devices 2 Select the Equipment Name you want to identify only eo Tap 2 You l see all the device names you ve set up on any dispenser network gt Use this communication feature ECUs S l gt to find out which equipment has 3 Click OK a selected device name Communication commences with the ECU A button flashes on the equipment currently set with the selected device name You can also identify devices 4 Go to the equipment and press the flashing button to turn it off that are nal yel addressed by selecting lt Hardware Station 5 If the actual equipment is not what you expected make changes to the name gt Unaddressed ECU s setup details and use Set Addresses if you need to send new addresses to the equipment August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Get Address To get addresses dispenser network devices or ECU 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Get Addresses 2 Leave Get ECU Address unchecked if you want
148. your ECU Free Pour Enable is not allowed on units that allow comps or pour cocktails unless they use Button Problem To enter Free Pour mode you must press both the up and down arrows which is the same method as entering comp or cocktail mode To avoid this confusion if you want to enable Free Pour you must use Button 16 to enter cocktail mode or not use cocktail mode You also will not be able to use complementary mode Remedy Disable free pour or disable complimentary pours or disable cocktails or enable button 16 File name is notin a legal format for a firmware file Legal format is lt type gt FV lt ver gt date hex Problem The file name for a firmware file used to program a device must be in a specific format in order to identify it It is likely that this file is not really a firmware file Remedy Locate the correct file Device Type does not match the firmware file Problem Part of the firmware file name identifies the type of device that it matches The file picked does not match the device you selected to program See M28 for an explanation of the file name Remedy Locate the correct file The ECU type is not supported by this network See ECU Types on Modify a Network Problem When you set up a network you must indicate the supported ECU types The ECU type selected cannot be placed on this network Remedy Change the supported ECU types for the network or correct the ECU type You may instead need to create a new network to com
149. 0 273 When a schedule is run and some actions have been missed schedule will show you the missed actions and allow you to run them immediately Up to one week s worth of missed actions will be shown When the list is shown you can choose to run all of the missed actions or to skip all of them August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 274 Run a Schedule from the Command Line To run a schedule from the command line 1 Access the Start Run window or DOS or other command line vehicle 2 Type the path and name of the schedule file gt Example C Program Data Berg Infinity berg sch 3 Click OK in the Run window or hit the Enter key in DOS The schedule named is automatically started To stop a schedule from the command line 1 Access the Start Run window or DOS or other command line vehicle 2 Type the path and name of the Schedule program and EXIT Example C Berg Infinity sch32 EXIT 3 Click OK in the Run window or hit the Enter key in DOS The running schedule is stopped and the Schedule program closed If the schedule is executing an action or any screen other than the main Schedule screen is open the Schedule program is not exited and a message is displayed Run from Command Line August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Schedule Log To find the schedule log 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedule Log To view the schedule log
150. 00 cocktails to a Cocktail Pad gt If an Infinity Network Laser is connected to a Dispenser Network using a Dispenser Converter assignment changes can only be made be made at the Infinity ECU Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 147 Copy Assignments To copy assignments i Pull down the Pouring menu and click Copy Assignments Copy Assignments 2 Select the From Equipment Name You ll see all the dispensers you ve set up You re selecting the dispenser with brand pee AN you a to a The ECU Type and fsa p EE can copy RE brand Type displays for the selected equipment assignments of dispensers to other identical dispensers 3 Select the To Equipment Name This is the equipment you want to copy to You ll see any groups or sales gt This feature copies the names stations you ve setup in addition to all your ECUs and dispensers If you of the brands and cocktails the copy to a station or group all dispensers in the station or group that are brand and cocktail prices and dispensers of a different type will be left alone Select Master Group if you portions and the buttons or want to copy assignments from one dispenser to all dispensers of that type pourer codes they are assigned 4 Click Continue to It does not copy device If you see an error message check your equipment selections You can t settings Comp Enable etc copy assignments to dispensers of a different type or with differ
151. 010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 18 click Back to return to the previous screen and then click Continue to return to this screen The order is not processed until you click OK 7 Click OK when you re ready to accept both the delivery quantities and back order quantities As soon as you click OK the received containers are added to the total stock The order remains in the system with the same order number and shows all the back order quantities When the back ordered products arrive follow the steps to enter a delivery If you want to view or print a copy of the back order you just created select the original order number from the Deliveries screen and click View or Print Click Cancel to exit the Deliveries screen OR Click Cancel to if you decide not to process the Delivery at this time August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 186 Inventory Reports To run Inventory reports 1 Pull down the Inventory menu and point to Reports Click the report name Inventory Reports 2 a Yes to archive and clear sales or No if you have the archives you gt For a description of Inventory SCH reports see Wait for the report to run and display in the View screen e ged Container Stock Report 3 View the report Cost Analysis Report See View Print Save Reports DEER Brand Information Report gt You can also run Inventory reports using the Advanced Reporting menu See Run an Advanc
152. 09 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 135 New Category of Prices and Portions To find new prices and portions i Pull down the Pouring menu and click Category Setup Click New Prices and Portions The New Prices and Portions screen displays OR Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions Click Show All Options and click New Prices and Portions The New Prices and Portions screen displays To create an entirely new category of prices and portions 1 2 3 4 5 Select New Category and click Continue Type the New Name of the category and click Continue This is the name that appears after the brand name in the list of prices and portions so choose something descriptive e g Mardi Gras Click each brand in your list that needs the new price portion category Click Select All to quickly select your entire list You can deselect a brand by clicking again or pressing the space bar Any brands you dont select won t receive new prices and portions with this category name Click Continue Wait for the operation to complete An existing set of prices and portions for each selected brand is copied to create the new set There is no way to influence which set of prices and portions is copied but it is always a price portion set for the same brand or cocktail Edit the new prices and portions which have been created See Modify Multiple Prices and Portions to ed
153. 10 210 View Reports gt The View screen provides a convenient way to view your Infinity report gt For information about a specific report see Types of Reports Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 211 Open or Delete Report Files To open an Infinity report file rdf 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Advanced Reports Click Open Infinity Reports gt Open reports with the rdf OR extension in Infinity If the report View screen is already displayed click Open gt To open other report file types 2 Select the Look in folder of the report if it s not already selected click on the report file name in 3 Double click the name of the report OR select the report name and click Windows and it will start the Open appropriate software to display You will only see reports with the rdf extension This is the only file type you the report can open in Infinity If you are not running Infinity you can click on the report OR file name in Windows and it will start Infinity and display the report in the If the software is already running View screen E l orAdebe Reader as e g Excel or Adobe Reader To delete an Infinity report file rdf Gre Open to select the file 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Advanced Reports you saved 2 Click Delete 3 Select the Look in folder of the report if it s not already selected 4 Double click th
154. 141 Calculate Portion Prices for Ingredients c ceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaneeeeseneeeeneeenanees 142 Assign PLUs to Brands and Cocktails sseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeseeeeanes 143 Assign Brands to Dispensers sscrseseeeeeseeeeeeneeseeneenenneeneeeessanenssanenssaeeaseesasueueaseeueaseeeenseeeenseeeseseeeeeaes 144 Assign Cocktails to Dispensers cssssseeessseeeeeenseeneeennennaeesennnaeeeensnanaeenseanaesasnanaeseenanaeaesnseanausanaananeas 146 Copy ASSIGN Me nts EEEE 147 Portion Size Learn Modeschoenen iaaa Arai 148 Start Pour Test E E T 149 Exit Po r VT EE 150 Start Free POUP sc scctsceeceeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeseegeeesueeseaeseaeeeeaseaaeeaaeeaaseaueeausegsenauenaeangeaoueaaeeaaueauseauesaussauseauseuuens 151 Exit Froe Bet eeengsgeedgek eege ee cesccentececudueceuswaesecewbe NEES Hee ENARAK N KAKEAN AE 152 Calibration Calibration OVervie W 1 scecccesccesceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeseseeuengeenaeaeueaaeeoaeeaaeeaaeeaneeauseesegseeesanaeenaeaoueanees 153 Align Activator Ringsi s eceeceeeeeeneseeaneeeeeeeeenenneaneeeeeneeensansananaeseeeeeaneeneanaeaeseeeenaensananaeseeeeaennsneanaeaeeneas 155 Store Alignment ValUcse e ceseeeceseeeeeseeeceseeeeseneeesnneeseeneeseneessanenssanenssansaseesasseeensseusnseeeenseeeseseeeesseeeesans 156 Set Default Alignment ValUues s seecessseeeeeenseeneeensenneee
155. 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 322 are illegal in file names dd day of the month e g 13 ddd day of the week short format e g Tue dddd day of the week full name e g Tuesday mm two digit month number e g 10 for October mmm name of the month short format e g Oct mmmm name of the month full name e g October y day of the year e g 355 for Dec 21 yy two digit year e g 06 yyyy four digit year e g 2006 first number to make the file name unique time format see below A specified time format which includes any combination of the following within curly brackets hh hour nn minutes ss seconds ampm if ampm is not part of the format the 24 hour clock is used Example hhnnampm 0230pm or rpt hhmmampm bd US0230am txt for a text usage report run at 2 30 in the morning Example scheduled report names Using the default report name rpt mmm dd rdf the name of the first scheduled Usage report run on June 17 is USJun17 1 rdf A second Usage report run on the same day is USJun17 2 rdf If you type Z ddd rdf Ztue rdf is the name of any scheduled report run on Tuesday Ave rdf is the name of any scheduled report run on Wednesday etc If you type dd mmm yy rdf the name of any scheduled report includes the day of the month the month abbreviation and the two digit year e g 130ct06 rdf This means if more
156. 20525uununnnnnnnnnnnnn ENER REENEN 29 Infinity Menus Exploded d EU CTT 20 Software Installation Upgrade Infinity Software sssccceseceeeseeeeeeeeesenneensenenssneeseansescansaseansasaensasneneaseenenseeesnseeeseseeeenseeeesseeeesenees 34 Additional Software on the Infinity CD scsscssssesnesesseseecsneeneesneesnssenssaeesnesneesneesnsssessesenseneesneesnenaes 35 Uninstall Infinity Software ENEE EEEREEEREEEEEEEEEE NEE EEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEE NEES EEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEE NENNEN 37 Change Business Name EES 38 Change Database Folder s s sssscesssseesseeeesseneeseenenssaneessensassensnseeeeasneneaseeeenseeeenseeessseeeensneessseeeenseeeesseeeesens 39 Change Program Folder c1ssscecseeeseeeeenneeenenee REENEN ne neee en neee en neeeen neces neeeenneaeenseaeenseeeenseaeenseeeeneeeeenans 40 Activation amp Licensing About Activation amp Benewal ee ENEE ENEE REENEN RENE ENEE REENEN REENEN EN 41 Activate or Renew by Phone csss ecceeseeceeessseeeeeenseaneeensnnaesesnnneesnensaanaesesnanaeseenanaeeeenseaaausasaanaeseenaaans 42 Activate or Renew by Fax ecccssseseceessesneeeesnnneessenseaeeesnnsenaesesnaneeceensaneesnsaanaeseenanaeseenseanausasnanauseenaaaes 43 Activate or Renew by Eimaiil css ecccsseeseeeessseeeesenseaeeeensenaeseenanaeseenseanaesnsnanaeeeenanaeeeenseanausnsaanaeseensaaas 44 TANS A E tte eege ege edd ee see catcceceacsscteccuscauescncesessanngeasesdsaanesenedsascasecsevecsssesseacscateces
157. 266 Current sales Current Sales Reports 206 Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report 231 Custom export copy 251 delete 251 modify 253 new 252 rename 251 run 251 setup 251 Custom report create new 222 Custom Reports description 221 D Data Storage and Display Options 57 Database backup full database 257 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help as Database change folder 39 Check the Database for Errors 280 Clear Database Log 284 clear sales 60 261 Compare ECU 289 Emergency Rebuild the Database 282 name of business 38 rebuild index files 279 rebuild the database delete chain 281 repair 283 restore full database 258 Show File Versions 285 store configuration settings 255 Date time set for ECU 173 set for Infinity system 174 DB Exam 35 Dealer configure for multiple end users 47 make changes on site 47 master copy of customer database 47 Debug mode 291 Default container for product type 116 prices and portions for product type 116 Define Action description 267 Delete Delete Empty Sales Stations Groups 97 Delete Unused Brands Cocktails description 118 ECU Hardware Station 82 export output file 250 group 96 network 81 report files 211 Deliveries create back order 184 enter 184 Demo ECU 72 mode 71 setup 73 Description of device settings 93 Detailed Sales X3 Report 233 Device settings description 93 set for individual dispenser 92 set for system 92 Diagnostics d
158. 44 Portion field Calibration Portions Calibration will be the most accurate if your calibration pours are the same as typical pours of the selected brand To change the Expected calibration portion amount to match a typical pour click Calibration Portions This is a shortcut to the Calibration Portions screen where you can enter the calibration portion s for the brand Entries can be either permanent for the ECU type or temporary for this brand only during this session What happens next When you click OK the software calculates the level of accuracy for the pours using the numbers you ve entered If the actual pours are not close enough to the expected portion size Infinity will prompt you to pour again Each time you pour measure and enter a new portion amount Infinity uses the amount to calculate new timing values You ll see the newly calculated values at the bottom of the List Calibration screen Each successive pour should bring you closer to the calibration portion size Once you re satisfied with the level of accuracy of the selected brand s pour its timing values are copied to the other brands you selected You can change your level of accuracy at Calibration Units and Accuracy August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 164 Calibration Portions For how to steps describing the entire calibration process see Calibrate Dispensers Calibration Portions What is this step Y
159. 544 Infinity Wine Bar Draft Sentinel An Infinity ECU can control one All Bottle dispenser and up to two Laser dispensers A TAP 1 ECU can control up to eight tap controllers A 1544 Infinity ECU pours up to 15 different All Bottle price codes The Infinity network ECU is where all of the price and portion information for each of the dispensers is stored as well as the recorded sales data Whenever you pour drinks the ECU is in charge of determining whether to allow the drink to be poured and is also responsible for tracking that pour Each time a drink is poured the ECU records the brand the amount poured and the retail price of the drink You can periodically read this information out of the ECUs and also periodically clear sales totals from the ECU formerly known as the Z Report and store the information in archive records in your Infinity database at the computer See also Dispenser Network ECU used for Tap 2 ECU Number A unique number from 1 to 32 assigned to each ECU in a network The network name and ECU number form the address of the ECU used by the software For Infinity network ECUs the unique ECU number must be set up in the software and set at the ECU For dispenser network ECUs the ECU number can be set in the software and communicated to the ECU ECU Type Infinity supports several types of Infinity network ECUs nfinity TAP 1 1544 Infinity Wine Bar Draft Sentinel Infinity ECUs control Laser and All Bottle dispens
160. 8 Driver Hel p sseeeceeeee cece sete ee eeseceeeeeesenaeeeeesnaeeeseseceaesesesnaeseseseaeeeseseguaesesesuaeeeseseeeesesegeaeeesesnaeeeesssaeeeenees 189 Set Up Sales Station for Interface ccssseeeceesseeneeensneneeessnnneeeeenseaaaesnseenaesesnanaeseenanaeaesnneanaesasannanees 193 Load DHVeE 2 uee esdeEEC edd 194 Testa Drive ts secstseiieesint E et ee ese see eect 195 Re MOVE Drive Maisie aaa aa a aaa a a raa Ee Ee ENEE NEE EEN EEN NEE EE e 196 Ehe Sta tuSiscscceescessdecccctsscasscoscaeccctecctedansdecccetsssasicetccesscdsncttssnscosacensesetecucccsscuctsstescestaecsencaseveassceteeseseanees 197 Enabl Disa ble Drive tis csecsee 2oscecss sSezecesesaccesseedadessacacecsccacacectesecdetcsateecsastcectes Mae dask access eataeesaasececsaastaceess 198 Activate DER ecco eee ete nee ieee ee eer et 199 Change Pour Communication css eesseeeseeeeseeeseeneseeenenensneesenueneesnenenseaeseaeenaesnsneasneesaaeenaesnseeanaeesaaes 200 Driver S ttingS ce ceseesseseeeeeeeeeeneenenneeeeeneeenanneneanaeceeeeeenesnananaeseeeensnnsqeanaeseeeesenseneanaeaeceeeeasnseneanaeaeseenenannas 201 POS identities iON rerna aggies si Deeg Eed iseeancecsdzccccived got E AATA A EE ERAAN ETNA 202 Sequence Number Setup EEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEER NEEN 203 Gene fate Rtl gesiess Eed ea decid NEE EE thet ewe nde etewe dian E SES e 204 HE EUR E E 205 Reports Run a Current Sales Report s ssssceceseeeeseeeenesneeneenenaee
161. AL eh Sees e a ac alee cee eat tuat 394 Warning Messages Communication CM Warnings ee SEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEE 397 General GE Warnings cccceceseetseeeeeeeeeeeeneeneaneeeesneeenaneeseaneeseseesensenaananaeseeeeasnnsneanaeaeseeesasanseanaeseeeeas 398 Infinity INF Warnings abuces ten ges Ee EEN e EEGEN E REESEN Ee ee ENEE eege 399 Interface ECR WarnningS sccsssseeeeeesseenneensnnneeseenneaeaeensennaesesnnneeenenseaaausnseanaesesnanaeseensaanansnsannanees 401 Report R Warnings E EEEEEEEEEEREREEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEn 403 Manager M Warnings ee ERSEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEREREEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEn 404 Schedule SCH Warnings KENNEN EEN NEEN ee NENNEN KOMEN Ged ad aN EK dee 408 Setup S Warnings Index ant Infinity Help 12 Quick Start Intro gt This manual is a quick guide to installing and configuring Infinity software for a fictitious restaurant Uptown Grill gt You ll learn the simplest way to get a new installation of Infinity up and running gt All tasks are presented sequentially to help guide you from one step to another gt However our example covers only the basics and uses several default options Several references are made to more detailed topics which can be found in the Infinity User Manual in PDF format or in the
162. August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 188 Checklist for Interface Setup Checklist for Interface setup 1 Complete all necessary hardware connections between the sales terminal and ECUs What is Interface 2 Select the appropriate driver at first install See Activate Driver EE Interface is automatically installed when you install Infinity software j link that allows rapid transfer of 2 Set up your sales station s drink information from a Berg 3 Assign the correct PLUs to brands and cocktails ECU to a sales terminal 4 Review and edit the settings for your selected driver s gt Sharing sales information 5 Load the driver file to your Infinity equipment already generated by a Berg 6 Test the interface with the sales terminal See Test Driver ECU can significantly reduce a bartender s labor and time spent per drink gt Once the interface is installed drink information for each pour is translated into a numerical code and sent to the sales terminal gt The sales terminal then rings up all drinks poured exactly as if someone were pressing the sales terminal keys August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 18 Driver Help Find the name of your terminal software package or POS system Berg Generic This is the Berg Generic POS driver It works with the greatest variety of sales terminals Berg Basic This is the Berg Basic POS driver It
163. Begin and End Times Shift definitions are optional and are used to display sales data by shifts in an Hourly Sales X4 report If you define shifts all sales from an entire shift are reported on one line in the report rather than sales being reported for each hour See Hourly Sales X4 Report for more details about the report Shift 1 is the first shift of a business day Type the hour a space and am or pm e g 2 am or use 24 hr time You can t enter minutes Make sure shift times don t overlap There are no Berg default begin and end times Shifts are set in Report Options Show All Options Displays additional buttons for more advanced features e g Rename and Delete Normally these buttons are hidden to protect you from accidental edits Show Archives Click this button to see a list of the archive dates and times for the selected Station Group This can help you determine the archive data available for specific reports on this Station Group Size Sizes 1 4 correspond to small S regular R large L and special SP or X on your dispenser or control box Sizes 1 8 correspond to the eight possible sizes on TAP 1 taps if alternate sizes are enabled If you don t use alternate sizes don t worry about sizes 5 8 The number of sizes you see may vary according to dispenser type and the maximum number of sizes you ve specified for each product type You dont need to type a decimal if you re entering a whole number e g type 6 f
164. Click Yes to confirm the deletion of all sales records from the computer gt You should clear sales from the 4 Click OK when you ve read the clear sales completion message database only when you want to 5 Click Finish to exit the Configuration screen erase all archive records of Don t forget to remove the Infinity CD from the CD drive sales from the computer s hard drive gt You may be directed to do this by Berg personnel or you may do it at regular intervals to clear old records from the computer and make room for new ones gt Clear sales can remove pours used for initial calibration gt Completing this operation will limit the kinds of reports you can run gt To automatically clear old sales records see Data Storage and Display Options gt Clearing sales from the database does not affect any configuration or setup data e g prices portions dispenser assignments You can only perform this task with your Infinity setup disk Although there is a menu item for Clear Sales in the Backups menu it only directs you to Configuration options You can t clear sales from the Infinity program August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 262 Schedules To find schedules 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules To set up BERG SCH See About BERG SCH To create a new schedule See New Schedule Time Schedule Setup On Demand Schedule Setup To tes
165. Diagnosis Put program into diagnostics mode Run the operation again At the error message click on diagnostics button and record the information Forward this info to Berg along with standard information ERROR CM13 Unrecognized response code Problem The returned response code is unknown Remedy Retry Reboot and then retry Diagnosis Forward a debuginf txt file to Berg ERROR CM14 Network record not found Problem Network being used by this operation could not be found in the database This could be a corrupted database or it could mean corrupted memory Remedy Reboot Retry Possibly repair database Diagnosis Run Check Database and Repair Database ERROR CM15 Hardware Station record not found Problem Hardware Station being used by this operation was not found in the database Possible database corruption See CM14 ERROR CM17 The ECU EPROM does not match the expected ECU type Run Clear and Restore Memory or you may need to delete this ECU Problem The ECU type recorded in the database does not match the type of unit Remedy Set correct unit number on ECU You may need to delete the current ECU This message will appear when upgrading from Infinity to Infinity with All Bottle ID Use Clear and Restore Memory to make needed changes then go to Setup ECU Hardware Station to change the All Bottle dispenser type If the database shows Infinity with All Bottle ID and the ECU is actually Infinity with All Bottle 7 you must delete the EC
166. Display options Archive Records Storage Length The length of time sales data is stored in archive records at the computer Choose from one day one week one three six or twelve months forever or none don t save any records Archive Reports Reports that use archive records Most Recent Archive Weekly Monthly Date Range can only report on data you ve put in the archive records during the time specified They don t necessarily report on all sales activity for the time specified For example if you run a weekly report on sales from 2 weeks ago but the last time you archived and cleared sales was a month ago there is no data in the archive records to run the weekly report Even if you archive and clear sales from the ECU right before you try to run the weekly report there are no archive records with the dates from 2 weeks ago Of course sales information for that week is included in the archive record you just ran but it can t be broken out into a weekly report because it wasnt archived weekly Archive Time This is the date and time data was cleared from the ECU s and archived at the computer Auto Run You can select Auto Run when you create a Time schedule You can only define one Auto Run schedule The schedule then runs automatically whenever Windows is running If you have Windows NT or 2000 a user must log on before the schedule will run This option is the most useful if you have one schedule you keep running all the time Bas
167. ECU will remain at its present level Warning INF151 Price Level c has no valid portions assigned to Network s ECU d Price Level was not changed Problem Changing to the price level indicated would result in the ECU not being able to pour since there are no valid portions on any of the brands at that price level Remedy Check the price tables and add valid portions to the price level desired Check that the price level is the one you intended August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 401 Interface ECR Warnings ECR100 109 ECR110 119 Warning ECR100 Warning ECR101 Warning ECR102 Warning ECR103 Warning ECR104 Warning ECR106 Warning ECR108 Warning ECR109 Warning ECR111 Warning ECR112 Warning ECR113 Warning ECR114 menu choice August 2010 Send after pour option ignored Problem Older EPROMS do not support the send after pour option This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need this feature you should upgrade your EPROM Size placekeeper for cocktails option ignored Problem Older EPROMs do not support size placekeeper for cocktails option This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need this feature you should upgrade your EPROM Comp modifiers ignored Problem Older EPROMs do not support comp modifiers This does not affect other options and modifiers for this EPROM Remedy If you need
168. EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EE EEEEEE ENER 325 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tipse s eeeeceeeeeseesseeneeeeeeeeeneenecnaeeeseeeensaneqnanaeseeeeeaaesneanaeaeseeesnsensqnanaeseeesasnesqanaeaneeeas 329 Troubleshooting Avoiding Problems een 330 Troubleshooting Local Network Communication ProblemS s e r1nnssrsrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nne 331 Troubleshooting Remote Network Communication ProblemS s 1s1es11nssrrnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnennnnne nnmnnn 334 Troubleshooting Modem Dip Switch Settngs EEN 336 Troubleshooting Pouring Problems c ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeseaeeeeeeseneeseeeenanes 337 Troubleshooting Software ProblemsS eseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee seen neaeeeseseeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeseseeeeeeneeeanees 341 Troubleshooting Report and Export ProblemMS e ss ssrnsrensrrnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne nnmnnn 342 Troubleshooting Schedule ProblemsS sseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeeseseaeeeeeseaeeeseseeneeseeeenaeees 344 Error Messages Communication CM Error MeSSaQe S c sessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeesnaeeeeesaaeeeseeeeeaeseeesaeeesesseneeseesenaees 346 Database DB Error EE 351 General GE Error MeSSages ccsssseeeeeeeseeneeeesnsneeeeensnanaeennennaesesnnnaesnensnaaausnneanaesesnanaeensnsanaesnsaananees 354 Infinity
169. ERROR M18 ERROR M19 ERROR M20 ERROR M21 ERROR M22 ERROR M23 ERROR M24 ERROR M25 ERROR M26 ERROR M27 16 ERROR M28 ERROR M29 ERROR M30 August 2010 Not all archive brand records were deleted for ECU Cannot delete archive records Problem Some of the records containing the details of archive records could not be deleted Therefore the archive cannot be deleted and the operation was not successful See M15 Not all Z brand records were deleted for ECU Cannot delete Z records Problem Some of the records containing the details of Z records could not be deleted Therefore the Z information cannot be deleted and the operation was not successful See M15 Maximum networks already defined Problem You may only define 31 networks in an Infinity system Remedy Delete any unused networks The maximum number of containers has been reached Problem You may only define 65535 containers Remedy Delete any unused containers You cannot delete the last remaining container Problem At least one container must exist in the system You cannot delete the last defined container Illegal product type for operation Problem This operation only can be performed on certain product types In particular some operations are only appropriate to cocktails or brands Remedy Check product type of product s selected for this operation You cannot copy or move to an ECU which is a different ECU type or supports a different type o
170. Exporting means you tell Infinity to copy the cocktail recipes prices and portions entered in your Infinity database to a file What wil be in the export file The cocktail export file contains a separate line of text for each price level of every cocktail in your database Each cocktail line lists the cocktail name price level price and optionally PLU For example Margarita Cock tail A 3 00 208 Margarita Cock tail B 4 00 209 Margarita Cock tail C 5 00 210 In addition directly following these cocktail lines is a separate line of text for each price level of every ingredient in the cocktail Each ingredient line lists the brand name price and portion at the specified price level For example Tequila Liquor A 1 50 0 50 Tequila Liquor B 2 00 0 50 Tequila Liquor C 2 50 0 50 Triple Sec Liquor A 0 75 0 50 Triple Sec Liquor B 1 00 0 50 Triple Sec Liquor C 1 25 0 50 Each separate item in a line is called a column Export Cocktail Columns are separated by a single character called a column separator usually a comma In the above file excerpts Cocktail Brand name is column 1 Product Type is column 2 Price Level is column 3 Portion Price Cocktail Price is column 4 Portion is column 5 and Cocktail PLU is column 5 Portions in the export file are listed in the unit of measure set up for your database Prices are listed in the unit set up for your computer How do I know what numbers to enter for Co
171. INF Error Meesages EENEG 356 Interface ECR Error Message s sccssseeseeesssceeseensaneeenseeneeseenaneeseenseaeaeensnanaesesnanaesesnsanauensannanees 361 Manager M Error Messages een 364 Report R Error Messages scsssseeeceenseeneeennenneesesnnneeenensnanaeensnnaeseenanaeceenseaaaesnseanaesesaanaeseensaaeauensae 370 Schedule SCH Error Marseag gns n gereg eeteiete Eegen 373 Setup S Error Mescages cccsssssseesssseeeesnseeeeeenseaneeensennaeeesnnnaeceensnanansnseanaesasaanaeseenanasenssseanausnsaananees 375 Utilities U Error Messages tise c ctetecctiae Sheet tacts shactectt cea deent sect te tc iat anaes encteanttaszecta ited ees cea tek 380 Question Messages Communication CM Ouestions eeEEEEEEEEEEREREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREREEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE En 383 infinity INF Dteretege ut 384 Interface ECR QUESTIONS eeeeeeeetteteee cnet en eeennnneee seen en ennnnnneaeeeeeeeenennsneaeaeeeseenennennneaeeeseeeennenssnaeaseeseenennenas 385 Manager M QUeStIONS eeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeennnnennaneeeeeeeeeneeneananeeseeeseannsneanaeaeseessnseneananaeeeeesasnaenanaeeeseenenennes 386 Report R Oue stions E EEEEEEEEEEEREREEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEn 390 Schedule SCH QUeStIONS ceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeenneeenaeenneenseeenaeennaeeneeeseeesaeesaeenaeeeseeesaeesnaeenaeeneeensneenaes 391 SEET 392 tities 0 Cue S
172. If applicable change the device setup details Or if the setup is correct on the Modify an ECU screen click Set Addresses to send the displayed address to a device To set device addresses 1 Click Set Addresses 2 Select the Equipment Name You ll see device addresses for this ECU Select lt All gt to send addresses to all devices at this ECU or select a single device address to send 3 Click OK A message tells you to press the address button on the device 4 Go to the equipment and press the flashing button on the correct device When finished the software displays the message for the next device if applicable 5 Repeat step 5 for any other device as prompted To identify which device has which device name 1 Click Identify Device 2 Select the Equipment Name you want to identify You ll see the device names you ve set up at this ECU 3 Click OK Communication commences with the ECU A button flashes on the equipment currently set with the selected device name 4 Go to the equipment and press the flashing button to turn it off If the actual equipment is not what you expected make changes to the ECU s setup details and use Set Addresses if you need to send addresses to the equipment Wu August 2010 Modify ECU Setup gt The steps you take to modify an ECU are similar to those you perform to set up a new ECU gt All ECU settings can be modified and the changes are communicated to
173. Infinity Help 159 it might not pour at the accepted level of accuracy Answer Cancel if you made a mistake no changes will be sent to the ECU and you can re enter the measured portions 12 If you clicked Yes repeat steps 7 11 until the level of accuracy is acceptable Each time you enter a new amount for an actual pour the software recalculates the timing values needed to bring the actual pour closer to the calibration portion size If you re calibrating a flow meter tap see TAP calibration 13 Repeat steps 4 12 for any other button or coded pourer at this dispenser Do not click Dispenser Calibration for more than one button or coded pourer at the dispenser 14 Repeat steps 2 13 for each dispenser that needs calibration You can copy the calibration values of an All Bottle dispenser to another All Bottle dispenser See Copy Assignments You can t copy the calibration values of Laser or TAP 1 dispensers to other dispensers All Bottle ID calibration values are automatically copied to all other All Bottle ID dispensers August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 160 Brand Calibration Enter Portion Amount What is this step Use the Brand Calibration screen to enter the exact amount of the calibration pour s of the specified brand Use a measuring cup or graduated cylinder to measure the pours For how to steps describing the entire calibration process see Calibrate Dispensers The num
174. Infinity User Manual Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Version 6 13 0 Thursday August 19 2010 Infinity Help Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Berg Company LLC Madison Wisconsin FCC Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for FCC compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Trademarks Infinity All Bottle Laser and TAP 1 are registered trademarks of Berg Company a Wisconsin Limited Liability Corporation All Bottle ID is a trademark of Berg Company a Wisconsin Limited Liability Corporation Other brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks Berg Part Number 5201997 Revision 6 00 Printed in U S A Table of Contents Infinity Quick Start QUICK S tart Il te EE 12 Quick Start Task 1 Install Infinity
175. Laser and All Bottle dispensers Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 163 List Calibration Enter Portion Amount List Calibration You ll see the List Calibration screen only if you selected List Calibration on the Select a Brand to Calibrate screen Once you re satisfied with the level of accuracy of the selected brand s pour its timing values are copied to the other brands at the dispenser you ve selected from the list What is this step Use the List Calibration screen to enter the exact amount of the calibration pour s of the specified brand Use a measuring cup or graduated cylinder to measure the pours For how to steps describing the entire calibration process see Calibrate List Calibration gt With List Calibration you are making pours and entering the amounts for one brand only gt When you re satisfied with the level of accuracy for the selected brand its timing values are copied to the other brands you selected from the list Dispensers gt List calibration is available for The number of calibration portions you enter depends on the ECU type Laser and All Bottle dispensers All Bottle and Laser Enter the exact small portion poured in the After performing list calibration Small Portion field and the exact large portion in the Large Portion each brand should still be field calibrated using brand calibration 1544 Infinity Enter the exact amount poured in the 15
176. Liquor 1 0 50 1 00 Absolut Liquor 2 1 00 3 50 Absolut Liquor 3 1 50 4 25 In this case the prices listed will be copied to the existing number of price August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 120 levels in your database Portions in the impor file should be listed in the unit of measure set up for your database Prices should be listed in the unit set up for your computer Price portion and PLU amounts in the import file may be truncated or rounded if necessary to fit into the proper units For example if your database uses two decimal places for prices then 4 is interpreted as 4 00 and 4 152 is truncated to 4 15 How do I know what numbers to enter for Columns on the Import screen Columns refers to the order of the price portion information in each line of your import file For example in the following sample line from an import file Brand is listed first so it s column 1 Absolut Liquor A 1 0 50 1 00 500 You should enter a number on the Import Prices and Portions screen for each column name specifying the order it appears in your import file There is no pre set correct order the important thing is determining how your import file is organized Find out the column order used by the exporting program or just look at your import file by opening it in a spreadsheet or text editing program Look at each line and determine in what order the price portion information is listed Is th
177. Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data stored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the ECU To run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report the computer uses archive data stored at the computer The data reported on is determined by the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified time August 2010 Reconciliation gt The sales data generated by Infinity can be compared with sales data from a sales terminal using the Variance or Reconciliation reports This is an alternative to using the Interface feature gt The Reconciliation report helps determine if brands are being poured and not accounted for at the sales terminal gt The Reconciliation report starts with PLU information exported from a sales terminal and compares that data See Compare by Volume and Compare by Sales gt This report requires previous setup tasks entering PLUs entering a price per unit defining a sales terminal data file but does not require input when you run the report See Set up the Reconciliation report gt Each time you run a Reconciliation report a current sales terminal data file must be present at the computer and available for Infinity gt Once you re ready you can run the report the same way you run any other advanced report See Run a Reconciliation report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help za Reco
178. No communication at this time and click Continue This lets you send the assignments later when you re ready to send all setup information to the equipment at the same time 10 Click OK to the message about saved changes 11 Click Cancel to exit the Assign Cocktails screen Wu N D August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 23 Quick Start Task 10 Broadcast Pending Changes To broadcast pending changes Some O28 are not synchronced with Me database Deng tend the database rage to the tun r the aiected Ox touement Kane pre nd Perens hve not en ae Send all changes you ve made Broadcast Pending in the software to the hardware in one operation aer toce Orvers heve not been vgl o n 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Broadcast Pending A list of all the pending changes displays 2 Select lt Master Group gt as the Equipment Name 3 Click OK to send the changes 4 Wait for communication with the equipment Now all equipment has all the setup information we ve entered August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Quick Start Task 11 Dispenser Calibration To perform dispenser calibration Eiter ty ESEA Calibration Dispenser calibration copies the calibration values of one brand to all brands at the dispenser gt If you have an All Bottle 7 ns i dispenser see Align Activator tH
179. O o oN PO o E wo O N Infinity Help 219 8 Select a communication option and click Continue These options are provided so you can wait to send the cocktail and PLU recipe assignments later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes 9 Click OK to the message about saved changes 10 Repeat steps 2 9 for another ECU August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 220 Run a Reconciliation report To run a Reconciliation report 1 Pull down the Reports menu Click Advanced Reports 2 Select Reconciliation Report 3 Select the Equipment Name for which you want to run the report gt Before you run this report be If you ve set up any groups or sales stations they appear in the list Otherwise select a hardware station Reconciliation Report sure you ve performed all the steps outlined in Set up the 4 Set Report Data and Brand Name Sort on the General and Selections Reconciliation Report tabs if you want to change options for this report only 5 Click View to run the report and view it on the screen OR Click Print to run the report and send it to the printer without viewing Wait while the reportis run The time it takes to run the report is determined by the amount of sales activity and the number of ECUs in the station or group Never turn off o
180. Problem There are no cocktails defined You cannot assign a cocktail when none exists It is not sufficient to have a cocktail name Cocktails must have their recipe defined with the portion for each ingredient Remedy Create cocktails as needed Then assign them You must set up prices and portions before you assign brands Problem There are no brands defined Therefore you cannot make any brand assignments Remedy Create some brands or use the brand wizard to create a standard list of brands Then you may assign brands You cannot perform calibration without a brand assigned Problem If you select a button code or dispenser without a brand assigned and then try to do any type of calibration you will be stopped Calibration must be based on a particular brand Remedy Select a brand to calibrate and continue Not all empty sales stations or groups were deleted Problem There was an error trying to purge empty sales stations and groups An unknown number of these groups were deleted but some may remain There was likely an error message displayed before this warning Remedy Fix the error indicated by the preceding error message Learned portions for unassigned brand ignored Problem In learn mode you make sample pours to determine what volume is required from each tap One of these sample pours was made on a dispenser that has no brand assigned Therefore the portions will be discarded Remedy If there should have been a brand as
181. Problem Although most functions can be run while you have a schedule running this function cannot be Remedy Stop the schedule Perform the blocked function Remember to start the schedule again Berg Infinity Utilities is currently running You must shut it down before running another Infinity program Problem See INF17 At least one item must be selected Problem This operation cannot proceed unless at least one item in the list is selected There are two selection methods The simple method clicking on each item selects or deselects it In the extended method clicking on an item selects it and deselects all other items To select another hold down Ctrl key when you click To select a range select one and then hold down shift as you click This selects all items between the first and second item clicked upon Remedy Select at least one item Disk is full Please enter next disk Problem The destination disk is full If it is a floppy you may be able to continue by using a continuation disk Disk is full Problem The destination disk is full Remedy Remove unused files from your disk is not a legal Column Separator Problem The character shown cannot be used as a column separator Remedy Choose a different column separator Can t open file with that kind of access Problem File needed for the operation was already open with another type of access or can never be opened for this type of access This is most likely when a file is
182. Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 Can t read database record Retry Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 Group or station name not found Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 Actual device type for x does not match type listed in the database Problem Communicating with the equipment indicates that device x is a different type than the type entered in the database see ECU setup Remedy Change the address of the device to match the address in ECU Setup Or enter DEMO mode to change the device type or address to match the equipment Can t write database record Retry Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 Missing record in the database Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 This database version is not supported by this software Problem Each database has a version number The number found is not supported by this version of the software This can result from an incomplete installation or from copying an old version of the database Remedy Try reinstalling the software and choose to update the database Find the correct backup or store of the database and reload it Diagnosis Determine the version of the software using Help About By putting the program in the Diagnostics mode and then clicking the diagnostics button on the message you can find out the version of the database Unable to perform database operation Problem Possible database corrupti
183. Stop to end the test 10 Click Close to exit the Loopback Test screen You can perform a series of tests in the following order to check all parts of the network to computer connection COM port loopback test 1 Unplug the converter from the computer s COM port and plug the loopback tester in its place 2 Run the loopback test If there are no errors the COM port is OK Perform the converter loopback test If there are errors either the COM port is incorrectly specified or the port is defective If you re unsure this is the port you re looking for try plugging the loopback tester into another 9 or 25 male pin port and see if the screen keeps counting errors If any port you try doesn t quit counting errors you may have a defective serial port Converter loopback test 1 Unplug the loopback tester from the COM port and plug the converter back into the COM port 2 Disconnect the network cable from the converter Oa N 3 Connect the test cable supplied with the loopback tester to the converter interconnecting the loopback tester and converter 4 Run the loopback test If there are no errors the converter and its transformer are OK Perform the network cable loopback test If there are errors the converter and or its transformer are not working Substitute a different converter or transformer and run the test again Network Cable loopback test 1 Unplug the loopback tester from the converter and reconnect the
184. Terminal File Station Correspondence Select Single File if one file from the sales terminal contains data for all your ECUs Select Use Station Column in Single File if there is a column in the Sales Terminal File with the name of the Station You must enter which column is the Station Column below Select Separate File for Each Station if you need to list multiple sales terminal data files Click Name File to enter the path and name of the Sales Terminal Data File lf you are using a separate file for each station first click the file name you want to change Select the folder type the file name and click Open You can use a variable sales terminal data file name using curly brackets Type the Column number in the sales terminal file for PLU Count or Sales PLU Column identifies which column in the file lists the PLUs The default is f Count Column displays if you re comparing by volume or count This identifies which column in the file lists a count for each PLU The default is 2 Sales Column displays if you re comparing by sales This identifies which column in the file lists a sales amount for each PLU lf your sales terminal file contains more than one column of PLUS Count or Sales type the column numbers in numerical order separated with the character noted on the screen e g 1 3 5 The separator character used by your PC is displayed after the words when separated by and is typically a comma When
185. The POS software supports pre checking Posera Maitre D This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This selection installs a POS driver Formerly known as Gamma Postech This is the Postech interface board This selection installs an ECR driver RDC POSitouch This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Special PLU bookend setup required Remanco This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007987 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Remanco Vision This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 The POS software supports pre checking Royal Alpha 587 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Royal Alpha 587 CX This selection installs a POS driver Royal Alpha CMS 482 Plus This selection installs a POS driver r Power A product of K3 Software This selection installs a POS driver Use a null modem cable PN 8007020 or Berg cable 8007993 Samsung 240 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Samsung 550 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Samsung 650 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007996 If you have installed a Postech or other third party interface board and are using an ECR interface you should select Postech or Berg Parallel inst
186. The current time and date from the PC are displayed The numbers do not Infinity System Date Time automatically advance as time passes However as each ECU is updated it gt Use this feature to quickly reset will get the actual PC time sent to it the time for all ECUs in your 2 Click OK to send the current PC time to all ECUs Click Close to exit system without saving gt To set the time and or date at Wait while the change is communicated to all the ECUs A message an individual ECU see Set ECU confirms the time was set Time 3 Click Close to exit the screen gt The ECU time can also be automatically updated during each Archive and Clear Sales operation gt If you need to set the computer time use the Date Time feature in the Windows Control Panel gt Warning Changing the PC date and time may invalidate your software license August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Inventory Overview Inventory helps you streamline and automate your inventory and ordering tasks Which brands does Inventory check Inventory tracks any brand in your Infinity brand list that has a supplier However Berg recommends not assigning a supplier to brands assigned to All Bottle 7 and All Bottle 15 codes unless a single brand is assigned to a single code e g Irish Cream Since multiple brands are typically dispensed under each All Bottle code e g Well or Call Inventory is generally
187. The regular portion size doesn t work With EPROMs 3 0 or greater the small portion size light blinks and after the small portion is poured the large portion size light blinks 1544 Infinity All price level and portion size lights go on All Bottle ID The dispenser displays Calibrate and the intended pour size TAP 1 The lights behind tap buttons 2 3 and 4 go out and all tap buttons pour 16 fl oz If any of your TAP 1 lines are in Flow Meter Only mode you can t discern calibration mode at the tap with lights or programmed portion sizes See also TAP 1 Calibration TAP 2 The lights behind tap buttons 2 3 and 4 go out Only button 1 can be used to pour Calibration with Tap 2 can calibrate both the timer and the flow meter in the same step Flow Monitor The lights behind tap buttons 2 3 and 4 go out Calibration Units This is the unit you ll use to measure and enter calibration portions Choose from fluid ounces fl oz milliliters ml cubic centimeters cc centiliters cl liters L or grams A common reason for changing the calibration unit is the use of metric units on graduated cylinders When calibrating with grams you will be weighing the portions and will need to supply a specific gravity Your selection does not change the unit of measure you selected on the Country Options screen Cancel Close the screen without saving changes Cancel Mode Enabled means canceled pours are recorded as cancels on reports
188. This might be useful for a Z report The data is transferred but nothing is printed The action taken and the report file name are recorded in the schedule log and error log e g report written to file ZNov02 rdf Report Names See Scheduled Report Names Click the Name File button to change the Report Name which is used for all scheduled reports Report Pour Type Pour Types include Sold and All The Berg default is All Some options are not available for all reports Report Title The title appears at the top of all reports The report title can be the name of the business or any name you prefer It can be up to 39 characters letters or numbers The Berg default report title is Berg Infinity Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 319 Retail Price Per Unit This is the retail price the customer pays for each unit of measure of the brand It s used to calculate retail value on the Cost Analysis report the Retail Usage report and the Reconciliation report It s also used to calculate stock value in the Container Stock report You enter this price using Brand List Setup or have it calculated using Modify Multiple Brands or have it calculated from brand usage after an Archive and Clear when the Calculate Retail Price box is checked Calculations Used Current price portion tables The price divided by the portion size is averaged for all sizes price levels and categories Retail Usa
189. U Berg Generic gt gt 02 31 31 32 31 01 03 lt lt 06 gt gt 02 31 31 31 31 7F 82 03 lt lt 06 The message starts with the STX 02 and ends with ETX 03 The checksum appears before the ETX For the first message the PLU is 1121 The second message has a PLU of 1111 Since the checksum equates to 02 it must be escaped to avoid confusion with the STX character The Escape code is 7F ESC The high order bit of the checksum is set changing it from 02 to 82 The POS must undo this escape sequence to determine that he checksum is 02 so that it can validate the message Other drivers are explained under the dealer area of the Berg website August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Uninstall Infinity Software To uninstall Infinity software 1 Remove your license 2 Go to Control Panel Add Remove Programs 3 Scroll the list and click Berg Infinity gt Note that if you uninstall Infinity 4 Click Remove from Windows without first Wait for the software to be removed removing the license you will not be able to install and activate a different serial number on this PC gt Using Control Panel insures all Infinity software files are removed August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Change Business Name To change your business name 1 Pull down the File menu Click Change Business Name 2 Type the new business name 3
190. U Sales Stations combine Hardware Stations into a single area of accountability and may be a more convenient way of running reports or operations An ECU can not be in more than one Sales Station A Sales Station is also used to indicate which ECUs share a POS terminal Sales Stations can also be used when supporting multiple types of sales terminals to indicate where each type of sales terminal is used For Dispenser Networks the Sales Station is also used to indicate which dispenser are handled by each P3 Hub when more than one exists You can easily set_up a new Sales Station If you plan to run reports that combine ECUs in several different ways e g all beer dispensers just the restaurant area all first floor dispensers you ll want to also define groups to combine stations in several ways Station Group List A list of all stations and groups that have been set up for your system Status This is the order status of the brand Stock Room This is the location from which the ECU is stocked Each ECU must be assigned to one and only one stock room You can specify separate stocking locations on your orders by creating as many stock rooms as you need See Stock Room Setup Supplier Supplier is the name of the supplier of the brand Select lt None gt as the supplier for brands not included in Inventory e g All Bottle 7 and All Bottle 15 brands August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 325 G
191. U to make this change Diagnosis Check ECU number Compare ECU ERROR CM18 Unit busy Please retry later Problem The ECU cannot perform the operation you requested since it is performing some other task at the moment Remedy Retry when the other operation is completed ERROR CM19 Invalid security code Problem The security code in the ECU does not match the security code in the database When this happens no communication is possible between the ECU and PC Remedy Cycle power on the ECU to clear its security code Then Clear and Restore Memory to send the security code to the ECU ERROR CM20 Port d is currently in use Problem Port is being used by another program or device The device may be a modem or a mouse Note that some programs will not release the port until they are exited If a program crashed while using the port the port may still think it is in use When running a program in a DOS window the August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help DOS window will hold on to the port even after the program completes until the DOS window is closed See also CM22 Remedy Close other programs using the port Close DOS windows If this doesn t work reboot to clear the port Diagnosis Check that you are using the correct port the Communication Wizard can be used for this ERROR CM21 Port d does not have appropriate hardware Problem 8250 UART or better is required to use the comm port Most equipment
192. Vodka at 2 Absolut Madness 4 50 PLU 2000 1 oz of Absolut at 3 and 0 5 ounce of Rumpleminz at 1 50 We pour 5 shots of vodka 2 shots of Absolut 3 screwdrivers and 2 Absolut madness The Infinity Sales summary report looks like Vodka 10 00 Absolut 12 00 Rumpleminz 3 00 Screwdriver 7 50 remember Abs Madness is PLU cocktail and therefore cannot appear on an Infinity sales report The STDF will have a PLU column of 2 and sales column of 3 and looks like Vodka 101 10 00 Abs 201 6 00 Screwdrivr 1000 7 50 Madness 2000 9 00 Note since the brand name column is not used it is not necessary that the names match this column does not even need to be present We then process the STDF line by line to produce the reconciliation report We will Show Infinity sales followed by POS sales for each line PLU 101 matches wth Vodka so we have Vodka 10 00 10 00 PLU 201 matches wth Absolut and we have Absolut 12 00 6 00 1000 is a screwdriver which is a cocktail known by Infinity so we have Screwdriver 7 50 7 50 Note we do not use the ingredient price PLU 2000 is the PLU recipe Absolut madness 9 divided by 4 50 is 2 cocktails Using the recipes we see that Ingredient one is Absolut which requires 6 for two pours ingredient two is Rumpleminz which requires 3 for 2 cocktails Both of these dollar amounts are covered by the Infinity side so we record 2 Absolut madness in the report Abs Madness 9 00 9
193. a PLU Recipe y 2 Select Cocktail as the Product Type and click New Brand gt For further information about 3 Type in the New Name of your PLU recipe and click OK PLU recipes and how they re 4 If prompted select the Category of prices and portions you want to used in the Reconciliation create and click OK report see PLU Recipes and Select the category of prices portions used by the brands in the PLU recipe Reconciliation Report Select lt All gt if you want to create a PLU recipe with this name for all your categories Wu Click Modify when you see your new PLU recipe name display on the Prices and Portions Setup screen On the Define tab select a brand in the Brand List that is an ingredient in the PLU recipe and click lt Replace or drag and drop the brand to the list Repeat step 6 for the remaining brands in the PLU recipe Click a Price Level tab Type the correct Portion for each Ingredient Name You re specifying the amount of each ingredient in the PLU recipe so the Reconciliation report can determine the correct volume for each brand 10 Type the Ingredient Portion Price for each Ingredient Name or click Calculate Portion Prices Itis important to accurately fill in the ingredient portion prices since they will be used in some calculations 11 Type the Cocktail Price for the displayed price level This is the total price of the PLU recipe and is also used in some calculations 12 Type the co
194. a backup of the database changing the serial number to the end user s Restore the full database on the user s PC August 2010 Preconfiguring Software gt Because of the new licensing policy you can no longer install more than one serial number on your PC gt Even if you have copies of each end user s database on your PC you should always have the customer make backups on site Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Change from a Duplicate Serial Number To change a serial number 1 Order a new serial number 7 j Duplicate Serial Number 2 Make a backup copy of the entire Infinity folder 3 Insert the install CD with the new serial number gt Use this procedure in situations 4 Click Change from a Duplicate Serial Number where a serial number has been 5 Select the folder of your database shared on two or more This automatically changes the database serial number to the serial locations number on the CD gt You can also use this feature to 6 Click Install Infinity software to upgrade your present database with its change the serial number of any new serial number version database to a new Serial number August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Access Configuration Options To access configuration options at software install 1 Complete the Infinity installation process The Configuration screen appears at the end of
195. a cocktail in the list click anywhere in the list and type the first letter of the cocktail name This scrolls the list close to the cocktail 5 Click lt Assign to assign the selected cocktail to Button 1 Or drag and drop the selected cocktail in place The cursor automatically advances to the next button Repeat steps 4 5 for the remaining Button numbers Be sure you don t assign a cocktail with ingredients not already assigned to the dispenser or you won t be able to save the cocktail assignments To remove a cocktail from a button select the cocktail and click Remove gt Or drag and drop it back to the cocktail list 8 Repeat steps 3 6 for any other Laser dispenser tab If you have enabled the Reconciliation Report feature all ECUs display a tab for PLU Recipes If you don t need to create any PLU recipes ignore this tab Or for help see Create and Assign a PLU Recipe 9 Click OK to save the cocktail assignments for all dispenser tabs 10 Select a communication option and click Continue These options are provided so you can wait to send the brand assignments later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes 11 Click OK to the message about saved changes 12 Repeat steps 2 11 for another ECU or dispenser To quickly access cocktail prices and portions setup while making dispenser assignments
196. a zero for Price Level In this case the prices listed will be copied to all the price levels in your database H the column Product Type is not included in the import file type a zero and make sure an intervening line appears between cocktail definitions in the import file See How does the import file show where one cocktail recipe ends and another begins below If the columns Portion Portion Price Cocktail Price or PLU are not included in the import file any existing portions prices and PLUs in your database will be retained This includes entries of zero in your database Optional columns are Product Type Price Level Portion Ingredient Portion Price or Cocktail Price Cocktail PLU How does the import file show where one cocktail recipe ends and another begins Cocktail recipes are distinguished one of two ways using a Product Type column or using a blank or intervening line in the file If you use a Product Type column the word Cocktail in the Product Type column signals the start of a cocktail definition Any succeeding lines in the file with a different product type are considered ingredients in the cocktail recipe As soon as another line appears with Cocktail as the product type a new definition starts If you don t use a Product Type column there must be a blank line or any line without column separators in the file between each cocktail definition The following excerpt from a sample cocktail import fi
197. abase only when you want to 5 Click Finish to exit the Configuration screen erase all archive records of Don t forget to remove the Infinity CD from the CD drive sales from the computer s hard drive gt You may be directed to do this by Berg personnel or you may do it at regular intervals to clear old records from the computer and make room for new ones gt Clear sales can remove pours used for initial calibration gt Completing this operation will limit the kinds of reports you can run gt To automatically clear old sales records see Data Storage and Display Options gt Clearing sales from the database does not affect any configuration or setup data e g prices portions dispenser assignments You can only perform this task with your Infinity setup disk Although there is a menu item for Clear Sales in the Backups menu it only directs you to Configuration options You can t clear sales from the Infinity program August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help st Preferences To enter preferences 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Preferences Preferences 2 Select your amp preferences e Select Basic Edition or Enterprise Edition depending on the Infinity You can change your features you need You can select a different edition at any time preferences at any time Check Interface to enable all interface menu choices You can also rem
198. ailable to you To determine the EPROM version in your ECUs run a Configuration Report See Run Advanced Reports Export To export means to send data from one software application to another Infinity s export feature lets you export report data to other programs To do this the report must be copied to a file the other software can import See Export Report Data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 304 Export Cocktail Columns Columns refers to the order of the price portion information in each line of your export file For example in the following sample line from an export file the Cocktail name is listed first so it s column 1 Margarita Cocktail A 3 00 208 You should enter a number next to each column name on the Export Prices and Portions screen specifying the order you want it to appear in your export file There is no pre set correct order Find out if the importing program requires a specific order use your own preference or click Load Defaults to use the Berg default column order If you don t want a column included in your file for example you re not using PLUs type a zero next to the column name on the Export Prices and Portions screen to indicate the information shouldn t appear in your file Notice the Cocktail name and Brand name of ingredients must have the same column number The Cocktail Price and Portion Price of each ingredient must have the same column number If y
199. aintain the auto run schedule You will then probably need to combine the schedules into one Question SCH209 Dispenser Network actions may be logged at the ECU Do you want to check for possible Dispenser Network schedule logs Problem Since Dispenser Network actions are run on the Dispenser Network their logs also are stored initially on the Dispenser Network To make sure that we have all schedule logs on the PC Infinity needs to check the Dispenser Network s Remedy Answer Yes to check Dispenser Network ECUs for schedule logs Answer No if you do not use Dispenser Network actions you believe that you have all of these logs or you want to skip this communication August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 32 Setup S Questions 200 209 210 210 270 279 Question S200 Do you wish to place Infinity program icons on your desktop Problem If you answer Yes an icon for Infinity will be placed on your Windows desktop in addition to appearing in the Infinity folder If you answer No you will need to use the Infinity folder under Programs to start any Infinity programs Question S201 All archive data sales will be erased Are you sure this is what you want Problem Clear Sales will erase all archived sales data This means you will not be able to run any Date Range or Most Recent Archive reports until you next run an Archive and Clear Sales Answer No if you want to retain your archived sales data Reme
200. ales at the ECU To run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report the computer uses archive data stored at the computer The data reported on is determined by the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified time gt This report provides a brand summary for the selected station or group in addition to the volume poured and potential pouring cost of each brand gt For help with running the report see Run an Advanced Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 240 Variance Report To understand the report Variance This report displays the Sales Collected Sales Variance and the Percent Collected Sales for each Brand Name in the selected station or group The end of the report shows the Totals for Sales Collected Sales Variance and Pct Collected Sales for all brands in the station or group The sales data generated by Infinity can be compared with sales data from a sales terminal Printed On using the Variance or The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run Reconciliation reports This is not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity an alternative to using the Interface program gt To run the Variance report you Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data curr
201. amount poured is not recorded nor is any PLU ever sent to the POS A dispenser stays in free pour mode until you take it out of free pour mode Use Exit Free Pour when you re done testing cleaning or priming Don t forget this step Once enabled anyone can enter free pour mode This is not recommended for normal operation since you will lose accountability When you exit free pour all dispensers exit at once Exit free pour also occurs if you close Infinity August 2010 Start Free Pour Free Pour means the liquor will pour as long as you hold down a button Sales and volume are not recorded and no PLUs are sent to the Sales Terminal gt Free Pour mode is good for priming the lines or cleaning them gt EPROMs 3 12 and 4 12 or above support Free Pour mode gt There is no free pour for TAP 2 gt To detect abuse any time you enter or exit Free Pour the ECU will log the event gt The Power Loss and Interface Log report will show you when Free Pour mode started and ended Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 151 Infinity Help 152 Exit Free Pour To exit free pour 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Exit Free Pour All dispensers currently using Free Pour are taken out of this mode The event is logged at the ECU Exit Free Pour Free Pour means the liquor will pour as long as you hold down a button Sales and volume are not recorded and no PLUs are sent to the Sales Termi
202. an t switch back to s Problem After the install setup tries to switch back to the original folder This failed In some cases this will not affect the success of the install Remedy See S46 Error creating category name Problem New installs will attempt to create the required category name Standard in the database This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy Check that you are not out of disk space and free some up Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Reboot and retry Error creating Master Group Problem New installs will attempt to create the required group Master Group which includes all ECUs in the database This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy See S57 Error creating configuration record Problem For new installs or installing from 3 x databases inventory configuration records must be created This failed and the install cannot continue Remedy See 57 Error creating Product Type Problem For new installs or installing from 3 x databases the product types are defined in the database and must be created This failed and the install cannot continue Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR S61 ERROR S62 ERROR S70 ERROR S71 ERROR S72 ERROR 73 ERROR S74 ERROR S75 ERROR S76 ERROR S77 ERROR S78 ERROR S79 ERROR S80 ERROR S81 ERROR S82 August 2010 378 Remedy See S57 Error creating Container Problem For new
203. and resume calibration on a higher precision unit You can proceed but it is not recommended Diagnosis Use Infinity s Diagnostics Get Version Number to see the EPROM version Versions 4 05 and above have the higher precision After calibration the Draft Sentinel will likely change its current recorded volume You may want to Archive and Clear before proceeding Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Warning M210 Warning M211 Warning M212 Warning M213 Warning M214 Warning M215 Warning M216 Warning M217 Warning M218 Warning M250 August 2010 Problem Draft Sentinel records pours made under calibration mode as regular volume Remedy Cancel out of calibration and run an Archive and Clear to store the current volume at the PC before completing calibration Current firmware version 1 is more recent than the hex file version This device will be skipped Problem It is not allowed to overwrite the firmware in a device to an older version of the firmware Other devices may still be programmed but it is also likely that you should find a more recent version of the firmware file Remedy Check that you are using the correct and most recent version of the firmware file Calibration light pattern may not be correct for Taps using old versions Calibration can still proceed Consider upgrading your EPROMs Problem If you use Enter Calibration Mode with some old versions of Tap 1 not all
204. anged by moving August 2010 You can move an ECU from one network to another You can also change the ECU number for this ECU gt No information about this ECU will be lost You are merely changing its location gt The ECU number identifies the ECU to Infinity software The number you enter in the ECU Number box must match the number set in the ECU Each ECU in a network must have a unique number Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Assign Address To change the ECU number on a dispenser network y N A 9 O N Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station Select the Hardware Station you want to move This must be a dispenser network ECU Click Change Number Type the current ECU number and click OK Type 0 if you don t know Type the new ECU Number This must be an ECU number unused on the selected network The numbers of any ECUs you ve already set up appear in the Existing ECUs field Click Continue Wait while the software communicates with the ECU If you see Click OK and then Apply power to the ECU to be addressed then Click OK and disconnect power to the ECU and then reconnect the power This will occur if you typed 0 zero for the current ECU Number Click Yes when prompted to do a Clear and Restore Memory to make sure the setup information is sent to the ECU You may answer No
205. any sales or setup data in the ECU gt Are all options in the software and at the dispenser s set correctly gt What is the exact nature of the problem Does the PC lock up or crash Are your reports inaccurate Are your dispensers not pouring Are scheduled events not running Try to narrow down the diagnosis by testing and excluding specific possibilities one ata time Determine if possible whether the problem lies in the software or in the computer hardware or in the station components Determine the scope of the problem gt Is the problem continuous or intermittent Is it predictable or repeatable If so how gt Are all prices and portions affected or only some of them gt If it involves the software what exactly does the screen say Describe it and write it down gt What was the last thing you did before the problem appeared gt Have you previously done the same operation successfully with the same setup Recently gt Does the problem happen with cocktail pours gt Does the problem happen with comp pours gt Does the problem happen with manual pours gt Does the problem happen with alternate sizes gt What have you done to try to fix or work around the problem Did it work gt How severe is it Does it prevent you from operating gt Did this occur while you were operating live or in a Schedule gt If it involved a schedule running what do the schedule log and the related ERR file say gt I
206. ar Sales report The default is Don t Clear Hourly Sales Type of Data Specifies the Type of Data for the ECU to store Choose from these combinations Sold Drinks Sales Sold Drinks Comp Drinks Comp Drinks Comp Sales Full Drinks Sales The default is Sold Drinks Sales If you change the type of data stored for an ECU that is already operating you must clear and restore memory for the ECU I Box The All Bottle dispenser unit mounted under the bar with an attached circular receiver called an activator ring The activator ring sits in a holder when not in use and slips over the top of All Bottle coded pourers for pouring Idle Time The approximate number of seconds 0 to 999 the computer modem waits after a communication has occurred before hanging up Set to 0 for the modem to disconnect when the software program is exited or another remote network is called The default is 60 seconds Import Export Category This field lets you specify the category name of the prices and portions in the import or export file When importing if you select the name of an existing category any prices and portions currently in the database with that name are replaced with those in the import file If you want to create a new category of prices and portions when you import or export simply type a new name Creating a new category when you import lets you keep any existing categories of prices and portions already in your database Import Cocktail Columns
207. are set 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for all equipment with alignment values you want to set 5 Click Close to exit the Set Default Alignment Values screen gt If you set default alignment values and they do not work for your coded pourers you ll still have to perform the alignment process gt Berg recommends always aligning the activator rings gt When you set up a new ECU with an All Bottle dispenser in the software default alignment values are automatically set for that activator ring August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 158 Calibrate Dispensers To calibrate dispensers 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Calibrate Calibration If you want to put more than one ECU into calibration mode at a time see Enter Calibration Mode gt To calibrate you select one 2 Select the Equipment Name dispenser at a time to put in You ll see all the dispensers you ve set up that require calibration calibration mode 3 Click OK gt You can only put one dispenser The Select a Brand to Calibrate screen displays for the selected dispenser at a time in calibration mode 4 If applicable select a Button number Laser pourer Code number All using this method Bottle gt If you want to put multiple ECUs Select a brand of representative viscosity or thickness to perform into calibration mode at one Dispenser Calibration or List Calibration time see E
208. as soon 5 Type a new Password and or select a different Security Level as you enter them 6 Click Save to save your changes gt If you want to change a 7 Click OK to confirm registered user s name you must first use Unregister Users to remove the old name and then use Register New User to register the new name gt Other configuration options include Country Options Data Storage and Display Options Features and Clear Sales August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 53 Unregister Users To unregister a user 1 Access Configuration Options Unregister Users 2 Click Security 3 Click Unregister Users gt You can remove any 4 Click the user s you want to delete unregistered user from the list 5 Click Unregister to delete the selected user s from the list and prevent their access to Infinity software 6 Click Yes to confirm the deletion A separate confirmation displays for each user gt Other configuration options include Country Options Data Storage and Display Options Features and Clear Sales August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Enable Disable Passwords To enable disable passwords 1 Access Configuration Options 2 Click Security 3 Click Passwords Enabled to enable password protection Uncheck it to gt Enabling passwords means disable password protection every user of your Infinity Unchecking this optio
209. aser 6 8 Repeat steps 4 6 to assign brands to this dispenser 9 Click OK to save the brand assignments for both dispensers 10 Select No communication at this time and click Continue This lets you send the assignments later when you re ready to send all setup information to the equipment at the same time 11 Click OK to the message about saved changes 12 Click Cancel to exit the Assign Brands screen Wu O August 2010 Assign Brands gt For convenience on this screen use the following options gt Dispenser Captions lets you change the labels on the dispenser tabs You can change them anytime Device Address shows the dispenser number Device Name shows the full dispenser name the default name or one you ve set up Dispenser Type shows the type of dispenser in parentheses after the Device Address or Device Name gt Sort Options let you sort the brand list for your convenience Sort by Descriptor sorts the list by any descriptor s you ve set up Category lets you select which categories of price portions display in the list gt Click Modify to see and modify the prices and portions for the highlighted brand Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 21 Quick Start Task 8 Cocktail Recipes To set up cocktail recipes Hz Cocktail Prices pec Portions S Cocktail Recipes gt You can type an Ingredient Portion Price for each ingredient Name or
210. assigns the ECU number When finished the New ECU Setup screen displays 6 See New ECU Setup for help setting up the ECU August 2010 It s a good idea to enter your system Device Settings before setting up a new ECU so the dispensers you set up will have the system settings gt Setting the ECU number is the first part of setting up an ECU See also New ECU Setup gt An Infinity network ECU number must be set in the ECU itself Dispenser network ECUs are addressed using the software you don t have to open them up gt The ECU numbers on a network must be unique If your system uses multiple networks you can assign unique ECU numbers system wide eg Network 1 ECU 1 2 3 and Network 2 ECU 4 5 6 Or you can use the same ECU numbers on different networks e g Network 1 ECU 1 2 3 and Network 2 ECU 1 2 3 gt You just want to be sure you can easily distinguish your ECUs in the software Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER New ECU Setup To find new ECU setup 1 2 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station Click New To set up a Infinity network ECU Infinity Tap 1 All Bottle etc 1 2 NOW See New ECU Number for help setting up the ECU number Type a Hardware Station name for this ECU The default hardware station name is the network name ECU number Choose a hardware station name
211. at until satisfied with the level of accuracy Then pour measure and enter a portion amount in Flow Meter Mode and repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy Tap Head Only Timer Mode Calibrate a tap in Timer Mode as you would any other dispenser pour measure and enter a portion amount and repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy Flow Meter Only Monitor Mode There is no Tap Head and no portion control Therefore the tap has no expected calibration portion amounts Pour a fairly large portion 16 fl oz measure and enter the amount This actual amount is compared with the amount recorded by the ECU Repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy Flow Meter Only calibration pours are recorded as sales Dispenser Network All dispenser network devices listed below record calibration pours separately from other pours Tap 2 Calibration with Tap 2 can calibrate both the timer and the flow meter in the same step Flow Monitor The same as Flow Meter Only TAP Calibration when calibrating a tap August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 166 Show Advanced Calibration Choices To show advanced calibration choices 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Show Advanced Choices The menus disappear When you access them again the Calibration menu SS shows additional items and continues to do so until you hide them again gt The additional menu it
212. at the computer depend on the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified week The computer looks for all archive records with dates that match the days in the specified week To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s Weeks Ago specifies which week s data to use for a Weekly report 0 is the current business week from the first day of the week to yesterday s end of business day 1 is the business week before the current week 2 is the week before that etc Monthly Reports on a calendar month of archive records stored at the computer The month reported on can be the current month or any month up to a year ago The archive records available depend on the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified month The computer looks for all archive records with dates that match the days in the specified month To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s Months Ago specifies which month s data to use for a Monthly report 0 is the current month from the first day of the month to today 1 is the month before the current month 2 is the month before that etc Date Range For a specific report set the From and To dates to specify a desired date range In Report Options this selection reports on archive records from a specified number of
213. atabase or you install Infinity as an update a master group is automatically created for you Once you have a master group any new ECUs that you set up are automatically added to the master group You can name or rename your master group with any name you choose Modifier Order The string of modifiers sent in a drink code to the sales terminal must be arranged in a particular order Some sales terminals require the PLU first or a size modifier first and price level modifier second and so on Learn from the sales terminal representative the order required by the sales terminal so you can enter it correctly in Interface software The Driver Settings screen includes a Show Example button that can help you double check the modifier order After you ve added the modifiers you want to the Current Modifier Order list click the Show Example button You ll see an example string of sales information using the modifiers in the order you ve entered them Make sure that order matches the order required by the sales terminal Modifiers Modifiers are numerical codes that distinguish one drink from another if separate PLUs are not used for this purpose Modifiers may pass drink information such as price level portion size complimentary canceled or cocktail status when that information is not conveyed with a unique PLU Modifiers can be 1 or 2 numerical codes to allow for two key presses for each modifier e g pressing an Enter key after each function key
214. ation contributes to the report The numbers in the Pct Total Sales column should total 100 The report also shows the total number of Comp Drinks and Comp Sales as well as Canceled Drinksand Canceled Sales These complimentary and canceled totals are not included in the Sold Drinks and Sales totals in the first two columns Archive Number Archive Num formerly Z number is the number of times a Clear Sales report has been run at the hardware station If you run this report on current sales data the archive number is not shown Archive Time Archive Time is the last date a Clear Sales report was run at the hardware station If you run this report on current sales data the archive time is not shown Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data stored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the ECU To run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report the computer uses archive data stored at the computer The data reported on is determined by the numbe
215. ation or variance This input line cannot be used Remedy Check the brands and PLUs used in both Infinity and the source of the input file Correct the name or PLU in one of the places so it matches Re run the operation August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Interface ECR Error Messages ECR00 ECR09 ECR10 ECR19 ECR20 ECR29 ECR30 ECR39 ECR50 ECR59 ECR60 ECR69 ERROR ECR01 Only one 1544 can share an interface to 1 Sales Station 2 exceeds this limit Problem The POS is named by 1 This driver has the restriction that only one 1544 can be interfaced to each POS terminal at a time You indicate which ECUs are to share a POS terminal by listing them under the same sales station Remedy Change the sales station definition for 2 so that only one 1544 is listed ERROR ECR02 Only one other ECU is allowed to share an interface to 1 with a 1544 Sales Station 2 exceeds this limit Problem The POS is named by 1 This driver has the restriction that a 1544 can share the same POS terminal with at most one other ECU You indicate which ECUs are to share a POS terminal by listing them under the same sales station Remedy Change the sales station definition for 2 so that only one 1544 and one other ECU are listed ERROR ECRO03 Only five ECUs can share an interface to 1 Sales Station 2 exceeds this limit Problem The POS is named by 1 This driver has the restriction that only up to five ECUs can be in
216. ation or group The end of the report shows the Sold Drinks and Sales totals for all price levels in addition to the Comp Drinks Comp Sales and Cancel Drinks totals Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data stored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the ECU To run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report the computer uses archive data stored at the computer The data reported on is determined by the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified time gt The sales summary report provides a summary of sales for each brand in the selected station or group gt For help with running the report see Run an Advanced Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Sales Totals X1 Report To understand the report Sales Totals This report shows the total number of Sold Drinks and total Sales for the selected station or group as well as the sales percentage that each hardware st
217. aults feature if you ve saved a brand s prices and portions with Save As Default and you now want to copy or load those prices and portions to this brand Local Network Up to 32 ECUs linked together by a single data transmission line that communicate with a computer through a hard wired connection at the computer s COM port An Infinity system can transmit data up to 4 000 ft through a communication cable Lost Retail Value The implied sales value of the difference between the Sold pour volume and the collected volume August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help s0 Glossary M O Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S LU VW X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary M N O Click a letter above to jump Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Manual Pouring Manual pouring means you start and stop a TAP 1 pour instead of letting the dispenser control the portion size You can pour manually using the tap controller buttons at any time but you must first enable the feature for the TAP 1 ECU Manual pours are monitored and are shown in reports You can also pour manually by re attaching the brand handle See the Pouring section of the Infinity Installation Service User Manual Margin The different between sales and volume cost Master Group A master group includes all currently defined ECUs including any that are not assigned to a sales station When you install Infinity with a new d
218. ave the same actions gt You can copy actions from one day to another or you can copy to all days of the week by 3 You will be asked if you want to copy the actions Answer Yes selecting lt All gt gt You can only copy from days that have at least one action gt When you copy actions from one day to another and the destination day already has one or more actions you must Method B You can use this method if there are already actions on the destination day or you want to add to the actions already present or you want to copy to all days of the week 1 From Modify a Schedule or New Schedule select the tab for the day of the week to copy 2 Click Copy decide what to do with the 3 Select the day of the week that should get have the same actions OR existing actions select lt All gt to copy to all days of the week gt They can be overwritten or they 4 If the destination day s already have actions you must choose what to can be retained When do overwriting the destination days Select Overwrite if the current actions should deleted All destination days become an exact copy of the will be an exact copy of the copy day copy day named in the title bar Select Retain if the current actions should be retained and the copy day s gt lf tain th ti th actions should be added to each destination day yoy re a y ga G e actions in the copy day are 2 ICK OR added to the actions in the destination days gt If yo
219. base yourself answer No Question S206 Do you want to install Interface Problem If you are installing a new DEMO database you are given the opportunity to include Interface This question will not appear if there is already a database in the folder you select Remedy Answer Yes to install Interface Question S207 Do you want to copy the on line manuals to your hard disk If you answer No the manuals can still be accessed from the CD Problem The manuals exist in PDF format on the installation CD You can copy them onto your hard disk so that they are always available Remedy Answer Yes to copy the manuals If you answer No the manuals can still be accessed from the CD Question S208 Each serial number can only be run on one PC and each PC can only run one serial number of Berg Infinity software Are you sure that serial number s should be installed on this PC Problem Make sure that this is the correct serial number for this PC Installing more than one serial number onto a PC will cause you problems later If this serial number is intended to be run ona different PC then you should not install it here Although the installation will work only one serial number can be run on each PC Remedy Answer Yes to continue the installation Answer No if this is the wrong serial number Question S209 If you install into this folder you will be responsible for setting user and administrative permissions for the folder Are you sure you want to in
220. be corrupted or missing Setup media could be incorrect Remedy Reboot and retry Try database repair functions from old version Utilities if Diagnostics indicate it If the old database is in bad enough shape you may need to install a new system Diagnosis Run diagnostics on old database Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR S36 ERROR S37 ERROR S38 ERROR S39 ERROR S41 ERROR S42 ERROR S43 ERROR S46 ERROR S47 ERROR S57 ERROR S58 ERROR S59 ERROR S60 August 2010 377 Can t locate record xxx Problem The install attempted to locate the named record type This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Reboot and retry Diagnosis Run diagnostics on old database Make complete backup and send to Berg Can t create record xxx Problem The install attempted to create the required named record type This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy Check that you are not out of disk space and free some up Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Reboot and retry Diagnosis Run diagnostics on old database Make complete backup and send to Berg Can t read record xxx Problem The install attempted to read the named record type This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Reboot and retry Diagnosis Run diagnostics on old database Make complete back
221. ber of calibration portions you enter depends on the ECU type All Bottle and Laser Enter the exact small portion poured in the Small Portion field and the exact large portion in the Large Portion field 1544 Infinity Enter the exact amount poured in the 1544 Portion field TAP 1 Enter the exact amount poured in the Tap 1 Portion field Wait for any foam to settle See also TAP Calibration Calibration Portions Calibration will be the most accurate if your calibration pours are the same as typical pours of the selected brand To change the Expected calibration portion amount to match a typical pour click Calibration Portions This is a shortcut to the Calibration Portions screen where you can enter the calibration portion s for the brand Entries can be either permanent for the ECU type or temporary for this brand only during this session Since the TAP 1 calibration portion is pre set there is no Calibration Portions shortcut for TAP 1 ECUs What happens next When you click OK on the Brand Calibration screen the software calculates the level of accuracy for the pours using the numbers you ve entered If the actual pours are not close enough to the expected portion size Infinity will prompt you to pour again Each time you pour measure and enter a new portion amount Infinity uses the amount to calculate new timing values You ll see the newly calculated values at the bottom of the Brand Calibration screen Eac
222. ble Driver 198 equipment in a station or group 171 passwords 54 Endofkeg 93 Enter calibration mode 168 Enterprise Edition Infinity Features 59 Enterprise edition select preference 61 EPROM get versionnumber 278 ErrorLog 276 Error Messages 345 Exit a schedule from the command line 274 calibration mode 169 Exit free pour 152 Export about exporting brand prices and portions 128 about exporting for cocktails 129 custom exports 251 delete export output file 250 export brand prices and portions 131 how to export cocktail prices and portions 132 modify custom export 253 options 65 report data 250 7 Fax activation 43 Features 59 File menu Change Business Name 38 Change Database Folder 39 File versions show 285 Flow meter calibration 165 Flow meter only 93 Folder for database 39 Free pour August 2010 exit 152 start 151 Function Security Levels 56 G Get version number of EPROM 278 Glossary A B 292 C 295 D 300 E F 303 G L 307 MO 310 P Q 313 R 316 S 320 T Z 325 Group change price level 172 delete 96 enable disable 171 modify 96 rename 96 setup 96 view equipment name mapping 70 H Hardware configuration vew 69 Hourly Sales X4 Report 234 How to access configuration options 49 create a On Demand schedule 271 create a Time schedule 266 create and assign a PLU recipe 218 enable disable passwords 54 enter initial stock 181 enter PLUS 143 exit a schedule from the command lin
223. blem For example if you ask for only two price levels only price levels A and B will be used Any portion and prices that have been entered in price level C will be erased Going into price level C for brands in this product type will result in no pours being allowed If you later change the number of price levels to 3 you will see price level C prices and portions set to zero and you will have to enter them Remedy Answer No if you have changed your mind Question M366 Changing to a smaller dispenser will cause all brands to be reset to Test Pour and all cocktails to be removed Do you want to continue Problem Changing to a dispenser with fewer number of buttons creates a problem for the Infinity program It is unable to guess how you might want to have the brands and cocktails assigned on this new gun since August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help there may be some assigned to the higher numbered buttons which will no longer exist Therefore all assignments will be removed and replaced with test pours as if you had just created this ECU Remedy Answer Yes if you understand this limitation and want to continue Question M367 Changing product type may result in loss of sizes or price levels if the product type dimensions are not identical Are you sure you want to change the product type Problem You can switch a brand s product type from the Modify Brand form Each product type is allowed to have different number
224. brand at that dispenser if a pour for the same brand is already in progress at any other Laser dispenser If this lockout feature has been disabled at the dispenser in question simultaneous pouring of a single brand is possible which might account for the inaccurate portions To determine whether the lockout feature is enabled or disabled check the position of jumper JP4 on the Laser controller board See Set Laser Controller Board Jumpers in the Hardware Installation section gt Any other pouring inaccuracies are probably due to lost or otherwise disrupted calibration values A recalibration of the brand should restore accurate portion sizes See the Calibration section Erratic portion size gt Is the All Bottle pourer gummed up or sticky If so turn the bottle to an upside down diagonal and hold the pourer under warm running tap water for fifteen seconds If that isn t enough remove the pourer and run hot water through it for two minutes See Clean the All Bottle Coded Pourers in the Maintenance section for instructions for cleaning the pourers after every bottle This is especially important with thick liqueurs If you are cleaning a pourer regularly but the problem persists or recurs replace the pourer and send the suspect pourer to your dealer Brand does not pour at all or just at one size gt Switch the assigned brand to Test Pour This brand has a fixed set of portions you can test the dispenser with Reme
225. brands will be sorted by their descriptor the descriptor will be shown in square brackets or will be present in a table column All other brand lists will also be sorted in this manner until the box is unchecked on one of those forms You can change the Descriptor for any brand from Brand List Setup See Descriptor Specific Gravity The term specific gravity refers to the ratio of the density of a solid or liquid to the density of water at 4 degrees Celsius Specific gravity is a dimensionless quantity that is it is not expressed in units Water has a specific gravity equal to 1 Materials with a specific gravity less than 1 are less dense than water and will float on water substances with a specific gravity more than 1 are more dense than water and will sink Specific Gravity is only needed if the calibration units are grams Station There are two types of Stations Hardware Stations and Sales Stations The term station will be used when referring to both types of stations A Hardware Station is the smallest component of the Infinity system used for performing software tasks such as changing price levels or running reports A hardware station never includes more than one ECU A Hardware Station name is automatically created when you set up a new ECU You can change the default Hardware Station name when you set up a new ECU or modify an ECU A Sales Station is a bartender area or sales terminal area and will normally include more than one EC
226. bration settings all brand price portion and dispenser assignment data system report options and schedules you have created if any You should store configuration settings so you have a backup copy if you need to reload configuration settings Connect Wait The number of seconds 1 30 to wait for the remote modem to answer The default is 30 seconds Container You can specify the different containers your brands come in Container information is useful for Inventory and also in the Usage report A small set of container definitions is included in Infinity Fifth Half Barrel Large Bottle Liter Magnum Standard Bottle Any bottle sizes you previously defined in releases 3 xx will be converted to a container Please check these after upgrading See Container Setup Container Cost This is the cost to you of each container of the brand It s used to calculate the potential pouring cost for the brand shown on a Usage report and the cost per unit shown on a Cost Per Unit report If you use the Inventory feature it appears in the Brand Information report and the Container Stock report Container Volume When a Column Selection report runs as a Sales report Container Volume is Container Drink Volume Drink volume expressed as number of containers When a Column Selection report runs as a Usage report Container Volume is Container Pour Volume Pour volume expressed as number of containers Cost per Unit The cost to you of each v
227. butes into the ECUs Warning ECR115 You must set up Sales Stations to indicate where each driver is used Problem When you are using more than one Interface driver in a system you must explicitly indicate where each driver is being used Remedy Create at least one Sales Station for each driver Assign a driver to the Sales Station Then assign every hardware station that uses that driver to the Sales Station You may also create multiple Sales Station which use the same driver Warning ECR116 Currently loaded driver does not match any activated driver Problem You may activate or more POS drivers Only the activated drivers can be loaded into Berg equipment A loaded driver has been discovered that is not on the activated driver list Remedy Reload the driver or change the activated driver Warning ECR117 There is more than one P3 Hub from a single Dispenser Network in this Sales Station Modify Sales Stations so that each P3 Hub isin a separate Sales Station Problem Each P3 Hub must be in a separate Sales Station This is the method by which Infinity determines which devices send to which P3 Hub POS This is not true if you have selected POS ID Remedy Change the Sales Station assignments so each P3 Hub is in its own Sales Station with the dispensers which use it to ring up Warning ECR118 All P3 Hubs in this sales station must be from the same Dispenser Network ECU Problem H you turn on POS ID all P3 Hubs in Sales Stations must be fr
228. c values will not be processed correctly To check settings use Start Settings Control Panel Click on Regional Settings and check both Number and Currency tabs Problem If the decimal separator for Number does not match the decimal separator for Currency or the thousand separator for Number does not match the thousand separator for Currency or the decimal separator is the same as the thousand separator for either of these Windows cannot correctly interpret numbers Under these conditions prices portions and other numeric values may not be interpreted correctly Remedy Change the separators so that they do not conflict and rerun the program Diagnosis Start Settings Controls panel Click on Regional settings Click on Number tab and then on Currency checking the fields named above Warning INF103 Berg recommends that you switch to at least a Premium processor Problem Infinity will not run well on anything less than a Pentium In fact the better the speed and memory capability of your PC the better performance that you will experience Remedy Upgrade your PC Warning INF104 Berg recommends that you add memory Problem Infinity will not run well without a sufficient amount of memory Check releases notes for current recommendations In fact the better the soeed and memory capability of your PC the better performance that you will experience Remedy Upgrade your PC Warning INF105 Setting the Infinity System Time will change the
229. can load the brand list with the factory defaults You can always change the prices and portions for specific brands after the brand list is installed August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Brand Wizard Product Types What is this step This step of the Wizard shows you the six product types in the Berg brand list You need to select which product types you want to load to your computer You may not want or need all product types Brand Wizard gt Click Back at any step of the Wizard to return to a previous For each product type you select a series of screens will appear to give screen and make changes you a chance to make changes to the defaults for that product type To proceed with the Brand Wizard 1 Select the product type s Even if you don t want to make any changes to product type defaults select i the product types you want included in your list If you deselect all product factory default pr Ices and types you ll exit the Wizard portions according to its product type The Wizard lets you replace these defaults with your own gt Click Cancel at any time to exit the Wizard gt Each brand in the list has 2 Click Next to proceed with the next step August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Brand Wizard Sizes and Price Levels What is this step This task lets you modify the number of sizes and price levels for a particu
230. can wait to send the price and portion changes later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time 11 Click Continue to proceed Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes Wu O N To save a single brand s prices and portions as product type defaults 1 Perform the steps above to modify the brand s prices and portions 2 Click Save As Default to save the prices and portions you just entered on all tabs as the default prices and portions for this product type Now if you select another brand of this product type and click Load Defaults your new defaults display To load your current price and portion defaults to a brand 1 Click Load Defaults to display the default prices and portions for this product type on all price level tabs 2 Click OK to save the displayed defaults To copy a single brand s prices and portions to other brands See Copy Prices and Portions August 2010 Prices and Portions gt When you set up prices and portions they are always associated with a brand or cocktail they re never defined independently gt Each brand s initial prices and portions are called its Standard category of prices and portions e g Budweiser Standard refers to the standard price portion category of the Budweiser brand gt Default prices and portions for the product type are assigned to all price levels of a brand whe
231. ces in the Calibration menu 2 Click Yes when you ve read the message confirming all dispensers being taken out of calibration mode 3 Wait while the communication occurs If you exit Infinity all equipment is automatically taken out of calibration mode gt Use this advanced calibration choice only if you have used the Enter Calibration Mode menu item gt You don t have to use this feature if you complete the calibration process outlined in Calibrate Dispensers gt You can t select specific ECUs to exit calibration mode gt If you forget to take ECUs out of calibration mode a message reminds you they ll be taken out of calibration mode when you exit Infinity August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 170 Initialize Calibration Values To initialize calibration values 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Initialize Calibration Values If necessary click Show Advanced Choices in the Calibration menu 2 Select the Equipment Name You l see all the dispensers you ve set up 3 Click OK 4 For a Laser or All Bottle dispenser type the correct Delay and Calibration values for each button number or each coded pourer For a 1544 Infinity ECU type the correct Calibration value the Delay values are Initialize Calibration Values gt Calibration values are the numbers Infinity uses to regulate portion sizes at the dispensers gt Yo
232. cess is complete If you forget to take the equipment out of calibration mode you won t be able to pour a regular portion size at Laser or All Bottle dispensers and all tap buttons pour 16 fl oz 475 ml If you exit Infinity the equipment is automatically taken out of calibration mode N N August 2010 Calibration Mode gt This advanced calibration feature lets you put any number of ECUs in calibration mode at the same time thus saving trips back and forth to the computer gt For example if the computer is in an office distant from the bar you can go to the office put all the ECUs in calibration mode and then go to the bar gt At the bar you can pour and record calibration portion sizes at all dispensers Then go back to the office to enter the actual pour amounts gt Jot down any dispensers that need an additional pour click No when prompted at the computer to recalibrate at this time Go back to the dispensers that need more pours and record the pour amounts gt Return to the office to enter the amounts etc Instead of making all the back and forth trips for each ECU you re making them for the entire system Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 169 Exit Calibration Mode To exit calibration mode 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Enter i g Calibration Mode Exit Calibration Mode If necessary click Show Advanced Choi
233. computer communicates with the ECU you can run this utility to Compare ECU to Database 4 View the results in the View screen using the scroll bars compare the setup information Possible Reasons for Differences between ECU and Database in the ECU with the setup e You forgot to Clear and Restore Memory after making changes to setup information in your database information at the computer e You re connected to the wrong ECU verify correct ECU number at ECU gt You ll be able to see which and the computer information if any is different e You didn t store alignment values after aligning All Bottle activator rings EPROM version dispenser e The setup information at the ECU s been corrupted assignments ECU type etc e The database information s been corrupted gt This operation doesn t help fix 5 Click Close to exit the Compare ECU screen the problem you ll probably have to do a Clear and Restore Memory to re send the setup information from the database to the ECU It may be useful however in diagnosing the problem August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 290 Display ECU To display an ECU s setup 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Display ECU 2 Select the Equipment Name 3 Click Run to begin the test gt Use this diagnostic tool to see Wait while the computer communicates with the ECU the information stored in an 4 View the results in the View screen
234. ction installs a POS driver HSI This selection installs a POS driver Ibertech Aloha This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This selection installs a POS driver Use a standard null modem cable PN 8007020 Infogenesis 4683 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007985 Infogenesis 4695 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Supports PLU numbers 1 255 only Infogenesis Relevations 3 3 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 iQ POS This selection installs a POS driver August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Micros 2000 400395 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Micros 2700 This selection installs a POS driver for use with the International protocol If you wish to work with the North American protocol install the Micros 4700 driver If you have installed a Postech or other third party interface board and are using an ECR interface you should select Postech or Berg Parallel instead ECR supports Direct PLU Micros 3700 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Micros 4700 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007986 Micros 8700 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Micros 9700 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Microsale This selection installs a POS d
235. culate Container Cost the Order Cost has no effect on the Container Cost you entered in Brand List Setup Order Method Par Stock means you specify the number of containers to keep in your total stock for each brand When the number of containers falls below that amount Inventory will include the brand on an order and calculate how many containers must be ordered to reach your par stock amount for the brand Order Point is the minimum number of containers of the brand you want on hand before you re order When the number of containers falls below the order point Inventory flags the brand to let you know it s time to re order These can be partial container amounts up to two decimal points You select either Order Point or Par Stock as your order August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 312 method using Inventory Options Order Point This is the minimum number of containers of the brand you want on hand before you re order When the number of containers falls below the order point Inventory flags the brand to let you know it s time to re order This can be a partial container amount up to two decimal points You select either Order Point or Par Stock as your order method using Inventory Options Order Quantity The number of containers of the brand ordered on the most recent order You enter this amount when you generate an order after performing an Inventory Check Once you enter a quantity for a brand it
236. d August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Brand Wizard Confirmation What is this step This step of the Wizard confirms the changes you ve made if any and gives you a chance to make any changes before the brand list is loaded Brand Wizard gt Click Back at any step of the To proceed with the Brand Wizard Wizard to return to a previous 1 To make changes to any previous steps in the Wizard click Back to screen and make changes return to the appropriate screen gt Click Cancel at any time to exit 2 Click Next when you re ready to save any changes you ve made and to the Wizard load the brand list for the product types you ve selected Wait while the Wizard loads the brand list August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help at Network Setup To find network setup 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Network To set up a new network 1 Click New 2 Type the network s unique New Name The name can be up to 31 characters If you are setting up multiple networks use names to easily distinguish between them 3 Click Continue Click Cancel to stop setting up a network 4 Select the correct Port number for the network Select the ECU Types Choose either Infinity ECUs Tap 1 All Bottle 7 Laser All Bottle ID 1544 or Dispenser Network ECUs Tap 2 If you have a system with both ECU types you must set u
237. d ECU Time if you want to determine the current time at the ECU Wait while the communication occurs and the current time and date from the ECU display in the ECU Time and ECU Date fields Click Use PC Time to set the ECU time to match the PC The Current Time Date and New Time Date fields update with the PC time Click Use PC Time again if you need to update the displayed times they do not automatically advance as time passes OR Type a New Time and New Date for the ECU Enter the new time using the same format your system is currently using Click the drop down arrow to see a calendar from which to choose your date Click OK to send the new time to the ECU Wait while the communication occurs A message informs you when the procedure is complete and the time that was sent 6 Click Close to exit the screen August 2010 ECU Date Time gt You can set the time and or date at an individual ECU using this feature gt To quickly set the time for all ECUs in your system see Set Infinity System Time gt It s a good idea to keep the same time set on the computer and all the ECUs in an Infinity system gt The ECU time can also be set during each Archive and Clear Sales operation Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 173 Infinity Help 174 Set Infinity System Time To set your Infinity system time 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Operations Click Set Infinity System Time
238. d determine in what order the price portion information is listed Is the brand name listed first If so Brand is column 1 Is Price Level next That s column 2 and so on H a column is not included in your file for example you re not using PLUs type a zero next to the column name on the Import Prices and Portions screen to indicate the information doesn t appear in your file If the columns Price Level or Size are not included in your import file the prices and portions listed for a brand in the file will be copied to all price levels or sizes of the brand If the column Product Type is not included in the import file any brands in the file not already in your database receive the Liquor product type H the columns Portion Portion Price or PLU are not included in the import file any existing portions prices and PLUs in your database will be retained This includes entries of zero in your database Optional columns are Product Type Price Level Size Portion Portion Price PLU Descriptor Product Code Calibration Defaults and Specific Gravity Import File Name This field lists the name of the file containing the price portion data you re importing Click Open to select the folder and filename Import Export Product Type Leave this field set to lt All gt unless you re importing or exporting a file that contains only brands of one specific product type If you select a single product type this eliminates the need for a P
239. d does not exist in the database which is referenced in some way Possible database corruption Remedy See DB02 Configuration record not found Problem Database configuration record is not found This usually means that this is an empty database that was not properly installed Remedy Reboot and retry Restore backup of the database Or reinstall Infinity Hardware Station Z records not found Problem A Z last archive record that should exist could not be located in the database Possible database corruption Remedy Reboot and retry Clear sales this will wipe out all Z records Repair database Find and restore a recent database Diagnosis Run Check Database and Repair Database Hardware Station archive records not found Problem An archive sales record that should exist could not be located in the database Possible database corruption Remedy See DBO6 ECU record not found Problem An archive station record which should exist does not exist in the database Possible database corruption Remedy See DB06 Can t archive the brand records Problem Can t write an archive record for a brand This should only happen during a Z Possible database corruption Remedy Check that you are not out of disk space and free some up Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Locate a backup and restore it you may lose some database Use clear sales to remove all archive records this often clears the problem Repair database Diagnosis Run Ch
240. data to archive records at the computer This was called a Z report in earlier versions of Infinity gt The sales you clear from the ECU are shown on a Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report which is identical to a Current Sales Totals X1 Report except running the report zeros out the ECU gt The archive records sent to the computer are stored for the length of time you selected under Data Storage and Display Options during Infinity installation gt Archive and Clear Sales may also affect Retail Price per Unit and the ECU Time Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 209 Run Advanced Reports To run an advanced report 1 Pull down the Reports menu Click Advanced Reports 2 Select the Report you want to run The list includes any custom reports you ve created 3 Select the Equipment Name for which you want to run the report If you ve set up any groups or sales stations they appear in the list Otherwise select a hardware station ECU or individual dispenser 4 Set options on the General and Selections tabs for this report only See Report Data Brand Name Sort Product Type Pour Type End of Day End of Week If you don t change any options the default report options set up for your system are used If you want to load your system defaults on all tabs click Load Defaults Switching to a different report also loads the defaults Some options are not available
241. days ago to today The From date August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help sie determines the number of days ago The To date can t be changed to any date but today in Report Options If today is 1 21 and you want data from ten days ago through today the From date should be 1 11 Use the End of Day option to specify the hour you want your business day to end The archive records available depend on the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified days The computer looks for all archive records with dates that match the specified days To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s See also Archive Reports Time Range For dispenser network devices Tap 2 the time of each pour is recorded Therefore reports can be run against any time range For Infinity network devices All Bottle Tap 1 Laser etc a specific time range selection is only appropriate if you ve cleared sales regularly like every hour Since the archive records available are completely depend on how often you clear sales Archive List If you click Show Archives Archive List displays as a report option and all the Archive Dates for the selected equipment are shown Use the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking to select one or more or all of the archive dates you want to include in the report You must enable the Enterprise edition of In
242. default prices and portions for the product type gt All PLUs for new brands and cocktails are initially set to zero gt You can quickly delete all brands and cocktails not assigned to any dispensers gt If you try to delete a brand assigned to any dispensers a message reminds you the assignments are deleted as well as any sales data for the brand The brand or cocktail s prices and portions are deleted at the same time gt You can t delete brands which are required ingredients in cocktail recipes Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help no New Prices and Portions for New Brand To select new prices and portions for a new brand 1 Select the Category of prices and portions you want for the new brand i 8 New Prices and Portions 2 Click OK to proceed S I ri Click Cancel to stop adding the new brand Neither the brand or its prices gt When you create a new brand and portions will be created S at least one set of prices and portions will be created for you gt If you have more than one Category you must select which category to use for the prices and protions gt The default is to create prices and portions for all existing categories August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ni Modify Multiple Brands To modify multiple brands 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Brand List Setup 2 Clic
243. der Quantity If you click Back Order after making any changes to the Order Quantity or Order Cost you ll see a message about your edits being removed and then the Back Order screen displays If you really want to create a back order follow the steps to create a back order below which include entering any quantities delivered If you don t want to create a back order click Cancel on the Back Order screen and re enter the delivery 4 Scroll to review the Order Cost and type in a new number if the invoice reflects a different cost 5 Click View or Print at any time to see the order in report form in the View screen or to print a paper copy The View screen or printed order reflects any of your changes to the order quantities or cost 6 Click OK when you re ready to accept the delivery with the amounts shown As soon as you click OK the received containers are added to the total stock and the order is removed from the system OR Click Cancel to if you decide not to process the Delivery at this time To create a back order 1 Select the Order number and click Continue 2 Click Back Order 3 Click Show Rooms to expand the order to show amounts for each stock room if you have more than one stock room Uncheck this box to see the totals for the entire order 4 Type the Delivered Quantity and Delivered Cost for each brand You re entering what you actually received If you received the full order quantity for a brand
244. der is C does not affect where your data is stored Program Files Berg Infinity 3 Click OK August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help a About Activation amp Renewal Serial Numbers Soft Li oftware Licensin gt Each serial number can only be installed on one PC g gt Each PC can only install one serial number gt Berg s software licensing gives gt For dealers see Change from a Duplicate Serial Number and you the use of Infinity software Preconfigure Software for Multiple End Users free upgrades and support for ES ees one year all for one low cost Initial Activation S es gt You will be assured of always gt During your initial activation you have a ten day grace period from the e DS See having the latest software time you install Infinity to the time you must complete the activation process During the grace period every time you run an Infinity program you will be prompted to activate the software gt You can activate by phone fax or email Renewal gt Click Help About at any time to see the expiration date of your license You need to renew your license at the end of each anniversary date Renewal uses the same steps as Activation You can renew by phone fax or email gt Sixty days before your license will expire you or your dealer will be contacted by Berg so you may renew your license The software will also give you periodic reminder
245. dnight enter midnight for your end of day No last report is present function cannot be completed Problem The last report cannot be found One reason is that you have not run any reports in this location The last report is stored as a file so the other reasons have to do with not being able to read the file It may have been deleted or you may be experiencing disk problems Remedy Rebooting may clear temporary problems If disk problems are indicated try to fix them Diagnosis Use a disk diagnostics tools such as ScanDisk The name of the of last report file is lastrpt rdf Hardware Station column can not be selected with any Time column Problem The hardware station column can not be selected at the same time as Archive Time Pour Date Pour Day of Week or Pour Shift unless additional information is also selected Remedy Remove hardware station column or time column from the selected columns Alternatively add PLU or Dispenser Name column to the selected columns These columns provide enough additional information to allow the hardware station and archive Time columns to be retrieved at the same time Only one percentage column can be selected Problem Percentage columns include Percent Total Drinks Pours Percent Total Sales Percent Total Volume Only one of these can be selected at a time Remedy Choose one of the columns and remove the others You must select a consecutive range of items in Problem All items in the li
246. duct type 6 Click Continue to copy the setup information to all selected brands The Modify Brand screen shows a message atthe bottom confirming the copy August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Im Initialize Brand List To load the initial brand list 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Pare Load Initial Brand List Initialize Brand List 2 Select the product type s you want to load 3 Select a default container for each product type 4 Click OK to load the list Wait while the loading of the list of brands from the selected product type s occurs Perform this task to load Berg s list of brands to your computer gt You don t need to perform this task if you already loaded the brand list with the Brand Wizard gt Any brands already in your brand list are skipped by this process they re not reloaded and no settings are changed gt Each brand in the Berg list has default prices and portions which have the Standard category name If you want to change the default prices and portions for one or more product types before you load Berg s list see Price and Portion Defaults gt You can also import your brand list from a file See Import Prices and Portions August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 115 Select Sizes and Price Levels To select sizes and price levels 1 Pull down the
247. e You wont be specifying any times for the actions The actions will be performed in the order you list them on the schedule so be sure you have the correct sequence You can select an action with the mouse and drag it to a different position or use the Down and Up buttons 10 Click OK to save the schedule with the displayed name Now you can run this schedule whenever you want this sequence of actions performed N o o August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Test a Schedule To test a schedule 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules 2 Select the Schedule File 3 Click Test If this is an On Demand schedule the test commences If it s a Time schedule you must select the day of the week or Repeat If you are running live schedule you may check the box to run the test as a simulation without any ECU communication if you wish Click OK August 2010 272 Test a Schedule When you select a day to test all of the actions on that day will be run in sequence regardless of the scheduled time of day Repeat actions will not be run when a day of the week is selected gt The test will be listed in the schedule log bracketed by Running Test logs gt When a day schedule is tested it will be identified as On Demand in the schedule log Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Run a Schedule To run a Time schedule Prior t
248. e months forever or none no time at all when you re entering data storage and display options The default is three months Scheduled Report Names The schedule report name is the file name used for all reports run and saved as part of a schedule Report handling must be set to Save or Print and Save Usually this name is a template of the actual report name where pairs of curly brackets codes are translated into a file name when the report is run The default report name is rpt mmm dd rdf You can specify a different name and or file format to be used for all scheduled reports Click Name File to enter a different name or select a different format Choose any curly bracket strings from the list below and type them in the order you want as a template of the final report name Any text you type outside curly brackets in the report name appears just as you type it If you type a report name without any curly bracket strings each successive report you ve scheduled will overwrite the previous report Since they all use the same report name If brackets don t match up or don t contain one of the defined strings they appear in the report name just as you typed them Any part of the file name that uses date information will use the business date see End of Day rpt the 1 3 character report abbreviation e g Z grp Equipment Name that the report covers Note some characters may be removed from the Equipment Name if they August
249. e pours made during Pour Test are combined with existing sales August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 150 Exit Pour Test To exit pour test 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Exit Pour Test 2 Select the Equipment Name and click Run e ee a list of all sia ican you ve SE gt Eii Pour Tesi esas he 3 Wait while Ee with the ee occurs portions in all dispensers to A message displays when the operation is complete match the assigned brands and 5 Repeat steps 2 3 for each dispenser you want to Exit Pour Test cocktails gt You should Exit Pour Test after you have completed your Pour Test gt If one or more dispensers have been left in Pour Test you will be reminded when you exit the Infinity program gt Doing a Clear and Restore Memory or other operation which sends assigned portions to an ECU will automatically Exit Pour Test mode August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Start Free Pour To start free pour 4 o Pull down the Pouring menu and click Start Free Pour Select the Equipment Name and click Run You can select from the list of all dispensers you ve set up Wait while communication with the equipment occurs Repeat steps 2 3 for each dispenser you want to use Free Pour At the dispenser hold down the button for as long as you want to pour This mode works well for priming the lines or cleaning them The
250. e 274 export brand prices and portions 131 export cocktail prices and portions 132 run a Column Selection report 212 run a Reconciliation report 220 run a schedule from the command line 274 run a Variance repot 214 set up brands for Inventory 180 set up the Reconciliation report 215 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help as Identify device 104 Import Prices and Portions brands 119 cocktails 122 how to for brands 126 how to for cocktails 127 Infinity ECU view hardware configuration 69 Infinity Program additional software on the CD 35 install 13 menus 30 uninstall 37 upgrade 34 Ingredient calculate portion prices 142 Initial stock 181 Initialize brand list 114 calibration values 170 Interface 187 activate driver 199 change pour communication 200 checklist for setup 188 Driver Settings 201 Enable Disable Driver 198 Exit Pour Test 150 Generate PLUs 204 load driver 194 Pour Test 149 remove driver 196 show driver status 197 test a driver 195 uninstall 205 Inventory Back Order 184 Brand Information Report 225 checklist for setup 177 Container Stock Reports 228 Cost Analysis Report 229 Deliveries 184 enter initial stock 181 Inventory Check 182 options 63 Orders 183 overview 175 set up brands 180 Stock Room Setup 179 Supplier Setup 178 August 2010 Ales Laser Guide 235 Learn mode for TAP 1 portion sizes 148 Licensing by email 44 by fax 43 by phone 42
251. e Description of Device Settings for help with each setting 4 Click OK to save 5 Select a communication option and click Continue These options are provided so you can wait to send the settings later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes To set up individual device settings 1 Select the Device Name You can also select an hardware Station for to affect an entire ECU 2 Click or enter the settings you want to use for this device You ll only see features applicable to the selected device See Description of Device Settings for help with each setting 3 Click OK to save 4 Select a communication option and click Continue These options are provided so you can wait to send the settings later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes See Broadcast Pending when you re ready to send all changes later August 2010 Device Settings Device settings will normally be made on a system basis That is if all of your dispensers are set up the same you only need to set these once on the device settings form gt Dispenser settings are no longer changed on ECU setup gt Any settings you enable will only be used if the appropriate equipment with the necessary EPROM versio
252. e ECUs your default settings are automatically loaded to the ECUs if no other options or modifiers are present at the ECUs Schedule A schedule lets you automate daily and weekly Infinity operations Various tasks you repeat at the same time every day or week are perfect candidates for a schedule For example enabling Infinity stations in the morning changing price levels at happy hour running daily reports and disabling stations at closing are tasks that can be included in a schedule and performed without you at the computer Or maybe you perform a series of tasks in a row when you run weekly reports With the new On Demand feature of Infinity you can define these tasks in a schedule without a specific time and just run the schedule whenever you want to perform that series of tasks Schedule Actions Schedule actions are the tasks you want Infinity to automatically perform You can define a specific time to perform the actions by creating a Time schedule Or you can simply define a series of actions without a scheduled time by creating a On Demand schedule When you create either type of schedule you must define the specific actions the order of the actions and the station s or group s to receive the action See Define Action Schedule Days of the Week You can select any or all of the days The schedule performs the action at the defined time only on the day s you select You can select different days on each time tab Schedule File Name
253. e auto run Diagnosis Check your registry with a registry diagnostics tool Warning S101 No compatible database was found in s Problem This database cannot be upgraded Your only choice is to overwrite and create a new system from scratch Check your Infinity folder Warning S102 Serial Number Error Unable to find serial number in s Problem All Infinity programs are stamped with the serial number on the setup media The file named could not be stamped You will not be able to run that program There may be problems with the setup media or your hard disk See S05 Warning S103 Unable to determine processor information A minimum of a 486 or equivalent is required Anything less and the software will not run effectively Problem Setup attempted to determine the type of processor that you are running on but was unable to You should check that your PC has enough processing power to run Infinity A 486 is the minimum but Berg recommends a Pentium for better performance Warning S104 An error has occurred trying to identify the database in s You must select a different destination Problem The type of database cannot be determined The database may be corrupt or you may be pointing to the wrong folder Remedy You may be able to use Utilities on the old database to correct database errors Warning S105 No database was found in s Problem An operation was attempted for which there must be an existing database Make sure that you are pointin
254. e brand name listed first If so Brand is column 1 Is Price Level next That s column 2 and so on H a column is not included in your file for example you re not using PLUs type a zero next to the column name on the Import Prices and Portions screen to indicate the information doesn t appear in your file If the columns Price Level or Size are not included in your import file the prices and portions listed for a brand in the file will be copied to all price levels or sizes of the brand H the column Product Type is not included in the import file any brands in the file not already in your database receive the Liquor product type lf the columns Portion Portion Price or PLU are not included in the import file any existing portions prices and PLUs in your database will be retained This includes entries of zero in your database Optional columns are Product Type Price Level Size Portion Portion Price PLU Descriptor Product Code Calibration Defaults and Specific Gravity What if lwant a price portion or PLU listed as zero in my database If you want an entry in your database to be zero for example you don t use size 3 make sure the price portion PLU entry is zero in the import file itself For example Absolut Liquor A 1 0 50 1 00 500 Absolut Liquor A 2 1 00 3 50 501 Absolut Liquor A 3 0 0 0 When limport are my existing prices and portions replaced Imported prices and portions will replace any exi
255. e changes gt Click Cancel at any time to exit the Wizard Any brands you already have in your brand list are not affected by the new list gt You ll still need to assign brand names to your dispensers after you ve completed the Wizard Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Brand Wizard Container Setup What is this step This step of the Wizard gives you a chance to specify the container your brands come in The Wizard simply provides an easy way to assign the same container to all brands or to all brands of a product type You can always assign a default container to a product type or assign a container to Brand Wizard gt Click Back at any step of the Wizard to return to a previous any of your brands later on Sr SEL iangan The container used for each brand appears on the Usage report You must oe Cancel Eli any Ume wo exi specify a container for each brand you track using the Inventory feature the Wizard Specify the size and unit of measure for your containers in Container Setup If you re upgrading from a previous Infinity release any bottle sizes you defined in previous releases will be converted to containers Please check all container sizes using Container Setup To proceed with the Brand Wizard 1 Select a container for each product type and click Next You ll only be able to select a container for the product type s you selected in the previous step of the Wizar
256. e changes gt Click Cancel at any time to exit the Wizard gt You can choose the number of portion sizes and price levels you want but you can t specify their designations gt For example if you choose 2 price levels they will be A and B If you choose 2 portion sizes they will be 1 and 2 The higher sizes and price levels are always the ones eliminated Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Brand Wizard Default Prices and Portions What is this step Each product type in the Berg brand list has factory default prices and portions This step of the Wizard lets you replace these factory defaults with your own Setting your own defaults is useful when you have several Brand Wizard gt Click Back at any step of the brands within a product type with the same prices and portions Wizard to retum to a previous screen and make changes If you don t want to set your own default prices and portions you can load BEE the brand list with the factory defaults by clicking Next c a cover any ume te SS the Wizard In this step a new screen appears for each price level of the indicated product type You can always change the To proceed with the Brand Wizard prices and portions for specific brands after the brand list is 1 To enter your own default prices and portions type the correct Portion installed and Price for each Size listed and click Next gt Th f diff You don t need
257. e file Specify if you want to compare by volume or compare by sales Enter Reconciliation options in Infinity 6 Run the report or include the report in a schedule See Run a Reconciliation Report or Define a Schedule Action If you run the Reconciliation report on a schedule you may also need to schedule the export of the sales terminal data file on the sales terminal side The export of the sales terminal file should precede the scheduled Reconciliation report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 26 PLU Recipes Why do Ineed a PLU recipe You only need to create PLU recipes if you want to run a Reconciliation report AND your sales terminal uses PLUs you can t define in Infinity without a PLU recipe PLU Recipe Examples Shared PLUs Infinity may use the same PLU for multiple sales terminal PLUs For example if you ve assigned names such as Well Call Premium etc to your All Bottle codes in Infinity each Well drink of the same size and price level has the same PLU in Infinity However your sales terminal may use separate PLUs for each brand of All Bottle Well liquor You need to create a different PLU recipe for each Well brand that defines the PLU used for that brand by the sales terminal and specifies Well as the ingredient TAP 1 cocktails All Bottle cocktails and cross cocktails These are multiple ingredient drinks that cannot be defined or poured as such by I
258. e name of the report OR select the report name and click Open You can also delete a report file as you would delete any other file in Windows Infinity reports use the rdf extension They are the only file type you can delete in the Report program August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 212 Run a Column Selection Report To run a column selection report 4 A oN Pull down the Reports menu Click Advanced Reports Select the Column Selection report Select Sales or Usage as the type of report See Sales vs Usage Select the Equipment Name for which you want to run the report If you ve set up any groups or sales stations they appear in the list Otherwise select a hardware station Set General options for report data for this report only If you don t change any General options the default report options are used Select columns on the Columns tab Select the column sort order on the Selections tab Click Print to run the report and send it to the printer without viewing Make sure your Windows default printer is ready The report is generated and sent to the default printer OR Click View to run the report and view it on the screen Wait while the report is run The time it takes to run the report is determined by the amount of sales activity and the number of ECUs in the station or group Never turn off or restart your computer while the report is running o
259. e replaced You need to open the ECU cover to check the SD card Diagnosis See CM30 The following devices are not responding Problem ECU communication is OK but one or more Dispenser network devices were not responding Remedy Repair connections or try again if device was busy Diagnosis Check network connections and power to device Also See CM18 or CM30 1 is currently busy Retry this operation when devices are ready Problem One or more devices cannot perform the operation you requested They are performing some other task or are in a special mode at the moment Remedy Retry when the other operation is completed Buffer Overflow Retry this operation Problem The reply is larger than can be handled Remedy Retry the operation Call Berg if the problem persists Unable to interpret response Problem The response from the ECU can not be interpreted by Infinity The response is being ignored Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 Required response keyword is missing Problem The response to this request requires a keyword The response is being ignored Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 Response value is illegal Problem The value returned for a returned keyword is not appropriate or is out of range The value was ignored Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 350 Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 ERROR CM73 Response value does not match request Problem The value returned for a returned ke
260. e reportis run The time it takes to run the report is determined by the amount of sales activity and the number of ECUs in the station or group Never turn off or restart your computer while the report is running or sales data may be lost Type the Collected Sales for each brand assigned to dispensers in the station or group A separate screen appears for each brand Collected sales means the actual money taken in for the brand 8 Click OK If you selected Print the report is sent to the default printer or if you selected View the report displays on the screen See View Print Save Reports 9 Click Close to exit the Reports screen O N August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 215 Set Up the Reconciliation report To set up the Reconciliation report 1 Enable the Enterprise edition when you install Infinity or using Pistarences Reconciliation Report 2 Enter a price per unit for each of your brands This is the retail price the gt For help understanding this customers pay See Modify Multiple Brands report see Reconciliation 3 Enter PLUs for all your prices and portions See Assign PLUs Report 4 If necessary create PLU recipes and list them on the ECU s PLU Recipe tab by using Assign Cocktails See PLU Recipes and Create and assign a PLU recipe 5 Learn the parameters of the sales terminal data file generated by the sales terminal Establish where Infinity will find th
261. e this file is a disk or system error Remedy Reboot and retry Fix any disk errors Diagnosis Check disk ERROR ECR14 Illegal record type in driver Problem The driver file could not be interpreted Verbose can be set on to get additional information about this error but the most likely cause is that the driver file is corrupted or the disk has an error Remedy Fix any disk errors or reinstall Interface Diagnosis Check disk ERROR ECR15 Undefined segment Problem See ECR14 ERROR ECR16 Segment is not relocatable Problem See ECR14 ERROR ECR17 Fatal loader error bad TIR record Problem See ECR14 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR ECR18 ERROR ECR20 ERROR ECR21 ERROR ECR22 ERROR ECR23 ERROR ECR24 ERROR ECR25 ERROR ECR26 ERROR ECR27 ERROR ECR28 ERROR ECR29 ERROR ECR30 ERROR ECR31 ERROR ECR32 ERROR ECR33 ERROR ECR34 ERROR ECR36 ERROR ECR37 ERROR ECRS50 ERROR ECR51 time ERROR ECR82 ERROR ECR53 ERROR ECR54 August 2010 Illegal TIR command Problem See ECR14 Command stack overflow Problem See ECR14 Command stack underflow Problem See ECR14 Underflow symbol Problem See ECR14 Loader ERROR signed byte out of range Problem See ECR14 Loader ERROR signed word out of range Problem See ECR14 Loader ERROR unsigned word out of range Problem See ECR14 Loader ERROR unsigned byte out o
262. e your EPROM is you want this feature Warning CM101 Add a head limit is not supported by ECU od Value ignored Problem Add a head limit is not supported by every EPROM version This ECU does not and so the add a head limit setting will be ignored Remedy You may upgrade your EPROM is you want this feature Warning CM104 Warning Neither ECU nor Database have Coil calibration data Problem When you Clear and Restore Memory Infinity checks the alignment values stored in the database with those stored in the ECU See CM200 Neither have activator ring alignment values Remedy Press OK for the restore to continue Afterwards align the activator rings and store the alignment values to the database Warning CM105 Warning The following devices are not responding Problem The operation is partially successful but one or more devices affected by the operation are currently not responding and therefore will likely not be aware of the operation Remedy Make sure the devices noted are present and have power After fixing this you may want to repeat the operation during which the error was found Warning CM106 xxx is currently busy Retry this operation when devices are ready Problem The current operation cannot be performed while other activity is occurring Remedy Wait until all other activity has been completed and try again August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 398 General GE Warnings Warning GE100 Functio
263. ead Samsung 1000 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007970 If you have installed a Postech or other third party interface board and are using an ECR interface you should select Postech or Berg Parallel instead Samsung 4900 4915 4940 These selections install an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Samsung 5100 5140 These selections install an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Samsung 6500 6540 These selections install a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007996 If you have installed a Postech or other third party interface board and are using an ECR interface you should select Postech or Berg Parallel instead SeQL This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 The POS software supports pre checking Sharp ER A330 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp ER A460 ER A470 These selections install an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp A550S This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp ER A570 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp ER A610 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp ER 3220 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Pos
264. eaenneneanaes 95 Group Setup ce eessesseeeeeeeeeeeenneneaneeeeeeeeenanneananeeseeeenannsqeanaeseseesensenaananaeseeeesanseqeanaeaeseesensenauanoeseeeenanssseanaeaeseess 96 Delete Empty Sales GtattonslGroups een 97 Broadcast Pending 11 ceesteeeeeeeeeee cece cence ee seceeeeesecnaeeeeeseaeeeeescaeeeeesesuaeeesesaaeeeseseaeeesessseaesesssnaeeesessaneeenees 98 RGD E GE 99 Communications Loopback TeSt 22 0 c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeesaeeesesccnaeseseseaeeeseseaeeesessguaesesesnaeeeseseaeeeseseseaeeesnseaeeeesssaneeeness 100 COMMUNICAtION TeSt eeraa r ete deck NEE NENNEN EEN EE Nee 101 COMMUNICATION Wizard A ceedaeedcees atl avevnscdievcaataceedasecces atsevtvezesaescatecs 102 Clear and Restore Mem oly ccsssseeeceenseeneeeesnneeeeeensnanaesnneanaesesnnnaesnenseaaaesnsnnaaesesnanaeeesnseanaeensaananees 103 Identify Device 2 1 ecseteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeesegeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseaeeesessceaesesesuaeeeseseaeeesesseuaesesssnaeeesessneeesessnnanees 104 ele EE 105 Sot Addie Soe S E T E E E E E T E E eat 106 Read Addresses and Verelons ee ENEE ENEE REENEN REENEN ENEE RENE ENNEN REN 107 Reset Dispenser Network ECU cseseeeseseeeseseeeneeneensenenssansnssansussansasensasseneassenensseeenseeeenseeeenseeeseseeeessnes 108 Brand Operations Brand List Setup s s e seeeeeeeeeeeeneeneneeeeeeeeeeesnnsneanaeceeeeeeneensaeaeaeseeeeaanesneanaeseeeeaensaneauanaeceeesasaeeqanaeaeseenenennas 109 New Prices and Portions f
265. eated for you BERG SCH that runs an Archive and Clear every hour gt Enable Disable and Change Price Level actions that take place entirely on Dispenser Networks will be controlled directly by those networks That is the actions are sent to the Dispenser Network and an Infinity schedule does not need to be running in order for these actions to occur Dispenser Network actions are denoted in a schedule by bold typeface Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 263 About BERG SCH What is BERG SCH BERG SCH is the name of the main Time schedule file On an initial install of Infinity software a BERG SCH schedule is automatically set up to run an Archive and Clear every hour How do I change what s in BERG SCH Follow the instructions to modify a schedule See Time Schedule Setup for specific instructions Alternatively if you plan to use multiple Time schedules you may want to create each time schedule with a different name and then just copy it to BERG SCH when you want to run it Can I change the name of BERG SCH No To run the schedule as a Time schedule it must have the name BERG SCH So is BERG SCH the only schedule I can use No BERG SCH is the only Time schedule you can run If you want to create another Time schedule to be run during a special season or event set up the new schedule with any name you choose Then copy that schedule to BERG SCH to run it You can always create and
266. eck Database and Repair Database Can t archive the cocktail records Problem Can t write an archive record for a cocktail Possible database corruption Remedy See DB09 Can t store the cocktail records Problem Can t write a Z record for a cocktail Possible database corruption Remedy See DB09 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR DB12 ERROR DB13 ERROR DB14 ERROR DB15 ERROR DB16 ERROR DB17 ERROR DB18 ERROR DB19 ERROR DB20 ERROR DB21 ERROR DB23 ERROR DB24 ERROR DB25 ERROR DB26 ERROR DB27 August 2010 Can t store the hardware station records Problem Can t write a Z record for a station Possible database corruption Remedy See DB09 Can t store the brand records Problem Can t write a Z record for a brand Possible database corruption Remedy See DB09 Can t modify the hardware station records Problem Can t write the ECU record in the database to accommodate some change explicit or implied Possible database corruption Remedy Reboot and retry Run Repair Database Either a backup or a store disk may be used to recover last good copy Diagnosis Check disk for errors Check Database and Repair Database Full backup of the database can be sent to Berg for analysis Equipment name not found Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 Dispenser not found Problem Possible database corruption Remedy See DB14 Coil alignment record not found
267. ect during this step Click OK 7 Confirm the final location Click Yes August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 255 Store Configuration Settings To store configuration settings 1 Pull down the Backups menu Click Store Configuration 2 Click Change Serial Number if you want to type in a different serial Store Config Settings number for the configuration settings Type the Database Serial Number and the Store Serial Number Use this option as a dealer if you are setting up for a customer site and you have a different serial number than the customer The Database Serial Number is the serial number of the Infinity program you re using The Store Serial Number should match the target customer s Infinity database Click Use descriptive backup folder to have Infinity automatically create descriptive folder names to identify the backup The default descriptive backup folder name includes the type of backup your business name serial number and the date After you click Continue you ll have a chance to change the default descriptive backup folder name if necessary or just click OK to accept the default descriptive name The backup folder will be saved in the parent folder you select on the Browse for folder screen Click Do not show this message again to remove the descriptive backup folder prompt with your selection permanently saved Click Continue Insert the backup disk into the selec
268. eczcnctece 45 Remove a Llegir eEE ARA 46 Preconfigure Software for Multiple End Useren 47 Change from a Duplicate Serial Number ee 48 Configuration Options Access Configuration Options Kee Ee EE EE EE EE EE eg 49 Security Options SEHR dea SEN OEB ENER NEE dee ES Nee SNE EENS See SEN de e E Se E ENES 50 Register User Information nenn EN REENEN ENEE ENEE ENEE EN EEN a a a a EN ENEE E ENEE ENKER ENEE EN ENEE E EN 51 Modify User Information 0ceeseeee cece enneee ee encneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeescaeeesessseaeeeseseaeeeseseaeeesesssnaeeesssnaeeesessaneeeneas 52 Unregister Se A T tet detec erehseredietaedeecue sec agudeniemewsGsueccucessedecwaseedsuaueienecuGeussadccasecetwaseessuceueetensss 53 Enable Disable EE UE Te ET 54 Security WC TT 55 Function Security Levels sccceseeeeseeseseeenseneensenenasnenssansessansnssensasensasnensaseeeenseeeenseeeenseeeenseeeessneeeennees 56 Data Storage and Display Options SR E ENEE NEE ge Ee ENEE ENER 57 Country Options SEE EERE CO CE ELEC CE PEEL COUPEE TEC EE EERE CC EEC ECP CEERE CEE EE EE ECC CELL ELT TELE C CRC EL CCP ENEE LCCC Peer eer 58 Eeakureg s rannin a ccna cece aadecnctecendaeceadenagesaceasescndaecacddescecedancnadeeesacuancadaecetesqeceeecudsecdenecescereneces 59 Clear EE 60 Options PrefE rene Sa seggt AS dee begCh ee See eg Ce i deeg SSC EeE ANNE EE ENN cede deen dg deeg eege Eed e dE Nee ENEE ENEE 61 Inventory Options s ssee cesses ee eeeene eens seceee ee eeeeeeeeeesnaee
269. ed Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 187 Interface Interface is a communication link that allows rapid transfer of drink information from a Berg ECU to a sales terminal POS or ECR Each pour at the ECU is translated into a numerical code and sent to the sales terminal using a driver compatible with the sales terminal The sales terminal then rings up all drinks poured exactly as if someone were pressing the sales terminal keys What do I have to do to set up Interface 1 Make sure Infinity software is installed and working Interface is automatically installed when you install Infinity software 2 Activate the correct driver 3 Meet with the sales terminal representative to determine the configuration of sales information required by the terminal and the necessary hardware connections 4 Enter PLUs for brands and cocktails that match the PLUs used by the sales terminal 5 Enter default driver settings These are any options or modifiers required by your sales terminal 6 If you are using a Micros 8700 driver or related POS and are sharing POS terminals between more than one ECU you must list the ECUs which share a POS terminal in a single Sales Station Repeat for every POS terminal 7 Load the driver file to the ECU s The driver is sent with any default settings you ve entered 8 Test each station and verify drinks are ringing properly at the sales terminal with each pour
270. ed if communication with this network is not working Remedy If you want to continue addressing click No If you want to save the changes but skip the rest of addressing click Yes If you want to cancel the save click Cancel Question M360 You have entered a sales station name which does not exist Do you wish to create a new sales station name Problem You can create a new sales tation name for the ECU setup form by typing in an valid name This can be done on new ECU or modify ECU setup Since you can also choose from the existing sales station name list this prompt wants to make sure that you didn t mistype expecting to match a current sales station name Remedy Answer Yes if you intend to create a new sales station name Note the existing sales station name will still exist except when it is the default name on new ECU setup and must be deleted if you no longer want it listed in the system Question M361 This will set all calibration values to match the brand you have selected Continue Problem Dispenser calibration will take the calibration values that result from the operation and copy these values to every brand that is located on this dispenser If you have already calibrated other brands their calibration values will be overwritten Remedy Answer Yes if it is OK that all brands will use the same calibration values Note that you can always recalibrate some brands later using brand or list calibration Question M362 Calibratio
271. ed to remove this serial number Follow the steps in the Remove License process Answer No if you need to continue to use Infinity In many cases you can re activate your license You will normally have an opportunity to activate before you see this question Repair database questions Question U250 Question U251 Question U252 Question U253 Question U254 Question U255 Question U256 Question U257 Question U258 Question U259 Question U260 Question U261 Question U262 Question U263 Question U264 Question U265 Question U266 Question U267 Question U268 Question U269 Question U270 Question U271 Question U272 Question U273 Question U275 Question U276 Question U277 August 2010 The following are questions produced by the Repair Database utility when you ask for prompting They always follow an error detected by Repair Database In most cases the appropriate response is Yes to make the recommended fix Note that at any time you can press Cancel which will stop asking for fix but will not make any further fixes If you want all recommended changes to be made check the Fix all without prompting option before running Repair Database Do you want to attach it Do you want to move it Do you want to delete it Do you want to detach from sales station Do you want to reattach to sales station Do you want to remove second definition Do you wish to set it to FALSE Do you want to disconnect the loop
272. edule screen to review and or change any setup details of a schedule August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 266 Time Schedule Setup To create a Time schedule y Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules Time Schedule 2 Click New 3 Select a folder for the new schedule in the Look in field and type a File You can only run the Time name for the new schedule SS schedule with the name BERG The default folder is the Program Data Berg Infinity folder You don t need SCH to type the sch extension in the file name the extension is added automatically gt If you re creating various Time 4 Click Open schedules you can copy to The New Schedule screen displays with the Options tab in front BERG SCH to run use 5 Click Select Ti if descriptive names to identify Click Select Time if necessary each e g regular sch 6 Click Auto Run to run the schedule automatically whenever Windows is mardigras sch oktoberfest sch started This option is the most useful if you have one schedule you keep running all the time You can only set up one Auto Run schedule On the Options tab select a Report Handling method for this schedule only if you don t want to use the default method displayed 8 To change the Scheduled Report Names used for scheduled reports in this schedule only click Name File type the name and click Save 9 To create cal
273. ee Align Activator Rings and Store Alignment Values before calibrating gt It s helpful to have a partner or carry a portable computer from dispenser to dispenser when performing the calibration procedure i Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click f A Calibrate gt For further help with calibration see Calibration Overview N Select the Equipment Name Uptown Grill is calibrating a brand on the Main Laser 16 dispenser we set up Click OK Click a brand on the dispenser Uptown Grill is calib rating Bailey s Standard Click Continue Click OK to confirm Go to the Laser 16 dispenser and pour a small portion of Bailey s into a measuring cup or graduated cylinder Record the amount of the pour Then pour a large portion and record the amount 8 At the computer type the exact amount of the Small Portion and the Large Portion click OK Aa W 4 OD Oo 9 If the values are not within the accuracy range click Yes to re calibrate Repeat steps 7 and 8 as needed When the values are within the accuracy range click OK Bailey s is now calibrated 10 Repeat steps 4 9 for any other brands at this dispenser that need calibration 11 Click Close to exit 12 Repeat steps 2 11 for any other dispensers with brands that need calibration August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Quick Start Task 14 Archive and Clear Sa
274. ee different price levels The PLU association is provided by the column order For example if there are 2 PLU columns 1 4 and four sales columns 2 3 5 6 sales columns 2 and 3 are associated with PLU column 1 and sales columns 5 and 6 are associated with PLU column 4 9 Type the Station Column number if you ve selected Use Station Column in Single File This identifies which column in the file gives the station name for the line of data Only a single column number is allowed By using the Station Column you can run separate reconciliation reports against each station Normally you will be matching up Sales Station names but you can also use Hardware Stations if they are not included in any Sales Station 10 Type the Date and Time column numbers if the file includes that information Both columns must be entered if you are using one of them The stamped date and time will be matched against the date range indicated for the Reconciliation report to determine which records should be compared Records in the sales terminal file that fall outside the report date range will not be included in the reconciliation report 11 Click OK to save all your entries It s okay if there are additional columns in the sales terminal data file Infinity just ignores them August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Schedule Options To enter schedule options 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Schedule Optio
275. ee pour Once enabled anyone can enter free pour mode A device stays in free pour mode until you take it out of free pour mode Free Pour is not recommended for normal operation since you will lose accountability However it can be useful for priming a line or cleaning a line Free Pour mode can be entered from Pouring Start Free Pour All dispensers in free pour mode are taken out of this mode when you choose Pouring Exit Free Pour or when you leave the Infinity program Free Pour transitions are shown in the Power and Interface Log Full Drinks The combination of Sold drinks and comp drinks Does not include cancels Full Drinks Pours Complementary plus Sold drinks or pours Does not include cancels Function Security You can customize which Infinity functions are available at each security level See How to customize security level August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 306 functions August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 307 Glossary G L Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U VW XY Z Infinity Menus Glossary G H I J K L Click a letter above to jump Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Group A group is simply a name you assign to a combination of stations and or other groups for ease in setup reporting and scheduling activities Groups are logical combinations of equipment that help you manage the system e
276. ee tip Port Number gt If you don t know the port number the Communication Wizard in the Communications menu can help This requires a loopback tester gt Security codes are an optional layer of security especially in remote networks Select Dispenser Network ECUs for TAP 2 P3 Hub 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Network 2 Click New 3 Type your network New Name e g Uptown Grill Infinity and click Continue 4 Select the computer Port number used for communication with the ECUs 5 Select the ECU Types Uptown Grill is setting up two networks an Infinity network and a Dispenser Network First we ll select Infinity ECUs for our Laser and All Bottle dispensers for our Infinity network Then we ll set up another new network and select Dispenser Network ECUs for our Tap 2 dispensers The baud rate is different for Infinity networks and Dispenser networks The baud rate is 9600 for the Infinity network and 57600 for the Dispenser network Click OK Repeat steps 2 6 for another network See Network Setup if you need help setting up a Remote Network 7 Click Close to exit the Network Setup screen O August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help m Quick Start Task 4 Device Settings To enter your system device settings Se System Device Settings Crmrpes mace mere wi atinct ALL cmpeceers anc TOUS
277. eeeeeesesssegnaeeeeeeesasessenaaaeeeeens 172 Set ECU Time esse os 2e issnin eases cee ses e cece cons eeede een ceecavetee ce iweede ainaani Se aka sted bec clad ainaani harani innana 173 Set Infinity System Time 2 csccesssecesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeecuseeesseeeusneeeeeeeseeecuseeuseeeeesneesssnsuseeeceseeesseesuseesseesenesensns 174 Inventory Inventory Overvleuw ee NEEN EEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEER NEEN 175 Checklist for Inventory S tup 1 sscesseeesseeensseeenssenenssenenssensnsseesnsaeeensnenenseeeensneeenseeeenseeeesseeeessneesesneeenses 177 Supplier Setulpssses ccscesseccesedsereccacecncensnceecccessaas sgenseceesccstecevenceeneteseseseddssacadeccacncaneccesccdesaeetaceenecesuttnaccesdets 178 Stock ROOM Setup seceeeeseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeennsseaneeceeeeaeneeneanaeeeseeeensanqeanaeseeeesaneeneanaeaeseeseasensqnaeaeseeeesenesneanaeaeeeess 179 Set up a Brand for INVentory ecesseeeeeeesseeeeenseaneeensenneeeeennneeseenseaaansnseenaeseennnaeseensnaeaesnseanaesnsannanens 180 Enter Initial OOC a T E ae NENNEN NEE ge EKNENEE ENEE NEEN EE Eege 181 INVENTORY CROCK EEEE 182 el IEN 183 De live rie S ora ecien e e ENEE deed Eed dee 184 Inventory Re POrtse eseeeeeetteee ee eeeeee ee eecnee ee eeecgeeeeeeeenaeeeeesaeeesescceaeeesesnaeeeseseaeeesesseeaeeesesnaeeesssegeeeseessnanens 186 Interface Interface 8 aise AAR A A A E E E E O 187 Checklist for Interface Setup EEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEER NEEN 18
278. eeeseaeeesesegeaesesssuaeeeeeseeeesesesnaesesssnaeeesesegneesesssnaees 63 Report Options cide Guided aude weet E EEN EE cue wet ENEE e EEN 64 Export Options SECC EEC EEN CEC OPP LEr REEL NEEN ege CCCP ETE EE Nee Deiere ENEE EENEG ENER ENEE 65 Reconciliation Options E Ee EE EE EE 66 Schedule Options 1 sssseceeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeceneeeeeeenaeeeeeseeeeeesecnaeeeseseaeeeeesegeeeseseseaesesesnaeeesessgeeeeesseneeeeneoaes 68 View Hardware Configuration SNE ege ONE ecw E E E E E E EEE E E EE 69 View Equipment Name Mapping SC E E TA T T T A TT 70 D mo Mod isiin aa aaa aa seaeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeesaaseeeageeeeeeeaeeeseaeesseasonses 71 Demo pr BE 72 Demo Setup SEELEN ee Eet EE EE suet deasttcnsescqenbdcneeuscansceewedsaageccaussaenedececeeueass 73 Brand Wizard Brand Wizard Introduction une eee eee ence eee EN ENEE E ENEE ENEE EN EEN EN ENEE ENEE EE EE EN sees EN ENEE ENKER ENEE EN EE E E Ee Nl 74 Brand Wizard Product TypeS s ssseceeeseeeeesneeeeeneensenenssensnssanenssansnssensasaensaseeeenseeesnseeeeeseeessseeeessneeeeenees 75 Brand Wizard Sizes and Price L Ve IS eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeageeeseseeeeeseaeeesaaeeesegeeeeeeeoeesseaeeeseasonses 76 Brand Wizard Default Prices and Porttons EE eens eens eeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaee 77 Brand Wizard Brand Namee sek RK ER ENKER ENEE EN ENEE E ENNER ENKER EN EEN EN ENEE E ENEE ENKER EN REENEN ENEE ENKER ENEE ENEE E E EN 78
279. eeesennaeeesesnaeeeeesaaeeesessgnaeeesssuaeeeseseeeesessseaeeesesneeeeenssneeeenees 253 Backups Backup Dipen cane cs cectanes att basacaescccpsantd cass css cmasceme canescens cee atnesas sass iaczestiensczesceumeastieet casthecenates 254 Store Configuration Settingse cceseeeceeeeeeseeeeesseeenenneenseeeessenanssansnssaeeassensaseesaseeeenseeeenseeeensneeenseeeeeses 255 Reload Configuration Settings ccsssseseesssesseessnneeenensaeaeenseenaesesnanaeeeenseaaaesnsennaesesnanaeenenseananenses 256 Backup Full Database cccccsssssseseeeeeeeeeeesensseaneeceeeeeeneeneananeeseeesnanssneanaeceseesenseneananaeseeeeasanenanaeaeseeeenennes 257 Restore Full Database ee EEE REENEN ENNEN ENEE ENEE EEN EEN EE ENEE ENEE ENEE ENNEN ENEE EEN ENEE EEN 258 Reload Previous Version Configuration a aaru aA nia a iOa anina a aaa iaaa aaa 259 Restore Previous Version Full Database 2ssececceeeeeeceeeeneeeeaaneeeceaaeeeeeaaneeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaseeeseaaneenenees 260 Clear Sales from the Database sssseccceeseececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeaseseceaaneseeegaeeeeeeaseseaeaeseeseeaageeeaeeneesanees 261 Schedules GET D EE 262 About BERG SCH iti Soni AE EE a A es 263 New Gchedulezgeieseesggass geed ee EES EE 264 Modify a Schedule ee ete eeteeeseeneneennaeeeaeeeneeeneeenaaeesaeeenesenaeesaeseaeseneeenaaesnaeesaeeeneaeneessaeenneens 265 Time Schedule Setup csscssccssscenseesssesnseenseeessoesssesnsesnssensseeseoesnsesnscessneess
280. een to indicate it doesn t appear For example if you don t use price levels type a zero for Price Level In this case the prices listed will be copied to all the price levels in your database H the column Product Type is not included in the import file type a zero and make sure an intervening line appears between cocktail definitions in the import file See How does the import file show where one cocktail recipe ends and another begins in Import Prices and Portions Cocktails H the columns Portion Portion Price Cocktail Price or PLU are not included in the import file any existing portions prices and PLUs in your database will be retained This includes entries of zero in your database Optional columns are Product Type Price Level Portion Portion Price or Cocktail Price Cocktail PLU Import Columns Columns refers to the order of the price portion information in each line of your import file For example in the following sample line from an import file Brand is listed first so it s column 1 Absolut Liquor A 1 0 50 1 00 500 You should enter a number on the Import Prices and Portions screen for each column name specifying the order it appears in your import file There is no pre set correct order the important thing is determining how your import file is organized Find out the column order used by the exporting program or just look at your import file by opening it in a spreadsheet or text editing program Look at each line an
281. eennneeseenseaaaeenseanaecasnanaeseensnaaeeenseanaeensaananens 157 Calibrate Dispense rse ecccceeeeeseecseeneeeeeeeeeneenenneneeseeeenannseanaeseseeeenaeneananaeseeesasaeeneanaeaeseeesaannsqeanaeseeees 158 Brand Calibration Enter Portion Amount EEN ENEE REENEN REENEN REN 160 Dispenser Calibration Enter Portion AMOUNt ss ss 1ssr1nnrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nenene 161 BC Ae E EE 162 List Calibration Enter Portion AMOUNt EEN ENEE REENEN REENEN 163 Calibration Portions 2 22 lt c eieet ees noenee eae eia e acre iaa eraa e ian tease teed setae sat deedeeetee estado settee 164 TAP Calibration TTT 165 Show Advanced Calibration Cholces neen 166 Calibration Units and ACCUIraCy ecceeseeseneesnseeeeeenseanenenseneesesnaneeseenseaaaeensnnaesesnanaeeeenseanauensennanens 167 Enter Calibration MOd lt 2 2 c2222 eines fetcce eds fecsce EE ce a oaa aap aa aaraa EO ect dctecedenpcdecedcaveescctaddieyetececetues 168 Exit Calibration Mode eene RRE REENEN RR ENEE E atanp arna aaaea REN RR ENER ENER RRE RE ENEE EEE EEN EE RER E REN RR ENER ENER EEN 169 Initialize Calibration Values ENEE REENEN REENEN REENEN REENEN EEN ENEE EN 170 Equipment Operations Enable Disable Equipment 1 ccsscecssesesseneceeeeeeeeeuseeeceeneeseeeuseeecuseeesseeeusneeaaseeuseeeceneeeseeesnseeessessssensoens 171 Change Price Level of Equipment c cce essesteseeeeeee ee eeenenneae ee ence eeeeneneaeee
282. efault descriptive backup folder name includes the type of backup your business name serial number and the date OR you can enter any other descriptive name Click Do not show this message again if you ve selected descriptive backup folders and you always want to use them without having to check the box Click Continue If prompted change the default descriptive backup folder name or just click OK to accept the default descriptive name Select the drive letter and folder where you want to store the backup copy and click OK The backup folder will be saved in the parent folder you select on this screen Click on the icon to collapse or expand the folders Berg recommends the destination folder be clear of all other files Click Yes to confirm the backup procedure Insert the backup disk if using into the selected drive Wait while the files are copied to the selected destination The files are compressed deflated to minimize the disk space required If you reload the files they will be expanded inflated If prompted insert any additional backup disks into the selected drive Remove the backup disk if using If you copied to disks remove and clearly label them with the date of the backup and the number of the disk August 2010 Backup Full Database gt When you back up the full database you copy all configuration and setup data and any accumulated sales records and all Inventory information
283. ek of archive records stored at the computer A business week is defined by the End of Week day The week reported on can be the current week 1 2 or 3 weeks ago The archive records available at the computer depend on the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified week The computer looks for all archive records with dates that match the days in the specified week To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s Weeks Ago specifies which week s data to use for a Weekly report 0 is the current business week from the first day of the week to yesterday s end of business day 1 is the business week before the current week 2 is the week before that etc Yes Go ahead and clear sales data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 320 Troubleshooting Tips The following tips help you pinpoint the cause of a problem This may help you solve the problem on your own or at least help you explain the problem to Berg service personnel Isolate the problem gt Have you checked all of your cabling and connections Some ECU problems can be solved by a simple reset of the ECU Just unplug the ECU s power cord wait for five seconds and then plug it back in and try again This is a good place to start for many electronics problems even if you cant isolate and define the problem This will not cause you to lose
284. elect Time to create a schedule with specific times A tab displays for each day of the week See Time Schedule Setup w y August 2010 New Schedule gt On the Options tab of a new schedule you select the type of schedule you want to create On Demand or Select Time gt An On Demand schedule is not set up to perform actions at specific times Instead it performs a series of actions in a row whenever you run the schedule The schedule automatically stops running after all actions are performed gt A Time schedule is set up to perform actions at specific times You select a specific day of the week and time of day to perform each action Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 265 Modify a Schedule To view or modify a schedule 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules 2 Select the schedule you want to modify If the schedule is not in the drop down menu click Open to find it 3 Click Modify The Modify Schedule screen displays for the selected schedule 4 Click the Options tab to make any modifications to Report Handling methods or Scheduled Report Names for this schedule only 5 Make modifications to any actions you ve defined for the schedule See Time Schedule Setup On Demand Schedule Setup Define Action Repeat Action Copy Action 6 Click OK to save your changes or click Close to exit without saving Modify Schedule gt Use the Modify Sch
285. els 93 Check Check the Database for Errors 280 Inventory Check 182 Clear clear and restore memory ofan ECU 103 Clear Database Log 284 sales from the database 60 261 Clear hourly sales data 57 Clear Sales Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report 231 Cocktail add new 109 assign to dispenser 146 calculate ingredient portion prices 142 copy assignments 147 delete 109 Exit Pour Test 150 ingredients prices and portions 141 remove from dispenser 146 rename 109 Cocktail mode 93 Cocktail pouring only 93 Cocktail reset 93 Column Selection Report description 226 how to run 212 Communication Wizard 102 Communications clear and restore memory ofan ECU 103 Communication Test 101 identify device 104 loopback test 100 reset dispenser network ECU 108 August 2010 wizard 102 Compare ECU to database 289 Complimentary cocktail enable 93 Complimentary enable 93 Complimentary reset 93 Configuration options how to access 49 Configuration Report 227 Configuration settings reload 256 reload previous version 259 store 255 Container Container Stock Report 228 delete 133 modify 133 rename 133 set default for product type 116 setup 133 Copy an ECU s settings to add another 87 brand assignments 147 brand setup to other brands 113 prices and portions to multiple brands 140 schedule actions 270 Cost Cost Analysis Report 229 Cost Per Unit Report 230 Country Options unit of measure 58 Create On Demand schedule 271 Time schedule
286. ems help you perform tasks you may not use your first time calibrating an Advanced Calibration Choices To hide advanced calibration choices 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Show Advanced Choices de E The menus disappear When you access them again the Calibration menu gt The advanced calibration hides the additional items choices include the following menu items Units and Accuracy Enter Calibration Mode Exit Calibration Mode and Initialize Calibration Values gt If you don t want the advanced calibration choices on your menu you can hide them anytime August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Calibration Units and Accuracy To modify calibration units and accuracy 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Units N Oy Di OO N and Accuracy If necessary click Show Advanced Choices in the Calibration menu Select the Units in which to measure calibration portion sizes You can change this unit of measure to any other unit without affecting the unit of measure setup for the entire system Select grams to calibrate by weight Type the Percent Accuracy Type the Small Portion size Type the Large Portion size Type the 1544 Portion size You can t modify the TAP 1 calibration portion size it remains set at 16 fl oz 475 ml To return all entries to the Berg defaults click Load Defaults
287. ence between the amount actually poured and the calibration portion size The percentage of accuracy must be between 0 no automatic checking of accuracy and 50 low level of accuracy The default level of accuracy is 10 For further discussion of level of accuracy see Calibration Berg recommends that you do not attempt high levels of accuracy less than 2 However if you want to control how long you do calibration you can set the calibration accuracy to zero percent Unless you pour the exact portions you can repeat the calibration process until you are satisfied Please note that setting accuracy to zero percent does NOT imply that all portions poured after calibration will be 100 accurate Calibration accuracy only affects how close to the targets you have to pour during calibration to automatically end calibration Percent Collected Sales The collected sales divided by the sales This is the percentage of the sales recorded by the ECU you actually collected at the sales terminal Percent Collected Volume The collected volume divided by the Sold pour volume The percentage of the Sold pour volume that was collected at the sales terminal Percent Drinks Pours This brand s drinks or pours compared to the total drinks pours Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Percent of Total Sales This station or this hour s or this brand s sales compared to the total sales in the report Percent Total Volume Th
288. end the communication test 7 Click Close to exit the Communication Test screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 102 Communication Wizard To use the communication wizard 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Communication K Wizard Communication Wizard 2 Click Next to proceed with the wizard GEET hiema wte te You ll have a chance to cancel at any step The wizard helps you troubleshoot communication problems between your computer and any Wizard You can perform ECUs in a hard wired network Since it takes you through the process step communication tests and by step the wizard is especially helpful if you re not sure you re running a loopback tests on your own loopback or communication test properly The Wizard can help you gt To use the Wizard you must determine the correct computer port and take you through a series of have a loopback tester your loopback tests to find the source of a communication problem network communication must be at 9600 baud and the ECUs must be free of security codes gt The Wizard can t help you test communication on a modem connected network August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 103 Clear and Restore Memory To clear and restore memory 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Communication Test 2 Select the Equipment Name You can only select one ECU ata time to clear and resto
289. endar day tabs click Change Days of Month Type a number for each calendar day you want to add and click OK This lets you create tabs to schedule actions to occur on certain days of the month e g 15th and 31st You can create up to 5 newtabs with calendar numbers on them Type 31 for the last day of the month this tab displays End so you knowit s the end of the month 10 Click one of the weekday or calendar day tabs 11 Define the actions you want to occur on that day Actions with identical times are performed in the order you list them on the tab so be sure you have the correct sequence You can select an action with the mouse and drag it to a different position or move it using the Down and Up buttons You may also want to repeat actions 12 If desired copy this day s actions to another day or all days You can t copy calendar day actions 13 Continue by defining new actions for each day or copying one day s actions to another Note that a schedule uses calendar days it does not consider any end of day you ve defined in report options Each schedule day ends at midnight 14 Click OK to save the schedule with the displayed name Now you can copy this schedule to BERG SCH and run it whenever you want this sequence of actions performed N August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Define Action To define a schedule action 1 Follow the steps to create a new schedule or modify a sc
290. ent sizes gt It also copies the calibration enabled Check the Alternate Size enabled for Tap O als if you see values for any All Bottle this message When you select appropriate equipment you ll see a list of z all matching dispensers to which the assignments will be copied If you ve dispensers selected a sales station or group you ll see any non identical dispensers gt You can copy from one are notin the list dispenser to multiple dispensers 5 Click OK to confirm the copy operation or click Cancel to cancel the by selecting a station or group copy operation gt You can t copy the calibration Wait while the copy is communicated to the ECU s values of Laser or TAP 1 6 Click Close to exit the Copy Assignments screen dispensers to other identical dispensers gt Because tubing runs air pressure beverage lines etc affect calibration values you must calibrate each Laser or TAP 1 dispenser August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 18 Portion Size Learn Mode To set up TAP 1 portion sizes using learn mode On as 6 Te Pull down the Pouring menu and click Portion Size Learn Mode Select the Equipment Name and click OK Click OK when you ve read the message about calibration and confirming learn mode The selected ECU is nowin learn mode The lights behind the cancel and repeat buttons at the taps go out Click OK when you ve read the message about pouring
291. ently stored must enter the sales collected at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared at the sales terminal for each sales at the selected ECU s brand in the report To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the The software then calculates the sales data stored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the difference between the sales ECU recorded at the ECU and the sales recorded at the sales terminal gt Any difference in the two amounts is shown and also figured as a percentage For help with running this report see How to Run a Variance Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 250 Export Report Data To export report data 1 2 Pull down the Reports menu and click Export Select the Equipment Name You ll see the list of all the dispensers stations and groups you ve set up Click By Sales or By Usage as the type of report By Sales means you ll see Drink information for each brand By Usage means you ll see Pour information for each brand Set options on the General tabs for this export only See Report Data End of Day End of Week Click Show Archives to see a list of archive dates available for the selected equipment f you don t change any options the default report options set up for your system are used If you want to load your system defaults on all tabs click Load Default
292. eport 64 schedule 68 Orders delete 183 modify 183 rename 183 setup 183 e H e Passwords enable disable 54 August 2010 Pause enable 93 Phone activation 42 PLU create and assign a PLU recipe 218 definition of PLU recipe 216 enter for brands cocktails 143 Exit Pour Test 150 generate consecutive 204 PLU Report 236 Pour Test 149 Portions change calibration 164 POS activate driver 199 Driver Settings 201 Enable Disable Driver 198 load driver to station or group 194 remove driver from station or group 196 show driver status 197 POS Test 35 Pour communication change 200 Pour Test Exit 150 Start 149 Power and Interface Log Report 237 Preconfigure software files 47 Preferences 61 Previous version reload configuration settings 259 reload full database 260 Price level Price Level Changes Report 239 select number of 115 Price level enable at dispensers 93 Prices and portions about exporting for brands 128 about exporting for cocktails 129 about importing for brands 119 about importing for cocktails 122 calculate cocktail ingredient portion prices 142 copy 138 copy to multiple brands 140 create anewcategory 135 delete 137 export for brands 131 export for cocktails 132 import forbrands 126 import for cocktails 127 learn mode for TAP 1 148 load default 138 modify for multiple brands 139 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Prices and portions Price Portion Report 238 save as default 138 select
293. equest does not have the proper syntax The function will not be performed Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 Unit detected a transaction error Problem Groups of communication requests are often combined into transaction meaning all of the requests in the transaction grouping should be performed together Transaction errors include closing a transaction when one is not open or opening a second transaction when one is already open Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 Internal Communication error returned from unit Problem This is a non specific communication error A device may not be able to interpret the request or may not have implemented this command Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 Device did not finish the previous re program operation and must be re programmed Problem If a re program operation is interrupted then the device being programmed will not be able to restart However by powering the device off it will be able to be programmed again Note that you will see this message at the beginning of the re program operation when you are recovering from this situation Remedy You must re program the device ECU Disk Error SD Card may be missing dislodged or corrupt If problem persists try using Diagnostics Re format SD Card Problem Dispenser Network ECU is having trouble reading or writing to its SD card Remedy Retry Try doing a clear and restore memory or Re format SD Card Perhaps the SD card will need to b
294. equired setup disks There is no protection against making errors and you may end up with all data being lost 5 Click Yes to continue Wait while the configuration settings are reloaded 6 Remove the backup disk 7 Re install the new version of Infinity August 2010 Reload Previous Version Configuration Settings gt Perform this task ONLY if it becomes necessary when upgrading to a new version of Infinity on a new computer gt The proper way to upgrade is to move your Infinity folder to the new computer and then upgrade to the new Infinity version gt If you didn t do this your old database is not compatible with the new version of Infinity gt If this is your case perform this task to restore your previous version configuration settings or restore the previous full database on the new computer gt After performing this task you MUST re install the new Infinity software upgrade Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 260 Restore Previous Version Full Database To restore previous version full database 4 o N Wu 6 T Pull down the Backups menu Point to Reload Previous Version and click Configuration Insert the backup disk into the selected drive Select the drive letter and folder where you ve stored the backup copy Click on the icon to collapse or expand the folders Click OK Be aware that restoring the database from a previous
295. er the user Name up to 19 characters This is case sensitive that is upper and lower case letters must be entered exactly as the user will enter them If you make a mistake backspace or delete to change it Type a Password up to 16 characters The password is case sensitive You won tbe able to read the password on the screen If you make a mistake backspace or delete to change it You can enter the same or different passwords for all users Select a Security Level Click Register to save the user Click OK to confirm August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Register Users gt A user s registration is composed of three things the user name a password anda security level gt If you enable passwords no one can run an Infinity program without first entering a correct name and password gt If a correct name and password are entered the security level of user determines the Infinity features the user can access gt You can only register a new user with the Infinity CD gt Other configuration options include Country Options Data Storage and Display Options Features and Clear Sales Infinity Help 52 Modify User Information To modify user password or security level 1 Access Configuration Options Modify Users 2 Click Security 3 Click Modify Users gt Any changes to a user s 4 Select the Name of the user you want to change registration take place
296. er unit and or the full brand price and portion table Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 143 Assign PLUs to Brands and Cocktails To assign PLUs Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions Select the Product Type gt Select a Category if you want to filter the price portion list by category Select the brand s Prices and Portions you want to assign PLUs and click Modify If you haven t set up any other price portion categories Standard is the only choice Click Sort by Descriptor to see the brand price portion list grouped by any descriptor s you ve defined OR Click Multiple to enter PLUs for all brands of the selected product type on one screen 4 RON a Click a Price Level tab with PLUs you want to enter or change The PLU column is shown only if you ve enabled Interface enabled the Reconciliation report or selected Show PLUs on the Preferences screen Type the correct PLU for each Size listed on the tab Repeat steps 5 and 6 for any Price Level tab that needs PLUs Click OK to save your entries on all tabs Review the list of equipment where the brand is assigned if any and click a communication option These options are provided so you can wait to send the PLU changes later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time 10 Click Continue to proceed Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selec
297. ernal Error wrong ECU type being passed Problem This function cannot be performed for this equipment name This operation is restricted to ECU types of a specific kind such as Dispenser Network ECU Remedy Run Repair Database This operation is not supported by this equipment Problem This function cannot be performed for this equipment name Sometimes this message will apply to all ECUs of a particular type Infinity Tap 1 Other times the operation is prevented because of the particular settings used by this hardware station You may have selected the wrong ECU or hardware station than the one intended Diagnosis Check the type of the ECU selected and its settings This operation is not allowed while one or more units are in calibration mode Problem Certain operations are not allowed when at least one ECU is in calibration mode Remedy Take all units out of calibration mode and retry the operation Large portion must be at least three times small portion Problem When doing calibration for a unit that uses portions the large portion should be at least 3 times the small This gives the best results in calibration Remedy Choose new large or small values to meet this requirement This operation is not legal with the Portion Lockout Jumper present Problem When the portion lockout version of the software has been purchased changes to portions can only be made when the jumper inside the ECU is moved to its inactive position or is removed This keeps
298. error is automatically corrected without further user action Missing system record Problem A system record was not found in the database Most likely this is a result of a installation that was not completed Remedy Reinstall the software Create check failed on s Problem Repair utility was unable to create a new record during testing phase The database is likely corrupted Remedy You may need to rebuild the index files or run the emergency rebuild utility Diagnosis Run Check Database Unable to delete new s Problem After creating a new record the repair utility was unable to delete it The database is likely corrupted See U54 Error reading s record Problem Repair utility was unable to read some database record The database is likely corrupted See U54 Error traversing s record Problem Repair utility was unable to traverse through all of the records The database is likely corrupted See U54 Error traversing s record by key Problem Repair utility was unable to traverse through all of the record keys The database is likely corrupted See U54 Error traversing s record by set Problem Repair utility was unable to access all of the records by traversing the set The database is likely corrupted See U54 Error getting set for s record Problem Repair utility was unable to read some database set for the record The database is likely corrupted See U54 Error setting owner of set for s record Problem Repair utility was unable t
299. ers and TAP 7 ECUs control tap controllers 1544 Infinity ECUs control 15 price codes of All Bottle coded pourers Dispenser network ECUs are used for Tap 2 dispensers ECU Hardware Station Shortcut button that accesses the ECU Setup screen End of Day End of Day is the hour that marks the end of your business day e g 2 00 AM Reports reflect the date the business day started For example if you ask for data from July 30 this will include data archived from 2 00 01 AM July 30 until 2 00 AM July 31 The hour you select for End of Day must be before noon The Berg default is 12 00 AM midnight The end of day is set in Report Options End of Day End of Day is the hour End of Week End of Week is the day that marks the end of your business week This is used for weekly reports The Berg default is Sunday The end of week is set in Report Options Enterprise Edition This Infinity edition includes everything in the Basic Edition with the added ability to save reports in pdf and html formats Export including export in Excel format Inventory and the Reconciliation report import export prices and portions and design Column Selection reports and exports Equipment Name Typically a list of equipment names includes Device names Hardware Station names ECU Sales Station names or Group names EPROM The EPROM is the memory chip in the ECU The version of the EPROM in your ECUs can determine which Infinity features are av
300. ertains to with a ERR extension 2 Click Delete 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion August 2010 gt A schedule error log is a detailed listing of errors that occurred while a particular schedule was running gt There is a different error log file for each schedule The name of the error log file matches the name of the schedule and has a ERR extension gt The content of this log is especially helpful during troubleshooting gt This log is overwritten each time you start the same schedule so check the log before restarting a schedule if you re having problems Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 277 Memory test To perform a memory test 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Memory Test 2 Select the Equipment Name 3 Click Run to begin the test gt When you perform a memory 4 Wait while the memory test is performed test the Hardware Station When the test ends a message indicates if any memory errors were found ECU provides self diagnostic If there are memory errors the Hardware Station ECU should be information ee See PERATA Restore Memory gt Use this test if you suspect 5 Click Close to exit the Memory Test screen memory errors at the Hardware Station ECU are causing problems August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 278 Get Version Number To get an EPROM version number 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu
301. es and Portions Cocktails i Export Prices and Portions Brands Import Prices and Portions if Export Prices and Portions Cocktails Export Prices and Portions Brand List Setup Container Setup Brand List Setup Container Setup Supplier Setup Supplier Setup Stock Room Setup Stock Room Setup Inventory Options Inventory Options Inventory Check Inventory Check Orders Orders Deliveries Deliveries Reports b Container Stock Report Cost Analysis Report Brand Information Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 32 Activate Driver e eng Activate Dave i Load Driver Remove Driver Remove Driver Show Status Show Status Enable Disable a Enable Disable Drivers Change Pour Communication Change Pour Communication Settings Driver Settings Generate PLUs Generate PLUs Start Pour Test Start Pour Test Exit Pour Test Exit Pour Test Current Sales Reports i p Archive and Gear 2 Archive and Clear Sales Z Advanced Reports Advanced Reports Custom Reports Custom Reports Export Export Custom Exports Custom Exports Seen Ten a Sales Totals X1 Report Sales by Price Levels X2 Sales by Price Levels Report X2 Detailed Sales X3 Detailed Sales Report X3 Hourly Sales X4 Hourly Sales Report X4 Most Recent Report Most Recent Report Schedules Schedule Log Error Log Option
302. es were not written to all ECUs You should have seen one or more CM errors which identify the ECUs with the errors Remedy See CM error displayed and correct that Retry the operation ERROR ECR59 The ECUs did not have identical options and modifiers Problem When reading settings from more than one ECU the options and modifiers were not the same for every ECU For most installations this indicates an error This may be preceded by ECR57 In that case fix ECR57 Remedy Make changes to the settings as need and send the changes to all ECUs ERROR ECR60 At least one ECU has an older version that cannot supply modifiers Problem Older EPROM versions had a different style of storing modifiers Changes made to the modifiers can be sent to the ECUs but they cannot be read and correctly interpreted by the software Remedy Upgrade your EPROM version August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 364 Manager M Error Messages M00 09 M10 19 M20 29 M100 109 M110 119 ERROR M03 ERROR M04 ERROR M05 ERROR M06 ERROR M07 ERROR Mos ERROR M09 ERROR M12 ERROR M13 ERROR M15 ERROR M16 August 2010 Product already exists under different product type Problem A new product that you are trying to define already exists in the database but under a different product type Remedy Choose a new name or use the Switch Type button on the Modify Brand form Can t restore
303. ess day to end The archive records available depend on the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified days The computer looks for all archive records with dates that match the specified days To run this type of report the computer does not communicate with the ECU s or report on any data currently stored at the ECU s Default Hardware Station Names Infinity automatically creates a unique hardware station for each ECU you set up The name of the hardware station is the network name plus the ECU number Occassionally this default will be somewhat different if the hardware station name is already in use You can accept the default name or type a new name in the Hardware Station field up to 31 characters You can always change a hardware station name Default Prices and Portions Defaults are base prices and portions which are automatically entered for each brand when the brand is added to the brand list If you click Load Defaults on the Modify Prices and Portions screen the prices and portions displayed are whatever defaults are currently defined for your system Berg s default prices and portions are used if you don t set your own defaults Setting your own defaults saves time re entering the same prices and portions over and over for related brands Defaults are defined for each product type and are given the Standard category name You can set your own default prices and portions for each product type using the foll
304. ever no archived sales information is copied gt Also no station or group membership is copied gt The new ECU will get an automatically generated default station name gt The ECU number identifies the ECU to Infinity software The number you enter in the ECU Number box must match the number set in the ECU gt Each ECU in a network must have a unique number Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Move an ECU To move an ECU to another network and or new ECU number 1 OAR wD N Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station Select the Hardware Station you want to move Click Show All Options Click Move Select the name of the Network The network can remain the same Type in a unique ECU number For Infinity network ECUs select the ECU number set in the ECU itself This must be an ECU number unused on the selected network The numbers of any ECUs you ve already set up appear in the Existing ECUs field Click Continue Wait while the software communicates with the ECU Click Yes when prompted to do a Clear and Restore Memory to make sure the setup information is sent to the ECU You may answer No if you have physically moved the ECU and know that it already has the setup information stored When the move operation is complete the ECU no longer appears under its old location Note that the Hardware Station name is not ch
305. f dispenser Problem The Copy or Move ECU function can only be performed when the target ECU is an exact match of the original ECU In particular the ECU type must be the same and the same type of dispensers must be supported For example you cannot move an ECU supporting All Bottle ID to one which does not even though both of these ECU are Infinity ECUs Remedy Check that you have selected the correct ECU This ECU is incompatible with the database settings Problem You cannot add an ECU to a database which is incompatible with the settings of the database The specific reason will be listed Remedy Change the settings for the database or the ECU One option is to create a new database with the needed settings You cannot have a cocktail assigned to button 16 when button 16 enable is selected Problem If you are using Button 16 to enter cocktail mode pressing button 16 again will revert to regular pouring mode Therefore it is not possible to use button 16 to pour a specific cocktail Remedy Remove any cocktails any bank assigned to button 16 Alternatively if you need that many cocktails uncheck the button 16 enable box on ECU setup This combination of dispenser types is not supported Problem The ECU version does not support the combination or number of dispensers you have selected For example the Wine Bar ECU will only support one dispenser when the first dispenser is WineBar 20 Remedy Change one or more dispensers to be compatible with
306. f cocktails poured and the amount of sales attributed to each ingredient Compare by Volume To compare volume in a Reconciliation report Infinity gets a PLU count for each brand from the sales terminal data file The PLU count is then multiplied by the volume units associated with that PLU in Infinity small portion large portion PLU recipe etc This gives an implied volume of the drinks rung up at the sales terminal and is called Collected Volume on the report The implied volume is then compared with the volume recorded by the Berg ECU The volume compared may be Sold Pour Volume or Pour Volume See Reconciliation Example by Volume Composite Drinks Pours Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report The number of sold drinks pours canceled drinks pours comp drinks pours other drinks pours Configuration Options Configuration options include security options data storage and display options country options units of measure and August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 29 features These options are entered at the time of software installation and can be modified as the need arises You can also clear sales from the database from the Configuration screen See Access Configuration Options Configuration Settings Infinity configuration settings include all configuration options you select during software installation all equipment setup data networks ECUs stations groups all cali
307. f it involves a TAP 1 ECU are you operating in stand alone mode or are you interfaced to the Infinity software gt Is there diagnostic information available gt Did you try any of the available diagnostic checks e g Check ECU Memory the Diagnostics menu Scandisk or Chkdsk virus checkers etc Review your system setup If you decide to call Berg personnel for assistance with a problem they are likely to ask you a variety of questions to help diagnose the problem You can help by being prepared to answer questions about your Infinity setup and the exact nature of the problem gt Are you using Infinity TAP 1 or 1544 Infinity ECUs If the problem happens on one type does it happen on the other gt Are you using a local or modem network gt Are you using an ECR or POS interface and Interface software gt Have you recently changed anything in your Infinity system setup and configuration gt Have you recently installed other new devices or software on your computer gt What version of the Infinity software and ECU EPROMs August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 330 Troubleshooting Avoiding Problems You can avoid some of the most commonly reported problems by performing the following procedures Calibration Taking the time to calibrate the system prevents future pouring problems If you don t calibrate the dispensers in your system inconsistent portion sizes can result You s
308. f one dispenser and copy the calibration values to any other All Bottle dispensers pouring identical brands Since All Bottle dispensers do not use tubing there is little variation in calibration values between two dispensers that pour identical brands See Copy Assignments You can t copy the calibration values of Laser or TAP 1 dispensers Each Laser gun or tap controller has its own tubing length beverage source etc so each needs to be calibrated separately However you can calibrate one button on a Laser gun and copy its values to all other buttons on the gun Dispenser Calibration or to selected brands on the gun List Calibration Be sure to calibrate any other buttons on the gun that pour beverages with significantly different flow rates You don t have to calibrate each button on a TAP 1 tap Whatis activator ring alignment is it the same as calibration Activator ring alignment is only performed for All Bottle dispensers It ensures the activator ring accurately recognizes each pourer code Though the activator ring is aligned at the factory the subtle electronic signals it uses to identify the pourer codes can be affected by installation and changes in components or cables Aligning the activator ring is not the same thing as calibrating the coded pourers It should be performed before calibration How does calibration work When you calibrate you put a selected dispenser in calibration mode In this mode the dispe
309. f range Problem See ECR14 Loader ERROR mixed byte out of range Problem See ECR14 Loader ERROR mixed word out of range Problem See ECR14 Command 64 arithmetic rotate not implemented Problem See ECR14 Command 82 invoke macro is not implemented Problem See ECR14 Fatal loader error has occurred Problem See ECR14 Conditional loader error has occurred Problem See ECR14 Loader warning has occurred Problem See ECR14 Conditional loader warning has occurred Problem See ECR14 At least one driver must be activated Problem Interfacing to a sales terminal is not possible without at least one active driver Remedy Use Interface Activate Drivers in Infinity to activate at least one driver Only one driver may be activated Problem Normally only one Interface driver is used on a system If you want to use more than one you must explicitly indicate that fact first Remedy From Interface Activate Driver in Infinity check Allow Multiple Drivers Then you may activate additional drivers PLU cannot be removed Problem In the modifier order list the PLU marker must be present It cannot be moved off of the list since the PLU must always be part of the packet sent to the sales terminal Remedy This action will be prevented Add to PLU Begin Transaction Bookend and End PLU Bookend cannot all be used at the same Problem The PLU increment makes use of the modifier strings By also defining a beginning transaction Bookend and a
310. f you don t want any to appear The default is 5 Number of Cocktails a Day Approximate number of each cocktail for the software to simulate Enter 0 if you don t want any to appear The default is 50 Security Level The security level you want to demonstrate on the software You can also show security levels by creating fictitious users and switching between them The default level is 1 Prevent Portion Changes Check this option to simulate a portion lockout jumper no portion size changes are allowed The default is unchecked Dispenser Network Capabilities These affect what is shown on the Device Settings screen Base means the basic set of functions for the device are shown Don t change means to not change any of the capability when clear and restore is done Descriptive Backup Folders Infinity can automatically create backup or store configuration folder names which identify the backup The folder name will include the type of backup the business name the serial number and the date When you backup or store configuration settings you can change the default descriptive folder name You still select the parent folder and the descriptive folder is created under the chosen folder Example You choose to store under the Infinity folder which is C berg infinity The created folder is C berg infinity Store of Joe s Bar 57960000 on Apr 05 2006 Descriptor An optional identifying entry up to 31 characters for each brand You ca
311. face software or enabled the Reconciliation report feature since PLUs are always shown in these cases Click Use descriptive backup folder to save backups with easy to identify names Enter Key Default Button specifies whether the Enter key functions as the default button on Infinity screens Default means the active button most commonly OK Check this option to use the Enter key as a shortcut to clicking OK or whatever button is the default on the screen This is the default Uncheck this option to use the Enter key as a Tab key which moves focus from one control on the screen to another Auto Drop down specifies whether a drop down list automatically displays on combo boxes Check this option to automatically display drop down lists such as brand lists ECU lists report lists Uncheck this option to pull down the list with the down arrow This is the default Select Entire Text specifies whether the entire text in a text entry field is automatically selected when you enter the field This is the default This option is only available in a text field and only when you first enter the field You can still de select parts of the text after you enter the field even if you select this option Exclude from Choice List allows you to eliminate equipment names from drop down lists For example if you never do any operations on an individual dispenser check Device Name and no device name will show August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Ber
312. ffected by the change and price levels affect any Click OK to continue the process currently defined prices and If you increase the number of portion sizes and price levels remember to portions and any default prices enter prices and portion sizes for the new sizes and price levels they aren t and portions given to new automatically filled If you eliminate previously defined higher prices and brands portions the changes are sent to the ECUs EE EE portion sizes and price levels you want but you can t specify their designations For example if you choose 2 price levels they wil be A and B If you choose 2 portion sizes they will be 1 and 2 The higher sizes and price levels are always the ones eliminated gt The number of portion sizes and price levels for Test Pour can t be changed August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ne Price and Portion Defaults To find price and portion defaults 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Price and Portion Defaults To modify price and portion defaults for a product type 1 2 3 A Wu Select the Product Type with price and portion defaults you want to change Click a Price Level tab Type the correct Portion and Price for each Size listed on the tab Sizes 1 3 correspond to the three possible portions small regular and large for All Bottle 7 and Laser dispensers Sizes 1 8 correspond
313. fine one or more users or the software cannot be run Passwords are used to start every Infinity program and determine which functions are allowed to the user Remedy If you do not want security turn off the password checkbox Otherwise define user by using register users Unable to create dialog box Problem See S20 Unable to start help Problem The help file cannot be located or run on this system This could be a error on the setup media or an error on your hard disk or operating system Remedy Call Berg with your question Reboot and retry Diagnosis Run disk diagnostics and fix any problems found A name is required Please enter a name Problem Every user defined must have a name This name is used as part of the logon Remedy Add a name Missing password for s Please enter a password Problem Every user defined must have a password defined This password is used as part of the logon Remedy Enter a password for this user Duplicate name A user with name s has already been registered Please enter a different name Problem There can only be one user with each name Remedy Enter a different name If you wanted to change this user s password use Modify User instead of Register User Unable to Unregister user No registration data exists for user s Problem The user selected to be unregistered does not exist in the database This is possible database corruption Remedy Fix database errors Reboot and retry Restore good
314. finity to use Date Range or Show Archives Report File Types You can save an Infinity report in any of 5 file types Some file types are not available in the Basic edition Report File This is the Infinity report file type It uses the rdf extension Files saved in this format can be viewed only with the Infinity report viewer Acrobat This file type uses the pdf extension Files saved in this format can be viewed only with Adobe Acrobat Reader Web Page HTML This file type uses the html extension Files saved in this format can be viewed with a web browser Excel Export This file type uses the csv extension Files saved in this text only format can be viewed with Microsoft Excel Text Export This file type uses the txt extension Files saved in this text only format can be viewed with any text editor Report Handling Print means all scheduled reports are sent to the printer Be sure the printer is on when the schedule is running and the paper tray is full Save means a scheduled report is saved to a file using the format you select when you specify the report file names Saved report files in the Infinity format rdf can only be opened from the Reports screen See View Print Save Reports Print And Save means scheduled reports are both sent to the printer and saved to a file You can select Don t Print for a specific scheduled report to override your report handling option Don t Print means no printing and no saving
315. g Company LLC Infinity Help so Security Options To find security options 1 Access Configuration Options 2 Click Security To add a new user See Register User Information To change a user password or security level See Modify User Information To change a user name 1 Unregister the user 2 Register the user with the new name To remove a user See Unregister Users To enable disable password protection for your system See Enable Disable Passwords To modify the number or names of security levels See Security List To change the Infinity functions accessible at security levels See Function Security Levels August 2010 Security Options gt Infinity offers protected access to the software through user registration passwords and security levels gt Security is maintained by allowing security option changes only from the Infinity CD with the correct serial number The CD should probably be locked away when not in use gt You can change the number and names of your security levels and also which functions are accessible at each level Other configuration options include Data Storage and Display Options Country Options Features and Clear Sales Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 51 Register User Information To register new users 1 2 3 4 Io Access Configuration Options Click Security Click Register Users Ent
316. g Company LLC Infinity Help e up in operations like Enable or Assign Brands This is useful since there are many equipment names and drop down lists may become cluttered There are names for each dispenser device names for the ECUs as well as Groups and sales stations 3 Click OK Click Load Defaults to use default software preferences August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Inventory Options To enter inventory options 1 Pull down either the Options menu or the Inventory menu and click R Inventory Options Inventory Options 2 Select an Order Method Par Stock means you specify the number of containers to keep in your total gt You can enter Inventory options stock for each brand When the number of containers falls below that from the Inventory or Options amount Inventory will include the brand on an order and calculate how menu many containers must be ordered to reach your par stock amount for the gt These options specify order brand details and can be changed Order Point is the minimum number of containers of the brand you want on hand before you re order When the number of containers falls below the order point Inventory flags the brand to let you knowit s time to re order 3 Type your Establishment name and Address to be printed on orders 4 Type the Tax Percentage you want added to the total cost of every order You ll see this percentage added when you prin
317. g an Infinity schedule once the Inventory feature is enabled It will be performed on the Master Group Typically an Archive and Clear Sales report should precede the Inventory Check in the schedule You can t adjust inventory amounts par stock order points order quantity or order cost while the schedule is running so set them up correctly before the schedule runs Any brands Inventory determines should be ordered based on order point par stock are automatically included in the order See How to create a Time schedule August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 177 Checklist for Inventory Setup Checklist for Inventory Setup 1 Enable the Enterprise edition when you install the software or using A Options Preferences What is Inventory 2 If you use the Brand Wizard select a Container for each product type 3 Perform all other Infinity setup tasks Networks ECUs brand and cocktail assignments etc Calibrate all dispensers 4 Delete unassigned brands and cocktails from your brand list See Delete unassigned brands and cocktails If you use and switch Categories then you should delete unused brands and cocktails from Modify prices and portions 5 Set up your suppliers See Supplier Setup 6 Set up your stock room s See Stock Room Setup 7 Set up ordering information for each brand See How to set up a brand for Inventory 8 Enter Inventory options 9 Perform a physical invent
318. g or emergency recovery The selected database already has a matching serial number Problem You can t change the serial number since this database already matches Remedy If this is the right database you already have a matching serial number and don t need to do anything Or you may have indicated the wrong folder Check the folder you have indicated This does not contain store configuration information Problem A store disk contains a file which identifies it as a store disk and gives the version of the database You should normally create a new store disk every time you upgrade the software and every time you make changes to the configuration Remedy If you have the wrong disk insert the correct one in the drive Diagnosis Run DBExam program This does not contain an Infinity backup Problem A backup disk contains a compressed file This file is missing or the version and serial number of the database cannot be identified You should normally create a new backup disk every time you upgrade the software and every time you make changes to the configuration Remedy If you have the wrong disk insert the correct one in the drive Diagnosis Run DBExam program This disk contains a database with an inappropriate version 1 Problem When reloading a store disk or restoring a full backup the version must match the current database version You should normally create a new store or backup disk every time you upgrade the software If you
319. g to the right folder Warning S106 The database in s cannot be upgraded to this version of software Problem There is not a supported upgrade path from your old database to this version Warning S107 By unchecking this box interface will be removed WARNING Drivers must be unloaded from all ECUs before removing the Interface feature Problem If you remove Interface with drivers loaded the drivers cannot be unloaded since the menu to do so will be removed from Infinity To re install Interface run a Typical install again or use Infinity s Options Preferences Remedy H you have not removed all drivers cancel this process and remove all drivers first Then remove interface You can also use Clear and Restore memory to effectively remove drivers Warning S108 The following files did not register Problem Some files copied onto your system need to be registered with Windows The files listed could not be registered and Infinity may not be able to be run Remedy Under some cases Infinity will be able to register these files are run time You can also register these file by using regsw32 name d on the Start run call line where name dl was the file listed in the error message You can also reboot and retry Registration may fail if file dependencies are missing Warning S109 Unable to load sample database Problem The sample database you requested was not loaded You may still be able to run with an empty database This warning may resu
320. gain Repeat this step until you reach a Timeout Value that no longer rings correctly 3 Move back up the table 2 lines and use that Timeout Value Tone or Pulse The type of dialing used on the computer modem s telephone line Total Stock This is the total number of containers of the brand on hand Transaction Mode This option used only by NCR requires the operator to be signed in at the mainframe computer before Infinity can pour In most cases Berg recommends not selecting transaction mode The sales terminal can better handle this option Type Modifier A type modifier may be required by your sales terminal to distinguish a cocktail pour from a typical brand pour If so learn what the modifiers are and the order they appear in the drink code You must include the type modifier in the Current Modifier Order list before you can enter the modifiers Unit of Measure Choose from fluid ounces fl oz milliliters ml cubic centimeters cc centiliters cl or liters I The unit of measure you select is used to measure all drinks throughout the Infinity system Unregister Deletes the selected user from the list of registered users Unregister Users Accesses the Unregister Users screen Variable Export Name You can give an export file a unique name using the following variable strings These strings insert a date in the export file name The dates are the date the export is run not the date s of the archives being exported If
321. ge For all brands that were part of the most recent Archive and Clear Sales the pour sales are divided by the pour volume It is recommended that you use this calculation method only with the Master Group so that all brands are updated at the same time August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 320 Glossary S Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary S Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Sales The sales figure for drinks Sales are calculated using drink prices you entered in Infinity Only includes Sold drinks not comps or cancels Sales Column The sales figure for drinks or pours Sales are calculated using drink prices you ve entered in Infinity Only includes Sold drinks not comps or cancels Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Sales Station See Station Sales Terminal Data File This file is generated by the sales terminal and lists PLUs and sales data for products rung at the sales terminal Infinity uses the file to compare volume or sales on a Reconciliation report You may be able to use an export function in the POS software to generate a file Or the sales terminal vendor can show you how to create a file To run a Reconciliation Report you need to determine how to generate the data file at the sales terminal understand the layout of the file and decide how you ll make the file available to Infinity Ge
322. gnostics If the disk space seems to be OK then run ScanDisk or other disk checking utility ERROR R05 If you recently changed your network Security Code it may no longer be valid Problem During an archive and clear the network security code is updated if it was changed since the last Z Due to errors during the process this security code may not have been properly updated in the database or ECU Remedy Clear and Restore Memory for each ECU which has a mismatched security code Diagnosis Check the security listed under Network setup and attempt to communicate with each ECU Any ECU with a general communication error CM03 or security code communication error may have a mismatched security code ERROR R50 The maximum number of columns that can be selected is Problem There is a maximum number of columns that can be included in a report based on the number of columns that can be fit into landscape orientation Remedy Reduce the number of columns selected to the number shown or choose narrower columns to include on the report Note that landscape orientation might be necessary to properly view all of the columns ERROR R51 No supplier has been assigned to any brand Problem Only brands which have suppliers assigned to them are part of Inventory There are not any brands with suppliers Therefore some Inventory functions cannot be performed Remedy Make sure that you have created at least one supplier Then use Brand Setup s Multip
323. h brands need ordering and you can save and print the order See Inventory Check Deliveries It s important to record all the items received so Inventory can keep an accurate count of your stock Inventory displays the amount you ordered and you can either accept that number enter a different number or mark August 2010 How does it work gt Each time you Archive and Clear Sales the drink volume recorded by the ECUs is available at the computer for running an Inventory Check gt Inventory Check uses the archived volume data to calculate the reduction in inventory that has occurred gt You then enter the actual stock on hand so you can review the amount of any product loss for each brand gt Because you can set an order point or par stock amount for each brand generating orders is easy You then print the order gt When the order is delivered simply verify the delivery amounts and Infinity adjusts your electronic inventory accordingly See also How to set up Inventory Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 176 items as back ordered See Deliveries Inventory Reports Inventory includes three reports Container Stock Cost Analysis and Brand Information These reports can be run using the Advanced Reporting menu or the Inventory menu See Container Stock Report Cost Analysis Report and Brand Information Report Scheduling Inventory You can run Inventory Check usin
324. h successive pour should bring you closer to the calibration portion size You can change your level of accuracy at Calibration Units and Accuracy Brand Calibration gt With Brand Calibration you are making pours and entering the amounts for one brand only August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 161 Dispenser Calibration Enter Portion Amount Dispenser Calibration You ll see the Dispenser Calibration screen only if you selected Dispenser Calibration on the Select a Brand to Calibrate screen Once you re satisfied with the level of accuracy of the selected brand s pour its timing values are copied to all other brands at the dispenser What is this step Use the Dispenser Calibration screen to enter the exact amount of the calibration pour s of the specified brand Use a measuring cup or graduated cylinder to measure the pours For how to steps describing the entire calibration process see Calibrate Dispensers The number of calibration portions you enter depends on the ECU type ilable for L d All Bottl All Bottle and Laser Enter the exact small portion poured in the ATD OE TREET D one Small Portion field and the exact large portion in the Large Portion d EN field gt After performing dispenser calibration each brand should still be calibrated using brand calibration Dispenser Calibration gt With Dispenser Calibration you are making pours and entering the a
325. hange the POS ID Timeout for all dispensers in a single step 10 Click OK to save 11 Choose No Communication or Send to this ECU August 2010 POS Identifcation gt P3 Hubs involved in POS identification must be on the same Dispenser Network and must be in the same Sales Station gt You must have more than one P3 Hub on a Dispenser Network to use POS ID You can have a maximum of four shared P3 Hubs on each Sales Station gt To identify the P3 Hub on a Tap 2 or Dispenser Converter push the button corresponding the the P3 Hub Code 1 through four gt On the cocktail Pad use the arrow button under desired POS ID Code on the screen gt Pour The POS Terminal connected to that P3 Hub will ring up gt Pour again before the POS ID Timeout to ring up on the same POS terminal gt You can press Cancel to back out of the current P3 Hub selection before a pour or during the timeout period Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Sequence Number Setup To enter or modify sequence numbers for Micros POS 1 Before using POS Setup you must put all ECU and P3 Hubs which are sharing a Micros POS terminal in the same Sales Station Sequence Numbers 2 Pull down the Interface menu and click Sequence Number Setup 3 Enter the beginning and ending sequence number for each POS connection The allowable numbers are 1 through 9 The equipment listed is grouped by Sales Station
326. he alignment values you will see this message when you exit Infinity If you do not store the alignment values in the database they will be lost if you later do a Clear and Restore Memory Remedy If you have correctly completed the activator ring alignment then answer Yes If you know that you made a mistake in that process answer No Question M301 Check the following cautions Are you sure you want to continue Problem This will be followed by one or more cautions about the pending operation Remedy Read the cautions If this is not what you want to do answer No Then make changes to eliminate the cautions Question M302 If there are sales present it is suggested that you Archive and Clear Sales before continuing Otherwise pours made during Pour Test will be combined with the existing sales Are you sure you want to continue Problem Pour tests are recorded by the ECU as regular pours If you have current sales that you want to distinguish from these pours test you should first do an Archive and Clear before proceeding If you do this then the test pours will be included in the next Archive and Clear so you may also want to Archive and Clear after the pour tests Remedy If you do not want to combine pour tests with your current sales answer No and run an Archive and Clear before continuing with this operation Question M303 Is this an Infinity All Bottle ID ECU Problem The Infinity ECU can support either the All Bottle 7 or the All
327. he computer after performing an the values when you exit Infinity activator ring alignment you ll be prompted to perform this task when you gt It s important for the computer to CDS have a copy of the alignment values so they can be reset at the ECUs if necessary gt If you clear and restore memory to the ECU alignment values at the ECU are reset using the values stored at the computer August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 157 Set Default Alignment Values To set default alignment values 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Default Alignment Values Default Alignment Values The Default Alignment Values screen displays only if you ve already set up an All Bottle 7 dispenser You should set default 2 Select the Equipment Name with alignment values you want to import alignment values for your All Select master group to import the values for all activator rings in one step Bottle activator rings if Only All Bottle 7 dispensers appear in the list something happened to the stored alignment values in your database or for some reason you can t perform the activator ring alignment process gt Aligning the activator rings of All Bottle dispensers is an important part of the calibration process The default values work for most situations 3 Click Run to set the default alignment values for the ECU s A message informs you when the default values
328. he report you want to run You can also run a current sales report using the Advanced Reporting menu This is useful if you want to set specific options for a current sales report See Run an Advanced Report 2 Select the Equipment Name If you ve set up any groups or sales stations they appear in the list Otherwise select a hardware station 3 Click Run to run the report Wait while the data is retrieved from the ECU s The time it takes to run the report is determined by the amount of sales activity and the number of ECUs in the station or group Never turn off or restart your computer while the report is running or sales data may be lost 4 View save or print the report See View Report Saved report files can be opened by clicking Open on the View screen 5 Click Close to exit the View screen Click Close to exit the Current Sales report screen O August 2010 Current Sales Report gt A Current Sales report uses the sales data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all sales data accumulated since the last time you cleared sales at the ECU gt The Current Sales menu provides convenient access to four current sales reports Sales Totals X1 Sales by Price Levels X2 Detailed Sales X3 Hourly Sales X4 Running a report from the Current Sales menu does not clear sales at the ECU s gt To view the last report run on your system click Most Recent Report gt The report op
329. hedule 2 Click New to add an Action or double click on an empty row The cursor points to the first line in the list 3 Select a Day of Week and Time if creating a Time schedule Select All Days of the Week for the action to occur every day at the same time Use the time format of your system to specify any hour minute and second of the day or night 12 00AM is midnight 12 00PM is noon Select the number of any calendar days you ve set up End is the last day of the month Select Repeat to set up the same action to occur at intervals 4 Select an Action and the Equipment Name to receive the action 5 Provide additional information about the action if prompted With Archive and Clear Sales Z retail price per unit may be changed Select Don t Print to prevent a report printing during the schedule Select whether to use Current or Most Recent Archive data if prompted If you select Change Price Level select the price level If you select Export click Save As to change the export file name If you select Custom Report or Custom Export select the custom name If you select a Usage or Sales Summary report enter the days ago the report should include Archive records available for the report depend on the number of times you cleared sales during the specified days Include the Exit Schedule action to automatically stop a Time schedule ata specific time The schedule won t exit until the previous action is complete No actions wil
330. his selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board TEC MA 516 100 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Trim POS Flashpoint This selection installs a POS driver A special cable available from Trim POS is required The POS software supports pre checking Uniwell UX 34F This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 193 Set Up Sales Station for Interface To set up a sales station for interface 4 ou Pull down the Interface menu and click Sales Stations You will only see this menu option if you ve allowed multiple drivers on the Activate Drivers screen Alternatively you can select the Management Setup Sales Stations menu option This takes you to the same screen Select a Sales Station and click Modify OR Click New to set up a new sales station See Sales Station Setup for help creating a new station Verify the correct equipment displays in the Current Definition list for the sales station Use the Add or Remove buttons to makes any changes to the list Select the appropriate Driver for the sales station You ll see only the driver s you ve activated in this list You re selecting the correct driver file for the sales terminal to which this sales station is connec
331. hould calibrate all dispensers at the time of installation and any time you install a new dispenser or make changes to tubing runs See the Calibration section Back up configuration settings With a backup copy of all your setup data you re prepared in the event of computer problems You should back up configuration settings at the time of installation and any time you make changes to setup data See Store Configuration Settings in the Database Management section Maintain the system Perform cleaning and maintenance tasks at regularly scheduled intervals This extends the useful life of your dispensers and prevents electrical and pouring problems See the Maintenance section of this manual and the Laser and TAP 1 Manuals August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 331 Troubleshooting Local Network Communication Problems Communication errors can occur for a number of reasons and can be difficult to isolate Once diagnosed however the problem is usually a faulty cable connection The two most effective tools for solving communication problems are the loopback tester Berg PN 8009196 and the RS485 network tester Berg PN 8005830 Both come with detailed instructions Local network connections The first step in finding a communications problem is to check all connections as described below You want to determine whether the communications fail for only a single ECU or for all ECUs within a network Chec
332. ht 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Activate or Renew by Phone To activate renew an Infinity software license by phone ey Click the Activate button if prompted OR pull down the File menu and click Activate or Renew Activation by Phone 2 Choose Step 1 Contact Berg Click Continue l gt Activation or renewal by phone Berg must be contacted with identifying information in order to activate the software H takes only a few minutes 3 Choose By Phone Click Continue SE SE emember to call during Ber 4 Call Berg Company and give them the Reference Code that appears on is business hours your screen You will also be asked for other identifying information including your serial For more help with software number After confirming your information and payment for the activation licensing see About Activation Berg will give you a license key amp Renewal GA Enter the license key on your screen Click Continue If the license key is entered correctly your software will be activated and you will no longer see the grace period warning when you run Infinity software August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 3 Activate or Renew by Fax To activate renew an Infinity software license by fax y Click the Activate button if prompted OR pull down the File menu and click Activate or Renew Choose Step 1 Contact Berg Click Con
333. iagnostics on the database Fix the previous error ERROR S88 Database is locked Problem Parts of the database are locked This may happen during a previous error Remedy Reboot and retry August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 30 Utilities U Error Messages U00 09 U10 19 U50 59 U60 69 ERROR U01 ERROR U02 ERROR U03 ERROR U04 ERROR U17 ERROR U18 ERROR U19 ERROR U22 ERROR U50 ERROR U51 August 2010 Current serial number was not found Serial number was not updated Problem On a store where the serial number was being changed the current serial was not found and therefore cannot be changed Remedy Use Help About to see the current serial number and try again There is no Infinity database present Check the selected folder Problem This operation requires an Infinity database and none was found Remedy Check the folder you have indicated Perhaps the database exists under a subfolder Error loading DLL or database Some functions will not be available Problem The database could not be opened or some supporting code file could not be loaded Diagnostics will still run but a number of functions may not be available to run Basically any function that requires access to the database contents will not run If one of those functions is attempted an error message will be displayed Remedy Reboot and retry Try restoring a good copy of the database reinstallin
334. ibrate but will change for a different brand that may be pouring accurately now Remedy Answer No if you are not sure why you got this message and check the ECU number dispenser number and brand button You may answer Y if you know why a different button was pushed after calibrating this brand Question M374 Do you want these changes to overwrite all dispenser settings in the system Answer No to change only those dispensers that currently have the default settings Problem You have made changes to the default dispenser settings It is unclear whether you would like these defaults to apply to all dispensers or only to those that currently match the defaults Remedy Answer Y to copy these changes to all dispensers in the system Answer N to change only current defaulted dispensers Question M390 Are you sure you wish to exit Not all steps in this wizard are complete Information may be lost Problem If you cancel a wizard before all steps have been completed then the wizard s job is not complete If changes have been made they will not be saved Remedy Answer Yes if you do not wish to complete the wizard August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 390 Report R Questions Question R250 The width of the selected columns is wider than the current orientation of the printer Do you wish to continue Problem The created report will be truncated because the total width of the report columns is more than the vie
335. ic Edition Choose this Infinity edition if you want basic functionality and you don t need any added features or the extra menus and screens they require This edition includes basic Infinity functions but does not include some report file formats och html Export Inventory and the Reconciliation report Baud Rate Baud rate is the speed of the computer network communications It must match the baud rate set at the ECUs during hardware installation If you are setting up a remote network the baud rate must also be supported by the modems Bookends Bookends describe the codes that may be required by the sales terminal to signal the beginning and or end of a transaction or PLU For example if the sales terminal requires a key press before you ring up a drink and one after you ve rung up the drink you ll need to enter the codes for those key presses as Transaction Bookends You don t have to include bookend modifiers in the modifier order list since their position in the drink code is already defined Brand Calibration Each Laser gun button All Bottle coded pourer and TAP 1 tap must be calibrated The process of entering separate calibration portion amounts for each brand assigned to the dispensers is known as brand calibration Copy features called dispenser calibration and list calibration can speed up the calibration process for All Bottle and Laser dispensers Each brand should still be calibrated but using the copied values make
336. icate it cannot be canceled For example 75 means any pour at least 75 full cannot be canceled Set to 0 to disallow all cancels Set to 100 to allow all cancels Tap 2 only Charge Cancels means any canceled pours are recorded as full volume full price pours Add a Head Limit is the maximum number 0 10 of consecutive add a head pours allowed Setting the limit to 0 means there is no limit Add a Head Button lets you designate a tap button to be used exclusively to add a head Set to lt None gt if you need all your tap buttons Tap 2 only Add a Head Open Pct indicates how far open the tap valve should be during an add a head The default is full open 100 Tap 2 only Brightness is the brightness level 0 7 of the tap s keypad 7 is the brightest Cocktail Mode lets you select Brand Pouring Only Brand and Cocktail Pouring or Cocktail Pouring Only for Laser dispensers All Bottle ID have identical brands means whenever brand assignments are changed on one ABID they are changed for all ABID dispensers this is the default Unchecking means all ABID dispensers are totally independent If you want to assign brands separately to each of your All Bottle ID dispensers uncheck this option This allows more than 200 total brands on a system but only 200 at any one ABID This is potentially a lot more work since you must make assignments individually for each ABID dispenser likely the bottom 50 or so will be the same at every ABID
337. if you have physically moved the ECU and know that it already has the setup information stored Note that the Hardware Station name is not changed by changing the ECU number August 2010 Assign Address gt In a dispenser network you can change an ECU s address from the software gt There is no need to open the hardware to assign a new number Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Modify an ECU To modify an ECU s setup 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station 2 Select the Hardware Station you want to modify 3 Click Modify 4 See New ECU Setup for help with ECU settings To use addressing features dispenser network ECUs only Use Check Addresses to check or confirm the addresses currently set in the equipment Use Set Addresses to send a device address to the actual equipment Use Identify Device to find out which equipment has a selected device name To check device addresses 1 Click Check Addresses to communicate with the ECU and check all device addresses Wait for communication to occur A message displays listing the device names followed by the device address e g Left Sam Adams A 2 Click OK after viewing the message The results will either confirm what you see on the setup screen or show addresses with no devices highlighted in green or missing devices or devices at different addresses highlighted in red 3
338. inal brand Click on Modify and check the portion for the price level and size noted in Step 1A a Valid portion is present Go to step 7 b Portion is zero If you want to be able to pour this price level size add the portion needed Go to Step 1 II If you dont want to pour restrict the system from putting your dispenser into this price level or size Gen A Wrong Price Level Price level changes can be restricted at the ECU by using ECU setup Also check that a August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 338 schedule does not put your ECU into a price level you do not want You can also use Pouring Brand Operation Select Price levels and Sizes to exclude the number of price levels allowed this however does not prevent someone from putting the ECU into those price levels If you select 1 price level you should do so for all product types used on this ECU or for Infinity release before 4 31 you must set all product types to have a single price level Infinity uses A as the single price level and without meeting the above conditions a restore station memory wil put the unit into price level B which will be undefined and wont pour B Wrong size Train your employees not to put the dispenser into this size and how to recognize when they are in a improper size Another trick sometimes used is to set illegal sizes to match the most popular size That is if
339. ings are not used by the sales terminal to generate the file They are used by Infinity to search for a sales terminal data file name that matches the date the Reconciliation report is run For example suppose you define a variable file name such as ddd dd mmm txt On Tuesday the 13th of October you run a Reconciliation report Infinity will look for a sales terminal data file named tue13oct txt because it follows the ddd dd mmm txt format and it matches the date the Reconciliation report is run grp Equipment Name that the report covers Note some characters may be removed from the Equipment Name if they are illegal in file names dd day of the month e g 13 ddd day of the week short format e g Tue dddd day of the week full name e g Tuesday mm two digit month number e g 10 mmm name of the month short format e g Oct mmmm name of the month full name e g October y day of the year e g 355 yy two digit year e g 06 yyyy four digit year e g 2006 match the highest number in an existing file x match any set of strings This allows you to read multiple files This cannot be used in conjuction with H curly brackets do not match up or do not contain the strings above they are left intact as part of the file name Any part of the file name that uses date information will use the business date see End of Day Examples rec ddd txt means Infinity
340. ion 3 4 Wu O N Pull down the Management menu Setup sub menu and click ECU hardware Station make sure you have added all of the P3 Hubs and that their Sales Station is correct Click on POS ID Codes tab The P3 Hubs are grouped by Sales Station The list of dispensers that share each P3 Hub is shown Normally each dispenser will appear in more than one P3 Hub Otherwise the P3 Hub is not really being shared Enter the POS ID Code This is the number used to identify the P3 Hub It must be from 1 to 4 Click on POS ID Details Each dispenser will be shown If there are any dispensers which are not shared select the P3 Hub which this dispenser will always use For example taps may be shared but All Bottle and Laser may be dedicated to a single POS terminal See Dispenser Converter to see how Infinity Network devices are connected to a Dispenser Network Enter the ID Timeout in seconds for each dispenser This is the time after a pour is completed during which that you can initiate another pour without having to re identify the P3 Hub Most often all dispensers will have the same timeout Enter 0 for the code to never time out This is useful when normally the dispenser rings up on the same sales terminal If a different bartender needs to pour there they must Cancel and then identify their P3 Hub When done they should Cancel out of their POS ID code You can use Driver Settings to c
341. ion Remedy Check the folder permissions of the folder and the properties of the file listed Remove any read only properties or set permissions of the folder to be Modify or Read Write and Execute for the current user or for Authenticated Users ERROR INF56 This operation is restricted to Equipment Names that contain only Dispenser Network devices or contain no Dispenser Network devices Problem Some operations cannot combine Dispenser Network devices with other devices These two types of devices are incompatible for this operation Check the network attributes Remedy You must run two or more separate operations Pick an Equipment Name that includes only Dispenser network devices or one that includes only other devices Repeat the operation for other Equipment Names if desired ERROR INF57 This operation is restricted to Equipment Names that contain only Dispenser Network devices Problem Some operations can only be run on Dispenser Network devices Check the network attributes Remedy Pick an Equipment Name that includes only Dispenser network devices Or adjust the operation so this restriction no longer applies Example Current column report with shifts You must changes form current or remove the shifts column ERROR INF58 xxx cannot be found Problem An input file contains a brand name or PLU that does not occur in the Infinity brand list where xxx is the non matching text Input files are used in some reports such as reconcili
342. ion Price Ingredient Portion prices are an optional entry and should be the retail value of the amount of the ingredient used in the cocktail Portion prices are only used in a Usage Report In the report the ingredient portion price is multiplied by the number of cocktails poured and added to the sales total for the brand The total of the portion prices for a cocktail may or may not equal the price of the cocktail Init String The initialization string for the computer modem The default AT PQC 3 PIG 1 PMH 1 PSS 2 amp D28 amp C1 amp N6 sets Data Terminal Relay and Carrier Detect to normal and turns off Auto Answer Large Portion Size This is the large portion size All Bottle and Laser dispensers pour when they are in calibration mode You should enter a typical large portion for your system The large portion size must be at least 3 times greater than the small portion size and no greater than 300 fl oz 8000 ml The default large portion size is 1 5 fl oz 45 ml Laser Dispenser A unit mounted under the bar with an attached Laser gun for portion controlled dispensing from the reserve supply in the liquor room Laser dispensers come in three sizes for pouring 6 12 or 16 brands Learn Mode Learn mode is an optional feature of TAP 1 ECUs that can help you set up initial portion sizes for your taps It s especially helpful when you know the glass or mug you want to use for a particular button but are not sure of the exact portion si
343. ion and dispenser assignment data system report options and schedules you have created if any gt Sales records and ordering information are not included in configuration settings gt Perform this task whenever you enter or make changes to any configuration settings Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 256 Reload Configuration Settings To reload configuration settings 1 Pull down the Backups menu Click Reload Configuration 2 Insert the backup disk into the selected drive 3 Select the drive letter and folder where you ve stored the backup copy gt Perform this task when you Click on the icon to collapse or expand the folders Reload Config Settings need to reload a copy of Infinity 4 Click OK Click Yes to confirm the reload procedure configuration settings to your Wait while the configuration settings are reloaded hard drive 5 Remove the backup disk gt For help saving a copy of As a dealer use this procedure to load configuration settings you ve entered off site onto the customer s computer and stored with the customer s serial number If you store configuration settings on one Infinity system without configuration settings see Store Configuration Settings changing the serial number and reload them on a different Infinity system gt Reloading configuration settings Infinity will not run replaces any existing If you attempt to reload configuration set
344. ion data you stored after installation or reload from a recent backup gt Investigate possible hard disk problems If the disk is full or close to full delete any outdated or unnecessary files To reduce the space used by Infinity sales records Clear Sales from your database at the computer This erases all Infinity archive sales records See Clear Sales from the Database in the Database Management section Remove saved Infinity report files you no longer need See Managing Report Files in the Reports section Set the Archive Record Storage Length to a lower limit to conserve hard disk space See Data Storage and Display August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 343 Options in the Configuration Options section Several commercially available diagnostic utilities PC Tools Deluxe or Norton Utilities among others can automatically inspect the surface of a hard disk and report on any irregularities and can even recover most or all of the data in the event of an otherwise catastrophic disk crash August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 344 Troubleshooting Schedule Problems Schedule stops prematurely gt Verify that an Exit Schedule action is not defined for the schedule gt Check the schedule log and error log The schedule log indicates when the schedule was started and stopped If password protection is enabled the name of the user who
345. ions of the Infinity ECU will only support the All Bottle ID and will not support the All Bottle 7 Remedy Select the appropriate dispenser type or contact Berg for an ECU upgrade Diagnosis Check ECU number In Infinity go into diagnostics mode Ctl Alt D and select Get Version under Diagnostics to see the EPROM version Too many ingredients listed for a cocktail Problem Infinity only supports up to 5 ingredients per cocktail Remedy Redo the recipes to contain no more than five ingredients Version must be of the numeric format x yy Problem The supplied version number must be a single digit followed by a period and then two additional digits such as 4 05 Remedy Check the version and enter it in the correct format column is required Problem The column named by must be specified and cannot be zero Remedy Determine which column this field belongs in and enter the column number Can t add a group that contains the group being defined Problem When modifying a group you cannot add any group that contains the group being modified including the group itself This would create a circular list Remedy Decide the mapping of groups Try to create groups that reflect combinations of ECUs that you perform functions on at the same time Diagnosis Use F9 to view the definitions of existing groups Name is already being used for a Sales Station Name Problem You have tried to create a selection name that is already being used for a Sales Station name
346. is enabled only if you select the Cocktail Mode of Brand and Cocktail Pouring Pause Enable enables the pause feature at the taps Uncheck to disallow pausing a pour Tap 2 only Program Mode enables the programming of pourers using an All Bottle ID dispenser Show Prices and or Show Portions lets you see price and portion information displayed on an All Bottle ID dispenser when you insert a pourer Alternate Size Enabled enables the repeat button on a tap to pour alternate portion sizes sizes 5 8 Tap 1 taps allow enabling of either Alternate Size or Repeat but not both Tap 2 taps can enable both features If you select both options in your System Settings Tap 1 taps will show Repeat Enabled and Alternate Size disabled Select specific Tap 1 equipment in Device Settings if you want to select an option different from your System Settings Selecting neither the Alternate Size or Repeat option disables the repeat button at the taps Alternate Size Reset means there is a reset of the portion sizes at the tap to standard mode after every alternate size pour if you enabled alternate size pouring August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Sales Station Setup To find sales station setup 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Sales Stations To set up a new station Click New 2 Type the sales station s unique New Name The name can be up to 31 characters 3 Click Continue
347. is an order number used in Inventory Remedy Enter a text string with a numeric portion The maximum for the numeric portion of is Problem The number that is part of the string entered has exceeded the maximum Remedy Choose a string with a lower numeric portion Error in file Problem The file named by has some syntactic error and cannot be used Often the line number and the text of the erroneous line will follow This may happen if you have attempted to change the file with an editor Remedy If you have a backup or store with a previous copy of this file restore the file Otherwise re install Infinity If this is a file that is optionally overwritten such as the Interface options request to overwrite it Diagnosis Call Berg with the name of the file and any additional information A backup can be sent to Berg for analysis You cannot choose It contains the current Infinity database Problem An operation was attempted using the current Infinity database The operation cannot be done in the current Infinity folder For example store configuration Usually a store is done toa floppy drive Remedy Choose a different folder or drive Can t launch Error Problem The program named in the error could not be started Remedy If the file is missing reinstall the software Reboot and retry Fix any disk errors Diagnosis See if this program exists in the Infinity folder Unable to write file Problem A file could no
348. is brand s volume compared to entire report volume Phone The exact phone number used to dial the remote modem If dialing long distance be sure to include 1 and the area code PLU Stands for Price Look Up The PLU is a number that points to the location in the sales terminal where the specific price of an item is stored For Interface software to communicate drink information to the sales terminal the correct PLUs must be entered in Infinity software See the sales terminal representative to get a list of the correct PLUs Depending on the sales terminal configuration a unique PLU may be assigned to every brand of drink or to every pour of a different portion size or price level of that brand Infinity software accepts any number between 1 and 32 767 as a PLU Check with Berg to see if your driver supports PLUs to 65 535 PLU Base For certain Interface drivers you may enter a value that will be added to every PLU before it is sent to the POS sales terminal This allows you to create a bank of PLU numbers that is greater than the current upper limit The POS system must be able to handle these larger numbers The PLUs entered on the POS side must match the PLU sent by Infinity after the PLU increment is added August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help am Note that the PLUs that you enter in Infinity should not include the PLU Base number Infinity will add the increment for you A reminder on the bo
349. is useful if you need to assign different suppliers to brands of the same product type or to assign the same supplier to brands of two or more but not all product types gt See Inventory Overview for help with understanding how Inventory works gt See Checklist for Inventory Setup to review the order of Inventory setup tasks Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 178 Infinity Help Stock Room Setup To find stock room setup 1 Pull down the Inventory menu and Click Stock Room Setup To set up a new stock room 1 Click New 2 Type the New Name of the stock room and click Continue 3 Type an Address for the stock room optional 4 Select an ECU in the ECU List and click lt Add to move the entry into the Current Definition list or drag and drop the selected entry to the Current Definition list Repeat this step for each ECU stocked from this room 5 To remove an ECU from the stock room select it and click Remove gt or drag and drop the selected ECU to the ECU List 6 Click OK to save the stock room Click Close to exit the screen without saving To modify a stock room s address or ECU assignments 1 Select the Stock Room from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Type the new Address optional 4 Select an ECU in the ECU List and click lt Add to move the entry into the Current Definition list or drag and drop the selected entry to the Current Definition list Repeat
350. isplay ECU Debug Mode Infinity Help ER Upgrade Infinity Software To upgrade Infinity software 1 Close all other programs running under Windows 2 Insert the Infinity CD in a CD drive 3 Click Install Infinity software 4 Click Yes to accept the License Agreement 5 Click Yes to confirm the serial number for this installation See About Activation amp Renewal Choose Install Software as the Setup Type and click Next Click Next to accept the default destination directory C Program Files Berg Infinity If Infinity is currently in a different destination select it 8 Click Update to preserve your current database 9 Click Next to accept the default folder for Infinity program icons Berg Infinity 10 Click Yes if you want a backup made of your current installation If you already have a current backup click No 11 Click Yes to place the Infinity icons on your computer desktop 12 Click No to not copy online manuals to your hard disk You can copy the manuals to your computer if you wish The default is to leave the manuals on the install disk This saves space on your PC You can always access Help from Infinity or viewprint the PDF version of the manuals anytime by inserting the install CD 11 Confirm the dealer s name and phone number for technical support and click Next 12 Click Next to confirm the installation 13 Wait while the software is installed 14 Click Finish on the Configurati
351. isplay ECU 290 get EPROM version number 278 August 2010 memory test 277 rebuild database index files 279 repair database 283 Disable enable Enable Disable Driver 198 passwords 54 Dispenser calibration enter portion amount 161 Dispenser Network ECU change number 89 Dispenser Network Pours Report 232 get address 105 identify device 104 new 84 read addresses 107 reprogram 99 reset 108 set addresses 106 Dispensers assign brands 144 copy brand assignments 147 switch to new price portion category 136 Display ECU 290 Driver activate 199 change pour communication 200 Driver Settings 201 Enable Disable Driver 198 load to station or group 194 remove from station or group 196 show status 197 test after loading 195 Duplicate serial numbers 48 E ECR activate driver 199 change pour communication 200 Driver Settings 201 Enable Disable Driver 198 load driver to station or group 194 remove driver from station or group 196 show driver status 197 ECU Compare ECU to database 289 copy 87 copy settings to add another 87 delete 82 modify 82 90 Move 88 new 84 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help om ECU new ECU number 83 read to add to a network 86 rename 82 settime 173 setup 82 view hardware configuration 69 Email activation 44 Emergency Rebuild the Database 282 Empty sales stations groups Delete Empty Sales Stations Groups 97 Enable disable Enable Disa
352. it includes all ECUs even those you set up after you define a master group 2 Click Modify 3 Add or remove equipment from the Current Definition and click OK to save your changes To rename a group 1 Select the Group from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a group 1 Select the Group from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion If you delete a group the ECUs and dispensers in the group are put back on the Selection list Then they can be assigned to a different group b y August 2010 Group Setup gt Groups are the most flexible equipment setup item in the software A group can consist of hardware stations sales stations dispensers or it can include other groups in its definition gt You should set up a new group for each logical combination of stations and or groups that helps you perform management tasks gt For example if you have Infinity and TAP 1 hardware stations you can define a group called Liquor that includes all the Infinity hardware stations a group called Beer that includes all the TAP 1 hardware stations and a group called All that includes the Liquor and Beer groups You can then perform operations on all liquor all beer or everything at once gt If you always run reports etc for the entire system or for
353. it multiple brands or Copy Prices and Portions to enter prices for one brand and copy to others To create new prices and portions in an existing category for brands that do not currently have that category 1 2 Select Existing Category and click Continue Select the Category from the drop down list and click OK You re selecting a category you previously created which didn t include all brands Click each brand in your list you want to include in the selected category You ll see only brands not previously assigned this category If you don t see any brands it means they already have prices and portions with this category name Click Continue Wait for the operation to complete An existing set of prices and portions for each selected brand is copied to create the newset Edit the new prices and portions which have been created for the selected brands See Modify Multiple Prices and Portions to edit multiple brands or Copy Prices and Portions to enter prices for one brand and copy to others August 2010 New Prices and Portions gt Each set of prices and portions is called a category gt Once you ve created a new category you can perform any operations outlined in Category Setup gt To switch dispensers to the new prices and portions see Switch Category Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 136 Switch Category To switch price portion categories
354. ith the deletion any brands with the container assignment receive another container assignment August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 134 Category Setup To find category setup 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Category Setup To switch brands to pour using a different price portion category See Switch Category To create a new category of prices and portions See New Prices and Portions To rename a category 1 Select the Category from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it You can change the name of any category Renaming a category changes the name for all brands using that category The newname can be up to 31 characters To delete a category 1 Select the Category from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion If you delete a category already assigned to a brand a prompt reminds you Click Yes to delete the category or No to keep it If you proceed with the deletion any brands with the category assignment receive another category assignment To quickly access Prices and Portions Setup for a category 1 Select the Category from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click the Prices and Portions shortcut button The Prices and Portions Setup screen displays with the category selected The Category Setup scree
355. k Multiple All brands in your list display in a table format 3 Select the Container from the drop down list If you haven t already done so you can quickly select the default container for a product type using the Brand Wizard 4 Type the Container Cost 5 Type the Retail Price Per Unit OR Click on Calculate Retail Price to compute the average retail unit price for each brand by using the current price portion tables 6 Type the Descriptor optional 7 Type in the specific gravity optional Click the Inventory tab and see Setup a brand for Inventory if you re using the Inventory feature 8 Click OK to save all your changes August 2010 Multiple Brands gt To save time setting up your brand list you can enter information for all brands using this table gt To set up container sizes or add new containers see Container Setup gt Any bottle sizes you defined in previous releases will be converted to containers Please check all container sizes if you re upgrading from a previous Infinity release Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 112 Switch Product Type To switch product type 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Brand List Setup Switch Product Type 2 Select the current Product Type and the Brand Name Click Modify You can change the product 3 Click Switch Type type designation of a brand If the brand is c
356. k the following connections 1 Is the RS 232 to RS 485 converter plugged into the computer s serial communications port 2 Is the power transformer for the converter plugged into a live outlet and into the converter 3 Is the network cable plugged into the converter 4 Are the ECUs power cords plugged into a live outlet 5 Is the network cable connected to the computer If a TAP 1 ECU is included in this network there is an additional adapter cable assembly that connects between the network cable and the first TAP 1 ECU 6 Are the ECU addresses correct Be sure each has a unique number 7 Is the communications baud rate for the network set to the same baud rate as the ECUs 8 Is the correct communication port entered during Network setup being used 9 Are the settings for the COM port itself correct If you re having trouble communicating after updating from a DOS version of Infinity the problem may be due to changes made to the COM port s IRQ or address with the old version of Infinity Those settings are no longer made in Infinity they re defined by Windows Find a copy of the settings from your old version and enter them using Windows Loopback tests If you cant determine the problem by checking cable connections perform loopback tests until the problem is diagnosed See Loopback Test in the Communications menu for help with performing the tests Perform the tests in the following order COM port L
357. ktails both tables must have the same set of ingredients If they do not then the switch will not be allowed Otherwise they may be problems with having the appropriate ingredient assigned to all of the dispensers with this cocktail Remedy You can cancel the operation if you did not expect to see this message Warning M207 The ECU options dispenser types and or brand assignments will be changed Warning M208 Warning M209 August 2010 Problem This comes up during a Clear and Restore Memory when the ECU EPROM has been changed since the last save This may be triggered when you upgrade from Infinity to an Infinity All Bottle ID system Remedy Answering OK will make the changes save them in the database and send them to the ECU Answering Cancel will not make the changes and will stop the Clear and Restore operation It is recommended to calibrate with a high precision ECU since the calibration values will or may be copied to other dispensers Problem If you have a system with more than one All Bottle ID or All Bottle 7 and the EPROM versions support different calibration precisions then it is best to calibrate using one of the high precision dispensers When calibrating All Bottle ID the resulting cal values are automatically copied to all All Bottle ID dispensers and it is better to start with the best precision All Bottle 7 calibration values will be copied if you use Copy Dispenser or ECU functions Remedy Cancel the operation
358. l occur after the Exit Schedule If you select Run Program enter the Call Line of the program If you select Switch Category select the From and the To category If you select Interface choose Enable or Disable If you select Inventory Check you should precede it with an Archive and Clear Sales Z Make sure par stock order point order quantity and order cost are accurate Orders will be printed and a Container Stock report run Ifyou select Backup Database click Save As to specify the backup file If you select Store Configuration click Save As to specify the store file If you select Set Service Mode choose Enable or Disable This action is only available for dispenser networks 6 Click OK The selected Action and Equipment Name are added to the schedule To repeat the same action on all days at certain intervals See Repeat Action To replace a schedule action 1 Point the arrow cursor at the Action you want to replace 2 Click Modify 3 If you are changing a Time Schedule change the Day and or Time if desired You can also change to Repeat 4 Select the new Action and Equipment Name Provide additional information if prompted 5 Click OK The new Action and Equipment are added to the list replacing the old one If you changed the Day or Time the action is moved to the appropriate place on the schedule tabs To delete a schedule action 1 Point the arrow cursor at the Action you want to remove 2 Click
359. lar product type This is useful if you never use all the sizes and price levels available or if you want to increase the sizes and price levels available because you ve added a 1544 Infinity ECU to your system Changes to the number of sizes and price levels affect any currently defined prices and portions To proceed with the Brand Wizard Select the maximum number of portion sizes and price levels you want for the indicated product type For the cocktail product type select the maximum number of ingredients you want for a cocktail recipe OR Click Load Defaults to use the Berg defaults You re not defining portion sizes or price levels you re just saying how many different portion sizes and price levels you ll need If you reduce the number of portion sizes and price levels a message may warn you the highest portion sizes and price levels are the ones that will be eliminated Click Yes to continue and remove the higher sizes and price levels or No to abort the process If you eliminate previously defined higher prices and portions the changes are sent to the ECUs at the end of the Wizard If you increase the number of portion sizes and price levels a message reminds you that no prices and portions are affected by the change Click OK to continue the process 2 Click Next to proceed with the next step 4 August 2010 Brand Wizard gt Click Back at any step of the Wizard to return to a previous screen and mak
360. last hardware station activity Type of Data To run this report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s This report can only be run as a Current report August 2010 227 Configuration gt The configuration report shows the physical configuration and current Enable and Price Level status of all equipment in the selected station or group gt Information is sorted by hardware station name network etc gt For help with running the report see Run Advanced Reports Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Container Stock Report To understand the report Brand Name The name of each brand in your brand list Container Stock Count gt This report shows the stock The number of containers of the brand in stock status of all brands included in Container Inventory The type of container used for the brand gt The information in the report is Container Cost based on the most recent e i Inventory Check The cost you pay for each container of the brand entered in Brand List Setup gt For help running the report see i Inventory Reports Container Value Inventory Reports The retail value of each container of the brand derived from the retail price per volume unit Supplier The name of the supplier of the brand Type of Data The data in Inventory reports reflects the results of the most recent Inventory Check The computer does not communica
361. le button to assign a supplier to all brands that will be inventoried ERROR R52 Total Stock values must be entered Problem When running Initial Stock function you must fill in total stock amounts for as many of the brands as you will be tracking No stock amounts were entered Remedy Determine your initial inventory and enter in the amounts ERROR R53 Can t save date range that does not include today Problem When saving report options or saving a custom report all date ranges are relative to the date on which the report is actually run Therefore the date range must include today and will be interpreted as running the report for the last X days where X is the difference between the From date and today s date ERROR R54 Can t change Archive Dates when is selected Problem Archive dates can be directly chosen for a report only when Archive List is the option chosen If any other option is chosen the archive date list is intended to show the archive dates that will be included After acknowledging this message the previously selected dates will be restored Remedy If you do wish to select dates from the list click on archive list first ERROR R55 Printer Error Problem A non specific problem was detected with the printer and the report could not be printed The error number returned by the printing mechanism is given by Remedy Fix the printer Try rebooting If this is a long term problem you can save your reports as file
362. le uses a Product August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 124 Type column Black Russian Cock tail A 3 50 211 Black Russian Cock tail B 3 50 212 Black Russian Cock tail C 3 50 213 Vodka Liquor A 2 25 1 25 Vodka Liquor B 2 25 1 25 Vodka Liquor C 2 25 1 25 Coffee Liqueur Liquor A 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur Liquor B 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur Liquor C 1 50 0 75 Daiquiri Cock tail A 3 50 232 Daiquiri Cock tail B 3 50 233 Daiquiri Cock tail C 3 50 234 This excerpt uses a blank line between cocktails and does not have a Product Type column Black Russian A 3 50 211 Black Russian B 3 50 212 Black Russian C 3 50 213 Vodka A 2 25 1 25 Vodka B 2 25 1 25 Vodka C 2 25 1 25 Coffee Liqueur A 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur B 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur C 1 50 0 75 Daiquiri A 3 50 232 Daiquiri B 3 50 233 Daiquiri C 3 50 234 The method you use depends on the exporting program or your preference when creating the file in a spreadsheet or text editor Either method imports cocktails accurately You specify you re using a Product Type column when you enter a number for its Column order on the Import screen Type a zero if you re not using this column and make sure an intervening line appears between cocktail definitions in the import file What if lwant a price portion or PLU listed as zero in my database If you want an entry in your database to be zero for example
363. lease Notes for upgrade versions supported After reloading the previous version you must reinstall the current software to upgrade the database Any data already entered in the current database in will be lost None of the Infinity programs will run until you reinstall Are you sure you want to continue Problem Be aware that recovering from a backup or restore from previous version of the database will at least temporarily leave you in a state where none of the Infinity programs will run Read the message to make sure that your situation qualifies and you have all the required setup disks There is not any protection against making errors and you may end up with all data being lost Remedy Answer Yes to continue Question U207 Do you wish to backup full database from to Berg recommends that the destination be empty of all other files Problem Check the destination listed in the question A backup works best if the removable media or folder is free of all other files Remedy Answer Yes to continue with the backup Answer No if the wrong destination appears or you need to check if any files are located in the destination Question U208 Do you want to Remove the Infinity License Problem When your license has expired or is corrupted running utilities will often offer to allow you August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help to remove the license Remedy Answer Yes if you are no longer using Infinity or ne
364. lect the Export from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The custom export is deleted from the list August 2010 gt A custom export gives you the chance to specify your own export parameters and save them with a unique name gt Once you ve set up a custom export you can quickly run it without having to change any details gt To save time creating similar custom exports you can copy an existing custom export and save it with a new name This gives you a starting point for the new export and leaves the existing one intact gt You can include a custom export in a schedule To include a custom export in a schedule you may want to use a variable export name gt You must enable the Enterprise edition to create a custom export Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 252 New Custom Export To create a new custom export d 2 3 4 5 O N Pull down the Reports menu and click Custom Export Click New Type the New Name of your custom export Itcan be up to 31 characters Click Continue Follow the steps outlined in Export Report Data to set up this export You cant see an Archive List for a custom export Disregard the steps about running the export Click Save As to export to a different folder or filename You re changing the default folder and filename displayed on the Selectio
365. lecting all the price portion tables you want to receive the consecutively generated PLUs Use Remove All if needed to clear the Brand PLU Order list and start over Arrange the Brand PLU Order list in the correct PLU order with the Up or Down buttons or drag and drop to re arrange the order The top of the list receives the Starting PLU Enter the Starting PLU number Select a Price Level If you choose a particular Price Level the PLUs for all other Price Levels will remain untouched Select lt All gt if you want to generate the same PLU for all price levels or different PLUs for each price level Check the appropriate box to indicate whether all Price Levels or all Sizes will use the same PLU If there will be separate PLUs for both Price Levels and Sizes indicate whether PLUs will be spread across Sizes before Price Levels or Price Levels first Click Show Example If you are not sure how the arrangement you pick will work A pop up will show the PLU assignments for the first brand Click OK to exit the popup You can then make changes and click Show Example again to see new results 10 Select whether you want to send the PLUs to equipment where the brands are assigned 11 Click OK when you are satisfied with your selections The PLUs are immediately generated Go to Modify Multiple Prices and Portions and check the PLU tab to see the newly generated PLUSs August 2010 Generate PLUs gt
366. lem One of the components needed by Setup could not be loaded It is named by s It may be missing or one of the components required by it may be missing Remedy See S05 Diagnosis Call Berg with the Error number d An error occurred during the data move process d Problem The data move is the main process of moving files from the setup media to your hard disk An error has occurred on file indicated See S05 Disk set is not serialized Problem The serial number location was found but without a valid serial number See S10 Remedy Ask Berg Company for a properly serialized disk if S10 remedies do not work Failure to overwrite existing database Check returned od Problem User indicated that they wanted to overwrite the existing database but setup was unable to do this Remedy Clear the Infinity folder yourself and retry Also see S05 This system has a 286 or 386 processor A minimum of a 486 is required Please contact your local computer dealer regarding possible upgrades Problem Infinity will not run on systems less than a 486 Berg recommends that you use a Pentium for better performance Remedy Install on a more powerful PC Infinity requires at least the following Service Pack on the target machine Problem Microsoft often releases service packs for their Windows Operating Systems The required service pack level is not present on your PC Remedy Download the latest service pack from Microsoft web site and install on your PC before trying to in
367. lem The copy dispenser function will only work between like dispensers The target dispenser does not match the source dispenser The copy cannot be performed Remedy Check that you have chosen the correct dispensers You cannot copy to a dispenser with a different number of sizes Problem When copying dispensers each must support the same number of sizes since price portion information is copied This message will most likely appear when copying from a TAP 1 dispenser that is using alternate sizes to one that does not or vice versa The copy cannot be performed Remedy Check dispensers named or change the alternate sizes setting on one of the dispensers You cannot copy a dispenser to itself Problem You have chosen the same dispenser as the source and destination No action will be taken Remedy Select a different source or destination dispenser There are no matching dispensers to copy Problem When copying using station or groups to describe the target at least one ECU or dispenser in the group must match the source item see M50 53 In this case there are no matches at all and so the function cannot be performed Remedy You have likely chosen the wrong station or group Change source or target Diagnosis Use individual ECU or dispenser as targets to see why each does not match the source item ECU does not support the selected dispenser type Problem The ECU version does not support the dispenser type you have indicated For example certain vers
368. les To archive and clear sales 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Archive and Clear Z 2 Select lt Master Group gt as the Equipment Name Archive amp Clear Sales miata Grill wants to clear sales at all equipment gt When you archive and clear 3 Glick Run sales you reset all totals at the 4 Click OK to confirm ECUs to zero and send the data Wait while the data is retrieved from the ECU s to archive records at the 5 View save or print the report See View Report computer 6 Click Close to exit the View screen gt See Archive and Clear Sales for 7 lf prompted click OK to confirm closing the screen without saving or more information printing gt See Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report for a description of the report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Quick Start Task 15 Usage Report To run a Usage report y Pull down the Reports menu Click Advanced Reports 2 Select Usage You ll see lt Master Group gt is already selected for the Equipment Name which is what we want 3 Click View Wait while the report is run 4 View save or print the report See View Report Since we used the Most Recent Archive data to run the report the totals are the same as those in the Archive and Clear Sales report 5 Click Close to exit the View screen 6 If prompted click OK to confirm closing the screen without saving or printing U
369. les activity For each hour listed in the report the Day of Month Starting Hour and Ending Hour are shown Shifts If you defined the hours of your shifts when you selected Report Options all sales from an entire shift are reported on one line in the report rather than sales being reported for each hour Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data To run this report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is determined by which Clear Don t Clear option you selected on the Data Storage and Display Options screen Clear clears all hourly sales data each time you clear sales Don t Clear leaves hourly sales data intact when you clear sales This report can only be run as a Current report August 2010 Hourly Sales X4 gt The hourly sales report is a summary of sales for the past 48 hours of sales activity at the selected station or group gt This report is only run as a current report because it uses data stored in the ECUs The data is stored separately from the sales data used for most other reports gt For help with running the report see see Run a Current Sales Report or Run an Advanced Report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 235 Laser Guide Report To understand the report Button Assignments
370. libration Mode or exit Infinity 4 Click OK to confirm the calibration message The Enter Calibration Mode screen displays again 5 Repeat steps 2 4 for each device you want to put in calibration mode 6 Click Cancel to exit the Enter Calibration Mode screen Go to the dispensers and pour drink s using a measuring cup or graduated cylinder Record the Laser gun button number or the All Bottle coded pourer number or the tap controller number and the exact amount of each pour 8 Perform the steps outlined in Calibrate Dispensers The only difference is you have already entered calibration mode and made your calibration pours You still have to select one device at a time in Infinity to enter the amount of the calibration pours If the level of accuracy is not acceptable for a pour and you want to conserve trips to the bar click No when prompted to recalibrate at this time Write down all dispensers that need additional pours When you finish entering pour amounts make another trip to the bar for additional pours and then return to the computer to reenter the amounts 9 When you ve finished calibration be sure to exit calibration mode for all equipment The ECUs are not automatically taken out of calibration mode when you complete the calibration process You can also exit calibration mode If you change your mind get interrupted or for any other reason need to take the equipment out of calibration mode before the calibration pro
371. ll continue ERROR INF34 Can t exit program Critical activity in progress Problem An Infinity function is performing a task that normally should not be interrupted This message should appear when you are trying to stop a program by abnormal means such as shutting down Windows Remedy Wait for Infinity to complete the ongoing task and then close the program ERROR INF35 Required fields have not been filled in Problem At least one field on this form has not been filled in that must be entered in order to complete the operation In many cases the focus will be returned to the missing field Remedy Identify one or more blank fields and fill them in ERROR INF36 Column exceeds range Line will be skipped Problem The column number is outside the accepted range of values The line given by will be skipped Remedy Identify the column and the line and check the file Check that the column number has been identified correctly If not change the column number Otherwise change the value to be within the range ERROR INF37 Missing or empty column Line will be skipped Problem The column number should contain some value The line given by will be skipped Remedy Identify the column and the line and check the file Check that the column number has been identified correctly If not change the column number Otherwise add a value to this column ERROR INF38 There are not enough lines in file Problem The file is required
372. ll store the values into the database Learn mode should be performed only after all taps have been calibrated Learned portions on uncalibrated taps will not be recorded correctly and if you calibrate later the learned portions will not pour correctly Do you want to continue Problem At least one of the taps on this ECU has not been calibrated If a tap is not calibrated and you learn a portion the portion calculated will be incorrect The brand will pour the correct amount but all reports using volume will be wrong Furthermore if you later decide to calibrate the brand will no longer pour the desired amount since the portion was inaccurate to begin with Remedy Answer No and calibrate all taps before proceeding with this step If you know which taps have been calibrated and you will only learn portions for those taps you may answer Yes and continue WARNING This will clear all sales from the ECU Are you sure you want to clear and restore memory Problem Clear and Restore memory will load the ECU with all data related to the ECU from the database However this data does not include the sales currently stored in the ECU The clear will remove all sales data from the ECU and the restore cannot replace that data Remedy Answer Yes if you are willing to accept this limitation or your ECU is not functioning correctly anyway Answer No and run an Archive and Clear Sales if you want to save the sales data in the ECU There are still some dispenser
373. lossary T Z Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S LU VW X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary T U V W X Y Z Click a letter above to jump Scroll to terms in alphabetical order TAP 1 Beer dispensing unit consisting of an ECU and up to eight tap heads with portion buttons and or flow meters TAP 1 Calibration A tap s dispensing mode determines its calibration Note there is no Calibration Portions shortcut button when calibrating a tap Tap Head Flow Meter To calibrate a flow meter tap you ll be prompted to calibrate first in Timer Mode and then in Flow Meter mode This provides accurate calibration values in the event the Timer is used as a backup for Flow Meter operation First pour measure and enter a portion amount in Timer Mode and repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy Then pour measure and enter a portion amount in Flow Meter Mode and repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy Tap Head Only Timer Mode Calibrate a tap in Timer Mode as you would any other dispenser pour measure and enter a portion amount and repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy Flow Meter Only Monitor Mode There is no Tap Head and no portion control Therefore the tap has no expected calibration portion amounts Pour a fairly large portion 16 fl oz measure and enter the amount This actual amount is compared with the amount recorded by the ECU Repeat until satisfied with the level of accuracy
374. lso an ending PLU bookend there is no place for the PLU increment Remedy Set at least one of these fields to be zero Syntax error in ecr cfg file Problem The contents of the configuration file have been corrupted Remedy Reinstall Interface and use a store disk or backup disk to restore the ecr cfg file Diagnosis The ecr cfg can be sent to Berg for analysis Internal error trying to read ecr cfg file Problem The config file may be corrupted or the disk may be corrupt or there may be a system error Remedy See ECR51 Unknown keyword in ecr cfg file Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 363 Problem See ECR52 ERROR ECR55 Wrong number of parameters Problem See ECR52 ERROR ECR56 An old style ecr cfg file was processed All modifier information will be lost Problem An older style ecr cfg file was found and used Since this style cannot be interpreted entirely the modifier information if present will be lost and will not be sent to the ECUs If you do not use any modifiers this will not present any problems Remedy Under driver settings click on save as defaults after making any changes needed This will write the config file in the correct format ERROR ECR357 At least one ECU had a communication error Problem When reading or writing driver or modifier settings one of the ECUs had a communication error Therefore the information being viewed does not necessarily reflect the settings of all of the ECUs or the chang
375. lt from a problem with the setup media or your hard disk Remedy See S05 Warning S110 Serial number mismatch The customer serial number from the database does not match the serial number of this product update You must select a different destination Problem When you are upgrading the serial number of your existing database must match the serial number stamped on the setup media You either have the wrong setup disk or are pointing to the wrong destination folder Warning S111 There is not enough space dd bytes in s Please free up some space or change the target location to a different disk Problem Setup has determined that there is not enough room on the disk drive to perform the installation Delete files on the drive in order to complete the installation If there are not enough August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help files you can delete you will need to select a different disk drive and or buy a larger drive Remember depending on how you use Infinity additional disk space may be required beyond the disk needed to finish the install Warning S112 uninstaller setup failed to initialize You may not be able to uninstall this product Problem Setup attempts to create an uninstall function if you later choose to remove Infinity This function could not be set up and automated uninstall will not be available Warning S113 Unable to register ActiveX for s Run this program As Administrator after in
376. lues of the first brand Proceed with making test pours to determine which specific brands need further calibration 10 Click Close to exit 11 Repeat steps 2 10 for any other dispensers August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 25 Quick Start Task 12 Make Test Pours To make test pours y Go to the dispenser e g Main Laser 16 where you performed Dispenser Calibration 2 Using a graduated cylinder or measuring cup make several test pours of gt various brands at the gun particularly those with a different viscosity Record the exact amount of the pours Rw Compare the test pour amounts with the expected portion size to see if the brands are calibrated correctly For example Uptown Grill used Brandy to calibrate the dispenser Brandy now pours a correct Small Portion of 1 oz However Rum on Button 2 pours closer to 1 5 oz for a Small Portion So we need to perform brand calibration for Button 2 Go to another dispenser and repeat steps 2 4 Perform Brand Calibration for each brand you ve determined needs further calibration D o August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Quick Start Task 13 Brand Calibration To calibrate a specific brand Brand Calibration gt Perform brand calibration for any brand that is still not pouring correctly after a dispenser calibration gt If you have an All Bottle 7 dispenser s
377. lumns on the Export screen See Export Cocktail Columns August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 130 How does the export file show where one cocktail recipe ends and another begins Cocktail recipes are distinguished one of two ways using a Product Type column or using a blank line in the file If you use a Product Type column the word Cocktail in the Product Type column signals the start of a cocktail definition Any succeeding lines in the file with a different product type are considered ingredients in the cocktail recipe As soon as another line appears with Cocktail as the product type a new definition starts If you don t use a Product Type column there will be a blank line in the file between each cocktail definition The following excerpt from a sample cocktail export file uses a Product Type column Black Russian Cock tail A 3 50 211 Black Russian Cock tail B 3 50 212 Black Russian Cock tail C 3 50 213 Vodka Liquor A 2 25 1 25 Vodka Liquor B 2 25 1 25 Vodka Liquor C 2 25 1 25 Coffee Liqueur Liquor A 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur Liquor B 1 50 0 75 Coffee Liqueur Liquor C 1 50 0 75 Daiquiri Cock tail A 3 50 232 Daiquiri Cock tail B 3 50 233 Daiquiri Cock tail C 3 50 234 This excerpt uses a blank line between cocktails and does not have a Product Type column Black Russian A 3 50 211 Black Russian B 3 50 212 Black Russian C 3 50 213 Vodka A 2 25
378. lut Liquor C 3 1 50 5 00 508 In this file excerpt Brand name is column 1 Product Type is column 2 Price Level is column 3 Size is column 4 Portion is column 5 Portion Price is column 6 and PLU is column 7 You specify the column order in your file and all lines use the same order You can also leave out columns you don t need For example if you don t include price levels or PLUs your export file may look like this Absolut Liquor 1 0 50 1 00 Absolut Liquor 2 1 00 3 50 Absolut Liquor 3 1 50 4 25 Portions in the export file are listed in the unit of measure set up for your database Prices are listed in the unit set up for your computer How do low what numbers to enter for Columns on the Export screen See Export Columns August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 120 About Exporting Cocktail Prices and Portions Export Cocktail Prices and Why or when should export cocktail prices and portions Portions Use Export to save to a file any cocktail price portion information in your For how to steps see Export database Typically you export prices and portions if you want to import cocktail prices and portions them somewhere else For example you need them for another Infinity installation or you want the information available to edit in a spreadsheet See About Importing Cocktail Prices and Portions What does it mean to export cocktail prices and portions
379. m You cannot delete this item You have reached the minimum count for this type of item Remedy Use rename if you want to change the name of the item or create others before you delete this one There are portions for this product which are not shown Choose a higher number of price levels or sizes for this product type to see them Problem The price table or cocktail definition has non zero portions for sizes price level or ingredients which are not displayed This is likely because of the selected sizes or price levels for the user s system Remedy If you expected to see more price levels or sizes in Infinity use Pouring Brand Operations Select sizes and price levels Choose a larger number or sizes price levels or ingredients for the price table in question If you do not expect to have any additional portions use Diagnostics Repair Database to zero out the unneeded portions There must be at least one container in the system Operation cannot be completed Problem You cannot delete this item You have reached the minimum count for this type of item Remedy Use Rename if you want to change the name of the item or create others before you delete this one was recorded The minimum pour amount is Problem For Flow Meter Only calibration for taps is the amount poured as recorded by the unit However calibration cannot be effectively performed unless a larger amount is poured and measured This minimum is given by Remedy Try again making
380. mber to switch back to the correct assigned brand when you re done testing gt Are the portion sizes entered accurately at the computer Check the portion sizes for the assigned brand at the price gt Are you attempting to pour complimentary drinks where comps are disallowed August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Troubleshooting Software Problems Software runs but not properly gt Check available hard disk space gt Check your system resources If they re at 50 or below close other programs gt Did you recently change anything on your computer particularly installing other software If you ve been using Infinity without any trouble and then suddenly encounter a problem this could be the cause Error and Warning Messages gt Error messages warnings and popup questions are numbered for easy identification and reference When the messages appear in a list box status line or otherwise on a form or in a file they are not numbered See the Software Messages section or online help for a complete list of message explanations August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help EH Troubleshooting Report and Export Problems Report problems are usually related either to printer errors or database errors Reports do not print If Infinity reports do not print at all investigate the problem by this step sequence 1 Verify that the printer is turned on o
381. mber you can also choose to automatically delete sales data older than a certain date by using Setup s Configuration Data Storage Length Answer Yes if you want to delete all archive sales Question S202 Do you want to load the sample database Problem A sample database is included with new DEMO and DISPLAY installations The sample database is populated with ECUs and assignments and is helpful in quickly illustrating some of Infinity s features Answer Yes if you would like this database to be installed Answer No if you want to build your own database Question S203 WARNING Overwrite will delete all equipment setup prices and portions and stored sales in the folder s Are you sure you want to do this Problem If you overwrite the database you will lose all set up information you have already entered such as ECU brands and sales Overwriting results in an empty database If you intended to upgrade this database answer No If you really are willing to junk your previous database answer Yes Question S204 Do you want a backup made of your current installation Problem The current database can be backed up by Setup if you like This creates a full copy of the Infinity folder in a sub folder named Backup If you need to restore this version of the database later simply copy the entire contents of the Backup folder into the Infinity folder If you want to have this safety net answer Yes If you have already done a full backup of the data
382. me Click Open The file is deleted You can only delete export files here To delete report files see Open or Delete Report Files August 2010 gt You can export report data from Infinity archive records or current sales data in the ECUs gt You must enable the Enterprise edition to export gt If you ve enabled the Enterprise edition you can select which export columns to include gt Export files can be in either text or Excel format gt See also Custom Exports Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 251 Custom Exports To find custom exports 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Custom Export To create a new custom export See New Custom Export To run a custom export 1 Select the Export from the drop down list 2 Click Run A message displays when the export is complete To copy a custom export Select the Export you want to copy Click Show All Options Click Copy Type the New Name you want to give the copy Click Yes to confirm There are now two custom exports with the same settings Select the one with the new name and click Modify to make changes to the export settings To modify a custom export See Modify Custom Export To rename a custom export 1 Select the Export from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename i 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a custom export 1 Se
383. me will include the end user s business name Repeat steps 2 4 for each end user Itis then easy to switch between different end users using a single install since each end user has a backup folder with their business name and all of these backups are using your serial number To view an end user s database you ve backed up use restore full database The business name is displayed on the Infinity title bar so itis easy to see which database you are viewing To transport a database to the end user 1 Make a backup of the database to removable media changing the serial number to the end user s Install Infinity at the site with the user s serial number Restore the full database using the preconfigured database copy you ve made with the appropriate serial number Determine if the database at the user site is the master copy as opposed to the copy on your PC Itis important to keep track of which is the master and which is a copy It is usually the case that the end user may make changes on site and their database should be considered the master and not the copy on your PC To make changes for the end user using your laptop 1 2 3 4 At the end user PC make a backup of the database to removable media changing the serial number to your own Restore the full database to your laptop Now you can work at the bar knowing you have a copy of the user s master database If you make changes make
384. mo program Problem Demo Infinity can be switched to do live connection But only a single ECU is allowed to be connected This operation has attempted to communicate with a different ECU Remedy Install DEMO again selecting a different ECU number ERROR CM26 You must upgrade your EPROM to use this version of Infinity Problem The type of operation cannot be performed by this version of EPROM Some features cannot be performed by all EPROM s Remedy Contact BERG for the latest version of EPROM for your ECU type ERROR CM27 The EPROM version has been changed Run Restore Station Memory before continuing Problem The ECU version type has not been recorded properly in the database Remedy Run Clear and Restore Memory Diagnosis Run Diagnostics Get Version ERROR CM28 MEMORY CORRUPTION DETECTED Operation will continue Problem The ECU has examined its memory and found corruption The current operation will continue but you may not be able to trust the state of the ECU Remedy Clear and restore memory You may need to cycle power on the unit Diagnosis debuginf txt ERROR CM29 Unexpected sequence number Retry operation or delete ECU Problem The EPROM and PC have gotten out of sequence The current operation is stopped Often this is a timing problem This can also mean that the ECU does not support sequence numbers Remedy H this is a timing problem retry operation If sequence numbers are not supported you will need to delete the ECU
385. mounts for one brand only gt When you re satisfied with the level of accuracy for the selected brand its timing values are copied to all other brands at the dispenser gt Dispenser calibration is 1544 Infinity Enter the exact amount poured in the 1544 Portion field Calibration Portions Calibration will be the most accurate if your calibration pours are the same as typical pours of the selected brand To change the Expected calibration portion amount to match a typical pour click Calibration Portions This is a shortcut to the Calibration Portions screen where you can enter the calibration portion s for the brand Entries can be either permanent for the ECU type or temporary for this brand only during this session What happens next When you click OK the software calculates the level of accuracy for the pours using the numbers you ve entered If the actual pours are not close enough to the expected portion size Infinity will prompt you to pour again Each time you pour measure and enter a new portion amount Infinity uses the amount to calculate new timing values You ll see the newly calculated values at the bottom of the Dispenser Calibration screen Each successive pour should bring you closer to the calibration portion size Once you re satisfied with the level of accuracy of the selected brand s pour its timing values are copied to all other brands at the dispenser You can change your level of accuracy a
386. mpany LLC Infinity Help 12 About Exporting Brand Prices and Portions Export Prices and Portions Why or when should export prices and portions gt For how to steps see Export Use Export to save to a file any price portion information in your database Brand Prices and Portions Typically you export prices and portions if you want to import them somewhere else For example you need them for another Infinity installation or you want the information available to edit in a spreadsheet See About Importing Brand Prices and Portions What does it mean to export prices and portions Exporting means you tell Infinity to copy the prices and portions entered in your Infinity database to a file What will be in the export fle The expor file contains a separate line of text for each size of every price level of every brand you re exporting Each line lists the price portion and PLU at the specified size and price level Each separate item in a line is called a column Export Columns are separated by a single character called a column separator usually a comma See the following excerpt from a sample export file Absolut Liquor A 1 0 50 1 00 500 Absolut Liquor A 2 1 00 3 50 501 Absolut Liquor A 3 1 50 4 25 502 Absolut Liquor B 1 0 50 1 75 503 Absolut Liquor B 2 1 00 3 95 504 Absolut Liquor B 3 1 50 4 75 505 Absolut Liquor C 1 0 50 2 00 506 Absolut Liquor C 2 1 00 4 00 507 Abso
387. ms saving the new ECU Second we want to set up a Dispenser network ECU 1 Select the name of the Network you set up for Dispenser network ECUs e g Uptown Grill Dispenser 2 Type the unique ECU number Uptown Grille Tap2 ECU will be numbered 2 3 Select Dispenser Network as the ECU Type IW CA DN Wu O N O w August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help mm Hep Al Hest Sect ac LO number atc Coes tot eami r he catatese Ee Vy Omperser Network 4 Click Set ECU Number to communicate with the equipment and set this number in the ECU itself 5 Click OK to confirm the message Go to the ECU and cycle power pull the power out and plug it right back in to the power supply Wait for communication to occur which assigns the ECU number Click in the Hardware Station field and type a name for this ECU e g Left Tap 2 Choose a hardware station name which helps you easily distinguish this ECU in a selection list when you assign brands run reports or other operations Select the correct Device Type for each Device Address On dispenser networks a P3 Hub is considered a device as well as Tap 2 taps The address of each device will be communicated to the hardware when you click OK 8 Type a new Device Name for each Device Address Use meaningful names e g Left POS or the brand of a tap Left Sam Adams to help distinguish your dispensers easily in
388. multiple ECUs An ECU can only be in one sales station but can be in multiple groups Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help EA Group Setup To find group setup 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Groups To set up a new group Click New 2 Type the group s unique New Name The name can be up to 31 characters 3 Click Continue Click Cancel to stop setting up a group 4 Select an entry in the Selection List list and drag and drop to the Current Definition list or click lt Add to move the entry Repeat for all equipment included in this group If you make a mistake select the entry and drag and drop or click Remove gt to move the entry back to the Selection List You can create an empty group if you want to make the station group assignments later Empty groups do not appear in group selection lists when you perform Infinity operations such as enabling disabling groups running reports etc However any empty groups are deleted if you close Infinity 5 Click OK to save all your entries and exit the screen To modify a group It s a good idea to clear sales at the ECU s before modifying a group if you want the modified group s reports to reflect sales only from the date you modified the group Select the Group from the drop down list The only group you can t modify is a Master Group There s no need to modify a master group because by definition
389. n 25 fl oz 7 5 ml and 300 fl oz 3000 ml The default 1544 portion size is 1 fl oz 30 ml Activator Ring A circular receiver attached to the l Box that reads the coded pattern of rings on All Bottle coded pourers It sits in a holder when not in use and easily slips over the top of a bottle for pouring Add a Head Add a head is a zero priced size typically set at a small portion Add a Head Limit The maximum number 0 10 of consecutive add a head pours allowed Setting the limit to 0 means there is no limit This feature is only available with 3 0 or later TAP1 EPROMs or TAP 2 Add a Head Open Percent How far open a tap valve should be when pouring an add a head 100 is normal and represents the full open position By entering a value less than 100 you will get a foamier head Available only with TAP 2 All Bottle Code Chart All Bottle Code Chart PRICE LEVEL CODE POURER LIGHTS mii c 2 mjii Ce 3 mjii mm 4 mji Com 5 Wmi m o e vllt m m 7 mjii emm All Bottle Dispenser A unit mounted under the bar the l Box with an attached activator ring that slips over the top of coded pourers inserted in liquor bottles The All Bottle dispenser provides portion control pouring for an unlimited number of brands Each Infinity ECU can control one All Bottle dispenser Alternate Size An alternate size is a portion size that can be set for a TAP 1 tap If you enable the alternate size feature bartenders can use the repeat
390. n is installed gt You can always select different settings for specific equipment if you don t want to use your system settings gt The information box at the top of the Device Settings screen tells you if a selected device has the system settings Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Description of Device Settings Device Settings Repeat Enabled enables the repeat button on taps for repeat pours Tap 1 taps allow enabling of either Alternate Size or Repeat but not both Tap 2 taps can enable both features If you select both options in your System Settings Tap 1 taps will show Repeat Enabled and Alternate Size disabled Select specific Tap 1 equipment in Device Settings if you want to select an option different from your System Settings Selecting neither the Alternate Size or Repeat option disables the repeat button at the taps Repeat Delay is the number of seconds 0 8 9 9 the tap pauses between identical repeat pours Dispensing is the pouring control method used for taps Tap Head Flow Meter is flow meter in line portion control using a Tap head Flow Meter Only is flow meter in line This simply monitors volume with no Tap head Tap Head Only is portion control by timer using a Tap head no flow meter End of Keg indicates the preferred notification when a flow meter detects an empty keg This is disabled if the pouring control method is Tap Head Only Immediate means immediately pause the
391. n First Sort to see brand information subtotaled for the first sort level For example if you sort by Net ECU Disp you ll see subtotals for each dispenser at each ECU If you sort by Descriptor you ll see subtotals for each descriptor group Columns Tab From this tab you select which columns appear on the report Select an item from the list on the right and click Add or drag the item to the list on the left The columns appear on the report from left to right in the order they appear in your list Select an item and use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop items to correctly order them Column items vary depending on whether you ve selected Sales or Usage as the type of report For links to descriptions of each column item see Column Selection Report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 298 Column Separator This is the character used to separate columns of information in each line of the export import file The default is a comma LL Comment Character The comment character is any character used to denote a comment line A header line describing the export will be produced as the first line of any export starting with this character You should enter a character recognized by the importing software application This character tells the importing software to ignore this line as a data line Comp and Cancel Modifiers Your sales terminal may use modifiers to identify comp or canceled drinks If
392. n also connect one ECU to a demo version of Infinity August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Brand Wizard Introduction What is the Brand Wizard The Wizard steps you through the process of loading Berg s brand list to your computer How can I get to the Brand Wizard Brand Wizard gt To save time entering the name of every brand in your system The Brand Wizard appears the first time you run Infinity in a new you can easily load Berg s installation Or pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand brand list using the Brand Operations Click Brand Wizard Wizard Do I have to use the Brand Wizard Each brand in the list has No If you click Cancel you can exit The Berg brand list is not loaded You factory default prices and can use the Wizard later to load the Berg brand list OR go to Load Initial portions according to its product Brand List type The Wizard lets you To proceed with the Brand Wizard replace these defaults with your own Click Next In the next step you select which product types from the brand list you want You can change the number of to change and or load sizes and price levels and the default prices and portions for specific product types gt Setting your own defaults is useful when you have several brands within a product type with the same prices and portions gt If you don t want to set your own default prices and portions you
393. n closes Why would I want more categories Creating new price portion categories is useful if you have dispensers in locations that require different sets of prices e g bar dispensers restaurant dispensers and dance floor dispensers You can use the Standard price portion category for a brand in one location and define names for additional price portion categories used for the brand in different locations August 2010 Category Setup gt Category refers to a set of price levels with prices and portion sizes at each price level gt You can think of a category as a three dimensional table filled with slots for prices and portions for each price level gt The Standard category is the basic set of price levels assigned to each brand when it s added to the brand list gt You can create additional price portion categories if you need them For example you may be having a special event or promotion but you re already using all the price levels of your Standard price portion category gt You can create a new category of prices and portions eg Oktoberfest or St Paddy s Each new category you create includes a new set of price levels for which you can define new prices and portions gt You choose which brands to include in a new category Only one price portion category can be assigned to a dispenser at a time See Switch Category to change which category a brand uses Copyright 20
394. n define a descriptor when you set up or modify a brand There are no restrictions on the use of this field A descriptor s primary use is in sorting brands on a Column Selection report To use this feature you must select Descriptor as acolumn item and also select it as a sort option It can also be used to sort brand lists in Infinity For example if you assign a Vodka descriptor to all vodka brands and a Rum descriptor to all rum brands the brand list can be sorted by these liquor types Similarly Well Call and Premium could be used as descriptors Or if you use Laser gun buttons as descriptors all brands assigned to button 1 appear first then those assigned to button 2 etc Device Name This is usually a dispenser but it also includes any other hardware connected to an ECU that can be addressed and names such as a P3 Hub Dial Rate The millisecond duration of each tone in the computer modem s dial 70 is the default Dispenser 1 2 and 3 Laser dispensers are listed under Dispenser 1 and 2 If you only have one Laser dispenser assign it to Dispenser 1 All Bottle 7 and All Bottle ID dispensers are listed under Dispenser 3 You can select lt None gt for any of the three dispensers Dispenser Calibration Each Laser gun button All Bottle coded pourer and TAP 1 tap must be calibrated You can speed up the process for Laser and All Bottle dispensers using a copy feature called dispenser calibration Dispenser calib
395. n does not delete any registered users It simply installation must log on with a disables protected entry to the system and lets anyone use the software user name and password gt See Security Options for links to help setting up users Enable Passwords August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 55 Security List To customize security level names 1 Access Configuration Options 2 Click Security 3 Click Security List gt You can change the number To add new security levels or rename current levels and names of your security 1 Highlight a current security level name or click an empty field levels Level 1 is the highest security clearance and 8 is the lowest Level 1 gt You can define between four accesses level 1 functions plus functions in levels 2 8 level 2 accesses its own plus functions in levels 3 8 level 3 accesses its own plus functions in levels 4 8 etc You must define at least 4 security levels using the numbers and eight different security levels with unique names for 1 4 All levels must be consecutive you can t skip a number Each name EEN en y Me can be up to 31 characters gt To customize which Infinity 2 Type a new name for the security level functions are accessible at each security level see Function 3 Click OK to save your changes Secunia lace To delete a current security level 1 Highlight and delete the security level name All levels
396. n in Diagnostics mode A form used by Infinity was not properly closed down when the program was closed Normally this will not cause any further problems Diagnosis Send information about this error and the circumstance which preceded it to Berg From Date must precede To Date Problem When a date range is given the from or start date must always precede the to or end date Remedy Check the dates and enter a proper range Value must be in range to Reset to previous value Problem A numeric value entered was too small or too large Usually this message will give the acceptable range of numbers The displayed value will be reset to a value that is legal Remedy Enter a number within the range shown Please select an ECU Problem The operation requested requires that an ECU number be entered or selected Remedy Enter the ECU number Unable to continue test Problem A loopback or comm test cannot be completed This will usually be preceded by some system error message Remedy Provide Remedy for the initial error message Diagnosis If there is no other error message turn on Diagnostics and run test again Wrong version of VSVBX VBX Problem The wrong version of the version checking code was found Remedy Reinstall or get a newer version of Infinity to install Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR INF14 ERROR INF15 ERROR INF16 ERROR INF17 ERROR INF19 ERROR INF20 ERROR INF21 ERROR INF22
397. n it is added to the brand list and these defaults are given the name Standard You click Modify to make changes to the currently defined prices and portions for the brand gt To save time entering identical prices and portions use Save As Default for a brand and then Load Defaults to another brand or copy one brand s prices and portions to multiple brands Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 13 Modify Multiple Prices and Portions To modify multiple prices and portions po sch mr N o CO o Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions Select a Product Type When you modify prices and portions for multiple brands you do it by product type Select a Category If you have only one category this selection does not appear Select lt All gt to modify multiple prices and portions for all categories from the same screen Select a specific category to see its prices and portions for brands in the product type Click Multiple If necessary make any changes to your Product Type Category and Brand selections You ll see the selections you made on the previous screen If you choose you can select a single brand here Otherwise leave the Brand selection as lt None gt to see all brands in the selected product type and category Click Continue Click the Portion tab and type the correct Portion amount for each Price Level and Size listed
398. n line and properly loaded with paper 2 Verify that the printer cable is securely fastened at each end to the printer and to the proper computer port 3 Verify that the printer is set up as the default printer in Windows Infinity prints all reports using the default printer 4 Execute the printer self test If necessary refer to the printer manual for directions to execute a printer self test If the printer self test does not print then the problem is in the printer Repair or replace the printer If the printer self test prints as it should then the problem is probably in the computer 5 If the printer is ready but Infinity reports still don t print try printing something from another software application H other applications can print restart the computer to try to reestablish the printer connection Incomplete reports gt Check the paper supply gt Check the printer s print head Brush out any dust or paper impeding the print head gt Did the computer suffer a loss of power while a report was running Even a momentary flicker in the power supply as sometimes occurs during storms can cause database errors if a report is in progress gt Perform the Infinity database diagnostic procedures included in the Utilities program See Check the Database for Errors Rebuild the Database Index Files and Repair the Database in the Database Management section gt Reload the backup copy of system configurat
399. n not allowed for current security level Problem Each user and each function has an assigned security level The current user does not have high enough security to perform the function requested Remedy Change to the user with higher security or use setup to increase the security for the user You can also lower the security level for the function August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 399 Infinity INF Warnings INF100 109 INF110 119 INF 150 159 Warning INF100 Berg recommends that you switch to a higher resolution or use small fonts Problem All Infinity forms can t be displayed properly with your current desktop settings Remedy Change resolution to the recommendation given in the releases notes or change from large fonts to small fonts Warning INF101 This operation was not completely successful Problem At least one ECU did not respond to this request This operation may have set a temporary state such as enable which is not saved in the database until we are done In other cases the operation is considered successful and is saved in the database The operation will be broadcast periodically until the non communicating ECUs respond Remedy Fix communication or other problem and retry this operation You may also make use of Clear and Restore Memory or the automatic retry available for some partial operations Warning INF102 A conflict exists in the decimal and thousand separator settings Numeri
400. n where you don t know the software version or serial number 1 Insert the Infinity CD 2 Click Install DBExam program and follow the installation prompts 3 Run the program by clicking on its icon 4 Click Next and browse to the drive and directory of the database to be identified The identity of the database will be displayed in the list window POSTest Utility POS Test is a program used to troubleshoot and test serial POS interfaces The POSTest utility shows you the output of the driver and the response of the sales terminal This can be very useful in determining interface problems One or two serial com ports are needed by this program You can do 3 things with POS Test 1 POS Test can act as a mock POS terminal You can watch the signal being sent from the Berg ECU and manually send an ACK signal NACK signal or have an ACK signal automatically sent You can use this to see if the Berg ECU responds correctly to the incoming signals and is sending the correct signal 2 POS Test can be used as a monitor to watch the signals as they go toa POS terminal and back to the Berg ECU You can use this to see if the Berg ECU is sending the correct signal and if the POS terminal is sending the correct signal back 3 POS Test can mimic a Berg ECU You can select PLUs to send to the POS terminal POSTEST works with any Berg ECU which supports serial interface It will not work with the parallel driver A null modem and a serial
401. n will be sent to ECU Values are NOT within accuracy Do you wish to recalibrate this brand now Problem The difference of the amount you poured and the target volume was not within the accuracy that you desired You may get better pouring results if you repeat the calibration process Remedy Answer Yes to repeat calibration using the values from the calibration just completed If this question seems to come up too readily and pouring seems to work accurately you may want to change you accuracy percentage Use Calibration Units and Accuracy Answer No to accept the calibration values but stop calibrating If you answer Cancel if you have made a mistake no changes will be sent to the ECU and you can re enter the measured portions Question M364 Do you want to use the High Flow pourer default values on the All Bottle Problem When pressing the defaults button on the Initialize Calibration Values form you need to indicate whether you are using the high flow or regular pourers They use different starting calibration values Both should be calibrated after setting the defaults Remedy Answer Yes to use high flow values Answer No to use regular pourer values Question M365 Reducing the number of sizes or prices levels will remove higher sizes and price levels from the current prices and portions definitions for one or more products These price levels and sizes will have their portions set to zero and will not pour Do you want to continue Pro
402. n you run a laser Guide report you may change the Laser button codes for each brand on the gun gt Each gun is shown ina separate form Initially the button codes are just the button numbers gt You may change these to a printed code on the stickers that you may have placed on the buttons gt These codes will be remembered for these brands if you choose to run this report again gt If you are not using stickers do not make any changes to the numbers gt See also Laser Guide Report for a description of the report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help am Run a Variance Report To run a variance report 1 Pull down the Reports menu Click Advanced Reports Variance Report 2 Select Variance Report gt To run the Variance report you 3 Select the Equipment Name for which you want to run the report must enter the sales collected If you ve set up any groups or sales stations they appear in the list at the sales terminal for each Otherwise select a hardware station brand in the report 4 Click Show Archives to see a list of archive dates gt See also Variance Report for a 5 Set End of Day End of Week on the General Sort and Selections tabs if description of the report you want to change options for this report only Click View to run the report and view it on the screen OR Click Print to run the report and send it to the printer without viewing Wait while th
403. n your new PC using the install CD with your serial number 3 Activate the software on the new PC by phone fax or email using the normal activation sequence Note that the expiration date for the software on the new PC will be same as the original license August 2010 Transfer your License gt You may transfer your license and Infinity software to another PC gt You can t just transfer your license if you plan to change the PC motherboard hard disk or Operating System A new license will need to be generated Contact Berg before you do this Note that Windows Update will not require a new license Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help EA Remove a License To remove an Infinity license 1 2 O N Close Infinity Run Infinity Utilities Ifyou don t have a desktop icon use Windows Start All Programs to find the Berg Infinity folder Click Berg Infinity Utilities Pull down the File menu and click Remove Select how you want to contact Berg Company and click Continue If the software is not currently activated you will jump directly to step 6 Contact Berg with identifying information by phone fax or email Much of the remainder of the process is like the activation process with the addition of a removal reason Select a removal reason You may add a free form text reason also if you like When Berg contacts you enter the Remove Refere
404. nal gt All dispensers in free pour mode are taken out of this mode when you choose Exit Free Pour OR when you leave the Infinity program gt There is no free pour for TAP 2 gt To detect abuse any time you enter or exit Free Pour the ECU will log the event gt The Power Loss and Interface Log report will show you when Free Pour mode started and ended August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 153 Calibration Overview Why do Ihave to calibrate Isn t the system calibrated at the factory It s true that each Infinity dispenser is set up with default calibration values However these values are identical for every All Bottle pourer code and Laser gun button TAP 1 taps have default flow meter counts or flow rates Since each system is unique as to brands poured lengths of tubing location of equipment etc the default calibration values may give unpredictable results The actual flow rates of different brands can vary significantly A two second pour of Schnapps yields less volume than a two second pour of vodka Slight variations in lengths of tubing runs or tubing diameters also affect the accuracy of pours The only way to make sure a system pours accurately is to calibrate each dispenser using the brands assigned to the dispensers Can t just copy the calibration of one dispenser to another Yes if you have All Bottle dispensers You can calibrate the coded pourers o
405. names of your security levels See How to customize security level names Select Time Schedule This type of schedule is set up to perform actions at specific times You select a specific day of the week and time of day to perform each action The schedule automatically stops running after all actions are performed You can create multiple schedules of this type each with a different name but to run a time schedule you must copy it to BERG SCH The only Time schedule you can run is BERG SCH Selections On this tab you can select a specific Product Type or Pour Type to include in the report Some options are not available for all reports August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 323 Send After Pour Send After Pour tells the ECU to pour a drink and then send sales information to the sales terminal You may want to select this option so dispensers begin pouring immediately upon pressing the dispenser button or tilting the bottle This is especially useful with ECR terminals where it may take a second or two to ring up the pour Note that this option may affect the handling of canceled pours Serial Number Serial number refers to the unique identifying number assigned to your copy of Infinity software To determine the serial number of your copy of Infinity click Help on the main menu of any Infinity program Click About Infinity The serial number is listed near the top of the About Infinity screen Shift
406. nce and Remove Key to complete the removal Finally depending on the reason for removal you will be asked to allow deletion of the Infinity software For example if you are moving the software you no longer need Infinity on this PC If you do delete the software it is recommend that you follow this with using Control Panel Add Remove programs to remove Infinity August 2010 Remove a License gt Follow these steps to remove your license from one PC if you want to transfer it to another PC gt If you plan to change the PC motherboard hard disk or Operating System contact Berg before you do this A new license will need to be generated Note that Windows Update will not require a new license gt Some other situations may also require you to remove your license and then re activate the software gt This is one of the only functions present ONLY in Utilities Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Preconfigure Software for Multiple End Users To preconfigure software for multiple end users 4 Wu 6 Use your own serial number to install Infinity on your PC Change the business name of the database to represent an end user This is important for distinguishing between end users Enter setup details for the end user Make a backup of the database without changing the serial number into a sub folder using descriptive backup folder names Note that the na
407. nciliation Example by Volume Compare by Volume This method starts with a usage report on the Infinity side cocktails names are not listed A count column must be present in the Sales Terminal Data File STDF the export file from the POS giving the number of times each PLU was rung up The brand name sold volume poured at Berg equipment and volume corresponding to number of ring ups are listed on the report The variance and percentage is shown In addition the Lost retail value is calculated by multiplying the variance times the retail price per unit For each line in the STDF the PLU is matched up there will be a volume recorded on the Infinity side from the usage report Then the brand table or cocktail recipe is used to calculate the volume associated with that number of pours for each brand Remember that will be no cocktails listed on this type of report Here is an example using a single price level Absolut and Rumpleminz are on the All Bottle ID and Vodka is on a Laser Brands Vodka 5 ounce 1 PLU 100 1 0 ounce 2 PLU 101 Absolut 5 ounce 1 50 PLU 200 1 0 ounce 3 PLU 201 Rumpleminz 5 ounce 1 50 PLU 300 1 0 ounce 3 PLU 301 Cock tails Screwdriver 2 50 PLU 1000 1 oz of Vodka at 2 Absolut Madness 4 50 PLU 2000 1 oz of Absolut at 3 and 0 5 ounce of Rumpleminz at 1 50 We pour 5 shots of vodka 2 shots of Absolut 3 screwdrivers and 2 Absolut madness The usage report is Vodka 8 oz Absolut 4 oz Rumplemi
408. ncluded in the file Export File Name The File Name field on the Export screen displays the default file name for the export file Default file names use a csv extension for Excel format or a txt extension for text format cur z and arc specify the type of data current z archive in the export file Export files of Sales column items include _ sale in the file name Export files of Usage column items include _use in the file name August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 3 If you don t want an export file to replace an earlier one with the same default file name you should give each export file you create a unique name See variable export name Export Format This specifies the file type of the export file A Text file uses a txt extension and can be viewed with any text editor You can specify any Column Separator with this format An Excel file uses a csv extension and can be viewed with Microsoft Excel This format requires a comma Column Separator File Name This field lists the name of the file you re creating Click Save As to select the folder and filename you want Flow Meter Pulse output meter installed in beer wine soda or juice lines that transmits information to the ECU to calculate the volume of beverage poured One TAP 1 ECU can monitor up to eight flow meters Flow Meter Count The default flow meter count is 3700 The flow meter count is the number on the flow meter
409. nenssanenseansassensasensasseesassenenseeeenseeeensneessseeeessneessenees 206 Run the Most Recent Re port csssseeccessseeneeennenneeeeenneaeenenseanaesnnsenaesesnanaeeeenseanaesnseanaeseeaanaessenseaaauensas 207 Archive and Clear Sales E 208 Run Advanced Reports sssccssssssrensessscensseensnsnesnscenseeessoesneesnseenseeensoesnsesnscesseeensonsnsesnscessseensonensenns 209 View Print Save REportse scceseeeceseeesseesseneeeesneesenneensensesensessaneussansassaesaseeensseesaseeeenseeeeeseeeeeseeeenses 210 Open or Delete Report Eiles EE EEE SEENEN EEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEER NEEN 211 Run a Column Selection Re port csscccseceseceeseeesseeeseeneneeenaeesneeeseeeeneennaesseseneeesaaennaeseaeeeneeenneessaeeneens 212 Run a Laser Guide Re port cssccssesseeeseensneesneenaeeneeeeeneeenaeenaeeeseeenneesnaeesaesenesenaeesnaessaeenneeenneennaeenaeens 213 Run a Variance Reporte sssesececeseeeesseeeeseeeenseneenseneensanenssanenssansaseeeeasensasseesasseuenseeeenseeeenseeessseeesssneeessnees 214 Set Up the Reconciliation report eccessseeeceeeseeneeeeseenaeeeennneeseensnanaeensenaesasnanaeseenanaeeasnseaaausneaanaeens 215 PLU RE CI e See eecetcceets caens ve sccencsciten lend tccenestanenanchbeeseetiteecaeieagecgencteeeaeehben ds quaneetsedhaaceuet come uneosanenmecegteinn 216 Create and Assign a PLU Recipe ge E eege e ee Ce ENEE 218 RUN a Reconciliation re POrt 2 ccseeeeseeee
410. network cable 2 Disconnect the other end of the network cable from either the network junction box or an ECU and plug that end of the network cable into the loopback tester 3 Run the loopback test If there are no errors the network cable is OK If there are errors replace the network cable ends If the test still fails the cable is probably defective somewhere in the middle of the cable and should be replaced August 2010 Loopback Test Perform a loopback test to verify you have a working accessible COM port on your computer You must have a loopback tester to connect to the port to perform this test gt If the loopback tests verify proper operation of components but communications still fail for a single ECU or for only a few ECUs but not all perform the ECU Communication Tests to test the individual ECU cable s gt If communications fail for all ECUs within a network the problem is either in the software configuration e g the baud rate is set incorrectly or in some hardware component or connection between the computer and the network Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help w Communication Test To find communication test 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Communication Test gt This test verifies communication To perform a communication test on a network line to an ECU 1 Choose Select an ECU or Select Equipment Name gt The network
411. new Category name 5 Specify the order of the Export Columns by entering Column Numbers for the items Enter a 0 zero for any column you don t want to export Type the Column Separator Check the Column Headers box if you would like the first line of the export file to give the name of each column 8 If you are exporting PLUs and have specified a PLU base you can add this base to the exported PLUs by checking the box 9 Click Run to export price portion data to the selected file N O August 2010 Export Prices and Portions gt For further help with exporting see About exporting Brand Prices and Portions Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 132 Export Cocktail Prices and Portions To export cocktail prices and portions 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Point to Export Prices and Portions and click Cocktails 2 Click Save As to select the File Name and path Select the folder to Save in and the File name you want Specify the file type in the Save as type field and click Save A text file uses a txt extension and can be viewed with any text editor You can specify any Column Separator with this format An Excel file uses a csv extension and can be viewed with Microsoft Excel This format requires a comma Column Separator 3 Select the price portion Category for all cocktails in the export file See Import Export Category To create a new
412. nfinity Cross cocktails combine ingredients from All Bottle 7 and Laser What is a PLU recipe gt A PLU recipe s sole purpose is to compute volume or sales on a Reconciliation report gt A PLU recipe defines the PLU of a product recognized by the sales terminal and translates it into brands and portions understood by Infinity gt Infinity doesn t use a PLU recipe to pour the product gt PLU recipes are never sent to the ECUs dispensers All brands for a cross cocktail must appear on the same ECU For example you may have a PLU for a Black amp Tan beer cocktail at the sales terminal two beers poured in a single glass but you can t define beer cocktails in Infinity So you create a PLU recipe in Infinity for Black amp Tan that defines the PLU used by the sales terminal and specifies the portion amounts of the ingredients in the drink You haven t created a new cocktail for Infinity to pour you ve just told Infinity which brands and how much of each to include in the Reconciliation report How do I create a PLU recipe You create a PLU recipe the same way you create a cocktail recipe You then list the recipe on a PLU Recipe tab for the ECU For step by step instructions see Create and Assign a PLU Recipe What is the difference between a PLU recipe and a Cocktail recipe A cocktail recipe is sent to the ECU and used to pour cocktails PLU recipes are never sent to the ECU and are never used t
413. ng the dates of the most recent archive and 3 Pull down the Inventory menu and click Inventory Check inventory check Click Yes to Archive and Clear Sales if you ve poured any drinks since your last Archive and Clear Sales Click No to proceed with Inventory Check If you ve previously selected Calculate Retail Price when you Archive and Clear Sales clicking Yes here to Archive and Clear Sales will use that setting This may affect the Retail Price per Unit of your brands If you don t want that to happen click No here and go to Archive and Clear Sales and de select Calculate Retail Price before proceeding If you click Yes here wait for the report to run View save and or print the report and click Close to exit the View screen If you ve performed a physical inventory type any adjusted stock amounts in the Total Stock column This includes containers behind the bar and in the store room Partial container amounts can be entered up to two decimal places If you ve set up more than one stock room a Physical Inventory screen appears for each one Enter adjusted stock amounts for each room Click Continue If you leave any stock amounts at zero a prompt reminds you Add or remove brands from the order by clicking or using the space bar Click Continue Brands with a total stock number below the par stock order point are already highlighted and include the tag ORDER NOW Type a new Order Number if desi
414. ng time Fix all without prompting finds errors and fixes them without waiting for confirmation Select this option only if directed by Berg personnel Report errors without fixing finds errors in the database and lists them without changing anything You can safely select this option anytime 3 Click Continue 4 Click Yes to continue with the repair process 5 Wait for the procedure to complete If you selected Prompt for each fix respond to each prompt When finished the Repair Database Report displays in the report viewer 6 View or print the report 7 Click Close to exit the View screen August 2010 Repair the Database gt You ll probably only perform this task if directed to do so by Berg personnel gt You may be directed to perform this procedure after checking the database for errors and rebuilding index files gt This procedure searches for inconsistencies in the actual data of the database e g a dispenser not assigned to an ECU You can choose from among repair options to view the errors only or to fix them Fix database errors only if you are directed to do so by Berg personnel Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 24 Clear Database Log To clear the database log 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Clear Database Log 2 Click OK when the operation is complete Clear Database Log gt You should only clear the database log if directed t
415. nk A shot or Infinity defined cocktail Shots used in cocktails but not defined in an Infinity cocktail recipe are identified as individual drinks Ingredients in an Infinity defined cocktail recipe are not listed as individual drinks Drink Volume Used when doing a sales report The number of drink volume units poured This does not include cocktail ingredients Driver A computer file included with Interface software that knows how to communicate with the hardware of your specific sales terminal Driver Options You can customize the way Interface software deals with specific pouring problems by selecting appropriate options These options alter the way communication occurs between the ECUs and the sales terminal You can establish default options for the system and then change them for a particular station or group if you need to Options include Transaction Mode Wait for Release Pour Without Release Send After Pour Timeout Value and PLU Base August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 3 Glossary E F Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S LU VW X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary E F Click a letter above to jump Scroll to terms in alphabetical order ECU A box containing circuit boards that controls the operation of dispensers connected to it Infinity has several types of Infinity network ECUs Infinity for All Bottle or Laser dispensers TAP 1 for TAP 1 dispensers 1
416. nning the report see The retail value of the containers of the brand that are unaccounted for Inventory Reports Type of Data The data in Inventory reports reflects the results of the most recent Inventory Check The computer does not communicate with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from the computer s database August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 230 Cost Per Unit Report To understand the report Brand Name The name of each brand included in the report Cost Per Unit gt This report shows each Brand Printed On Name in your brand list with its The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run cost per volume unit not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity gt This report only shows cost Type of Data information if you enter a cost This report can only be run as a Current report The computer does not when setting up the brand communicate with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from OR the computer s database gt If you select Calculate Container Cost as an Inventory option gt The unit is the unit of measure for your system gt For help with running the report see Run Advanced Reports August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 231 Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report To understand the report Clear Sales Clear Sales Z This report
417. ns 2 Select a Report Handling method used for all scheduled reports 3 Click Name File to change the Schedule Report Names and or the file Schedule options specify how format used for all scheduled reports report output is generated in a Select the folder to Save in select the file format to Save as type the File Schedule Options schedule name and click Save Click Load Defaults to see the Berg defaults in all fields gt Default schedule options are 4 Click OK to save your entries and exit EE If you define options on the Options tab of the the New Schedule or Modify gt Changing default options does Schedule screen those options apply ONLY to the specific schedule being not affect any existing created or modified schedules gt You must be using Enterprise Edition to to save reports in pdf or html format gt You must be using Enterprise Edition to save as text files txt or CSV gt Infinity report files rdf can only be opened in Infinity but the text files can be viewed by a variety of programs gt Note that saving as a text file loses the report formatting August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e View Hardware Configuration To view hardware configuration 1 Pull down the Options menu and click View Hardware Configuration OR Hardware Configuration From any screen press the F8 key gt This feature lets you view a list The hardware configu
418. ns refers to the order of the price portion information in each line of your import file For example in the following sample line from an import file the Cocktail name is listed first so it s column 1 Margarita Cock tail A 3 00 208 You should enter a number next to each column name on the Import Prices and Portions screen specifying the order it appears in your import file Find out the column order used by the exporting program or just look at your import file by opening it in a spreadsheet or text editing program Look at each line and determine in what order the price portion information is listed Is the cocktail brand name listed first If so Cocktail Brand is column 1 Is Price Level next That s column 2 and so on Columns can appear in any order in your file but all lines in the file must use the same column order This means in a cocktail recipe the Cocktail Brand name of ingredients must have the same column number The Cocktail Price and Portion Price of each ingredient must have the same column number If you use Cocktail PLUs your import file may use the same column number for Cocktail PLU and ingredient Portion since one applies only to cocktail lines and the other to ingredient lines Or they may be different columns If any column is not included in your file enter a zero next to the column name on the Import Prices and Portions screen to indicate it doesn t appear For example if you don t use price levels type
419. ns tab Select the folder to Save in The default folder is the Program Data Berg Infinity folder Type a File name for the file see also Variable Export Name Select the file format in the Save as type field Click Save Click OK to save the custom export You can nowrun the custom export or include it in a schedule August 2010 New Custom Export gt A custom export gives you the chance to specify your own export parameters and save them with a unique name Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 253 Modify Custom Export To modify a custom export 1 Select the Export from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Follow the steps outlined in Export Report Data to make changes to this gt You can make changes to any custom export er custom export you ve created You cant see an Archive List for a custom export Disregard the steps about gt If you want to change the name running the export 4 Click Save As to export to a different folder or filename ee ae You re changing the default folder and filename displayed on the Exports Selections tab Select the folder to Save in The default folder is the Program Data Berg Infinity folder Type a File name for the file see also Variable Export Name Select the file format in the Save as type field Click Save 5 Click OK to save your changes Modify Custom Export August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company
420. nser pours only calibration portion sizes You then go to the dispenser and pour a calibration portion size in a measuring cup or cylinder At the computer you enter the exact amount poured Infinity calculates the difference between the amount poured and the calibration portion size It calculates the difference as a percentage and determines if the percentage is within the defined level of accuracy If it s not the calibration values are changed so a more accurate pour results If you want to save trips back and forth to the computer you can put multiple ECUs into calibration mode See Enter Calibration Mode August 2010 What is calibration gt Calibration is the process of checking and adjusting the amount of beverage poured from each Infinity dispenser Using the calibration process you tell Infinity how long to pour at a specific dispenser to achieve the desired portion size gt If you are unsure about the need for calibration or the process involved in calibrating an Infinity system the tips in this topic may be helpful For how to steps describing the entire calibration process see How to calibrate dispensers Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 154 Whatis level of accuracy or accuracy The level of accuracy is the percentage difference between the amount poured and the amount expected A 0 difference means the pour measures exactly as expected The default level of
421. nsert additional backup disks and press any key as prompted Remove the last backup disk Wu No August 2010 Restore Full Database gt You can only restore the full database if you ve previously backed up a full database gt The only reason you d ever want to restore the database from a backup is if something happens to your system database gt Restoring a full database replaces all existing setup and sales data with the data in the backup copy gt If your backup copy of the database is not current when you use it to restore the database you ll lose any archive sales data and orders made since the date of the backup gt If you attempt to restore a database from a different version of the software an error message will prevent you from doing so Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 259 Reload Previous Version Configuration To reload previous version configuration settings i Pull down the Backups menu Point to Reload Previous Version and click Configuration 2 Insert the backup disk into the selected drive 3 Select the drive letter and folder where you ve stored the backup copy Click on the icon to collapse or expand the folders 4 Click OK Be aware that restoring settings from a previous version will at least temporarily leave you in a state where Infinity won t run Read the message to make sure your situation qualifies and you have all the r
422. nter Calibration 5 Click Continue to calibrate only the brand you ve selected Mode Wait while the dispenser is put into calibration mode gt Proper calibration of each OR dispenser provides Infinity with Click Dispenser Calibration to calibrate the selected brand and copy the necessary data to fine tune its calibration values to all other brands at the dispenser All Bottle or the duration of each pour and Laser only deliver accurate portions Click Yes to continue Wait while the dispenser is put into calibration mode gt Since the calibration process OR involves pouring measuring and Click List Calibration to calibrate the selected brand and copy its entering the amount at the calibration values to selected brands at the dispenser All Bottle or Laser computer it s helpful to have a only partner or carry a portable Select the brands to receive the calibration values and click Continue Se Press the space bar or click to select or de select brands mg ti d 9 Wait while the dispenser is put into calibration mode CEDEO Ge lich 6 Click OK to confirm calibration mode gt Ee e a ee 7 Go to the selected dispenser and pour a drink into a measuring cup or raged Sy stent O wor with Infinity enter the meter graduated cylinder Record the amount or weight of each pour S SC counts and flow rates listed on At an All Bottle or Laser dispenser pour a small portion first and then a TAP 4 fi ti D large portion with the button number
423. nz 1 oz Let s say we forgot to ring up one of the vodka shots The export file now has a count column as column number 3 and looks like Vodk a 101 4 5 poured but only 4 rung up Abs 201 2 Screwadrivr 1000 3 Madness 2000 2 Potato Chips 9023 1 Let s go through each line of the STDF We list Berg side first and then the POS side PLU 101 is a regular Vodka which is 1 ounce 4 times 1 is 4 ounces and we have Vodka 8 oz 4 oz PLU 202 is a regular Absolut at 1 ounce each so we have 2 oz and the line so far is Absolut 4 oz 2oz PLU 1000 is a Screwdriver There are 3 of them so we have an additional 3 ounce of vodka so our line is vodka 8 oz 7 Oz Then we have 2 rings of PLU 2000 which means 2 oz of Absolut and 1 oz of Rumpleminz So these lines become Absolut 4 oz 4 oz Rumpleminz 1 oz 1 oz The final line is a PLU 9023 not used by Infinity and is ignored The final report is Vodka 8 oz 7 oz Absolut 4 oz 4 oz Rumpleminz 1 oz 1 oz If you gave a retail price per ounce of 2 then the Lost Retail Value for vodka will show as 2 00 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Reconciliation Example by Sales Compare by Sales A sales column must be present in the Sales Data Terminal File STDF the export file form the POS It should use the same price format as Infinity e g 100 00 for one hundred dollars This method starts with a sales summary report on the Infinity side Note tha
424. o Use this menu item to send all broadcast changes you ve made in the This is the equipment you want to communicate with Select Master Group operation to send the changes to all affected equipment gt When you make changes such 3 Click OK to send the changes as altering portions for a brand 4 Wait for communication with the equipment that affects multiple dispensers you will be given a choice whether you want the changes to be sent now or not gt If you delay sending price portion changes you can send them by using the broadcast operation at any time gt This is useful if you re performing several setup tasks gt If you exit Infinity and have not yet sent the changes to the equipment you will be prompted to broadcast those changes August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Re program To re program a dispenser network device 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click Re program 2 To re program one device only click Single Device and select the Equipment Name Re program gt Use this menu item to re program dispenser network OR devices Tap 2 P3 Hub etc To re program multiple devices of the same type click Device Type with new firmware select the Device Type and the Network gt You must have the new firmware Select Device Type to send new firmware to all devices of that type with one file to perform this operation operati
425. o do so by Berg personnel August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 285 Show File Versions To show file versions 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Show File Versions 2 Select a show file option as directed by Berg personnel Show all Files displays a list of version numbers for every file used by Show File Versions S gt You may be directed to perform Infinity 8 Show File Differences displays a list of any file version numbers that don t this procedure to check the match the version numbers Infinity expects version numbers of various files 3 Click Continue Infinity uses Wait for the file list to display gt If you ve recently loaded other 4 Click a filename to see its Detailed Description software and error last Read or write down the detailed descriptions as directed by Berg personnel appear when you run Infinity 5 Click OK to close the Version Verify screen Berg personnel may ask you to perform this task to determine if files used by Infinity have been affected by the other software gt If you ve just installed Infinity while other Windows programs were running try re installing Infinity after you ve shut down all other Windows programs gt If you ve just installed Infinity and the setup program directed you to re boot before running Infinity try re booting and running Infinity again gt If you ve performed all the installation instructions and
426. o find the owner for some database record The database is likely corrupted See U54 Wrong value for 1 It will be reset Problem Repair utility found a flag setting that is illegal Remedy This error is automatically corrected without further user action Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 382 Communication CM Questions Interface ECR Questions Infinity INF Questions Manager M Questions Report R Questions Setup S Questions Schedule SCH Questions Utilities U Questions See also Error Messages and Warning Messages August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 383 Communication CM Questions Question CM200 The ECU currently has different alignment values than that stored in the PC Do you wish to reload the alignment values data from the PC into the ECU Problem Activator ring alignment values have been stored in both the database and the ECU but the stored values are not the same Normally after Align Activator Rings the values are stored using Store Alignment Values If this is not done Infinity reminds you when you exit The fact that the two sets of values do not match probably means that you did not want to store the alignment values since it may have been done improperly Remedy Answer Y if the last alignment done at the ECU was suspect and you want to return to the last good values stored in the database Answer N if you expect the align values are
427. o pour drinks Cocktail recipe names appear on system reports PLU recipe names never appear on Infinity reports How many PLU recipes can assign to an ECU The default number of PLU recipes that can be assigned to an ECU is 50 If you assign 50 the number available becomes 100 for all ECUs The number continues to increase as you need it depending on your system s capacity to process and store the recipes The maximum per ECU is 2000 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 217 How is a PLU recipe used When you run a Reconciliation report Infinity uses the PLU recipes you ve entered and assigned to compare the volume rung at the sales terminal with the volume monitored by Infinity 1 It is important to accurately fill in the ingredient portions and prices since they wil be used in some calculations 2 The difference between the volume or sales rung at the sales terminal and the volume or sales computed by Infinity is shown on the report 3 The names of Infinity brands are shown on the report The names of any PLU recipes you ve created do not appear in the report but the volume of the brands poured in those PLU recipes will be included in the total volume listed for the brands August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ze Create and Assign a PLU Recipe To create a PLU recipe Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions Create
428. o running the schedule modify BERG SCH to include all the actions at the specific times you need See Time Schedule Setup 1 Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules 2 Select berg sch as the Schedule File Berg sch is the only schedule file you can run as a Time schedule If you need to run different Time schedules see About BERG SCH 3 Click Run The Schedules screen is replaced by a Running Schedule screen You ll see the current time and the next scheduled action s The schedule continues to run performing actions at specified times until you stop it unless you ve included an Exit Schedule action in the schedule 4 Continue with other tasks in Infinity as needed When no schedule actions are currently running you can perform any functions in Infinity If while you are actively doing something else a schedule action becomes due it will wait until the current activity is complete and then the schedule action will run If a schedule action is running you will be locked out from any other function until the schedule action is complete 5 To stop the schedule click Stop Click OK to confirm The schedule won t automatically restart You must run it again You have a built in schedule feature called Auto Recovery If a running schedule is stopped due to a computer crash power failure etc the schedule automatically recovers when the computer reboots Any actions that were scheduled during the power outage will be run
429. ode does not calibrate your system Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 149 Start Pour Test To start pour test 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Start Pour Test 2 Select the Equipment Name and click Run Start Pour Test You ll see a list of all dispensers you ve set No E gt Pour Test allows you to test 3 Click Yes to confirm Pour Test after reading the message about existing pouring operation including ae f POS interface without using a Click No if you need to archive and clear sales first lot of product Start Pour Test 4 Wait while communication with the equipment occurs sends very small portion sizes Only assigned buttons on the selected dispenser are changed All sizes and to selected dispensers price levels are setto the small test portion even if the portion in the assigned price portion table is zero Cocktail ingredients are also set to this small portion Price and PLUs are not changed 5 Repeat steps 2 4 for each dispenser you want to use Pour Test Any pours made during pour test will be recorded in your usage and sales numbers for the assigned brand or cocktail 6 Use Exit Pour Test when you ve completed testing gt Pour Test can be used to ensure the correct brand pours It can also be used to test whether PLUs have been set up correctly at a POS gt If there are sales present it is suggested you Archive and Clear Sales before using Pour Test Otherwis
430. oesnsesnscessseessaeensesnssenssenssees 266 Define Achomair iiae e AENEA a EAA NEE ANKERRA VEDEA ANEA E NOA ENEA EEN RE EN 267 Repeat Action sssseseeeeteeeeesecneeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeseseceaeeesesnaeeeeesnaeeesescgeaeeeseseaeeeseseaeeeseseseaeeesssneeeesssaneeennes 269 COpy CH OM ise csse nts chee vstecee sec ccedcesentic ce ccksteececat et sciicdancenctcavnde idee scent ce sacutlaeceadieauseaicnieeceanboesedialenseacutseers 270 On Demand Schedule Setup EE ee ee EE e EES 271 Test a SCH TTT 272 Run a E TI EE 273 Run a Schedule from the Command Line e e eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseoeeeseaeeesaaeeeseseoeeeeeaeesseaseusegsonees 274 Schedule Oey eeneuereugeet eebe eege 275 dee E E 276 Diagnostics Memory HO SU EE 277 Get VERSION NUMbBG dE 278 Rebuild the Database Index File sS cceseeeecceeeeeeceeaneeeeeeaneeeeeaaeeeeeaa se eeeeaa se eeseaaaeeeeeaaeeeaeaaseeseneeneenenees 279 Check the Database for Ertrors ENEE ENEE REENEN REENEN REENEN ENEE REENEN 280 Rebuild the Database Delete Chaiitn 2 s eecceeeeeeceeaeeeeceeaneeeeeaaeeeeeaasneeeeaaeeeeeaaseeeeeaaneeeaeaaneeeeeaneeenenees 281 Emergency Rebuild the Database csscccsccssesseenseeesneeenaeesneeeseeenaeesnaesneeeseeesaaesnaeenaeeeneeesneennaeeneens 282 Repair the Database cccccssessseseeneeeeeeensnneseaneeseeeeeenesneaeaeeeseeesaanssneanaeaeeeeaensaneqnanaeseeesasnesseanaeaeeeesenennas 283 Clear Database o E 284 Show File Versi ONS sisece
431. of price levels and sizes If the target product type has fewer price levels or fewer sizes then some of the prices and portions for this brand will be set to zero and will not pour at those higher price levels or sizes See M365 Remedy Answer Yes if the dimensions are the same or losing some prices and portions is okay Question M368 This brand is already calibrated Do you just want to copy its calibration values to the other brands without re calibrating this brand Problem Choosing Dispenser or List Calibration will copy the resulting calibration values from a single brand to all other brands or to the brands selected respectively If the selected brand to calibrate has already been calibrated you may just copy these values without having to go through another calibration Remedy Answer No if you think you need to recalibrate this brand Answer Yes if you are pleased with the pouring of the brand and do indeed want to copy its calibration values to the rest of the indicated brands For list calibration you will be asked to selected the brands after this question is answered Answer Cancel if you do not want to complete this operation Question M370 Do you want to load the Interface driver Problem Whenever you create a new ECU or Clear and Restore Memory and you have installed Interface you have the option to load the Interface driver If you do not load the driver the ECU will not be interfaced This question is asked because some system
432. olume unit Derived from the container cost and container size entered when you set up a brand and set up containers The actual volume units are often shown Count The number of containers Current Report Data Reports on all data currently stored at the ECUs or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the ECU s To run this type of report the computer must communicate with the ECU s The Berg default is Most Recent Archive data Custom Reports A custom report is a report you design to meet your own special requirements You start with a standard report and select certain options to customize the report such as a beer only sales report or an hourly liquor only sales report You specify a name for the report and save it Your custom report is added to the report list for you to run at any time August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 300 Glossary D Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary D Scroll to terms in alphabetical order Date Range Report Data Reports on archive records from a specified number of days ago to today The From date determines the number of days ago If today is 1 21 and you want data from ten days ago through today the From date should be 1 11 The To date can t be changed to any date but today in Report Options Use the End of Day option to specify the hour you want your busin
433. om the same ECU Remedy Create at least one Sales Station for each Dispenser Network ECU OR turn off POS ID if you are not using it August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 403 Report R Warnings Warning R151 The current report was not saved or printed Pressing OK will lose this report Problem Any time you view a report without saving it or printing it you will be given a chance to do so Press Cancel if you would like a copy of this report Print or Save then the viewer can be closed Answer OK to close the viewer without saving August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 4 Manager M M200 209 M210 219 M250 259 M260 269 Warning M200 Warning M201 Warning M202 Warning M203 Warning M204 Warning M205 Warning M206 Warnings Name in use Problem See INF14 Usually this message will not be seen It could indicate some database corruption Remedy If it does not seem that the message is accurate reboot and retry or fix database Diagnosis Run check database and repair database Ignoring assignment of s s Dispenser d does not exist Problem A price table is being assigned to a dispenser that does not exist This likely indicates some database corruption The rest of the assignments will continue however Remedy Reboot and retry or fix database Diagnosis Run check database and repair database 1 is assigned on more than one butt
434. ompany LLC Infinity Help is Enter Initial Stock To enter Initial Stock On Wu Pull down the Inventory menu and click Initial Stock Click Continue after reading the note about clearing sales Click Yes to Archive and Clear Sales if you ve poured any drinks since your last Archive and Clear Sales Wait for the report to run View save and or print the report and click Close to exit the View screen The Physical Inventory screen displays Type your current stock amounts for each brand in the Total Stock column This includes containers behind the bar and in the store room Partial container amounts can be entered up to two decimal places Brands without an assigned supplier will not appear in this list Click OK If you leave any stock amounts at zero a prompt reminds you August 2010 gt You must enter the initial number of containers on hand for each brand as part of Inventory setup gt Your stock amounts should include all containers both behind the bar and in the storeroom After entering Initial Stock once the menu item changes to Inventory Check gt See Inventory Overview for help with understanding how Inventory works gt See Checklist for Inventory Setup to review the order of Inventory setup tasks Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 182 Inventory Check To run Inventory Check 1 2 Click Continue after reviewi
435. omputer does not communicate with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from the computer s database Warnings You may see one or more messages at the end of the report These messages help you see how your brands are set up and whether you need to make some changes The messages include the number of brands without suppliers these are not part of inventory the number of brands with an invalid stock count the number of brands with an invalid order point par stock the number of brands with an invalid order quantity and the number of brands not assigned August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 226 Column Selection Report To understand the report If you run the report using Sales column items you can select any of the following columns Archive Date Brand Name Canceled Drinks Pours Canceled Sales Canceled Volume Comp Drinks Pours Comp Sales Comp Volume Composite Drinks Pours Container Container Cost Container Volume Current Time Descriptor Device Name Full Drinks Pours Hardware Station Other Drinks Pours Other Volume Pct Total Drinks Pours Pct Total Sales Pct Total Volume PLU POS ID Pour Date Pour Day of Week Pour Event Pour Shift Pour Type Pour Usage Price Level Product Code Product Type Retail Price per units Sales Size Sold Drinks Pours Sold Volume Pour Time Total Stock Volume If you run the report using Usage column items you can select any of
436. on Remedy See DB14 Unable to perform database operation Attempting to continue Problem Possible database corruption The operation is one where it makes the most sense to try to continue Remedy See DB14 Too many dispensers on this ECU Problem An operation which loops through the dispensers found more than allowed on this ECU Or the number of the dispenser may be more than allowed The database may have errors The operation may try to continue Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR DB28 ERROR DBS50 ERROR DB51 ERROR DB52 ERROR DB53 ERROR DB54 ERROR DB55 ERROR DB56 ERROR DB57 August 2010 Remedy Reboot and retry Run ECU Setup and check dispensers make corrections if needed and save the information Note if you change dispensers you should also check your brand assignments Run Diagnostics to fix the database If necessary restore a full database backup or reload configuration Diagnosis Run Diagnostics Check database and Repair Database Check for disk corruption Device settings for x may need to be changed to account for version difference Problem The possible settings for a device are determined by its version If the version found in the device does not match the version currently in the database some of the device settings may be changed to account for differences in what options are supported by the actual version Remedy Run Clear and Restore and then check
437. on Berg will provide this file 3 Click Run 4 Select the new firmware hex file Click Open 5 6 Wait for communication with the equipment Click Yes when prompted to do a Clear and Restore Memory if you want to perform the operation now You may want to answer No now and wait for all devices to finish before performing a Clear and Restore Memory on each August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 10 Loopback Test To find loopback test 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Loopback Test To perform a loopback test 1 Select the number of the Port 2 Select the Baud Rate 3 Type the Phone number if you are testing a modem connection 4 Type the Init String The default AT PQC 3 PIG 1 PMH 1 PSS 2 amp D2 amp C1 amp N6 sets Data Terminal Relay and Carrier Detect to normal and turns off Auto Answer Select Tone or Pulse Click Run to begin the test without the loopback tester in place The loopback testcommences You should see exactly 100 failure If you don t see 100 failure click Stop to end the test The port you ve chosen is already in use by a device that is echoing the loopback signal That port is not available for Infinity Select a new Port number and click Run 8 When you see 100 failure plug the loopback tester into the computer port You don t need to stop the test If the failure rate decreases to near 0 you know the port is OK 9 Click
438. on You may continue working with Infinity software When you receive a return email start the activation process again see step 1 above Choose Step 2 Click Continue The return email will contain your License key in the message body and also as an attached file You can either type in the codes or read the attached file to fill in the codes To type in the license key yourself answer No to Do you have a key O N o file Enter the Reference Code and License Key from the email Click Continue OR To use the file attached to the email save the file to your computer and note the folder location Answer Yes to Do you have a key file Select the folder location of the saved file Click Continue If the license key is entered correctly your software will be activated and you will no longer see the grace period warning when you run Infinity software August 2010 Activation by Email Activation or renewal by email lets you send your information whenever you re working at the computer without spending time on the phone gt A return email will only be sent during Berg business hours gt For more help with software licensing see About Activation amp Renewal Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help EA Transfer a License To transfer an Infinity software license to a new PC 1 Remove the license from the old PC 2 Install Infinity software o
439. on or code on the same dispenser Problem Usually a brand is not assigned to the same dispenser more than once This warning points out this anomaly Remedy Check assignments and remove any duplicates If you do need than same brand twice ignore this warning Diagnosis Check all brands assigned This baud rate is unsupported Baud rate has been reset to 9600 Problem The baud rate set for the network is not supported by all of the ECUs on the network The baud rate is being reset to 9600 Remedy Check that this is the proper baud rate and Save the network Check the specific gravity for this brand Problem When calibrating using grams the brand s specific gravity is used This brand appears to be using a default value for specific gravity Remedy Enter the specific gravity for the brand in the brand setup form s S does not have category s and will be skipped Problem When a switch category operation is attempted every brand that has a price table with first category name but does not have one with the second category name will be listed This does not prevent the brand that do have both tables from being switched In fact if only some brands have been given alternate tables it is expected that you would see this message Remedy You can cancel the operation if you did not expect to see this message s S does not have the same definition as s s and will be skipped Problem When a switch category name is attempted for coc
440. on screen N o 15 Click OK after reading the message about creating a new backup 16 See Store Configuration Settings or Backup Full Database to create a new backup August 2010 Software Installation gt Be sure to use the Infinity CD with the serial number for this specific site gt You can easily upgrade to Infinity 6 from Infinity 4 41 or later gt You can upgrade from versions prior to 4 41 using a multi step process On the Infinity CD follow the instructions to click the appropriate link for upgrading your version Then upgrade again to the current version gt When both upgrading the software and installing on a different computer you must first move the entire database to the new PC Then the software should be installed You will NOT be able to copy the database to the new PC after the software is installed since the database version is different for each software version gt Please note that after upgrading you should create a new store disk You cannot Reload Configuration disks from a different release Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 35 Additional Software on the Infinity CD DBExam Tool A database tool DBExam is present on the CD which helps identify the release and serial number of an Infinity database a store disk or a backup This can be helpful when your original CD has been lost a PC has been destroyed or you are otherwise in a situatio
441. on the tab You dont need to type a decimal if you re entering a whole number e g type 6 for 6 00 fl oz or 2 for 2 00 Select the Portion Price tab and type the correct Portion Price for each Price Level and Size listed on the tab Select the PLU tab and type the correct PLU for each Price Level and Size listed on the tab if you re using Interface or the Reconciliation report See also Assign PLUs to Brands and Cocktails 10 Click OK to save your entries on all tabs 11 Select a communication option and click Continue Select the option most convenient for your workflow for example you may want to wait to communicate with the equipment after editing all product types 12 Repeat steps 2 11 for each Product Type August 2010 Multiple Brand Prices Portions gt To save time setting up your prices and portions you can enter them for multiple brands on a single form gt To save time entering identical prices and portions use Save As Default for a brand and then Load Defaults to another brand or copy one brand s prices and portions to multiple brands See Modify Prices and Portions gt When you enter a brand s prices and portions for the first time you re replace the factory default standard prices and portions or any defaults you set up with the Brand Wizard Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help mo Copy Prices and Portions Where can I copy prices and p
442. one connection could not be made Both modems need to be operational Check modem settings and the modem init string and phone number Both modems must not be in use by another program and must be powered on Sometimes modems just don t connect Remedy Try the operation again Diagnosis Any of the conditions listed under CM03 can apply Note that the Communication Wizard cannot be used on a modem network Noisy communications line Fix Communication problem Problem A complete message was sent to the ECU but the content was corrupted This is often the result of a noisy communication line Remedy Try again Replace the communication line Make sure you have not exceeded the recommended line length for communication line Diagnosis Debuginf txt Incorrect ECU responsed Problem The wrong ECU has responded to a communication message One possible reason this can happen is when an ECU has the wrong security code Remedy Retry If problem persists identify the offending ECU Cycle power on that ECU and Clear and Restore its memory Diagnosis Use debuginf txt to identify the ECU that is inappropriately responding You can also run communication tests with show error check on each ECU to see if one has the wrong security code CM19 Unit received an invalid command Problem The ECU received a message that it does not know how to handle In many cases this is because the PC has misidentified the type or version of the ECU Remedy See CM12
443. online Help gt You can also click Help from any Infinity screen for more information gt If you are viewing this document from within the Infinity online Help you can easily access more information by clicking the links to other topics August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 13 Quick Start Task 1 Install Infinity Software To install Infinity software 1 Close all other programs running under Windows 2 Insert the Infinity CD in a CD drive 3 Click Install Infinity software 4 Click Yes to accept the License Agreement 5 Click Yes to confirm the serial number for this installation Each serial number can only be installed on one PC Therefore you will be asked to confirm the serial number at the beginning of installation See About Activation amp Renewal Choose Install Software as the Setup Type and click Next Click Next to accept the default destination directory C Program Files Berg Infinity 8 Click Next to accept the default folder for Infinity program icons Berg Infinity 9 Click Yes to place the Infinity icons on your computer desktop 10 Click No to not copy online manuals to your hard disk You can copy the manuals to your computer if you wish The default is to leave the manuals on the install disk This saves space on your PC You can always access Help from Infinity or view print the PDF version of the manuals anytime by inserting the install CD 11 En
444. only run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report if you selected Detailed Info under Quantity of Stored Data on the Data Storage and Display Options screen TAP 1 Manual Drinks Any manual pours from a TAP 1 ECU are displayed on this report separately from regular pours and labeled Manual Any manual pours are included in the brand subtotal for both Drinks and Sales The portion size number and associated price assigned to a manual pour is the portion size closest to the actual volume poured August 2010 Detailed Sales X3 gt This is the most detailed sales report provided by Infinity gt In addition to listing sales by brands and price levels it shows sales for each portion size gt For help with running the report see Run a Current Sales Report or Run an Advanced Report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 23 Hourly Sales X4 Report To understand the report Hourly Sales This report shows data for the past 48 hours at the station or group The type of data reported is determined by your selection in Data Storage and Display Options The default data is Sold Drinks and Sales as well as the Percent of Total Sales that each hour contributes to the report The numbers in the final column should total 100 Hours with no sales activity at the station or group are not listed on the report For 1544 Infinity ECUs sales data is listed for the past 48 hours that had any sa
445. onnected from the phone line The lights on the modems should return to their original reach states If the modem lights do not respond as described above test whichever modem seems to be at fault or both modems with some other communications application for example by dialing an online service or Internet provider If either of the modems fails in a test with another application replace that modem and repeat the test H the modem lights do respond as described above but communications still fail the problem may be within the Infinity components Perform the loopback tests listed under Local Network Communication Problems in this section Use a gender changer and treat the network modem s 25 pin D connector like the computer s serial port to perform the test Then remove the gender changer and plug the modem converter in and proceed to test it and then the communication cable August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 336 Troubleshooting Modem Dip Switch Settings If you use a modem supplied by Berg you dont have to worry about these settings If you use a non Berg modem Berg does not support it Computer Modem DTR Normal Auto Answer Off Carrier Detect Normal Load Factory Defaults Load Factory Defaults August 2010 Station Modem DTR Forced Auto Answer On Carrier Detect Forced Load Factory Defaults Dumb Mode Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 337 T
446. ons Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC 137 Infinity Help 138 Modify Prices and Portions To modify a single brand s prices and portions 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions 2 Select the Product Type 3 Select a Category to filter the price portion list by category 4 Select the brand s Prices and Portions you want to change Ifyou haven t set up any other price portion categories Standard is the only choice Click Sort by Descriptor to see the brand price portion list grouped by any descriptor s you ve defined To modify more than one brand s prices and portions see Modify Multiple Prices and Portions Click Modify A warning message may appear if the brand is uncalibrated anywhere it is assigned Click a Price Level tab to change its prices and portions Or just click Load Defaults to load your default prices and portions on all Price Level tabs Type the correct Portion and Portion Price for each Size listed on the tab You don t need to type a decimal if you re entering a whole number e g type 6 for 6 00 fl oz or 2 for 2 00 If you ve enabled Interface see How to enter PLUs for help with entering PLUs in Infinity 8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for every Price Level tab 9 Click OK to save the prices and portions on all tabs 10 Review the list of equipment where the brand is assigned if any and click a communication option These options are provided so you
447. ons Click Enable Disable Select the Equipment Name you want to enable or disable You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your hardware stations Select Show Actual to communicate with the selected equipment to determine the current price level Wait while the communication occurs The Unknown field is selected if Show Actual is not selected The software has no way of knowing the current price level of equipment unless it communicates with the equipment The Unknown field may also be selected if the equipment within a group is currently using different price levels Select the new price level Click Run to communicate the change to the equipment Wait while the communication occurs A message informs you when the change is complete Click Close to exit the screen August 2010 172 Change Price Level gt You can quickly change the price level for a station or group using this feature gt This is a convenient way to change the price level for the entire system gt Infinity can automatically perform this task at specified times if you include it ina schedule Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Set ECU Time To set an ECU s date time 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Operations Click Set ECU Time Select the Equipment Name You ll see the hardware station names of the ECUs you ve set up Click Rea
448. oopback Test 1 Unplug the loopback tester from the converter and reconnect the network cable 2 Disconnect the other end of the network cable from either the network junction box or an ECU and plug that end of the network cable into the loopback tester 4 Run the Loopback Test If there are no errors the network cable is OK If there are errors replace the network cable ends If the test still fails the cable is probably defective somewhere in the middle of the cable and should be replaced If the loopback tests verify proper operation of components but communications still fail for only a single ECU or for only a few ECUs but not all perform the ECU Communication Tests to test the individual ECU cable s H communications fail for all ECUs within a network the problem is either in the software configuration e g the baud rate is set incorrectly or in some hardware component or connection between the computer and the network ECU communication tests Use these tests if only some of the ECUs in the network are not communicating with the computer See Communication Test in the ECU Diagnostics section for help with performing the tests 1 Disconnect all cables from one of the non communicating ECUs 2 Connect the ECU directly to the computer using a known good converter and cable The only cables required for communication are the power cord and the communication cable 3 Run the Communication Test If there are no e
449. oopback Test 1 Unplug the converter from the Computere COM port 2 Run the Loopback Test If there are errors with the loopback tester disconnected and no errors when you connect the loopback tester the COM port is OK Perform the converter loopback test If there are errors either the COM port is incorrectly specified or the port is defective If you re unsure this is the port you re looking for try plugging the loopback tester into another 9 or 25 male pin port and see if the screen keeps counting errors If any port you try doesnt quit counting August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help errors you may have a defective serial port or you may need to change the system s settings for your COM port Converter loopback Test 1 Unplug the loopback tester from the computers COM port and plug the converter back into the COM port 2 Disconnect the network cable from the converter 3 Connect the test cable supplied with the loopback tester to the converter interconnecting the loopback tester and converter 4 Run the Loopback Test If there are no errors disconnect the loopback tester and see if errors occur If they dont you ve specified the wrong port If they do the converter and its transformer are OK Perform the network cable loopback test If there are errors the converter and or its transformer are not working Substitute a different converter or transformer and run the test again Network Cable L
450. or 6 00 fl oz or 2 for 2 00 Size and Price Level Modifiers If the sales terminal doesn t use separate PLUs to identify the size and or price level of a brand you need to determine the size and or price level modifiers the sales terminal uses Learn from the sales terminal representative what the modifiers are Interface software accepts modifier codes from 1 to 255 You can enter 2 codes for each modifier if necessary You must include the size and or price level modifier in the Current Modifier Order list before you can enter the modifiers Size Placekeeper for Cocktails If your sales terminal uses size modifiers a number is sent to the sales terminal in the drink code that defines the drink as small medium or large Since a cocktail doesn t usually have a size modifier its drink code is shorter than that of other pours If your sales terminal requires all drink codes to be the same length you can tell Interface to insert a placekeeper in a cocktail drink code to make it the same length as other pours The placekeeper sent is simply the size modifier corresponding to the cocktail bank of the cocktail pour If your sales terminal can handle drink codes of variable length don t use the placekeeper This avoids sending unnecessary information to the sales terminal Skipped Actions Time schedules are meant to be run all of the time so that none of the scheduled actions will be missed However if this does happen the Schedule program will
451. or New Brand ENNEN REENEN ENEE 110 Modify Multiple Bramds ss ccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeenesneenennenssnenssanenssansussansaseesasseesasseeeaseeeenseeeeeseeessseeeenseeeesenees 111 Switch Product Type cssssececeeeseeceeeesseneesesnnneeeeenseaneesenennaesesnanaeseensaaeaesnseanaesesnanaesesnanaeaeenseanaeensaananeas 112 Copy Brand Setupe ssccecesseseeseeeceeeeeeeenncseaneeeeeeeaennenecnaeeeseeeenanneqeaneeseseesensenqnanaeseeesasassneanaeaeseeesaaansqanaeeeeeeas 113 Initialize ET RN WC EE 114 Select Sizes and Price TEE 115 Price and Portion Defaul ts 2 2 ceesceeeceeeceeeseeeceeecea eee eeeeecaeeceeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseeaseaa seas nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 116 Si ZONA A sere lets cech ec ccede ete T 117 Delete Unassigned Brands CocktailS 1 ceeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseneaeeesesaeeeeeseaneeennes 118 Import Export Prices and Portions About Importing Brand Prices and Portions EENEG 119 About Importing Cocktail Prices and Porttons EENEG 122 Import Brand Prices and Portions ccessseeeseeesseeeeseeeseseenenseenensenensnenensneeenseeeenseeecnseeeenseeeensneesesneeeeaes 126 Import Cocktail Prices and Portioms ecesseeeeceenseeneeenseeneeeesnnneeesenseanaesnnnenaesesnanaeeeensaneusnsnnnanens 127 About Exporting Brand Prices and Portions EENEG 128 About Exporting Cocktail Prices and Porttons EENEG 129 Export Brand Prices and Portions ssssceseseeeseeeeeseeneeseenenssen
452. or coded pourer you selected Ata TAP a con gura on epo 1 tap pour a single portion At a 1544 Infinity ECU pour a single portion If before perfor ming calibration l you are calibrating by weight all brands must have their specific gravity See Initialize Calibration Values entered If the specific gravity is still listed as 1 0 then you will be prompted to enter the correct specific gravity Make sure you tare the weight of the container used to weigh the liquid 8 At the computer type the exact amount poured Click Calibration Portions if you need to change the calibration portion amount expected excluding TAP 1 This is a shortcut to the Calibration Portions screen See also TAP Calibration 10 Click OK after entering the Actual amounts Infinity displays the small and large accuracy based on the amounts you entered 11 If the values are within the accepted accuracy range click OK Proceed with step 13 OR If the values are not within the accepted accuracy range click Yes to re calibrate Answer Yes to repeat calibration using the values from the calibration just completed If this question seems to come up too readily and pouring seems to work accurately you may want to raise your accuracy percentage Use Calibration Units and Accuracy Answer No to accept the calibration values and stop calibrating Infinity still considers the brand calibrated but August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC
453. ore dispenser in the same Sales Station as this P3 Hub xxx is the only P3 Hub in a sales station and therefore will not use POS ID Problem POS ID is only useful when dispensers are sharing more than one P3 Hub The P3 Hub named xxx is the only one in its sales station Therefore the POS ID function is being turned off for this P3 Hub and the dispensers that use it Remedy Add additional P3 Hub s into the Sales Station Or you can turn off POS ID if you do not intend to use it at all Warning M215 xxx isa cocktail pad without any dispensers assigned to it Problem A Cocktail Pad without any dispensers cannot produce any cocktails When have more than one Cocktail Pad on an ECU you must indicate which dispenser are associated with each Cocktail Pad Remedy Under ECU Setup click on Cocktail Pad Association tab Pick a Cocktail Pad for each dispenser xxx restricted to a single P3 Hub POS ID is being turned off Problem Under POS ID Details you have restricted the dispenser named xxx to a particular P3 Hub No POS ID will be used on this dispenser Flow meter was not detected Flow meter count will not be changed Check flow meter wiring or Device Settings Problem You are calibrating a tap which is supposed to have a flow meter No flow meter counts were detected during the calibration pour Remedy Under Device Settings correct the Dispensing mode of the tap If it is correct then the flow meter likely is not wired correctly Flo
454. ork Pours Re port cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeneeenaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseenaeeeeeseaeeeeeseeneeenees 232 Detailed Sales X3 REPort secseseceeeseeeeseeeeneeneeneeneeasnenssansnasanenseansaseeusasneesasneuenseeeenseeeenseeesnseeeessneeensnes 233 Hourly Sales X4 Report sseeseceesseeeeeenseeneeensenneeeesnnnaeenensnanaesnssanauseenanaeceenseanauenseanaeseeaanaeeeensaaaeensee 234 Laser Guide Report ecccccceseesseseeeeeeneeensnneneaneeseeeeeenesnnaeqeseeeeasnesqeanaeseeeesensaneauanaeceeesaaneeseqnaeaeseeeenennas 235 PLU On bateace seth caces chess cana ctacedactececasisanetsarscansatdavaracestetsendtassaccceasentha cas saesiataanthcnsmeancasseepiczmectoctatenaae te 236 Power and Interface LOg ssceseseeeeeeeeseeeeneeneenenenseanenasanenssaesassensaseesasneesasseuenseeeenseeeensneessseeeessneeessnees 237 Price Portion Report cccceceseeseeseeeeeeeeeensnnsseaneeseseeeenseneananeeseeeeaanssneanaeceeeeaenaeneanaaaeeeeesasneeneanaeaeseeeenennes 238 Price Level Changes Re port sssseeccessseeneeensenneesesnnneeenenseanaesnnsenaeseenanaecesnseanaesnseaaaesesnanaeeeenseaaanenses 239 Reconciliation Re port ccccsssssseseeeeeeeeeeesneeseaneeseeeeeeneeneqnaeeeseeeeaanneqeanaeseeeeaenaaneananaeceeeeaaaneneanaeaeeeeeenannas 240 Reconciliation Example by VOlUMe ss ss ns1nsr1nnsrnnsnnnrsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne ennenen 241 Reconciliation Example by SaleS
455. ort Prices and Portions Brands Or you may be able to export prices and portions from a POS system to a file see the POS documentation You can also create a file in any spreadsheet or text editor and type in the price portion information What needs to be in the import file The import file should contain a separate line of text for each size of every price level of every brand you re importing Each line should list the price portion and PLU at the specified size and price level Each separate item in a line is called a column Import columns must be separated by a single character called a column separator usually a comma See the following excerpt from a sample import file Absolut Liquor A 1 0 50 1 00 500 Absolut Liquor A 2 1 00 3 50 501 Absolut Liquor A 3 1 50 4 25 502 Absolut Liquor B 1 0 50 1 75 503 Absolut Liquor B 2 1 00 3 95 504 Absolut Liquor B 3 1 50 4 75 505 Absolut Liquor C 1 0 50 2 00 506 Absolut Liquor C 2 1 00 4 00 507 Absolut Liquor C 3 1 50 5 00 508 In this file excerpt Brand name is column 1 Product Type is column 2 Price Level is column 3 Size is column 4 Portion is column 5 Portion Price is column 6 and PLU is column 7 Columns can appear in any order in your file but all lines in the file must use the same order You can also leave out columns you don t need For example if you don t use price levels or PLUs your import file may look like this Absolut
456. ort then lists the Price Portion Tables for each brand or cocktail Prc Lvl The price level A B C D Size The portion size up to 1 8 depending on product type Ptn The portion amount listed in the unit of measure for your system Ptn Price The price of the portion size PLU Product Assignments Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run Type of Data This report can only be run as a Current report The computer does not communicate with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from the computer s database August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Price Portion gt The price portion report lists the prices portions and PLUs for brands and cocktails gt There are two forms of this report gt Show Product Assignments lists the brands assigned to each dispenser in the selected station or group followed by the prices and portions for each assigned brand and any cocktails that have been assigned gt Show All lists the price portion tables of all brands and shows these regardless of whether a brand is assigned anywhere gt If you select Show All you can also select the product type if you only want one type of product to be on the report gt To select which form of this report to run simply click Show Product Assignments or Show All after selecting the Price Portion report in the Reports list gt For help with running
457. ortions 5 To copy a single brand s prices and portions to selected brands Copy Prices and Portions Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions Select the Product Type Category and Price and Portions name you want to copy and click Modify Edit the prices and portions if necessary See Modify Prices and Portions k gt Use the Copy feature to save time re entering the same prices and portions over and over for brands of the same product type IW 3 Click Copy or to quickly apply changes to OR the defaults for a product type to To copy default prices and portions to selected brands selected brands 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations gt Selecting Copy on the Modify 2 Click Price and Portion Defaults Prices and Portions screen or 3 Select the Product Type and click Modify the Enter Price and Portion Edit the prices and portions if necessary See Price and Portion Defaults Defaults screen will copy the 4 Click Copy prices and portions of the indicated price table to one or more other brands gt You ll see a list of all the brand price and portion tables of the same product type You select which brands in the list should receive the copy of the prices To copy prices and portions 1 Click Copy on the Modify Prices and Portions screen OR the Edit Price and Portion Defaults screen 2 If applicable select the price portion Category to receive
458. ortions 1 Select the Product Type of the new brand 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click the New Brand shortcut button 4 Follow the steps outlined in Brand List Setup to add a new brand or cocktail The Prices and Portions Setup screen remains open in the background while you add the brand cocktail When you click OK to save the new brand itbecomes the new selection in the Prices and Portions list so you can proceed with setting up the new brand cocktail s prices and portions August 2010 Prices and Portions gt When you set up prices and portions they are always associated with a brand or cocktail they re never defined independently gt Each brand s initial prices and portions are called its Standard category of prices and portions e g Budweiser Standard refers to the standard price portion category of the Budweiser brand gt Default prices and portions for the product type are assigned to all price levels of a brand when it is added to the brand list and these defaults are given the name Standard gt The brand list can be sorted by descriptor gt You can create additional categories of prices and portions for a brand if you need more prices and portions gt You can also import prices and portions After defining prices and portions Berg recommends calibrating dispensers before making changes to portion sizes Without calibration the dispensers may pour inaccurate porti
459. ory and record the number of containers on hand for each brand 10 Run Initial Stock It will prompt you to Archive and Clear Sales so any recorded pours can be cleared before you enter stock amounts Then it will prompt you to enter initial stock amounts from your physical inventory for each brand 11 Inventory is now set up and ready to use At regular ordering intervals perform an Inventory Check to assess stock amounts and adjust as needed before generating orders See How to run Inventory Check Promptly enter all deliveries received See How to enter deliveries gt See Inventory Overview for help understanding how Inventory works gt Inventory works best if you purge unassigned brands August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Supplier Setup To find supplier setup 1 Pull down the Inventory menu and Click Supplier Setup To set up a new supplier Click New 2 Type the New Name of the supplier and click Continue This is the supplier name that will be printed on orders 3 Type the Address of the supplier Type it as you want it to appear on printed orders If you don t need an address on orders leave it blank b A OR Select a product type to assign this supplier to a single product type nly ai a in the product type you select will receive the supplier assignment even if they already have a supplier assignment To select a different supplier for a
460. ostic step before using clear and restore memory Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 19 Brand List Setup To find brand list setup 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Brand List Setup To modify a single brand s setup 1 Select the Product Type and Brand Name from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Enter a Descriptor optional Container Container Cost Retail Price Per Unit and specific gravity only required if you calibrate using grams See Setup a brand for Inventory if you re using the Inventory feature 4 Click OK to save your changes To switch a brand s product type See Switch Product Type To copy a brand s setup to other brands of the same product type See Copy Brand Setup To modify the setup of multiple brands 1 Click Multiple This lets you view all brands in your list in a table format 2 Change setup entries for each brand see Modify a Single Brand above See also Modify Multiple Brands and Calculate Retail Price Click the Inventory tab and see Set up a brand for Inventory if you re using the Inventory feature 3 Click OK to save all your changes To add a new brand or cocktail to the list 1 Click New 2 Type the brand or cocktail s unique New Name The name can be up to 31 characters 3 If you are adding a brand click Continue to proceed or click Close to exit OR If you are adding a cocktail
461. ot produce the correct brand or cocktail names gt The ECU number identifies the ECU to Infinity software The number you enter in the ECU Number box must match the number set in the ECU Each ECU in a network must have a unique number Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Copy an ECU To copy settings from an ECU to create a new one 1 om to N Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station Select the Hardware Station you want to copy Click Show All Options Click Copy Select the name of the Network The network can remain the same Type in a unique ECU number Select the ECU number set in the ECU itself This must be an ECU number unused on the selected network The numbers of any ECUs you ve already set up appear in the Existing ECUs field Click Continue Wait while the software communicates with the ECU A Clear and Restore memory operation is performed for you so that the setup information is copied to the new ECU When the ECU Setup screen displays again you can click Modify to see the settings or to change the hardware station name for the new ECU In many cases you will want to calibrate the new ECU August 2010 You can copy an ECU s setup to create a new ECU in Infinity gt The new ECU type must match the type being copied gt Information copied includes ECU options and brand assignments and calibration How
462. ou ll see the Calibration Portions screen only if you clicked Calibration gt Use this shortcut to quickly Portions when entering calibration portion amounts Calibration will be change your calibration portion the most accurate if your calibration pours are the same as typical pours of amounts the selected brand gt Note there is no Calibration Change Calibration Portions Portions shortcut button when calibrating a tap Enter a typical Small Portion and Large Portion for the brand Infinity All Bottle or a typical 1544 Portion These entries become the Expected portion amounts for calibration Check Temporary to use these calibration portions for this brand only during this session Uncheck Temporary to use these portions as default calibration portions for all ECUs of the same type This is the same as changing your default portions for this ECU type on the Calibration Units and Accuracy screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 16 TAP Calibration A tap s dispensing mode determines its calibration Tap Head Flow Meter To calibrate a flow meter tap you ll be prompted to calibrate first in Timer gt Note there is no Calibration Mode and then in Flow Meter mode This provides accurate calibration Portions shortcut button values in the event the Timer is used as a backup for Flow Meter operation First pour measure and enter a portion amount in Timer Mode and repe
463. ou use Cocktail PLUs you can use the same column number for Cocktail PLU and ingredient Portion since one applies only to cocktail lines and the other to ingredient lines Or they may be different columns The columns Cocktail Brand and Price Level are required If you don t want a Product Type column in the export file type a zero In this case a blank line appears between cocktail definitions in the export file See How does the export file show where one cocktail recipe ends and another begins in Export Prices and Portions Cocktails lf you enter a zero for Size Portion Portion Price Cocktail Price or Cocktail PLU these entries in your database are not included in the file Optional columns are Product Type Price Level Portion Portion Price or Cocktail Price Cocktail PLU Export Report Columns If you run the export using Sales column items you can select any of the following columns All Volume Archive Time Canceled Drinks Pours Canceled Sales Canceled Volume Sold Drinks Pours Sales Sold Volume Comp Drinks Pours Comp Sales Comp Volume Container Container Cost Container Volume Descriptor Full Drinks Pours Net ECU Disp PLU Price Level Product Code Product Type Retail Price per unit Size Hardware Station Total Stock Current Time If you run the export using Usage column items you can select any of the Sales column items with the exception of PLU and Size In addition you can select the following columns
464. ous database should still exist You will now be given a chance to locate that database Question S272 Deleting any existing security level s will change users and functions with that security level to the lowest available level Do you want to continue Problem When you remove a security level it is possible you have functions or users who have been assigned that security level Any function or user with the deleted security level will be changed to the security level with the lowest priority still available the highest numbered Remedy Answer Yes to continue Answer No if you want to check which user and functions may have been assigned to that security level Question S273 You are about to unregister user s Are you sure Problem When you unregister a user that user is no longer available as a name which can log on to Infinity programs Be careful not to delete the last user without also turning off the Passwords Enabled flag Remedy Answer Yes if you are sure that this user is no longer needed Question S274 You have changed the volume units in an existing database If you continue all volumes will be converted to the new units Are you sure Problem Once you have started to enter data into a database changing the volume units will affect price portion tables cocktail recipes and archive records Note that cost per unit and retail value per unit are not changed If you continue all volumes already present in the database will be con
465. out Activation amp Renewal O N August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help za Activate or Renew by Email To activate renew an Infinity software license by email y Click the Activate button if prompted OR pull down the File menu and click Activate or Renew Choose Step 1 Contact Berg Click Continue Berg must be contacted with identifying information in order to activate the software Choose By Email Click Continue Enter required information including your Business name telephone and address Click Continue You ll have a choice of attaching this information in a file to an email or using cut and paste to copy the information into the body of an email To create a file you can attach to an email select Create Key File and click Continue Indicate the folder where you want to save the file Create an email to Berg Company and attach the file you just saved to the email The default folder for the file will be the Infinity folder It doesnt really matter where it s saved You just need to remember the location so you can attach itto an email OR N AA O Wu To cut and paste your information create an email to Berg Company and cut and paste the information in the box on the Activate screen into the email A subject line of Activate Infinity is recommended for the email Send the email to Berg Company This completes Step 1 of activati
466. ove Interface from your configuration by unchecking the Interface box This will remove the Interface menu and eliminate all sales terminal Interface functionality Note you can also just disable a driver You MUST remove all drivers from all ECUs before disabling Interface After disabling Interface you will not be able to remove drivers since the menu choice will be gone Explicit Sequence Numbers applies only when you are interfaced with a Micros POS which uses sequence numbers If this is checked you can choose which sequence numbers are used by each ECU or P3 Hub Use Sequence Number Setup to do this POS Identification only affects Dispenser Networks It means that dispensers share a POS and before each pour the P3 Hub to be used must be selected Check Suppress Confirmations if you don t want to see typical confirmation questions for software tasks Confirmation questions usually ask if you really want to do the operation Are you sure you want to delete X Click the Show Hidden Messages button to see confirmation screens you ve previously asked not to see For example when you confirm overwriting current data to import prices and portions you can specify Do not show this message again If you later decide you need the confirmation message click Show Hidden Messages Show PLUs specifies whether you ll see a column for entering PLUs on the Modify Prices and Portions screen You won t see this option if you ve installed Inter
467. owing methods Enter price and portion defaults using the Brand Wizard This method lets you set the defaults before the brand list is loaded so all brands will receive your defaults Use the Price and Portion Defaults menu item You can use this method before the brand list is loaded then all brands receive your defaults However if you use this method after loading your brand list it does not automatically change any brands with default prices and portions to the new defaults You must copy or load the new defaults where you want them Use the Save As Default button on the Modify Prices and Portions screen This method also does not automatically change any brands with default prices and portions to the new defaults You must copy or load the new defaults where you want them Delay and Calibration Delay and Calibration are the timing values adjusted during calibration to regulate the duration of each pour You can initialize these values before calibration High flow and standard flow pourers have different delay and calibration values If you switch to high flow pourers you should recalibrate the brands that use the new pourers You can enter the correct delay and calibration values before calibrating to speed up the process The delay calibration values and meter count flow rate values can be found on a Price Portion report Demo ECU You are allowed to communicate with a single ECU while in Demo Mode First select the Demo ECU If yo
468. p a separate network for each type All your ECU types can still be connected in one system in the hardware Wu O Type in an optional Security Code for the network Select Network on Modem if the network connects to a remote computer See Phone Init String Dial Rate Idle Time Hangup Time Tone or Pulse Connect Wait Redial Tries 8 Click OK to save all your entries and exit the screen Click Close to exit the screen without saving To modify a network 1 Select the Network from the drop down list 2 Click Modify 3 Select new entries and click OK to save your changes To rename a network 1 Select the Network from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a network 1 Select the Network from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion If you have ECUs set up in the network wait for the ECUs to be deleted N August 2010 Network Setup gt From the Network Setup screen you perform all tasks related to setting up networks in Infinity software gt You must set up a new network with a unique name before any communication between Infinity hardware and software can take place gt You must set up a network before you can set up any ECUs stations or groups gt You must set up a separate network for any Dispenser Network ECUs Tap 2 g
469. parator if required layout of the export file 4 Type a Comment Character if required gt Options you specify are used for 5 Check Column Headers if required all future exports until you Click Load Defaults to see the Berg defaults in all fields change them 6 Click OK to save your entries and exit Click Close to exit the screen without saving August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Reconciliation Options To enter reconciliation options 1 Pull down either the Options menu and click Reconciliation Options 2 3 Select Compare by Volume Compare by Sales or By Count If you select Compare by Volume or By Count choose the type of Berg volume you want to compare Sold Pour Volume or Pour Volume That is you decide whether to include comps and cancels in the volume Type in the Column Separator This is a character used to separate columns of information in the sales terminal data file The default is a comma Type the Header Lines number This is the number of header comment lines at the beginning of the sales terminal data file These lines are skipped by Infinity Check Verbose Errors to see all discrepancies listed on the Reconciliation report Discrepancies may include duplicate PLUs in Infinity unrecognized PLUs from the sales terminal etc There may be expected unknown PLUs from the sales terminal such as those for food orders Select a Sales
470. pied into the Infinity folder Since some of the files could have been the database may have been left in an inconsistent state Remedy Reboot and retry Use a different store disk or backup disk You may need to reinstall and rebuild the database from scratch ERROR INF31 The evaluation period has expired Problem This copy of software has a evaluation period which has just expired You may no longer use this copy of Infinity Remedy Upgrade your software to a full version of Infinity ERROR INF32 The system clock is not working Problem Infinity needs to read the PC s system clock for a number of reasons Such as running schedule The system clock could not be properly read for some reason Remedy You may need to replace the PC battery or correct the date and time set under CMOS when the computer is booted Sometimes when a network logon is required after a PC is rebooted the system clock cannot be accessed until the network logon is complete If the auto run schedule starts before this time it will be unable to read the clock until network logon is complete Diagnosis Look under the _debug and schedule for logs dated on January 1 1980 Check your PC s battery Check the time set under CMOS ERROR INF33 Maximum count was reached All counts reset to zero Problem A count such as used in the communication and loopback test has reached the maximum that can be handled or displayed The count will be reset to zero and the counting wi
471. plete this operation Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR M31 ERROR M50 ERROR M51 ERROR M52 ERROR M53 ERROR M54 ERROR M55 ERROR M56 ERROR M57 ERROR M58 ERROR M59 ERROR M60 August 2010 Dispenser network versions must be at least 1 00 Found Version x You must upgrade the firmware in order for the system to function properly Problem This version of the Infinity software can only run with Dispenser Network devices with firmware version 1 00 or later If you are using older equipment used in a standalone network you may run into this Diagnosis Use Communications Read Addresses and Versions to determine which devices need to be updated any with version before 1 00 Remedy Use Management Setup Re program to update the firmware for all older devices Appropriate firmware files are on the installation disk and are also downloadable from the Berg dealer bulletin board on the Internet You cannot copy to an ECU which has a different number or type of dispensers Problem The copy ECU function can only be performed between ECUs that have exactly the same number and type of dispensers The target you have chosen does not have any target ECUs that match the source ECU The copy cannot be performed Remedy Check that you have chosen the correct ECU or group You can copy individual dispensers that match by using copy dispenser You cannot copy to a different type of dispenser Prob
472. port 246 Sales Totals X1 Report 247 Save reports 210 Schedule copy actions 270 create a Time 266 create an On Demand 271 create new 264 Define Action description 267 delete 262 errorlog 276 exit from the command line 274 log 275 modify 262 265 options 68 rename 262 run 273 run from the command line 274 setup 262 August 2010 test 272 Security options description 50 enable disable passwords 54 functions at each security level 56 modify users 52 register users 51 security list of levels 55 unregister users 53 Select number of sizes and price levels 115 Serial number backup options 254 change from duplicate 48 configure for multiple users 47 Set ECUtime 173 Infinity system time 174 Set Default Alignment Values 157 Setup brands for Inventory 180 Category 134 cocktail ingredients prices and portions 141 Container 133 ECU Hardware Station 82 group 96 network 81 new brand 109 new cocktail 109 sales station 95 schedule 262 single brand prices and portions 138 Stock Room 179 Supplier 178 Show advanced calibration choices 166 Show File Versions 285 status of driver 197 Show portions 93 Show prices 93 Simultaneous ingredients 93 Size bank reset 93 Sizes create new names 117 select number of 115 Start free pour 151 Start in cocktail mode 93 Station change price level 172 enable disable 171 set up sales station 95 view equipment name mapping 70 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help oe
473. pour After Pour means pause after pour is complete No Notify means no notification at the tap Backup Timer Percent is used as a backup for taps using Tap Head Flow Meter With this dispensing method the pour is always timed in case of the rare circumstance that a flow meter fails However the backup timer can interfere with a full pour especially when the flow rate is variable If your backup timer is stopping pours prematurely try increasing the backup timer percent The backup timer percent is a percentage of the expected pour time This percentage is only used as a backup to stop a pour if the flow meter does not register the expected pour volume within the expected pour time PLUS the backup percentage time The percent can be anywhere from 0 to 100 20 is the Berg default You can enter a default value for your System Settings or you can enter a different value on different taps by selecting the specific equipment Any displayed Timer Value on Initialize Calibration Values will always reflect the calibrated time and does not factor in the Backup Timer Percent Example It normally takes 5 seconds to pour 8 ounces You are using Tap Head Flow Meter and have set the Backup Timer Percent to 20 If the flow meter does not register 8 ounces by the time 6 seconds have passed 100 20 of 5 seconds the pour is stopped Cancel Lockout Pct can provide a lockout for canceled pours at a tap When a pour reaches the percent you ind
474. promotion but you re already using all the price levels of your Standard price portion category You can create a new category of prices and portions e g Oktoberfest or St Paddy s Each new category you create includes a new set of price levels for which you can define new prices and portions Only one price portion category can be assigned to a dispenser at a time After you ve created additional categories you can switch categories any time you need to pour using a different set of prices and portions Close Closes the window currently displayed Cocktail Banks The three cocktail banks represent the three levels of cocktails available at the Laser gun using the up and down arrow buttons The cocktail banks can correspond to the size of the cocktails if you choose Use the Regular bank of cocktails for those poured most often This bank does not require an extra button press on the Laser gun The Lower bank is accessed with the down arrow button and the Upper bank with the up arrow button The number of cocktails you can assign to each bank is the number of buttons on the Laser gun 6 12 or 16 If you use button 16 switching on a Laser 16 gun you can assign 15 cocktails to each bank Cocktail Defaults Even though all your cocktail recipes are different you may have several recipes with a 1 2 fl oz ingredient and a 1 fl oz ingredient By defining default portions and prices for cocktail ingredients you can save time re entering the
475. que New Name and click OK to save it To delete a sales station 1 Select the Sales Station from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion If you delete a sales station the ECUs and dispensers in the sales station are put back on the Selection list They must be assigned to a different sales station to be interfaced k Wu g August 2010 Sales Station Setup gt All Infinity network hardware stations ECUs and Dispenser network dispensers must be in a sales station to be interfaced with a sales terminal gt By default all ECUs and dispensers are included in the lt Default Sales Station gt If you remove any equipment from this default sales station and do not re assign it to another sales station it will not be interfaced gt You can set up a new sales station if you want to combine Hardware Stations ECUs into a single logical unit or accountability area gt You might do this if you ll always change their price levels at the same time run the same reports etc gt When Allowing Multiple Drivers sales stations indicate which driver is being used by each ECU gt For Dispenser network ECUs if there is more than one P3 Hub on an ECU an additional sales station is required to specify the association between each P3 Hub and the dispensers it services gt For maximum flexibility set up new groups for all operations involving
476. quently for example hourly you can gather pouring per hour even on Infinity ECU dispensers You cannot combine Infinity Network and Dispenser Networks on a report which using any representation of the pour times Pour Event Pour events are non standard events during a pour This column indicates if a pour was Paused reached End of Keg or was stopped by the Backup Timer Pour Sales The sales figure for pours Calculated using drink prices and cocktail ingredient portion prices you entered in Infinity Pour Sales Pour Volume A sales figure determined by dividing the pour sales by the pour volume Pour Type Pour Types include Sold Complimentary Canceled and All The Berg default is All If you select a pour type other than All only sales data for that pour type appears on the report Pour Usage August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 315 Pour Usage indicates whether a Brand was poured as an Ingredient in a Cocktail This column also shows when the Brand is a Cocktail This column is blank if this was poured not pat of any cocktail Pour Value The volume units poured multiplied by the retail price per unit Pour Volume The number of volume units poured Used in a usage style report Includes Infinity defined cocktail ingredients comp pours and canceled pours Pour Without Release Pour without release lets the ECU pour a drink without waiting for approval or release from the sales terminal
477. r sales data may be lost 9 If you view the report on the screen see View Report 10 Click Close to exit the View screen 11 Click Close to exit the Reports screen August 2010 Column Selection Report gt To create a Column Selection report you can run later or run using a schedule create a custom report based on the Column Selection report gt See also Column Selection Report for a description of the report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 213 Run a Laser Guide Report To run a laser guide report 4 4 5 N o Pull down the Reports menu Click Advanced Reports Select Laser Guide as the Report Select the Equipment Name for which you want to run the report You ll see ECUs with Laser dispensers and individual Laser dispensers in the list Click View to run the report and view it on the screen OR Click Print to run the report and send it to the printer without viewing Type the Button Code for each brand if applicable You re entering any codes you may have placed over the Laser button numbers If you use the button numbers you don t need to enter anything Click OK Click Yes or No to answer the prompt about showing portions on the report If you selected Print the report is sent to the default printer or if you selected View the report displays on the screen See View Print Save Reports August 2010 Laser Button Codes gt Whe
478. r of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified time August 2010 247 Sales Totals X1 gt The sales totals report provides the total sales for the selected station or group gt Each hardware station in the group is listed separately gt For help with running the report see Run a Current Sales Report or Run an Advanced Report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 8 Usage Report To understand the report Usage This report shows the number of Full Pours Pour Sales Pour Volume a Count and the Container for each Brand It also lists the Percent Total Volume that each brand contributes to the report and the brand s potential pouring cost The end of the report shows the total Pours Sales and units for all brands in the station or group and the average potential pouring cost for all brands combined Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data stored at the computer since the last time you cleared s
479. r restart your computer while the report is running or sales data may be lost If you selected Print the report is sent to the default printer or if you selected View the report displays on the screen See View Print Save Reports 6 Click Close to exit the Reports screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 221 Custom Reports To find custom reports 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Custom Reports To create a new custom report See New Custom Report To run a custom report 1 Select the Report from the drop down list 2 Click View Wait for the report to display in the View screen See View Print Save Reports OR 1 Run a custom report as any other report See Run Advanced Reports To copy a custom report Select the Report you want to copy Click Show All Options Click Copy Type the New Name you want to give the copy Click Yes to confirm There are now two custom reports with the same settings Select the one with the new name and click Modify to make changes to the report settings To modify a custom report See Modify Custom Report To rename a custom report 1 Select the Report from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a custom report 1 Select the Report from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confi
480. ration copies the actual timing values for one gun button or coded pourer to other buttons or codes at the August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 302 dispenser When performing dispenser calibration select a brand that is representative of the viscosity or thickness of most brands at the dispenser After performing dispenser calibration each brand should still be calibrated using brand calibration Dispenser Converter By adding this device to a Dispenser Network ECU and connecting to an Infinity Network ECU the Infinity Network dispensers become part of the Dispenser Network This allows the Infinity Network dispensers to be included as ingredients for the Cocktail Pad Also you will get time stamping of individual pours The Dispenser Converter is most likely to be used to provide cocktail ring up with an All Bottle ID Added in ECU Setup Dispenser Network ECU This type of ECU manages communication between dispenser network devices e g Tap 2 and a POS system and or Infinity software This type of ECU is in many ways the same as an Infinity network ECU However since many operations can now be performed on dispenser network devices themselves the dispenser network ECU is not the only equipment with a brain in a dispenser network Also unlike Infinity network ECUs a dispenser network ECU stores a date time stamp for every operation so reports can be run with a finely filtered time range Dri
481. ration list reflects only your database configuration at of the networks and ECUs you the computer it does not check to see what hardware is attached at the have set up present time gt It also includes the Hardware 2 View the folder type list using the scroll bar if necessary 3 Click the plus sign on networks or ECUs to view their components Station name of each ECU gt This list is helpful if you want to 4 GE sign on networks or ECUs to collapse their get an overview of the system s p i organization or you need to see changes gt This screen is easily moved and resized and you can view it from any screen by pressing F8 gt The hardware configuration list reflects only your database configuration at the computer it does not check to see what hardware is attached at the present time August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help View Equipment Name Mapping To view equipment name mapping 1 Pull down the Options menu and click View Equipment Name Mapping OR From any screen press the F9 key The list reflects only your database configuration at the computer it does not check to see what hardware is attached at the present time 2 View the folder type list using the scroll bar if necessary The list is useful to check which ECUs are included in a sales station or other group 3 Click the plus sign on any equipment to view its name and any components 4 Click
482. ration portion sizes are defined in the Calibration Units and Accuracy screen For EPROMS 3 0 or greater All Bottle and Laser dispensers automatically switch to small portion size when put in calibration mode After you pour a small portion they switch to large You can still toggle between the two at the dispenser You can t set the portion size to regular At an All Bottle dispenser Berg recommends calibration pours when the beverage volume is in the middle third of the bottle At a TAP 1 tap pour a single portion with button 1 at the tap number you selected At a 1544 Infinity ECU pour a single portion with the coded pourer you selected Pour Communication Options Wait for Release The ECU sends drink information to the sales terminal and waits for approval release before pouring the drink Pour Without Release The ECU sends drink information to the sales terminal before pouring a drink but doesn t wait for sales terminal approval to start the pour Send After Pour The ECU pours the drink before sending drink information to the sales terminal Pour Date Pour Day of Week Pour Shift Pour Time Indicates when the pour was completed Choose among the Pour Time include the date just the date the day of the week or the shift These are most effective when used with dispensers connected to a Dispenser Network When you get sales from an Infinity Network ECU the Pour Time is the same as the Archive Date By archiving and clearing fre
483. rd 4 WO N O N 9 Run Infinity Brand Wizard starts automatically the first time you run Infinity Click Next to continue Select the product types you need and click Next Uptown Grill is using all product types Select the number of price levels and portion sizes and click Next Uptown Grill uses the default number of price levels and portions Type a reasonable portion amount and price for your first price level of Liquor and click Next Repeat for each price level If you like the defaults shown just click Next Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the Cocktail Wine Mixer and Other product types You ll see a newscreen for each price level Simply click Next anytime you don t have a better number to enter Click Next to load the product types selected 8 Click Next Uptown Grill uses the default container sizes Click Next to commence loading the brand list 10 Click Finish to exit the Brand Wizard August 2010 Default Prices and Portions You can just keep clicking Next to accept Berg s default prices and portions gt However it saves time later to enter your default prices and portions for each product type here For detailed help on any Brand Wizard screen click Help or see the Brand Wizard section in the manual Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 15 Quick Start Task 3 New Network Setup To set up a network Pee Peters S
484. re 3 Click OK A warning message appears reminding you that this operation clears all sales data from the ECU 4 Click Yes to proceed The communication with the ECU commences If needed click Yes to confirm changes to ECU settings 5 Wait while the ECU s memory is cleared and restored 6 Click Cancel to exit the Clear and Restore Memory screen You may see a message informing you of differences between the ECU s data and the database at the computer If your ECU s been having problems it s usually best to reload data from the computer to the ECU If you are using Interface performing this operation also brings up a message asking if you want to load the driver to the ECU August 2010 Clear and Restore Memory gt When you clear and restore memory for an ECU you reset the setup data at the ECU to match the setup data in the software and clear any sales data stored in the ECU gt This also establishes the EPROM version number of the ECU in the Infinity database gt You should perform this operation if you encounter memory problems in an ECU or you change the EPROM in an ECU or you replace an ECU This operation clears all sales data from the ECU without archiving or printing it Runa Clear Sales Z report first if possible if you want to preserve the sales data gt When you clear and restore memory for an ECU with an All Bottle ID dispenser turn the ID dispenser off during the operation Or
485. re disk as the target database store disks contain only configuration information not a complete database Remedy Reinstall or use a full backup to restore the database In case of deletion try using recycle bin or deleted file recovery utility present on some PCs to recover the missing files Diagnosis Send a folder listing of the files in the Infinity folder to Berg Logging Database cannot be accessed Logging will be suspended Problem An error has been discovered in the logging portion of the database probably during schedule Logging cannot continue because of this error The schedule will continue and other actions may be successfully completed Logs will continue to be placed in the error file and will also automatically be added to the debuginf txt diagnostics file Remedy Check and correct database errors Reboot and retry The destination folder name is too long Problem The destination folder name is limited to 30 characters Remedy Choose and type in a shorter destination folder name Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 354 General GE Error Messages GE00 09 GE10 19 GE20 29 GE40 49 GE50 59 ERROR GE00 ERROR GE19 ERROR GE21 ERROR GE43 ERROR GES50 ERROR GE51 ERROR GE52 ERROR GES53 ERROR GE54 August 2010 Insufficient memory Please exit Problem There is not enough available memory to continue running The current operation may not have completed successfull
486. re package select the software package If you have installed a Postech interface board on your POS terminal you should select Postech board If you have installed some other interface board select Berg Parallel Finally if none of the above apply select Berg Generic See Driver Help for specifics on each of the possible driver selections Click lt Add to move your selection to the Activated list Click Allow Multiple Drivers if you need to activate additional drivers for other sales stations Click OK to confirm the sales stations message Repeat steps 2 3 for any additional driver Selecting the Allow Multiple Drivers option inserts a Sales Stations menu item in the Interface menu After you exit the Activate Driver screen you can select which driver goes with each of your existing sales stations or you can set up new sales stations and assign a driver to each Create at least one sales station for every driver you are using Note that you may create more than one sales station for a driver Make sure each ECU using a driver is in a sales station assigned to that driver before you load drivers Click OK to save the activated driver s Click OK to confirm the message about loading drivers to ECUs See Load Driver August 2010 gt When you have installed Infinity with Interface a specific driver must be selected before you can load a driver to ECUs gt A driver is a computer file included with Interface software
487. red Successive order numbers are automatically generated Type or verify the Order Quantity for each brand If you re using Order Point once you enter a quantity for a brand it s remembered for future orders If you re using Par Stock the quantity shown is the number needed to reach par stock This quantity is not remembered since it s re calculated for each order OR Check Show Rooms and enter verify an order quantity by stock room Type the Order Cost for each brand Once you enter a cost for a brand it appears on every order until you change it If you checked Calculate Container Cost on the Inventory Options screen any order cost you enter here will be divided by the order quantity to determine a new container cost for the brand If you didn t check Calculate Container Cost the order cost has no effect on the container cost 10 Click Print to print a copy of the order You can uncheck Show Rooms when you print the order for the supplier Check Show Rooms to print the order for receiving 11 Click OK to save the order and exit OR If you re ordering brands from more than one supplier click Next and repeat for each order August 2010 Inventory Check Inventory Check uses only the volume data that s been archived at the computer to calculate the reduction in stock amounts for each brand gt If you haven t archived and cleared sales since your last Inventory Check you ll be prompted to do
488. rfest back to any other price portion category you ve defined You can automatically switch price portion categories at specific times by including the switch in a schedule See Schedules gt Switching a price portion category doesn t delete the old category Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Prices and Portions Setup To find prices and portions setup 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Prices and Portions To modify a single brand s prices and portions See Modify Prices and Portions To modify prices and portions for multiple brands See Modify Multiple Prices and Portions To modify prices and portions for cocktails See Cocktail Prices and Portions To see where a selected brand or cocktail s prices and portions are assigned 1 Click Show All Options 2 Click Show Product Assignments The equipment names if any display in the Product Assignments list To delete a single brand or cocktail s prices and portions 1 Click Show All Options 2 Click Delete 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion You cant delete prices and portions already assigned to dispensers To quickly access Category Setup 1 Click Show All Options 2 Click the Category Setup shortcut button The Prices and Portion Setup screen closes and the Category Setup screen displays where you can create a new set of prices and portions if you need them To add a new brand or cocktail while setting up Prices and P
489. rg Company LLC Infinity Help 236 PLU Report To understand the report PLU This report lists the PLU for every brand in the selected station or group and shows the Brand Name price portion Category Name Price Level and gt The PLU report lists the PLUS portion Size assigned to the PLU PLU Report that are assigned to each brand Printed On in the selected station or group The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run gt For help with running the report Type of Data see Run an Advanced Report This report can only be run as a Current report However the computer does not communicate with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from the computer s database August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Power and Interface Log To understand the report Hardware Station The name of the hardware station reporting Date The date of the event Time The time of the event Event Indicates the event that was logged Depending on the ECU events logged may include power loss and power on clear and restore memory enter exit Free Pour Interface disabled and enabled POS override switch on and off and changing between Pour without Release and Wait for Release Error conditions will also be listed here including the hardware stations that do not record power losses or Interface state changes Printed On The Time and Date on the report are
490. rice levels do not switch but other operations appear normal verify that price level changes are enabled in the ECU definition If the feature is enabled and the problem persists isolate it as follows Replace the ECU with a substitute test ECU and try again Make sure the baud rate and ECU number of the test ECU match those of the suspect ECU If price levels switch with the new ECU the problem was in the dispenser controller board or the CPU board of the original ECU 2 If price levels still do not switch unplug the cables connecting the dispenser to the replacement ECU and inspect the connections for problems such as moisture bent pins corrosion etc 3 Whether or not you find an obvious connection problem plug the cables into the original ECU not the ECU you used for the test in step 1 above and try again and or replace the cables and try again 4 If still unsuccessful remove the All Bottle or Laser dispenser from its mounting plate and remove the cover 5 Place the probes of an ohmmeter on the common and normally open leads of the switch The meter should read gt 1000 ohms when the switch is open and lt 2 ohms when the switch is closed August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help If the readings are incorrect the switch is defective or incorrectly assembled and should be replaced ECU stops pouring 1 Verify that the ECU is properly connected to all dispensers 2 Ve
491. rify in software that the portion and price level of the brand in question is not set to zero and that the ECU itself is not disabled at the computer 3 Ifa POS Interface driver is loaded and enabled check to see if the sales terminal is in the correct mode Then test with the ECU in the Pour Without Release mode or with POS bypass enabled Try with the driver removed 4 lf these preliminary tests do not identify the problem reset the ECU electronics unplug the AC line cord from the ECU wait five seconds and then plug it back in 5 If the problem persists and the ECU includes an All Bottle dispenser realign the activator ring See Align All Bottle Activator Rings in the Calibration section If the unit then pours the activator ring alignment is probably drifting This can be caused by an aging activator ring contamination of circuit boards or loose or dirty cable connections Another possible cause is immersing the activator ring in water or ice which can temporarily change the alignment 6 If the problem persists restore the ECU memory See Restore Memory in the ECU Diagnostics section This clears ECU sales so run an Archive and Clear Sales Z report first if you want to save the data If the unit then pours the ECU had probably lost its memory which can be caused by a dying battery on the CPU board To test the battery unplug the ECU again wait one minute plug it in again and see if the ECU is still pouring and
492. right 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 233 Detailed Sales X3 Report To understand the report Detailed Sales This report shows the number of of Sold Drinks Sales and Sold Volume for every portion Size of each Brand Name at each Price Level of the selected station or group The total Sold Drinks and Sales for the Brand at each price level are computed along with the total number of Complimentary and Canceled drinks and the total sales value of these drinks These complimentary and canceled totals are not included in the Sold Drinks and Sales totals for the brand The Sales Drink Volume is given for each brand at each price level The total Sold Drinks and Sales for each price level are shown with the Complimentary and Canceled Drinks and Sales value for each price level The end of the report shows the totals for all price levels Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data stored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the ECU You can
493. riptor and click OK A message at the bottom of the screen tells you when the operation is complete To modify a size name set 1 Click Modify 2 Type a new name for any Size 3 Click OK to save your changes To rename a size name set 1 Select the Size Name Set from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a size name set 1 Select the Size Name Set from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion 5 Click Continue to complete the deletion or Cancel to abort the process August 2010 117 gt Perform this task to enter your own names for sizes gt Once you create a size name set you can assign it to any product types or to brands with a descriptor gt You can create as many size name sets as you need Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ns Delete Unassigned Brands Cocktails To delete unassigned brands and cocktails 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click E Delete Unassigned Brands Cocktails Delete Unassigned 2 Click Yes to proceed with the deletion gt It s usually best to purge any unused brand cocktail names to create a more concise brand list gt Inventory works best if you purge unassigned brands gt Be sure you ve made all your brand and cocktail assignments before
494. river Use Berg cable 8007993 Use POS software version 3 3 or higher The POS software supports pre checking NCR 1101 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board NCR 2760 This selection installs a POS driver NCRS Saturn This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 The POS software supports pre checking Omron RS 3010 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Omron RS4541 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Omron RS4841 4341 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Panasonic JS 5000 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Panasonic 7500 Plus This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This selection installs a POS driver A special cable available from Panasonic is required A RJ 45 connector is used Panasonic 7700 Plus This is a software package that runs on your sales terminal This selection installs a POS driver A special cable available from Panasonic is required A RJ 45 connector is used PDQ Restaurant Systems This selection installs a POS driver PI Electronique This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 Pixel Point This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993
495. rm the deletion The custom report is deleted from the list To open or delete a custom report output file rdf See Open or Delete Report Files August 2010 Custom Reports gt You can create your own custom reports by selecting an existing report to base your report on customizing the options for the report and giving your report a new name gt This is especially helpful if there are several report options you change each time you run a certain report You can set those options once save the report with its own name and never have to set the options again gt You can run any custom report you ve created from the Custom Reports screen by clicking the View button or using the Advanced Reports screen or by including the report in a schedule gt For a description of each report see Types of Reports Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 222 New Custom Report To create a new custom report 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Custom Reports 2 Click New New Custom Report 3 Type the New Name of your custom report gt When you create a custom Itcan be up to 31 characters report you select an Infinity 4 Click Continue report and save specific options 5 Select the name of the report you want to customize from the Based On for the report under a new name list of your choice The list does not include other custom reports gt This makes it
496. roduct Type column in the file so you ll see that column grayed out For example if you want to export a file that contains only Beer prices and prices select Beer as the product type on the Export Prices and Portions screen If you want to import only Beer prices and portions select Beer on the Import Prices and Portions screen and make sure your import file contains only Beer prices and portions Selecting Beer as the product type when your import file contains all product types does not import only Beer products Increment Add To PLU Your sales terminal may derive separate PLUs for comp or canceled drinks using increments rather than identifying these pours with modifiers For example using a comp increment of 1000 means all PLUs under 1000 are regular drinks and all PLUs over 1000 are comp drinks If you want to enter a comp or cancel increment do not include the comp or cancel modifier in the Current Modifier Order list Simply enter the increment in the Add to PLU box under Comp Modifier or Cancel Modifier on the Auxiliary Modifiers tab If you define both comp and cancel increments they are both added to the base PLU August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 309 of a canceled comp drink Infinity Network ECU Any ECU that connects to the 9600 baud Infinity Network These are the Infinity ECU Laser and All Bottle the Tap 1 ECU the 1544 Infinity the Draft Sentinel and the Wine bar Ingredient Port
497. rop down list 4 Select the Quantity of Stored Data stored in the archive records 5 Select the Hourly Sales Type of Data stored for hourly sales reports 6 Select Clear to delete hourly sales data from the ECUs when you Archive and Clear Sales OR select Don t Clear to keep it The default is Don t Clear 7 Select the Schedule Log Storage Length from the drop down list 8 Click OK to save and exit August 2010 Data Storage and Display gt You should enter these options at the time of software installation gt The options for data storage and display include how long to keep archive records how much sales data to keep in archive records what type of hourly sales data you need and how long to keep the schedule log Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Country Options To enter country options 1 Access Configuration Options Country Options 2 Click Country 3 Select the Unit of Measure for calculating and displaying fluid volumes gt The unit of measure is called a You cant change the unit of measure once you ve entered any portion sizes country option because into the database usually it is the country you live 4 Click OK to save and exit in that determines how you set this option gt You should enter the unit of measure at the time of software installation August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Features
498. ror appears in the schedule log when the error file could not be opened Note that all errors will still be located in the schedule log Remedy View the schedule log to check on errors Restoring a backup or store disk may restore Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 355 the error file ERROR GE55 Illegal characters in X Problem Some characters are illegal for certain text If the text will be used as part of a file or folder name for example you cannot use the characters that can have special meaning in a folder name such as the colon or backslash Remedy Delete the characters Note that often this will be done for you August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 356 Infinity INF Error Messages INF00 09 INF10 19 INF20 29 INF30 39 INF40 49 INF50 59 ERROR INF01 ERROR INF02 ERROR INFO3 ERROR INF04 ERROR INFO6 ERROR INF07 ERROR INFO8 ERROR INFOQ ERROR INF10 ERROR INF11 ERROR INF 12 ERROR INF13 August 2010 This program was not meant to be run on this version of Windows Problem The current Infinity Windows combination will not allow Infinity to be run correctly Remedy Install Infinity on a compatible versions of Windows Diagnosis Check the release notes manual or setup disks for the Windows Operating System versions that your Infinity software runs on Please puta floppy in the disk and close the door Problem You have tried to
499. roubleshooting Pouring Problems Laser won t pour If you are interfaced there are additional reasons why you may not pour The Laser manual also has a section on pouring problems 1 Check the Price Level light on the remote console or station A Light is on Write down the current price level Look at the gun and write down the current size Go to step 2 B Lights are flashing i Fast flashing Memory is cleared Do a clear and restore memory and repeat step 1 li Slow flashing Power supply short circuit Repair or replace power supply C Lights are off i Make sure unit is plugged in and power is not switched off to the electrical outlet li Make sure that the console station is properly connected to the ECU iii From Infinity Manager enable the ECU If lights do not go on see information in Steps 2 B and 3 for identifying ECU and dispenser iv Dead unit Power supply board battery 2 Make sure you are using the ECU you expect From Infinity disable the ECU using a station or group which only contains this ECU Use F8 to find the station for this ECU Then press F9 and click on the plus sign to make sure no other ECUs are in this same station If so create a station that only contains this ECU and proceed A Lights go off Go to Step 3 B Lights do not go off You have misidentified the ECU Check the ECU number by looking at the DIP switches Or if you have more than one network use Infini
500. rrect PLU for the displayed price level Get the correct PLU from the sales terminal 13 Repeat steps 8 12 for each Price Level tab 14 Click OK to save your entries on all tabs 15 Repeat steps 2 14 for each PLU recipe you need to create 16 Click Close to exit the Prices and Portions Setup screen To assign a PLU recipe You should assign the brand s in your PLU recipe before assigning the PLU recipe Pull down the Pouring menu and click Assign Cocktails Select the Equipment Name and click OK You ll see the list of all hardware stations ECUs and dispensers capable of pouring cocktails Select an ECU where you pour the PLU recipe Click the PLU Recipe tab Select a PLU recipe you pour at this ECU from the Cocktail List Click lt Assign or drag and drop the selected recipe in place The numbers in the Recipe column on the Prices amp Portions list do not correspond to any dispensers Repeat steps 4 5 for each PLU recipe at this ECU The order in which the PLU recipes are listed has no significance You just want to include all the PLU recipes poured at this ECU Click OK to save cocktail and PLU recipe assignments on all tabs If any ingredients are missing a prompt reminds you Click Continue to proceed The Modify Brand Assignments screen displays so you can assign the ingredients and then go back to saving the cocktail and PLU recipe assignments August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC
501. rrors the ECU is probably OK Using Berg s RS485 Network Tester PN 8005830 will give you a more certain result If there are errors check the baud rate and ECU number set in the software and in the ECU unplug it first If the settings are correct try replacing the CPU board in the ECU August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help If you switch boards set the ECU number and baud rate in the ECU before re trying the Communication Test If there are still errors replace the ECU Daisy chain cables If the ECU s test out OK test the cable connecting the ECUs in the network If you have a problem communicating with the last ECU s in a daisy chain the problem is usually a cable problem 1 Disconnect the last ECU in the chain and take it to the ECU it was connected to 2 Connect a short jumper cable between the 2 ECUs 3 Run a Communication Test If there are no errors the problem is in the cable previously connecting the ECUs August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 334 Troubleshooting Remote Network Communication Problems Remote network communication errors usually include modem errors and or cabling connections Check modem requirements If you suspect a malfunctioning modem first check to make sure that the modem s type configuration and operational settings are consistent with the requirements of the Infinity system gt All modems must be Haye
502. run as many On Demand schedules as you need See On Demand Schedule Setup How can I save what is currently in BERG SCH before copying over it 1 If you want to save your current BERG SCH setup first create a new Time schedule with a descriptive name e g Regular sch You must add at least one action to the new schedule to save it 2 Now select BERG SCH and copy it to the new schedule e g Regular sch you just created BERG SCH and Regular sch are now identical You can now copy another schedule to BERG SCH see below How do I copy another schedule to BERG SCH 1 First create a new Time schedule and save it with a descriptive name e g MardiGras sch 2 Select the new schedule e g MardiGras sch and copy it to BERG SCH Now BERG SCH and MardiGras sch are identical August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 264 New Schedule To create a new schedule y Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules Click New Select a folder to save the new schedule in the Look in field and type a File name for the new schedule The default folder is the Program Data Berg Infinity folder You don t need to type the sch extension in the file name 4 Click Open The New Schedule screen displays with the Options tab in front 5 Click On Demand to create a schedule with no set times The days of the week tabs are replaced by the On Demand tab See On Demand Schedule Setup OR Click S
503. ry on every affected ECU using a live version of Infinity August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Demo ECU To set up a demo ECU 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Demo ECU You must be in Demo Mode to see this option 2 Type the ECU number and click OK EE SIG Wado 3 Click Live Connection in the Communications box displayed in the communicate with a single ECU top left corner of Infinity while in demo mode while in Demo Mode Only one ECU is allowed to communicate in Demo Mode All other ECUs Si gt If you are running a version of will get a CM25 error Infinity built and installed as DEMO select the Demo ECU by running the Setup program on the Infinity CD August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Demo Setup To set up a demo version 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Demo Setup 2 Enter your choices for demo version numbers on the Demo Setup Demo Setup screen 3 Click OK to save your changes and exit or click Close to exit without gt You can set up a demo version saving changes of Infinity to simulate the sales data of an actual system even though you have no Infinity hardware connected gt The numbers you choose for your demo version are used to generate a random amount of sales data to demonstrate Infinity s features gt Click Load Defaults to use Berg s default demo version numbers gt You ca
504. s Remedy Answer Yes to create this schedule You will then need to indicate when you wish to run the Archive and Clear Answer No to create your own schedule later Question SCH202 Do you wish to copy lt day1 gt to lt day2 gt Problem If you click on an empty day tab in Modify Schedule you will be given the opportunity to copy the contents of the previously selected day tab to the empty day This gives you a good method of copying the same set of actions to multiple days Remedy Answer Yes to copy Answer No to enter a different set of actions Question SCH203 Press OK to confirm that you want to stop running this schedule Problem To prevent accidentally stopping a schedule you must always confirm If this question in not answered in a timely fashion the schedule will continue Remedy Answer Yes to stop the schedule Answer No if this was unintended Question SCH204 Press OK to confirm that you want to pause this schedule Problem To prevent accidentally pausing a schedule you must always confirm If this question in not answered in a timely fashion the schedule will continue Remedy Answer Yes to pause the schedule Answer No if this was unintended Question SCH205 lt schedule gt was last run on lt day gt at lt time gt Do you want to run the list of skipped actions now Problem One or more actions have been missed since the last time that you ran this schedule You have an opportunity to run all of the missed actions now
505. s Preferences a D gien ear F nventory Options wegen Ss Report Options Report Options Export Options Export Options Reconciliation Options Reconciliation Options Schedule Options Inventory Options View Hardware Configuration View Hardware Configuration F8 View Equipment Name Mapping View Equipment Name Mapping F9 Demo Mode Demo Mode August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 33 Backups Store Configuration Reload Configuration Restore Full Database Reload Previous Version gt Configuration Communications Loopback Test Communication Test Communication Wizard Clear and Restore Memory Identify Device Set Addresses Read Addresses Broadcast Pending Reset August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Store Configuration Reload Configuration Backup Full Database Restore Full Database Reload Previous Version Configuration Reload Previous Version Database Clear Sales Loopback Test Communication Test Communication Wizard Clear and Restore Memory Identify Device Set Addresses Read Addresses Show Address Broadcast Pending Reset Dispenser Network Memory Test Get Version Number Check Database for Errors Rebuild Database Index Files Rebuild Database Delete Chain Emergency Rebuild Database Repair Database Clear Database Log Show File Versions Compare ECU to Database D
506. s 75 sizes and price levels 76 Brands add new 109 assign to dispensers 144 Brand Information Report 225 copy assignments 147 copy setup of one to others 113 delete 109 Exit Pour Test 150 load initial list 114 modify 109 modify multiple 111 modify multiple prices and portions 139 remove from dispensers 144 rename 109 set up for Inventory 180 Brightness 93 Business name 38 Button 16 enable 93 Ce Calculate cocktail ingredient portion prices 142 Calibration align All Bottle 7 activator rings 155 Brand Calibration Enter Portion Amount description 160 calibrate dispensers 158 Calibration Units and Accuracy 167 change calibration portions 164 copy All Bottle values 147 Dispenser calibration 158 Dispenser Calibration Enter Portion Amount 161 enter calibration mode 168 exit calibration mode 169 initialize calibration values 170 List calibration 158 List Calibration Enter Portion Amount 163 more about 153 Show Advanced Calibration Choices 166 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help n Calibration Store Alignment Values description 156 Cancel lockout percent 93 Category delete 134 modify 134 new 135 rename 134 setup 134 switch dispensers to new 136 Change Change Network or ECU number 88 price level of station or group 172 serial number 254 Change Business Name 38 Change Database Folder 39 Change from duplicate serial number 48 Change pour communication 200 Charge canc
507. s a list of currently registered users Remote network Up to 32 ECUs linked together by a single data transmission line that communicate with a computer through a modem and telephone line A remote network requires an open phone line only when data is exchanged This exchange occurs when setup data is sent to the ECU and when reports are generated The rest of the time the ECUs manage barside operations on their own Repair Option Prompt for each fix prompts you each time an error is found You can then choose to fix the error or not If your database is large or has lots of errors this option can take a long time Fix all without prompting finds errors and fixes them without waiting for confirmation Select this option only if directed by Berg personnel Report errors without fixing finds errors in the database and lists them without changing anything You can safely select this option anytime Repeat Action The last tab on a Time Schedule allows listing a set of actions that should be repeated multiple times each hour These actions are defined the same as any schedule action except the Day is set to Repeat and there is no specific Time Instead of Time on the first tab use the Repeat Settings to indicate how often and when the Repeat Actions should run The Interval is selected by choosing a number in the Interval box The interval must be between 1 and 60 inclusive and must be an even divisor of 60 The Starting Minute of the Hour can also
508. s as you approach the expiration date When prompted click on Renew to extend your license for another year gt Or at any time click File Renew to renew Note that by renewing early you will not lose any licensing days That is your anniversary date remains the same Expiration gt If your license expires the software will not run So do not wait until the last minute to renew Expired licenses can be re activated via the renewal process However expired licenses will not be given priority over other activation There may also be a pricing penalty for waiting until after expiration gt Berg will only reinstate current software In the case the software has lapsed and there is a new release you must first install the upgrade before you can re activate your license This means you must wait for a software CD to be shipped to you before you can activate and use the software gt Therefore it is in your best interests to promptly renew your license when notified Software Upgrades gt All licensed users are automatically mailed software upgrades when they are available gt Simply install the software on the same PC and the upgrade occurs automatically Your license is not be affected and you do not need to re activate PC Clock gt Do not rollback the date on your PC Doing so will invalidate your license Daylights Savings time or other time adjustments do not affect your license August 2010 Copyrig
509. s compatible that is they must respond to the AT command set and must have Hayes compatible S registers gt A separate phone line must be provided for each modem gt Is the problem continuous or intermittent Is it predictable or repeatable If so how gt If the phone lines at the installation are controlled by a PBX system call the PBX dealer to see if that particular PBX system is compatible with modems gt Berg s RS 485 to RS 232 converter must be inserted between the network modem and the first component of the network gt The baud rate setting for all ECUs served by the same modem should be set to the same value not to exceed the transmission capacity of the modem itself Check modem lights gt If you have an external modem with status lights observe the reactions of the lights to attempted communications A special communications utility such as Telix ProComm Q Modem etc may be helpful for these sorts of diagnostic tests With configured modems properly connected check to see that the AA Auto Answer TR Transmit and MR Modem Ready Power lights are on The HS High Speed light may also be on As the modems communicate the data or send and receive lights should blink gt If the lights on the modems are labeled differently use the above names labels as a guide Also some modems have only two lights for power and data Verify as much as you can from the available lights on the modems Check modem
510. s do not interface all of their ECUs Remedy Answer Yes if this ECU is interfaced to a POS or ECR sales terminal Question M371 Calibration accuracy exceeds 1000 Are you sure want to use these entered portions Problem The calibration accuracy is calculated from the expected and actual portions The expected and actual are very far apart and this may result in unusual calibration values It is likely that you entered the wrong portion or the starting calibration values are in error Remedy Check the portions you entered and correct them Or go to Initialize Calibration Values and reset to the defaults Question M372 Device is in Free Pour mode If you proceed the device will exit free pour r n r nDo you want to continue Problem Free Pour mode is incompatible with certain operations Performing this action will affect one or more dispensers which are in free pour mode Remedy Answer Y to proceed exit free pour mode and perform the action Answer N if you need to remain in free pour mode Question M373 You are attempting to calibrate 1 brand 2 but the last button pushed was 3 You may be calibrating the wrong brand dispenser or ECU Are you sure you want to continue Problem Certain dispensers can detect the last brand that was poured You have indicated that you are calibrating one brand but the last button pushed was a different one If you calibrate the wrong button then the pouring will not change at the brand you are trying to cal
511. s in calibration mode Do you want to take these out of calibration mode Problem If you use enter calibration mode to put more than one ECU into calibration in order to calibrate more than one ECU at a time you must explicitly take these units out of calibration mode This message Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 388 will appear at the end of Infinity to remind you to do that Remedy By answering Yes the units in calibration mode will be taken out of that mode Question M357 You have entered a category name which does not exist Do you wish to create a new category name Problem You can create a new category name for the brand by typing in an valid name This can be done on import brand or cocktails Since you can also choose from the existing category name list this prompt wants to make sure that you didn t mistype expecting to match a current category name Remedy Answer Yes if you intend to create a new category name Note that all existing category names will still exist Question M358 Do you want to Clear and Restore Memory Problem Some operations may require that you Clear and Restore Memory of an ECU Remedy If you know you should restore the ECU memory or you are not sure answer Yes Question M359 Address for device 1 was not set Do you want to skip rest of addressing and continue with Save Problem The listed device did not properly get an address You can skip the rest of the addressing requir
512. s not match the database then it is likely the settings do not match either Berg recommends that you Clear and Restore Memory instead Do you want to continue Problem While synchronizing the version of the database with the equipment version may allow you to continue with many operations there is a good chance that in this situation that there is other information which is not the same in the equipment and the database A better solution is often using Clear and Restore Memory which updates the equipment with the database settings and updates the database with the equipment version Remedy Answer Yes if you are sure that the equipment does have up to date settings Answer No to stop This allows you to do a Clear and Restore Memory You are about to delete all empty sales station and group names Do you want to continue Problem All sales stations and groups which do not contain any ECUs are about to be deleted This may affect groups and schedules that refer to the sales stations and groups being deleted Operations however on empty sales stations and groups do nothing so it is best to remove them Remedy Answer Yes to confirm the purge Answer No if you may want to reassign or reuse these names You are about to delete all unassigned cocktails and prices and portions Additionally unused brand names and category names will be deleted Do you want to continue Problem Any cocktail or brand price and portion tables that are not assigned will be dele
513. s of each device will be communicated to the hardware when you click OK See Set up a Cocktail Pad for more information about Cocktail Pads Type a new Device Name for each Device Address The default device name is the network name ECU number device address You can enter a more meaningful name e g Left POS or the brand of a tap Left Sam Adams Device names are displayed in all lists of equipment assigning brands reports schedules so choose names to help distinguish your dispensers easily Select the Sales Station for each Dispenser Number See POS Identification for more information about sharing POS terminals on the Dispenser Network Click OK to save the ECU A message tells you to press the address button on the device you ve assigned to address A Go to the equipment you specified for Device Address A and press the flashing button This enables the software and hardware to communicate the correct address for the device When finished the software displays the message for the next device Repeat step 6 for each device as prompted When all the device addressing is done communication occurs to send all August 2010 It s a good idea to enter your system Device Settings before setting up a new ECU so the dispensers you set up will have the system settings gt You can use the Device Settings button as a shortcut to this screen but you must first save what you ve set up on the
514. s the process faster Brand Name Sort Specifies how you want Infinity to sort brand names on reports The Berg default is Normal Sort The sort does not determine subtotals it just specifies how brand names are listed Normal Sort provides a combined alphabetical list of all brands followed by an alphabetical list of cocktails Sort by Product Type provides an alphabetical list of brands for each product type liquor wine mixer beer followed by an alphabetical list of cocktails Separate by Archive Date provides a separate alphabetical list for each archive date Some options are not available for all reports Button 16 switching Laser 16 option that uses button 16 to toggle between standard pouring mode and cocktail mode Enabling this option reduces the number of button presses to pour a cocktail However it also reduces by one the number of brands that can be August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 204 individually poured at the dispenser You can assign a brand to button 16 but you can only use it in cocktails This is commonly done especially with brands like Triple Sec If you use button 16 switching you can only assign 15 cocktails to each bank since pressing button 16 while in cocktail mode will take you out of cocktail mode August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Glossary C Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U
515. s until the printer problem is resolved Diagnosis Use printer diagnostics tools that came with your printer Try printing with another program ERROR R56 Printer is not available Problem The printer cannot be accessed Remedy See R55 ERROR R57 Printer job cannot be started Problem The printer failed to respond August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR R58 ERROR R59 ERROR R60 ERROR R61 ERROR R63 ERROR R64 ERROR R65 ERROR R66 ERROR R67 ERROR R68 ERROR R69 ERROR R70 ERROR R72 ERROR R73 August 2010 371 Remedy See R55 Printer is busy Problem The printer is already printing a job and cannot handle the new one Windows can generally handle this type of situation by spooling the pending print job Remedy Set printer to spool or wait until printer has finished the previous print Diagnosis Check that your printer is set to spool print jobs Both beginning and ending hour must be entered Problem A time range must have both a beginning and ending hour Remedy Enter both hours Shift is using an hour already included in shift Problem Shifts cannot overlap The shifts numbered and have at least one hour in common Remedy Check the shifts in question and correct by removing the overlap Export to file failed Problem The export which was to be written to the file named by has failed Remedy If another error appeared before this one fix
516. sage Report gt See Usage Report for a description of the report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Quick Start Task 16 Schedule To set up a schedule gt For further help with schedules see Schedules About BERG SCH Define Action Time Schedule Setu On Demand Schedule Setup k Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules The file berg sch displays in the Schedule File field N Click Modify A schedule appears with the name berg sch Since Uptown Grill is using the default schedule options we won t change anything on the Options tab Click one of the day tabs Uptown Grill starts its schedule on Sunday On an initial install of Infinity a schedule will be created for you that runs an Archive and Clear every hour To remove any Archive and Clear you don t want select it and click Delete Click New to add a schedule Action Type a Time select an Action leave lt Master Group gt as the Equipment Name and click OK Uptown Grill is scheduling an Archive and Clear Sales report for all equipment at 2 00 AM closing time Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional actions on the same day Uptown Grill is also scheduling a Usage report at closing time using data from 0 days ago today Click a new day tab when you ve completed your first day Click Yes if you want to copy all the actions to the new day Repea
517. same numbers in each recipe Don t worry about defining more ingredient defaults than you may use in a particular cocktail recipe When you assign specific brands to your cocktail recipes Cocktail Prices and Portions any unassigned default ingredient portion prices and portions are automatically removed from that recipe Cocktail Pad A device that is part of the Dispenser Network You can select cocktails from the display and pour ingredients from any of the dispensers on the Dispenser Network including Infinity Network dispensers such as an All Bottle ID connected via a Dispenser Converter Added in ECU Setup using the method descibed in POS Identification Setup Cocktail Price You can build your cocktail prices based on the ingredients used The more expensive the liquor the higher the price that is Sold Example The following brand prices are established Bar Vodka Regular portion 2 00 Call Vodka Smirnoff Regular portion 2 25 Premium Vodka Absolut Regular portion 2 50 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 297 Kahlua premium cordial Small portion 1 25 lf a customer orders a Black Russian the price could be built as follows Bar Vodka Black Russian 2 00 1 25 3 25 Call Vodka Black Russian 2 25 1 25 3 50 Premium Vodka Black Russian 2 50 1 25 3 75 If you need more prices and portions for a cocktail than the three price levels see New Category of Prices and Portions Cock
518. se the Change Portion button on the Enter Actual Amount form to do this this button will also recommend Calibration portions to be used or you may use the Units and Accuracy form If you haven t entered the correct portions for brands you may wish to do this first If you are sure that the eventual portions will be within the Calibration portions you can ignore this warning Diagnosis Check the portions you have set to make sure that they are correct Look at both the price portion table for the brand and also at all cocktails for which this brand is an ingredient No default defined Problem No default has been defined for the current item No changes will be made to the present form Remedy Make changes you desire by hand If you would like there to be defaults go to the appropriate form and save default It may be the current form Portions should not be changed for until the following dispensers are calibrated Problem Accurate portions are not possible until a brand or dispenser has been calibrated Therefore if you mean to change the portion to get a full portion your first thought should be to calibrate the brand first If the glassware is not being filled properly then portions can be changed Remedy Cancel and calibrate Or if you are actually changing the portion you may continue with the change However you should still calibrate when you are done You must set up cocktail prices and portions before you assign cocktails
519. see Run a Current Sales Report or Run an Advanced Report Sales by Price Levels X2 gt This report shows the total sales for each brand at each The end of the report shows the total Sold Drinks and Sales totals for all price levels and the total Complimentary and Canceled drinks for all price levels Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data If you run this report as a Current report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s To run this report as a Most Recent Archive report the computer uses the sales data stored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the ECU To run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report the computer uses archive data stored at the computer The data reported on is determined by the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified time August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 26 Sales Summary Report To understand the report Sales Summary This report shows the number of Sold Drinks and Sales the number of Comp Drinks and Comp Sales and the number of Canceled Drinks for every Price Level of each Brand of the selected st
520. sers appear in the list 3 Click OK A message reminds you of the need for a complete set of coded pourers to perform the alignment Make sure the activator ring is in an upright position before proceeding N A Click Yes if you have everything you need Wait for communication with the device Click No if you don t have all seven coded pourers 5 Click OK to confirm the dispenser is in alignment mode The Align Activator Rings screen displays again Repeat steps 2 5 for any other All Bottle 7 dispensers Go to any of the All Bottle 7 dispensers you put into alignment mode Take a complete set of coded pourers with you 8 Hold the activator ring upright as though you were holding a bottle and place the coded pourers in sequence within convenient reach of your other hand y o Rei Make sure the dispenser is ready for you to continue by observing the lights on the dispenser All six of the portion size and price level indicator lights should be off while the Berg light is blinking 10 Turn the empty activator ring over as if to pour a drink and hold the ring in this position until the price level indicator lights change This transmits the no bottle state of the activator ring to the ECU Do not omit this important step 11 Return the activator ring to the upright position and insert the pourer that corresponds to the display of price level indicator lights on the code chart 12 Tip the activator ring and the
521. shooting Use these tools as directed by Berg personnel August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Meaning of the Data Packets Each sales terminal and driver produces a different set of numbers All examples here will use Hexadecimal Hex as the display mode None of the examples consider modifiers and trailers Lines preceded by gt gt indicate data that is going from ECU to POS Lines preceded by lt lt indicate data that is going from POS to ECU POS replies When the reply from the POS is 06 that is the code for Acknowledge ACK The PLU has been successfully received and recognized If the reply is 15 that indicates No acknowledge NAK This means did not receive the message Berg Basic gt gt 02 31 31 31 31 03 01 lt lt 06 gt gt 02 31 31 30 03 31 lt lt 15 02 is the ASCII code for Start of Text STX 03 is the code for End of Text ETX After the ETXis the checksum The checksum is used to validate that none of the message was scrambled during communication The PLU NLU is in between the STX and ETX The ASCII code for 0 is 30 the code for 1 is 31 etc The code for 9 is 39 So in this example the PLU is 1111 The reply from the POS is 06 which is the code for Acknowledge ACK The second message has a PLU of 110 note the different length of the message The reply however is 15 for No acknowledge NAK This means that the POS does not recognize the PL
522. shows the number of Sold Drinks and the Sales for the selected station or group as well as the sales percentage that each hardware station gt When you archive and clear contributes to the report The numbers in the Pct Total Sales column Sch DE should total 100 Sales y gene Current Sales Totals Clear Sales report showing data for the selected station or group gt If you run this report on the The report also shows the total number of Comp Drinks and Comp Sales as well as Canceled Drinks and Canceled Sales These complimentary and canceled totals are not included in the Sold Drinks and Sales totals in the first two columns Master Group you ll only see Archive Number combined totals for the entire Archive Num formerly Z number is the number of times a Clear Sales group report has been run at the hardware station including this time Pane cates dain te cleo conto Printed On the computer to be stored in The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run archive records not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity gt Only run this report when you Type of Data want to set all totals at the ECU To run this report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU to zero s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in gt For help with running the report other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected see
523. sign the needed brand and redo learn mode for the newly assigned brand Increasing sizes or price levels does not change any prices or portions You must enter portions for each new price level and size in order for them to pour Problem When you select sizes and price levels to be shown by the software increasing the dimensions will not affect any of the existing price and portion tables The new price levels or sizes can now be seen but will all be zero Remedy if you want to use the new sizes or price levels prices and portions must be entered for each brand You may also want to store a new default prices and portions Actual ECU type is Problem When you are defining a new ECU if the ECU type does not match the one you indicated then the type will be corrected The ECU form shown will match the type of the actual ECU on the network Remedy If you think this message came up in error then check the numbers set for each ECU There are no more ECUs that can be found on this network Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 407 Problem Using the identify function will loop through all possible ECU numbers starting with the currently displayed ECU number Using communication the next ECU unit will be identified This message indicates that there are no more ECUs that can be identified on this network that are higher than the initial ECU number August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help
524. snssenenseensassensaseensnsnenenseeeensneessseeeessneeesenees 131 Export Cocktail Prices and Portions c sccessesseeeeenseeeesenseaneeensnenaesesnnnaeeeenseanaesesennaeseenanaeseenseananenses 132 Pouring Container Getup EE EE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EE nnmnnn ENER 133 Category SCtup s ccccecessesseseeeceeeeeenseneseaneeceeeeeeneeneananeeseeeenanseneanaeseeeesensaneanaaaesesesesaseneananaeseeeeaannsqeanaeseeees 134 New Category of Prices and Portions cssessecsssseeeceenseeneeenseeneeseenanaeeeenseanensnsennaesesnnnaeeeenseaeaeensee 135 Switch Cate QOry sseseseceeeeeeeeeeeenceeeeesennaeeeeeenaeeeeeseaeeesesegeaeeeesseaeeeseseaeeesesecnaeseessaaeeeeeseaeeesesssneesessenanees 136 Prices and Portions Setup cessseeeceenseeneeensenneeeeennneeenenseananennsenaeseenanaeceenseanaesnseanaesesaanaeeeenseaaauensae 137 Modify Prices and Portions ssssseccessseeneeenseeneeeeenaneeesenseanaesnsnenaesesnanaeenenseanaeenseanaeseeaanaeenenseananenses 138 Modify Multiple Prices and Portions ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seen eeeeee ee eeeeee seen seaeeeeeeeaeeeeeseneeeeeeesaeeeeesenneeenees 139 Copy Prices and Portionsi sccseseeeseeeeesseeeesseeeesseneessensnscenensenensaenensnenensneeenseeeensneeenseeeesseeeensneeseeneeeeaes 140 Cocktail Prices and Portong enee ee KKK KE KE EK EK KEE KE KE KEE EK EK KE KE EK KE KE EK EK eeN
525. so before proceeding This may also affect Retail Price per Unit gt If you ve cleared sales more than once since your last Inventory Check Infinity uses combined volume data from all of those Archive and Clear Sales reports to determine stock reduction gt To calculate any product loss you must also take a physical inventory However you can run Inventory Check without doing a physical inventory to review stock amounts and generate orders gt Initial Stock must be performed once before Inventory Check is available Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 183 Orders To find orders 1 Pull down the Inventory menu and Click Orders To generate a new order gt To generate a new order you ll 1 Click New use Inventory Check This 2 Follow steps 2 11 of How to run Inventory Check prompts you to run an Archive and Clear Sales report and then adjusts all stock amounts using volume data from the report To modify an existing order 1 Select an Order number to modify 2 Click Modify This helps you determine which 3 Type a new Order Quantity or Order Cost for the desired brand s brands need to be ordered Type in an Order Quantity of zero to remove any item from the order Once gt Click the Deliveries shortcut you enter a cost for a brand it appears on every order until you change it If you checked Calculate Container Cost on the Inventory Options screen any
526. ssedede coces deccwceeed cc deda veces Namaa KN AAAA ENA NACEN E ENNE EANN ARENA i AAEN KAKAN EN REAREA NA ENEN RAKAN 285 VergiorCMerlbzer zei erz eegdezegtieerek reeEgeegCeC eege neatsbeesceitcesecindaneeacusscees 286 Version Verify All Eiles ee EEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEER NEEN 287 Version Verify RUM Time cceseceeeseeeceseeeessneeeeeneenseneessneeneaneessansnssansnssaesaseesasseesasseuensseesnseeessseeesssneeeeaes 288 Compare ECU to Database vessssccecccecncecnceenceeneeeneueneeeneuseeueneeenceenausnausneuenausncuenauenaueauenausnausnaueuauenausnausnauens 289 Diener Eege eer cure eee nenre ees ee EES pee ee 290 Debug Debug Mode se ase ciants te cote tacos Decca ccna eege ege eege deet ee eege eege 291 Glossary TE gt ieee cere Seren cae ear eer eer cece core eee rr eee ere eee rer eee oer ee eee cr 292 GOSSArY A OE 295 e D 300 Glossa ry GU GEET 303 Glossa ry Gad TEE 307 Glossary d e OT 310 Glossary 08 MECC PCE EEC CCE ECC ESC ETE CECE CEE SCE TELE TE CEC ECP E eC EE CECT CECE CED ECE REL ECE A RCT ET TTT CECE TEETCEETCECECECEE EE TCE PETC 313 Glossar Reveeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeneeeeneeenseneeneanenssanenssaesnssaneasaneasensaseesasseesasaensasuenensneeensseeenseeecesneessseeeesseeeessneeeeses 316 GIOSSALY D eeeeeeeeeeeERRREEREEEEEREEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EE EEEEEE ENER 320 GIOSSALY TZ eeeeeeeeREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
527. sseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceseeeseneeseeeceseeesseeeuseeeeseenseeeceseeeesesusneeseseeseseesoers 220 CUSTOM a T 221 New Custom Report ccccsseeceeceseesceeesnseeeeeenseaneesnnennaeseennnaeseenseaaaesnseanaesesnanaeseensaanaesnsqanaeseeaanaeseenseaaauensae 222 Modify Custom Report ssee 1sserrnnsernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnne nnmnnn nnmnnn nnnnne nnmnnn nnmnnn nn nnne nnmnnn nnmnnn eenma 223 Types of Reports Il 224 Brand Information Report s scseseeceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeneeasenenssnenscanenssensaseeneasneesasaeuenseeeenseeeseseeeesseeeessneesnsnees 225 Column Selection Re port c sssseccessseceeeeeseeneeeeennneeseenseaaaeenseanaesesannaesnenseaaaesnseanaesesaanaesesnsanaesnsaananeas 226 Configuration RO POM tives lt c se ceccscc sees ccesccncascnnesebessaccteisceennancsanecutsnestensineensund seunseenseuecetaboeteuecsesnccesaseceensne 227 Container Stock REport ceeseseeeeeenseceeeenneeneeensnnneeseensnaeeesnseenaesesnnnaeseenseaaaeensannaesesaanaeeesnseanausnsaananees 228 Cost Analysis Re port 1 sseceeeeesneeeeeeeneeeeescceeeeeeeenaeeeeeseaeeeeesegeaesesssuaeeeseseaueesesesuaeeesesnaeeesessaneesensonaeens 229 Cost Per Unit Report s seecceeeeeeeeencseeneeeeeeeeeneeneananaeseeeenannsseanaeseeeeaensenqeaeaeeeeesasnseneanaeaeseeeeaenesseanaeaeenes 230 Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Z Report esseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeesenneeeeseeeaeseeesaneeseseneeesneeenaeees 231 Dispenser Netw
528. sses OR gt This operation can be performed Click Check Addresses on Modify an ECU to read addresses for a for dispenser network devices specific ECU only e g Tap 2 2 Select the Equipment Name l gt Use Read Addresses to check If you used the Communications menu you ll see dispenser network ECUs EE in the list Selecting an ECU means you re reading addresses for all devices currently set in the equipment at the ECU l You should check that all 3 Click OK l l version for any device type are When finished the software displays all responding devices with their the same address device type and version if the versions do not match for all devices of the same type then re program the older versions August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Reset Dispenser Network ECU To reset a dispenser network ECU and its devices 1 Pull down the Communications menu and click Reset 2 Select the Equipment Name You ll see dispenser network ECUs in the list 3 Click OK Reset cycles power for the ECU and its devices putting them into a neutral default state It does not change any settings or data August 2010 108 Reset DN ECU gt This operation can be performed for dispenser network devices only e g Tap 2 Use Reset when the system seems to be frozen or is in some unrecognized state light pattern not understood gt Reset is a good diagn
529. st between the first and last one selected must also be selected Remedy Check the list and select all items required Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 372 ERROR R74 Both 1 and 2 must be selected if either is selected Problem The two fields listed are associated with each other If you select or enter a value for one you must also select or enter a value for another Remedy Select both or select neither ERROR R75 Archive Time and Pour Time related column cannot be both selected Problem Pour Time columns include Pour Date Pour Day of Week and Pour Shift None of these columns can be selected if you have also selected Archive Time Remedy Remove Archive Time or remove all of the Pour Time columns August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 373 Schedule SCH Error Messages SCHO00 09 SCH10 19 ERROR SCH01 ERROR SCHO02 ERROR SCHO03 ERROR SCH04 ERROR SCHO05 ERROR SCHO06 ERROR SCH07 ERROR SCHO08 ERROR SCHO9 ERROR SCH10 ERROR SCH11 ERROR SCH14 August 2010 Password is missing Running an auto run schedule requires a password Problem The mechanism for an auto run schedule includes the password for the person who set the schedule to be auto run When an attempt was made to run this schedule the password was not found Remedy Enter a user name and password after responding to the error message This password will be used in the future to
530. stall Infinity Error Code d Unable to stamp serial number to file s Problem The serial number on your setup disk must be stamped inside of each of the Infinity programs to ensure that there is not a mismatch between the database and the software This stamp process failed The target programs may be missing or there may be hard disk or setup disk errors Remedy See S05 dd Error defining dialog Problem A dialog to get information from the user cannot be created The error number is given by ld Remedy Try rebooting Diagnosis Call Berg with the error number if rebooting does not work The destination folder is too long Please choose a shorter name Problem The destination folder name is limited to 30 characters Remedy Choose and type in a shorter destination folder name This program requires VGA or better resolution Problem The video resolution is set lower than VGA 640 x 480 The setup cannot continue with the resolution set this low Remedy Use control panel Display Settings to select a higher video resolution The value is out of range Problem The value that was entered is too small or too large Remedy Enter a new value that is within the proper range The text is too long The maximum length is d Problem There is a limit of the length of the text string that was entered The maximum is listed in the message Remedy Enter shorter text Can t open databases Problem The old or new database could not be opened Database could
531. stall into s Problem If you use the default locations for Infinity data files the installation process will make sure that all users will have permission to access the data If you install into a different location Berg does not want to be responsible for compromising the security of your system Therefore you must set user permissions yourself Remedy Answer No and choose the default location If you answer Yes after the install is complete inform an IT person to help you set the user permissions for the selected data folder Question S210 Database version Ge serial number s business name s already exists in s It will be overwritten Do you want to continue Problem Under certain circumstances the installation process will move your entire database to a August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 393 default location Usually there will be no existing database there However in this case a database was found Remedy Answer Yes to overwrite this existing database If you answer No you can choose a different folder to contain the data files Question S211 Missing database files in s Do you want to install a new database Problem A previous version of Infinity was installed on this PC but the database no longer exists Therefore the database cannot be copied Remedy Answer Yes to skip the copy This is the answer to use when you have removed the previous version Answer N if you believe the previ
532. stallation is complete Problem Some of the Infinity programs may need ActiveX registration If this step fails you must perform the registration yourself after installation completes The program that failed will be listed Remedy Make sure you are signed in as an administrator Then run the program listed in the warning If you are on Windows Vista or later right click on the program icon and choose Run as Administrator Warning S114 Unable to set permissions for s You should enable Create permissions for Authorized Users on this folder Problem In order to run Infinity as any Windows user the correct permissions need to be set on the data folder If this step fails you can still set the proper permissions yourself after the installation completes The folder that requires permissions will be listed Remedy Make sure you are signed in as an administrator Right click on the folder and choose properties Click on the Security Tab If Authorized Users appears make sure the following permissions are set Or you may need to Add Authorized Users The set of permissions required is collectively known as Create and consists of Modify Read and Execute List Read and Write Make sure all of these or their equivalent are checked Different operating systems may have different methods Warning S170 In order for Hourly Sales changes to take effect you must Restore Memory to every existing ECU Problem You have changed the type of data to be recorded
533. sting prices and portions with the same category name If you want to import with the same category name you may want to store existing configuration settings or backup your database before importing August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 121 If you import prices and portions with a new category name they become a new set of prices and portions in your database What happens if import a category of prices and portions already assigned to dispensers The imported prices and portions are immediately sent to the ECU s What happens if a brand in the import file is not in my database The new brand will be added to your brand list using the product type specified in the import file If there is no product type specified the product type Liquor is assigned The new brand gets any product type defaults for the brand fields You may want to review these defaults which include cost per unit container size and inventory par stock order point What happens if the number of sizes and or price levels in the import file is greater than the number set up for my database Any price levels and sizes in the file which exceed the maximum number of sizes and price levels set up for each product type in your database are not imported August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 122 About Importing Cocktail Prices and Portions Import Cocktail Prices and Why or when sho
534. stopped the schedule is recorded in the log H there is no Ending Schedule X SCH entry in the log a power failure probably caused the computer to restart Consider adding the schedule to your Windows StartUp group or folder See Run a Schedule in the Schedules section August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 3 A numbered code identifies each error message for example ERROR CM26 Use the code to select from the following error categories Communication CM Error Messages Database DB Error Messages Interface ECR Error Messages General GE Error Messages Infinity INF Error Messages Manager M Error Messages Report R Error Messages Setup S Error Messages Schedule SCH Error Messages Utilities U Error Messages See also Question Messages and Warning Messages August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 346 Communication CM Error Messages Note that all communications with an ECU are tried three times An error must be persistent in order to produce an error message For a communication log put the program into diagnostic mode Ctrl Alt D from main menu and run the operation Close the program and send the debuginf txt file to Berg CMO01 CM09 CM10 CM19 CM20 CM29 CM30 CM39 CM70 CM79 ERROR CM01 ERROR CM02 ERROR CM03 ERROR CM04 ERROR CM05 ERROR CM06 ERROR CM07 Can t open comm port Problem This message sho
535. t See View Hardware Configuration to see a list of all the networks and ECUs you ve set up gt Quickly access the ECU Setup screen with the shortcut button ECU Hardware Station after setting up a network gt It s a good idea to run a communication test for each ECU after you ve set up a network This ensures each ECU can be properly accessed by the computer gt Make any major changes to network settings when the system is not in use Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e ECU Hardware Station Setup To find ECU Hardware Station setup 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station OR Click ECU Hardware Station on Network Setup To set up a new ECU It s a good idea to enter your system Device Settings before setting up a new ECU so the dispensers you set up will have the system settings 1 See New ECU Number for help setting up the ECU number 2 See New ECU Setup for help setting up the ECU To read an ECU to add it to a network See Read an ECU To copy settings from an existing ECU to create a new one See Copy an ECU To move an ECU to another network and or new ECU number See Move an ECU To change the ECU number in a dispenser network See Assign Address To modify an ECU s setup See Modify an ECU To use addressing tools for dispenser network ECUs See Modify an ECU To rename an ECU 1 Select the Hardware Station from
536. t Calibration Units and Accuracy August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 162 List Calibration For how to steps describing the entire calibration process see Calibrate Dispensers List Calibration You ll see the List Calibration screen only if you selected List Calibration on the Select a Brand to Calibrate screen What is this step You re selecting which brands in the list you want to receive a copy of the timing values of the brand you selected to calibrate in the prior screen 1 To select a brand point and click with the mouse or use the up and down arrow keys and press the space bar OR Click Select All to select all brands OR Click Clear All to de select all brands 2 Click Continue Wait while the dispenser is put into calibration mode What happens next You ll be prompted make a calibration pour and enter the amount See List Calibration Enter Portion Amount August 2010 List Calibration gt With List Calibration you are making pours and entering the amounts for one brand only gt List calibration copies the timing values of the selected brand to other brands which you select gt This brings the values for all buttons or coded pourers which you ve selected closer to the correct range For the most accuracy you should still calibrate each of the buttons and pourer codes you select from the list List calibration is available for
537. t Reports Current Sales Totals Clear Sales Sales Totals X1 Report Sales By Price Levels X2 Detailed Sales X3 Report Hourly Sales X4 Report Advanced Reports Sales Summary Report Usage Report Retail Usage Report Price Level Changes Report Price Portion Report PLU Report Cost Per Unit Report Configuration Report Variance Report Reconciliation Report Container Stock Report Cost Analysis Report Brand Information Report Column Selection Report Laser Guide Power And Interface Log Laser Guide DN Pours Schedule Reports Schedule Log Error Log August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 225 Brand Information Report To understand the report Brand Name The name of each brand in your brand list Brand Information Count gt Use this report to see the brand The number of containers of the brand in stock setup and ordering information Container you ve entered at the computer The type of container used for the brand gt This is an Inventory report To Container Cost run the report see Inventory Reports The cost you pay for each container of the brand entered in Brand List nepons Setup Container Value The retail value of each container of the brand derived from the retail price per volume unit Supplier The name of the supplier of the brand Type of Data The data in Inventory reports reflects the results of the most recent Inventory Check The c
538. t a schedule See Test a Schedule To run a schedule See Run a Schedule or Run a Schedule from the Command Line To change a schedule See Modify a Schedule To copy a schedule To save what s in BERG SCH before copying over it see About BERG SCH 1 Select the Schedule File 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Copy 4 Select the schedule file name you want to copy to e g Berg sch and click OK 5 Click Yes to confirm overwriting the selected schedule There are now two schedules with the same set of actions To rename a schedule 1 Select the Schedule File Do not rename Berg sch 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete a schedule 1 Select the Schedule File You cant delete Berg sch 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion To print a schedule 1 Select the Schedule File 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Print 4 Select the print options and click OK August 2010 gt Schedules let you automate daily weekly or monthly Infinity operations gt The way you use your Infinity system determines what type of schedules work best for you gt You may want a master schedule running constantly that handles all Infinity operations gt Or you may want schedules that you run at specific times of the week or month gt On an initial install a main schedule will be cr
539. t be written Remedy If another more specific message was also displayed use the remedy for that message Fix any disk errors or clean up disk space Retry Diagnosis Check destination disk for errors and for disk space More than one column is the same Problem When specifying multiple fields normally a column cannot be used for more than one Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 360 purpose Remedy Check the column number definitions and remove any duplicates ERROR INF52 Columns must be listed in order Problem When a list of columns is needed the columns should be in numeric order Remedy Revise the order ERROR INF53 Columns must not overlap Problem Certain columns must precede other columns This is often the cases when columns are associated together Then one group of columns cannot overlap with another group of columns Remedy Check which columns should be used and change one or more column lists ERROR INF54 Number of columns for 1 must be a multiple of number of columns for 2 Problem There are two lists of columns which are related The number of columns in the list named by 1 should be an even multiple of the number of columns in 2 It is possible for 1 to contain the same number of columns as 2 Remedy Revise the number of columns in either 1 or 2 ERROR INF55 Insufficient permissions or read only file Problem A file and its folder must allow the current user to perform the current operat
540. t complimentary pours and cancels are not included For each type of brand or cocktail poured the Infinity Pour Sales is listed as well as the Collected Sales from the Sales Column in the STDF The difference is shown in the Variance column as well as the percentage of Collected Sales divided by Pour Sales For each line in the STDF the PLU is read and matched against the PLUs assigned to the ECUs in the Station or Group If the PLU is a brand PLU or a Laser cocktail PLU the sales are simply slotted to appear on the line in the report If the PLU corresponds to a PLU recipe then the following calculations occur The number of recipes poured is calculated by dividing the POS sales by the price of the recipe in the Infinity definition Then the sales recorded by Infinity for each ingredient is examined to determine if there are enough sales to account for the number of recipes rung up This uses the ingredient prices in the Infinity definition The maximum number of recipes possible is determined and recorded on the Infinity side The sales amount used for the ingredient in the recipe is subtracted from the brand row Here is an example using a single price level Absolut and Rumpleminz are on the All Bottle ID and Vodka is on a laser Brands Vodka 5 ounce 1 PLU 100 1 0 ounce 2 PLU 101 Absolut 5 ounce 1 50 PLU 200 1 0 ounce 3 PLU 201 Rumpleminz 5 ounce 1 50 PLU 300 1 0 ounce 3 PLU 301 Cocktails Screwdriver 2 50 PLU 1000 1 oz of
541. t have any gaps For example if you have three P3 Hubs their codes must be 1 2 and 3 Remedy On ECU Setup click on the POS ID Code Tab and give each P3 Hub consecutive codes ERROR M09 Duplicate POS Code nnn Problem When using POS ID each P3 Hub in a Sales Station must have a unique POS ID Code Remedy On ECU Setup click on the POS ID Code Tab and give each P3 Hub its own POS ID code Product s does not exist Problem The brand cocktail or ingredient name given by s does not exist in the brand list This is likely the result of a database error or some previous error The function attempted will not be completed Remedy If database errors then fix them Otherwise reboot and retry Diagnosis Run database Diagnostics and check for errors in database Category s does not exist Problem The category name does not exist in the category name list See M12 Some ECUs are left undeleted in this network Cannot delete network Problem At least one ECU could not be deleted from the database Therefore the network could not be deleted This is likely due to a database error Remedy Repair any database or disk error You can also try to reboot Diagnosis Run database Diagnostics Check for disk errors ECU has undeleted dispensers Cannot delete ECU Problem At least one dispenser could not be deleted from the database and therefore the ECU cannot be deleted See M15 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR M17
542. t help from your sales terminal representative to generate and understand the data file Enter the layout of the file using Reconciliation Options See also How to set up the Reconciliation report The sales terminal data file must be an ASCII text file The file must list either a sales amount for each PLU or a count for each PLU It can also contain other information The Reconciliation report supports date and time columns in the sales terminal file Records in the sales terminal file that fall outside the report date range will not be included in the reconciliation report Enter the Date and Time Column if you wish to use these The reconciliation report allows more than one PLU sales or count column to be used on each sales terminal data file line By using multiple PLU columns each line can represent more than one PLU where an additional sales or count column must be present for each PLU If more than one sales or count column is present for each PLU column the data will be added together and counted against the PLU associated with the PLU column Enter multiple columns separated by commas A station column can be used in order to separate the data in a single sales terminal data file into stations Reconciliation reports can then be run against individual stations If you are using a column for a station it will normally be a Sales Station Hardware Station names will not be matched against a column if the Hardware Station is included in a Sales
543. t orders If you enter zero tax is not shown on the printed order 5 Check Calculate Container Cost if you want Inventory to recalculate the container cost for each brand in an order based on its order cost If your order cost changes frequently you may not want to select this option but keep the container cost entered in Brand List Setup 6 Click OK to save your entries and exit Click Close to exit the screen without saving anytime August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Report Options To enter report options 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Report Options 2 Confirm the correct Business Name or type a new one The business name appears at the top of all reports and in the title bar of Infinity You can also change your business name from a menu 3 On the General tab select the report data you want Infinity to use Type the End of Day time and select the End of Week day 4 On the Selections tab select the brand name sort and the Report Pour Type Report Options Report options determine the look and scope of Infinity reports gt These options are used as the default report options for your system 5 On the Define Shifts tab type shift Begin and End times optional E You can click on Clear All to remove all defined shifts Specific repons can later be Shifts are used by the Hourly Sales report and on Column Selection reports customized with different
544. t steps 7 and 8 for each day with identical actions OR Click Copy and select lt All gt to copy the actions to all days of the week Uptown Grill wants these same reports each day at closing so we use Copy to quickly populate all days with Sunday s actions 10 If you need different actions on any day click a new day tab and answer No to copying Then repeat steps 4 6 to define new actions 11 Click OK to save the schedule 12 Click Run to start the schedule You can still perform other tasks in Infinity Note Infinity must be running when you want the scheduled actions to occur 13 Click Close to exit the Schedules screen CA oa A O Oo oO N August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Exploded Menus Infinity Menus To view these menus in a separate pop up window go to Glossary and click the Infinity Menus link at the top Change Business Name Change Database Folder Exit Enable Disable Change Price Level Set ECU Time Set Infinity System Time Network ECU Hardware Station Device Settings Sales Stations Groups Delete Empty Sales Stations Groups Broadcast Pending Re program Calibrate Align Activator Rings Store Alignment Values Default Alignment Values v Show Advanced Choices Units and Accuracy Enter Calibration Mode Exit Calibration Mode Initialize Calibration Values
545. t your system is currently using No Don t clear sales data OK Save changes and exit On Demand Schedule This type of schedule is not set up to perform actions at specific times Instead it performs a series of actions in a row whenever you run the schedule The schedule automatically stops running after all actions are performed For example a On Demand schedule could be helpful at closing Perhaps you always disable stations clear ECU sales and export data to your spreadsheet when you close at night but the time varies from day to day Put those actions in a schedule called Closing The schedule won t run until you start it Whenever you re ready run the schedule and the tasks will be completed in order while you re busy with something else Options You can customize the way Interface software deals with specific pouring problems by selecting appropriate options These options alter the way communication occurs between the ECUs and the sales terminal Options include Transaction Mode Wait for Release Pour Without Release Send After Pour Timeout Value and PLU Base Order Cost This is the cost to you of all containers of the brand in an order If you checked Calculate Container Cost on the Inventory Options screen any Order Cost you enter will be divided by the Order Quantity for the brand to determine a new Container Cost The container cost will be automatically changed in Brand List Setup If you didn t check Cal
546. tail A 3 00 208 Margarita Cock tail B 4 00 209 Margarita Cock tail C 5 00 210 In addition directly following these cocktail lines should be a separate line of text for each price level of every ingredient in the cocktail Each ingredient line should list the brand name price and portion at the specified price level For example Tequila Liquor A 1 50 0 50 Tequila Liquor B 2 00 0 50 Tequila Liquor C 2 50 0 50 Triple Sec Liquor A 0 75 0 50 Triple Sec Liquor B 1 00 0 50 Triple Sec Liquor C 1 25 0 50 Each separate item in a line is called a column Import cocktail columns must be separated by a single character called a column separator usually a comma In the above file excerpts Cocktail Brand name is column 1 Product Type is column 2 Price Level is column 3 Portion Price Cocktail Price is column 4 Portion is column 5 and Cocktail PLU is column 5 Portions in the import file should be listed in the unit of measure set up for your database Prices should be listed in the unit set up for your computer August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 123 Price portion and PLU amounts in the import file may be truncated or rounded if necessary to fit into the proper units For example if your database uses two decimal places for prices then a 4 is interpreted as 4 00 and 4 152 is truncated to 4 15 How do I know what numbers to enter for Columns on the Import screen Colum
547. tail Sales The sales of Infinity defined cocktails Calculated using cocktail prices Cocktails Infinity defined cocktails Code Chart All Bottle Code Chart CODE POURER re mji deu vlt Cer 3 vgl mm 4 ve Ce 5 mii me e vllt Cem 7 vlt emm Coded Pourer Specially designed pourers inserted and sealed into liquor bottles to provide portion control Metal coding bands in various configurations on the pourers electronically identify price and portion information to the ECU Collected Sales The sales amount collected recorded at the sales terminal for the brand Collected Volume The implied volume of the sales rung for the brand at the sales terminal Infinity multiplies the count for the brand from the sales terminal data file by the portion size amount to determine the collected volume Column Headers lf you check Column Headers a line is included in the export file listing the column names This line appears after any header line This line is not commented since it can be used by programs such as Excel Column Separator The Column Separator is a character used to separate fields of information in the export file The default is a comma You should enter the Column Separator required by the importing software application Column Sort You determine how brands are sorted on a Column Selection report from the Selections tab Sort options vary according to the items you select on the Columns tab Check Subtotal o
548. taps may show the calibration lighting pattern even though they are indeed in calibration mode Remedy You can continue calibrating normally if you know which taps are in calibration mode If this is confusing get out of calibration mode and calibrate each tap individually To avoid this problem in the future contact Berg for how to upgrade your equipment This network has the same definition as another network Check Port and Phone if Network on Modem This situation may cause communication errors Problem Normally every network needs to use a different communication port unless networks are using a modem On modem networks each network should have a different phone number If two different physical networks are contacted using the same network you may get multiple replies to a single message which will often cause a variety of communication error messages Remedy Check your wiring and the ports that you have In most cases you should either combine networks or you need to correct the port listed on one of the networks If you do not have enough communication ports you need to use an Ethernet converter or USB converter to create additional logical com ports This is only a warning so if you have a special reason to set up your networks this way you can ignore the message xxx is not assigned to any dispensers Problem The P3 Hub named xxx is not associated with any dispenser No PLUs will pass through the P3 Hub Remedy Place one or m
549. te with the selected ECU s because all the data comes from the computer s database Warnings You may see one or more messages at the end of the report These messages help you see how your brands are set up and whether you need to make some changes The messages include the number of brands without suppliers these are not part of inventory the number of brands with an invalid stock count the number of brands with an invalid order point par stock the number of brands with an invalid order quantity and the number of brands not assigned August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 2 Cost Analysis Report To understand the report Brand Name The name of each brand included in Inventory Poured gt This report shows volume The number of containers of the brand poured in the time between the two poured and volume lost for each most recent Inventory Checks brand Container gt The lost volume data is only The container type assigned to the brand available if you ve entered container amounts from your physical inventory gt The information in the report is Containers Lost The number of containers of the brand unaccounted for in the time between the two most recent Inventory Checks This number is only available if you perform a physical inventory and enter the current stock amount when you based on the most recent run the Inventory Check Inventory Check Lost Value gt For help ru
550. tech or other third party interface board Sharp ER 3310 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp ER 4230M This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board Sharp Series 4500 This selection installs a POS driver Sharp 880 This selection installs a POS driver It should be used with Maitre D software Sharp 5700 This selection installs a POS driver It should be used with Maitre D software August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 192 Silverware This selection installs a POS driver Squirrel This selection installs a POS driver A special adapter available from Squirrel is required Use standard 9 pin to 9 pin cable The POS software supports pre checking System 3 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 TEC CRS 3000 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board TEC FS1450 1 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board TEC FS 1650 This selection installs an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board TEC FS 3600 This selection installs a POS driver Use Berg cable 8007993 TEC MA 1350 MA 1350 F These selections install an ECR driver It requires a Postech or other third party interface board TEC MA 1400 MA 1450 1 T
551. ted If a brand has all of its price portion tables deleted then the brand name itself will also be deleted If all price portion tables that use a category name are deleted then the category name will also be deleted If is usually best to purge these names to create a more concise brand list Remedy Answer Yes to confirm the purge Answer No if you may want to assign these price and portion tables later The cocktail or an ingredient is missing portion or price information for at least one price level Are you sure you want to save this cocktail Problem A cocktail price and portion table needs to have a price for the cocktail for each price level Each ingredient needs a portion and a price for each of the price levels One or more of these values are zero Without this information the cocktail will not pour correctly or some reports will give inaccurate information Remedy Answer No and locate the missing information and fill it in If you have a valid reason for omitting this information you can answer Yes to continue This function will realign the All Bottle coils for code sensing You must have all 7 codes available for realignment Do you want to continue Problem When aligning the activator ring it is required to have all 7 pourer codes to do the alignment correctly Remedy If you do not have all seven codes answer No and locate the proper pourers If you have everything you need to continue answer Yes After the alignment you must sti
552. ted If you ve activated only one driver it displays by default This driver file will be downloaded to all the ECUs you ve included in this sales station when you load driver Click OK to save the selected equipment and driver for the sales station If required click OK to confirm the message about loading drivers to ECUs See Load Driver August 2010 Sales Stations gt You must use Sales Stations to indicate where each driver is to be loaded gt By default all ECUs and dispensers are included in the lt Default Sales Station gt If you remove any equipment from this default sales station and do not re assign it to another sales station it will not be interfaced gt When Allowing Multiple Drivers sales stations indicate which driver is being used by each ECU gt For Dispenser network ECUs if there is more than one P3 Hub on an ECU an additional sales station is required to specify the association between each P3 Hub and the dispensers it services Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 194 Load Driver To load a driver 1 Pull down the Interface menu and click Load Driver 2 Select the Equipment Name where you want to load a driver Load Driver You ll see any groups or sales stations you ve set up in addition to all your hardware stations Click Continue Wait for communication with the selected equipment A confirmation screen displays to show you
553. ted drive It s a good idea to store a copy of configuration settings on a separate CD or other disk rather than on your hard drive Select the drive letter and folder where you want to store the backup copy Click on the icon to collapse or expand the folders Berg recommends the destination folder be clear of all other files Click OK Click Yes to confirm the store procedure Wait while the configuration settings are copied Remove the backup disk Clearly label the disk and store it in a safe place You should perform this task as a dealer if you are entering customer configuration settings off site prior to installation You can then reload configuration settings on the customer s computer You should only reload configuration settings at an installation site that have the same serial number and software version as the customer s copy of Infinity August 2010 You should store configuration settings after you ve performed all the setup tasks in Infinity software This gives you a backup copy if you ever need it gt Storing configuration settings with the correct serial number is very important gt If you want a complete backup including archive sales records use Backup Full Database gt Infinity configuration settings include all configuration options you select during software installation all equipment setup data networks ECUs stations groups all calibration settings all brand price port
554. ted to send changes Oo Oo Jo To automatically generate a sequence of PLUs See Generate PLUs To import PLUs Import Price and Portions August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 144 Assign Brands to Dispensers To assign brands to dispensers Pull down the Pouring menu and click Assign Brands 2 Select the Equipment Name and click OK You ll see the list of all hardware stations ECUs and dispensers you ve set up If you select an ECU you ll see all its dispensers on the next screen 3 If applicable select a different Dispenser Caption for the dispenser tab s These options help distinguish your dispensers while on this screen You can change them anytime Device Address shows the dispenser number Device Name shows the full dispenser name the default name or one you ve set up Dispenser Type shows the type of dispenser in parentheses after the Device Address or Device Name 4 If desired select sort options for the Brand List Use these options to sort the brand list for your convenience Sort by Descriptor sorts the list by any descriptor s you ve set up Category lets you select which categories of price portions display in the list 5 Click a dispenser tab if necessary to begin assigning brands The cursor automatically points to the first button or code Initially Test Pour is assigned in every position You re replacing Test Pour with the brands you choose Click the
555. ter the dealer s name and phone number for technical support and click Next 12 Click Next to confirm the installation 13 Wait while the software is installed 14 Click Finish on the Configuration screen Uptown Grill is using default options 15 Click OK to exit Infinity setup You should now see Infinity program icons on your computer s desktop 16 Click the Berg Infinity Program icon to launch Infinity 17 Remember to activate your license See About Activation and Renewal N O August 2010 Software Installation gt Be sure to use the Infinity CD with the serial number for this specific site gt The CD starts with a selection page where you can select and install programs other than Infinity that are present on the disk After clicking on a link you may be asked if you want to run open or save Choose run or open gt You can change Configuration Options when you install Infinity or at any time gt Configuration options include security options data storage and display options country options units of measure and features gt During a new install a Business Name is given to each installation The default name for the business will be the folder name but it is advisable to change to a name that reflects the actual business See Change Business Name Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help In Quick Start Task 2 Brand Wizard To use the Brand Wiza
556. terfaced to it at a time You indicate which ECUs are to share a POS terminal by listing them under the same sales station Remedy Change the sales station definition for 2 so that only five or fewer ECUs are listed ERROR ECRO06 Unsupported driver Interface options are disabled Please reinstall Interface Problem The NCR 2160 is no longer supported This message may also occur if the driver cannot be determined Remedy Reinstall Interface from disk ERROR ECR07 Unsupported driver version Interface options are disabled Please reinstall Interface Problem The driver version is old and no longer supported or the version number cannot be determined Remedy Get an upgrade if appropriate and reinstall Interface from disk ERROR ECR12 Can not open the driver file Problem In the process of loading a driver the driver file itself could not be opened The file could be missing the disk drive could have an error or there may be PC system errors Remedy Reboot and retry Fix any disk errors Reinstall Interface Diagnosis Check if the driver file exists It has the drv extension Check your hard disk for errors ERROR ECR13 Can not open the log file Problem When the verbose flag is on in the ECR Configuration file a log file gives details about the loading process This flag should be turned on only by direction of Berg personnel This log file is created as a new file and overwrites any old file any time a driver is loaded Failure to creat
557. that error first Diagnosis Check for available disk space and run a disk diagnostics tool such as ScanDisk Minimum Zoom factor reached Problem You cannot zoom out any further Maximum Zoom factor reached Problem You cannot zoom in any further No default printer assigned Problem Reports cannot be printed without a default printer assigned Remedy Use View or Save instead of Print or define a printer in your Windows control panel Price Level and Size columns required for PLU column Problem In order to include the PLU column in an export or report you must also include both the Price Level and Size columns Remedy From the columns tab add the Price Level and or Size columns to the selected columns or remove PLU Station or Group is empty or missing Selecting the current default group Problem The selected custom report or custom export refers to a station or group that is not valid An empty group contains no ECUs and will not produce any data A missing group was probably deleted In its present form the custom report or export will not run For your benefit the referenced group has been changed to the system s current default Remedy In the modify form select the station or group to be used and save it End of Day must not be after noon Reset to previous value Problem When selecting End of day the hour must be between midnight and 11 AM inclusive Remedy Pick a time in the AM range of hours If you shut down before mi
558. the All Bottle dispenser can alter activator ring alignment so perform this procedure as needed gt Use a complete set of coded pourers when you perform the activator ring alignment gt After you perform the alignment you need to store the alignment values in the Infinity database at the computer Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 156 Store Alignment Values To store alignment values 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Store Alignment Values The Align Activator Rings screen displays only if you ve already set up an All Bottle 7 dispenser Store Alignment Values gt You should store alignment 2 Select the Equipment Name with alignment values you want to import values after aligning All Bottle Select master group to import the values for all activator rings in one step activator rings Only All Bottle 7 dispensers appear in the list gt This procedure imports the 3 Click Run to import the alignment values from the ECU s to the activator ring alignment values computer from the ECUs to store them A message informs you when the alignment values are stored at the computer 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for all equipment with alignment values you want to gt If you omit this procedure after import aligning activator rings a 5 Click Close to exit the Store Alignment Values screen message prompts you to store If you forget to store alignment values at t
559. the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Rename 4 Type a unique New Name and click OK to save it To delete an ECU 1 Select the Network from the drop down list 2 Click Show All Options 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Wait for the software to complete the deletion When you delete an ECU the ECU and its dispensers are disabled August 2010 ECU Hardware Station Setup gt When you set up a new ECU you tell Infinity that you have an ECU connected and where An ECU must be set up witha network name and a unique ECU number gt The combination of the network name and ECU number can be thought of as the ECU s address which uniquely identifies that ECU to Infinity You can change the network or ECU number by using move an ECU gt You can create a copy of an ECU by using Copy an ECU gt You can also create a new ECU by reading the information stored in an ECU gt You need to verify that each ECU in your system can be properly accessed by the computer gt Use the communication test to check the connection with each ECU one at atime gt This test does not require that the ECU be defined in the system it only has to be physically connected to the network you specify and have the ECU number properly set in the ECU Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help s New ECU Number To find new ECU number 1 Pull do
560. the minus sign to collapse any equipment 5 Click Close to exit the screen August 2010 Equipment Name Mapping gt This feature lets you view a list of the groups sales stations hardware stations and devices you have set up gt This list is helpful if you want to get an overview of the system s organization or you need to see what s out there before making changes gt This screen is easily moved and resized and you can view it from any screen by pressing F9 gt The equipment list reflects only your database configuration at the computer it does not check to see what hardware is attached at the present time Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Demo Mode To use demo mode 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Demo Mode The menu displays a checkmark and Infinity immediately switches to demo mode Demo Mode 2 To set up options for this mode see Demo Setup Demo mode su oi ame same functions to the Infinity 3 To connect in demo mode to a live ECU see Demo ECU database without 4 To exit demo mode pull down the Options menu and click Demo Mode communicating with any Infinity immediately switches back to live mode equipment gt This makes this mode valuable for demonstrations for preliminary setup or for making a large number of changes gt If changes made in demo mode need to be applied to actual equipment you must later perform a clear and restore memo
561. the report see Run an Advanced Report Infinity Help 2 Price Level Changes Report To understand the report Price Level Changes This report shows the Date Time Old Price Level and New Price Level for each price level change at each ECU in the selected station or gt This report shows the date and group The 19 most recent price level changes are listed S r time of price level changes at Price level changes are not cleared when you run an Archive and Clear the selected station or group Sales Z report Calibration Mode Portion Changes This report also shows all operations which may have affected portions These changes include calibration price portion changes and learn mode Changes across the entire system are shown for the last 14 days Switch Category This report shows the Date Time Old Category and New Category for each price portion category switch at each ECU in the selected station or group Printed On The Time and Date on the report are the time and date the report was run not necessarily the time and date of the last hardware station activity Type of Data To run this report the computer must communicate with the selected ECU s The data reported on is all data currently stored at the ECU s or in other words all data since the last time you cleared sales at the selected ECU s This report can only be run as a Current report Price Level Changes gt It lists the original and new price level
562. the time and date the report was run Type of Data This report can only be run as a Current report August 2010 237 Power amp Interface Log gt This report lists the most recent times a unit has lost power or had a state change concerning its sales terminal Interface gt Not all ECU types or versions support this report gt For help with running the report see Run an Advanced Report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 238 Price Portion Report To understand the report Product Assignments The first assignment section is only shown if you select Show Product Assignments when you run the report Alternatively select Show All to show all price tables regardless of whether they are assigned When using Show All you will not be allowed to select a station or group and no assignments will be displayed in the report You may select a product type if you wish For every dispenser Laser All Bottle Tap at the selected station group this report shows Brand Name The brand or cocktail assigned to the button coded pourer or tap Category Name The name of the category of the brand or cocktail s prices and portions Delay Timer The delay value of an All Bottle or Laser dispenser or the flow rate of a TAP 1 dispenser Calibration Meter Either the calibration value of an All Bottle or Laser dispenser or the meter count of a TAP 1 dispenser Price Portion Tables The rep
563. these brands can be viewed via the Brand Information and Container Stock reports Also under Pouring Brand Operations Brand List Setup Modify you can see information about the Total Stock and Order Point for a brand Question R256 Do you want to show Portions on this report Problem The report can either show or hide portions Remedy Answer No to hide the portions and answer Yes to show the portions Question R257 All sales information covered by the time period requested may not have been archived Do you want to get additional archives now Problem The most recent Archive does not span the time period requested Additional sales data may be able to be archived from one or more ECUs to fully which would full cover the tme period Remedy Answer Yes to Archive and Clear Answer No if you do not want any communication to occur or if you are sure that there is no additional applicable sales data August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Schedule SCH Questions Question SCH201 Would you like to create a default schedule It will include a repeated Archive and Clear Z Problem When you first run a new Infinity you are given a chance to create a schedule which runs an Archive and Clear every so many minutes or hours You can also indicate an overnight period when the Archive and Clear will not run It is advisable to do regular archives to have the sales data on the PC for faster and more flexible report
564. time for your PC and all of your ECUs Problem Changing the Infinity system time affects the time for your entire system This includes the PC itself and all of the ECUs Warning INF106 Selected item is empty No operation is possible Problem The operation you are trying to perform is not possible because it will result in no action The station group order or other item that you selected to perform this action on is empty Warning INF107 Using the PC time for the ECU selected Problem The time could not be read from the ECU so the time from the PC is being displayed instead Warning INF108 No changes made Problem An operation was requested that would not result in any changes Therefore the operation is not necessary For example if you indicate that you want to change to price level C and all of the ECUs in the group are already at that price level this message will be displayed Warning INF109 Maximum length is Text was truncated after maximum number of characters Problem Infinity has a maximum length for many text fields The name that you have selected or typed is too long The text has been truncated to fit within the maximum length Remedy H the truncated name is acceptable then you may continue Otherwise try a new name Warning INF110 All changes are being undone since Infinity is not sure about your intentions You may proceed with the current operation Problem In operations with multiple options or steps it can be
565. tings from a different version of configuration settings These software an error message will prevent you from doing so settings do not include any sales records gt Infinity configuration settings include all configuration options you select during software installation all equipment setup data networks ECUs stations groups all calibration settings all brand price portion and dispenser assignment data system report options and schedules you have created if any August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Backup Full Database To backup the full database i O N Pull down the Backups menu Click Store Configuration Click Change Serial Number if you want to type in a different serial number for the configuration settings Type the Database Serial Number and the Store Serial Number Use this option as a dealer if you are setting up for a customer site and you have a different serial number than the customer The Database Serial Number is the serial number of the Infinity program you re using The Store Serial Number should match the target customer s Infinity database Changing the serial number does not change the serial number of the existing database only the serial number of the backup stored in the destination folder Click Use descriptive backup folder if you want to specify a descriptive folder name for the backup On the next screen you ll see the d
566. tinue Berg must be contacted with identifying information in order to activate the software 3 Choose By Fax Click Continue This choice requires a printer 4 Enter required information including your Fax number Business name telephone and address Click Continue 5 If you have a printer attached to this PC choose Print A single page should be printed out at your PC s default printer OR Choose View to show the Fax data in a window Cut and paste this data into Notepad or other program Save the file and then move it to a PC with a printer Print out the Fax form Fax the printout to the Berg Company at 608 221 1416 This completes Step 1 of activation You may continue working with Infinity software When you receive a return Fax start the activation process again see step 1 above 8 Choose Step 2 Click Continue 9 Answer No to Do you have a key file 10 Using the information on the return Fax enter the Reference Code and License Key Click Continue If the license key is entered correctly your software will be activated and you will no longer see the grace period warning when you run Infinity software Activation by Fax N gt Activation or renewal by fax lets you send your information when it s convenient for you without spending time on the phone or with email gt A return fax will only be sent during Berg business hours gt For more help with software licensing see Ab
567. tions you ve set up are used when you run a report from the Current Sales menu However the data type is Current regardless of the data type you selected in the Options menu gt You can also run a current sales report using the Advanced Reporting menu This is useful if you want to set specific options for a current sales report See Run an Advanced Report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 207 Run the Most Recent Report To run the most recent report 1 Pull down the Reports menu and point to Not archived Current Sales Click Most Recent Report Most Recent Report 2 View save or print the report See View Report Saved report files can be opened by clicking Open on the View screen 3 Click Close to exit the View screen gt This menu item lets you view and print the last report run on your system gt The report appears in the View window exactly as it did the first time it was run and you can print the report if you choose August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 208 Archive and Clear Sales Z To archive and clear sales Z 1 Pull down the Reports menu and click Archive and Clear Z 2 Select the Equipment Name You re selecting a group or sales station or ECU hardware station you want to clear 3 Click Calculate Retail Price if you want to calculate the Retail Price per unit for all brands poured since the last archi
568. to be opened for writing Remedy Exit all Infinity programs and retry If that fails reboot and retry Or you may need to reinstall Infinity Diagnosis Check that another program is not using the file File already open Problem File needed for the operation was already open for another purpose Remedy Exit all Infinity programs and retry If that fails reboot and retry Or you may need to reinstall Infinity Diagnosis Check that another program is not using the file File not found Problem File needed for the operation was not found There is likely some file missing from your database Remedy Reboot and retry Look for a good restore or backup disk and restore the database Or you Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e may need to reinstall from scratch ERROR INF28 File not found Please enter next disk Problem File needed for operation was not found If there is another floppy disk enter it now If not then this may not be a good store disk ERROR INF29 Store settings was NOT completed This disk should NOT be used for reload settings Problem One or more database files could not be copied There may be missing or corrupt files in the database Remedy Check the hard disk and the destination disk for errors and correct any of them Reboot and retry ERROR INF30 Reload settings was NOT completed The database may have been left in an undefined state Problem One or more database files could not be co
569. tored at the computer the last time you cleared sales at the ECU To run this report as a Weekly Monthly or Date Range report the computer uses archive data stored at the computer The data reported on is determined by the number of times you cleared sales at the ECU during the specified time August 2010 Retail Usage gt The Retail Usage report provides the retail value of the volume poured for each brand in the selected station or group gt This report does not show any actual sales data but a projected value of the volume poured based on a retail price per volume unit gt You must enter a price per unit for each of your brands if you want the retail value to be computed in this report gt For help with running the report see Run an Advanced Report Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help a Sales by Price Levels X2 Report To understand the report Current Sales By Price Levels This report shows the number of Sold Drinks Sales and the Pour Volume for each Brand at each Price Level of the selected station s The drinks and sales totals do not include complimentary or canceled drinks The final column lists the Pour Sales Pour Volume rice level The total Sold Drinks and Sales for the price level are computed along with Es Blose TEE the total number of Complimentary and Canceled drinks and the total sales onne p Wit TBAOINE tne repo value of these drinks per price level
570. ttom of any screen that enters PLUs will remind you if there is a PLU Base value Note that the number you enter is multiplied by 10 000 Port Port refers to the communication port at the computer used for the network connection Infinity allows you to specify ports 1 255 POS Identification POS Identification is used when dispensers share a POS The P3 Hub POS terminal is identified at the dispenser before a pour It is available only on Dispenser Networks POS ID Timeout Applies when using POS Identification This is the time in seconds after a pour is completed during which that you can initiate another pour without having to re identify the P3 Hub Potential Pouring Cost Potential Pouring Cost is the owner s potential pouring cost which is calculated by multiplying the number of containers poured for each brand by the container cost for the brand The total is then divided by the sales for the brand and multiplied by 100 to determine a percentage Berg labels this percentage a potential pouring cost for the brand because Infinity has no way of computing losses due to overpouring spillage etc A potential pouring cost is only computed if a container cost has been entered for the brand See How to add a brand or cocktail This metric is also called the Cost Percent Pour a Drink At an All Bottle or Laser dispenser pour a small portion first and then a large portion with the button number or coded pourer you selected The calib
571. tton on the Cocktail pad and the Dispenser Converter 10 Go to the equipment and press the flashing button on the correct device 11 Assign cocktails to the Cocktail Pad 12 If you have more than one Cocktail Pad you must associate each dispenser with one of the cocktail pads Click on the Cocktail Pad Association tab For each dispenser select a Cocktail pad You can select lt None gt for devices that are not used in any cocktail August 2010 Cocktail Pad Cocktails gt The brand used in each cocktail must be assigned before assigning the cocktail to the Cocktail Pad gt You can still use Laser Cocktails You pour them from the Laser as normal gt If a Laser is part of a cocktail which also has other ingredients you do not go into cocktail mode at the Laser To pour a cocktail from the Cocktail Pad gt Enter the cocktail number on the pad and press Enter gt Go to the dispensers which have ingredients and pour that brand You do not need to select a size gt The cocktail is not rung up until you pour the first ingredient gt You will not be able to pour at any other brands at the Infinity ECU until you complete the cocktail gt After the last ingredient is poured the cocktail pad returns to its ready state Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Device Settings To find Device Settings 1 Pull down the Management menu and point to Set
572. ty Manager to make sure this unit is defined and connected to the network you think it is Using the correct identity repeat step 2 C Communication error You must fix the communication error before we can proceed Make sure the ECU network is what you think it is Try using the Communication Wizard in Manager Then repeat step 2 3 Make sure you are using the dispenser you expect Enable the ECU you disabled it in step 2 Unplug dispenser from ECU and see if lights go out Check laser board jumpers and position of boards Make sure this dispenser is defined in Manager 4 From Diagnostics run Compare ECU A ECU matches database proceed to Step 5 B ECU does not match database This unit does not have the right settings Run a clear and restore memory If pouring does not start return to step 1 5 If you are interfaced Use Interface Settings to check Pour communication A Pour wthout release or send after pour Go to step 6 B Wait for release i Change the setting to Pour without release a Still does not pour Go to step 6 b Pours There is a problem with the interface Go to Interface problem article 6 Check portion In Pouring Assign Brands see if any brand is assigned to that button that won t pour A If no assignment assign the brand you want and go to step 1 B Brand is assigned Replace brand with test pour Still does not pour Go to step 7 ji Pours Reassign the orig
573. u can enter initialize these values if you know the correct timing values or meter count fixed flow rate numbers for your OR dispensers For a Tap dispenser type the correct flow rate in the Timer field or the gt When using a unit which correct flow meter count in the Meter field for each tap controller Click Backup Timer for quick access to change the system settings for Backup Timer Percent features increased precision the calibration values will be SS shown with a single decimal 5 If desired click Save as Default to save the current calibration values as place to reflect this increased the default for All Bottle dispenser brands OR click Load Defaults to precision ER your current Ge e EE 6 Click OK to save all your entries high flow and standard flow 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for each dispenser pourers Entering the correct values speeds up the calibration process and is helpful if you are upgrading a system and already know the exact values or when something happens to your database and you need to re enter the values gt The current delay calibration values and meter count flow rate values can be found on a Price Portion report August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Enable Disable Equipment To enable or disable equipment 6 Pull down the Management menu and point to Operations Click Enable Disable Select the Equipment Name you
574. u have made changes that must be saved before continuing Do you want to save your changes Problem Normally changes are saved when you Click OK When you click on a secondary button it can be easy to forget to save your original changes So you are forced to save these changes before you proceed Remedy Answer Yes to save the changes and proceed If you answer No then the requested function will not run To discard the changes Click Cancel after answering No August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 35 Interface ECR Questions Question ECR200 Interface has just been installed Do you want the driver to be loaded into every ECU If you decline you must use Load Drivers menu choice to load the drivers into each ECU Problem As soon as Infinity is loaded after installing Interface it will inquire whether the driver should be loaded into every ECU that has been defined By answering Yes the driver will be loaded in a single step Choose Yes unless there are some ECUs which are not interfaced By answering No the drivers must be loaded into each appropriate ECU by using Interface Load Driver August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 36 Manager M Questions M300 309 M350 359 M360 369 M370 379 M390 399 Question M300 Do you wish to copy ECU alignment values to the database Problem If you have aligned the activator rings for an All Bottle 7 but have not stored t
575. u have selected to copy to all days then this question affects all days You can Click Cancel if you change your mind August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 271 On Demand Schedule Setup To create an On Demand schedule y Pull down the Scheduling menu and click Schedules Click New Select a folder for the new schedule in the Look in field and type a File This type of schedule was name for the new schedule formerly referred to as a Run The default folder is the Program Data Berg Infinity folder You don t need EE E Now schedule to type the sch extension in the file name the extension is added automatically gt An On Demand schedule has 4 Click Open no set times for the actions to be performed it simply lists a sequence of actions to be performed whenever it is run On Demand Schedule oO N The New Schedule screen displays with the Options tab in front Click On Demand The days of the week tabs are replaced by the On Demand tab An On Demand schedule only uses one tab Wu O On the Options tab select a Report Handling method for this schedule only if you don t want to use the default method displayed To change the Scheduled Report Names used for scheduled reports in this schedule only click Name File type the name and click Save Click the On Demand tab Define the actions you want to occur when you run the schedul
576. u have toggled into Demo Mode this is done by Options Demo ECU If you are running a Demo Version you select the Demo ECU by running the Setup program on the Infinity CD Once the Demo ECU is selected select Live Connection in the Communications box that appears in Demo mode Only the Demo ECU will communicate All other ECUs will get a CM25 error Only one ECU is allowed to communicate in Demo Mode Demo Mode Demo Mode performs all of the same functions to the Infinity database without communicating with any equipment This makes this mode valuable for demonstrations for preliminary setup or for making a large number of changes If these changes need to be applied to actual equipment you must later perform a clear and restore memory on every ECU August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 3 affected using a live version of Infinity You can enter Demo Mode from Options Demo Mode and exit the same way Demo Version Numbers Number of Drinks a Day Approximate number of drinks per brand for the software to simulate A random factor is included so the number will not be exactly the same each time The default is 50 Number of Comp Drinks a Day Approximate number of comp drinks per brand for the software to simulate Enter 0 if you don t want any to appear The default is 5 Number of Canceled Drinks a Day Approximate number of canceled drinks per brand for the software to simulate Enter 0 i
577. uld I import prices and portions Portions Use Import to save time entering prices and portions at a new Infinity gt For how to steps see Import installation or to quickly change prices and portions at an existing cocktail prices and portions installation Typically you import prices and portions if you ve previously entered them somewhere else For example you may have entered them at another Infinity installation or in a POS system What does it mean to import cocktail prices and portions Importing means you tell Infinity to copy the cocktail recipes prices and portions saved in a file to your database It means you don t individually enter prices and portions for each cocktail and its ingredients they are copied in one step from the file How do I get an import file You can create a file by exporting cocktail prices and portions from another Infinity installation see Export Prices and Portions Brands Or you may be able to export cocktail prices and portions from a POS system to a file see the POS documentation You can also create a file in any spreadsheet or text editor and type in the cocktail price portion information What needs to be in the cocktail import file The cocktail import file should contain a separate line of text for each price level of every cocktail you re importing Each cocktail line should list the cocktail name price level price and optionally PLU For example Margarita Cock
578. uld be preceded by CM20 CM21 or CM22 See those messages Can t transmit data Check comm port Problem Communication data being sent through the comm port never got transmitted The maximum time the software waits for a transmission is 0 4 seconds 80 x 50 ms This is probably a problem with your comm port Remedy Try using a different comm port or installing a new port Rebooting or shutting down other programs may work if multiple programs are contending for the port No response from unit Fix Communication problem Problem The message to the ECU was successfully sent but no response was received from the ECU This is the most common communication error After waiting 0 4 seconds 80 x 50ms for each communication try no legal response was received both an STX and an ETX must be received Usually if you see this message nothing was received from the ECU There are many reasons for this error including the ECU has no power the ECU is not connected in the Infinity network a converter is not present or has no power the wrong port has been selected or there is a loose network connection For some older units this error can mean a mismatch in the security code see CM19 Remedy Try the operation again Check all connections to the ECU and power to the ECU Diagnosis Use the Communication Wizard to diagnose the problem No answer from modem Check modems or fix communication problem Problem This occurs on a modem network when the ph
579. umn Separator 8 Type the number of Header Lines if any in the import file 9 Click Run to import data in the selected file 10 Click Yes to continue importing after reading any warnings o E D August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 127 Import Cocktail Prices and Portions To import cocktail prices and portions 1 2 3 4 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Point to Import Prices and Portions and click Cocktails Click Open to select the Import File Name and path gt For further help with importing Select the price portion Category for all cocktails in the import file see About Importing Cocktail To create a newcategory type a new Category name BEE Specify the order of the Columns in the import file by entering a number for each column Enter a 0 zero for any column not included in the import file See Import Columns OR Check Use column headers to determine columns The text of the columns in the import file are used to identify which columns are in which position All columns will be imported This option should only be used when the import file was produced by Infinity Type the Column Separator Type the number of Header Lines if any in the import file Click Run to import data in the selected file Click Yes to continue importing after reading any warnings Import Prices and Portions August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Co
580. unaccounted portion changes from being made Remedy The ECU must be opened and the jumper removed before any changes can be made Dispenser does not exist Problem The dispenser selected does not exist and the intended operation cannot be performed Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR M99 ERROR M100 ERROR M101 ERROR M103 ERROR M104 ERROR M105 ERROR M106 ERROR M108 ERROR M109 ERROR M110 ERROR M111 ERROR M112 ERROR M113 August 2010 Remedy Go to ECU Setup and add the missing dispenser Diagnosis Check that you have selected the correct dispenser for this ECU If the 1544 is using metric volume units it cannot be calibrated with metric units Please switch the calibration units to ounces Problem This is a known bug in the 1544 Infinity EPROM Remedy Change the calibration units to fluid ounces A modem network requires a phone number Problem When the modem checkbox is checked this means the Infinity network is using a modem line A phone number is required to dial up the remote modem at the ECU site Remedy Enter the phone number or uncheck the modem box if this network is not using a modem value is not supported by this ECU Resetting to legal value Problem A feature or value is not supported by this ECU gives the name of the feature This may be because of the type of ECU or the version number Many features are available only in more recent EPROMs For example
581. under the new brand s name gt If an Infinity Network dispenser is connected to a Dispenser Network using a Dispenser Converter assignment changes can only be made be made at the Infinity ECU Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 1 2 Click the Prices and Portions Modify shortcut button The Price and Portions Setup screen displays with the Modify Brand Assignments screen still in the background To copy brand assignments from one dispenser to other identical dispensers See Copy Assignments August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 146 Assign Cocktails to Dispensers To assign cocktails to dispensers 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Assign Cocktails 2 Select the Equipment Name and click OK You ll see the list of hardware stations ECUs and only dispensers capable of pouring cocktails If you select an ECU you ll see all its Laser dispensers on the next screen 3 Click the tab for the correct Laser dispenser and the correct Cocktail Bank A on the tabs means Dispenser 1 B means Dispenser 2 When you click a tab the cursor automatically points to Button 1 4 Click the cocktail in the Cocktail List you want to assign to Button 1 When there is more than one category you can select a category and only those price portion tables will be shown in the Cocktail List Select lt ALL gt to display all category tables To quickly jump to
582. up Click Device Settings OR Click Device Settings on ECU Setup To set up system device settings 1 Select lt System Settings gt as the Device Name 2 Check Actual to only see those settings which apply to the equipment you currently have defined on your system If this is not checked then y ou ll see every possible setting for every possible device Don t worry about settings not applicable to your system 3 Click or enter the settings you want to use for your system See Description of Device Settings for help with each setting 4 Click OK to save 5 Select a communication option and click Continue These options are provided so you can wait to send the settings later when you have other changes to send to the equipment at the same time Wait while the changes are broadcast to the equipment if you ve selected to send changes To set up settings for an ECU type 1 Select lt System Settings gt as the Device Name 2 Select the tab with the ECU type you want to set You will only see options that apply to the ECU type you have selected These settings are considered system wide settings and will affect other ECU types that share any setting type 3 Check Actual to only see those settings which apply to the equipment of this ECU type that you currently have defined on your system Some options also depend on the version of equipment you have 4 Click or enter the settings you want to use for your system Se
583. up This is done not by adding the list of all groups to a new group but rather by checking the box which says includes all ECUs This way any ECUs added will automatically be included without having to modify this group Can t open Problem The file named by could not be opened The file may be missing or there may be a system or disk error Remedy Fix any disk errors Reboot and retry may clear some system errors Diagnosis Check if the file exists and the disk for errors Make sure the file is in the correct folder Error in file Not enough columns Line will be skipped Problem The line in the file named by is expected to be a text line containing a certain number of columns Columns are pieces of text separated by one or more column separator characters such as spaces or commas Remedy Change the separator if the type of file allows you to such as the sales terminal data file Otherwise recreate or get a replacement file from the producer Diagnosis The file can be printed out to confirm the number of columns Check the correct separator is used Error in file Numeric value expected in column Line will be skipped Problem The file is named by and the line number is The column numbered should contain a numeric value but it does not Remedy See INF37 requires a numeric portion Problem An entered value must have a number as part of the string such as ABC123 The value s name is given by An example
584. up and send to Berg Can t write record xxx Problem The install attempted to write a change to the named record type This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy Check that you are not out of disk space and free some up Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Reboot and retry Diagnosis Run diagnostics on old database Make complete backup and send to Berg No Infinity Configuration Information Empty database Problem Database configuration record is not found This usually means that you are trying to upgrade from an empty database that was not properly installed Remedy Reboot and retry Restore backup of the old database Or you may need to install a new system Fatal Error Preparing for Infinity Database Problem Before the database could be opened there was some error This is likely a system error Remedy Reboot and retry Run diagnostics on your PC Shut down other programs Can t find member of set xxx Problem The install attempted to locate a record This failed and a valid new database cannot be created Remedy Check that the disk drive is not corrupt Reboot and retry Diagnosis Run diagnostics on old database Make complete backup and send to Berg Can t switch to s Problem Setup tries to change to the indicated install folder For some reason this did not work Remedy Choose a different folder name Reboot and retry Fix any disk errors Diagnosis Check disk for errors Verify that the indicated folder exists C
585. urrently assigned to dispensers you ll see the assignment list Select the Switch To product type Liquor can be switched to the Wine or Mixer product type Beer can be switched to the Liquor Wine or Mixer product type Wine can be switched to the Beer Liquor or Mixer product type Mixer can be switched to the Beer Liquor or Wine product type type Cocktail can t be switched any other product type 5 Click OK to save the switch gt Switching a brand s product type is useful if a brand s product type was defined incorrectly and you want to switch to the correct product A August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 113 Copy Brand Setup To copy a brand s setup information to other brands 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and point to Brand Operations Click Brand List Setup Copy Brand 2 Select the current Product Type and the Brand Name Click Modify Select a brand representative of other brands 3 Click Copy gt All of a brand s setup information with the exception Alist disol ZE Ge of Product Code can be copied ist displays with brands of the same product type to ona oi more omer branda 4 Click Continue to proceed with the copy process gt You can only copy brand setup 5 Select one or more brands in the list using the mouse or space bar information to other brands of Click Select All to select the entire list Click Clear to deselect all choices the same pro
586. using more than one PLU column you are indicating there is more than one set of data on each line in the sales terminal data file One use of this is when multiple price levels are exported by the POS systems into a single line If you enter multiple PLU columns you must enter at least the same number of Sales or Count columns You can also specify more than one Sales or Count column for each PLU column The number of columns must be a multiple of the PLU number of columns In this instance the data columns are grouped with a particular PLU column and the data contained in those columns is added together and associated with the single PLU An example of when this is useful is when the POS keeps track of price levels but each price level is not given a separate PLU For example there may be three sales columns associated with each PLU corresponding to August 2010 Reconciliation Options gt To run a Reconciliation report you must first determine how you will generate a sales terminal data file at the sales terminal See your sales terminal representative for help with this gt The sales terminal data file must be an ASCIl text file gt Once you know the column format of the sales terminal data file its name and location enter these on the Reconciliation options screen Unless something changes you only need to set up these options once Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help thr
587. using the scroll bars ECU 5 Click Close to exit the Display ECU screen gt The report lists all ECU setup data prices portions current state and any POS drivers loaded It does not show any sales information gt The ECU number must be set up in the software but the data in the report reflects only what is stored at the ECU gt This tool is especially useful to diagnose an ECU about which little is Known August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Debug Mode To use debug mode 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Debug Mode The menus disappear When you access them again the Diagnostics menu shows additional items and continues to do so until you hide them again To exit debug mode 1 Pull down the Diagnostics menu Click Debug Mode The menus disappear When you access them again the Diagnostics menu hides the additional items August 2010 Debug Mode gt The additional menu items help you perform diagnostics as directed by Berg personnel Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 22 Glossary A B Numbers A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S LU V W X Y Z Infinity Menus Glossary Numbers A B Click a letter above to jump Scroll to terms in alphabetical order 1544 Portion This is the single portion size 1544 Infinity ECUs pour when they are in calibration mode This portion size must be betwee
588. ve This option means the pour sales are divided by the pour volume for each brand being archived You can check the retail price per unit that was calculated for a brand in Brand List Setup Itis recommended you use this calculation method only with the Master Group so that all brands are updated atthe same time If you leave this option checked then whenever schedule or inventory check run an archive and clear this will also calculate the retail price per unit 4 Check Set ECU Time if you want to reset the clocks of all ECUs in the selected Station or Group to match the current PC clock This is especially important if you use the Hourly Sales report Click Run to archive and clear sales at the selected equipment Click OK to confirm the clearing of sales or click Cancel to exit the process Wait while the data is retrieved from the ECU s The time it takes is determined by the amount of sales activity and the number of ECUs in the station or group Never turn off or restart your computer while data is being retrieved or the data may be lost View save or print the report See View Repor Saved report files can be opened by clicking Open on the View screen 8 Click Close to exit the View screen 9 Click Close to exit the Archive and Clear Sales Z screen O uo N August 2010 Archive and Clear Z gt When you archive and clear sales at selected ECUs you reset all totals at the ECUs to zero and send the
589. version will at least temporarily leave you in a state where Infinity won t run Read the message to make sure your situation qualifies and you have all the required setup disks There is no protection against making errors and you may end up with all data being lost Click Yes to continue Wait while the database files are reloaded If necessary insert additional backup disks and press any key as prompted Remove the backup disk Re install the new version of Infinity August 2010 Restore Previous Version Full Database gt Perform this task ONLY if it becomes necessary when upgrading to a new version of Infinity on a new computer gt The proper way to upgrade is to move your Infinity folder to the new computer and then upgrade to the new Infinity version gt If you installed the new Infinity upgrade on the new computer before transferring your current database to the new computer your old database is not compatible with the new version gt If this is your case perform this task to restore your previous version full database or you can reload the previous version configuration settingson the new computer gt After performing this task you MUST re install the new Infinity software upgrade Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ER Clear Sales from the Database To clear sales from the database 1 Access Configuration options 2 Click Clear Sales SEEE 3
590. verted to the new units Remedy Answer to No followed by Cancel to cancel this change Answer Yes if you want to convert all volumes When this is done check the portion tables to see if the converted portions are appropriate August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 304 Utilities U Questions U200 209 U250 259 U260 269 U270 279 Question U200 Are you sure you want to change the database in 1 2 to 3 Problem If the serial number is changed for the database in the folder named by 1 then you will no longer be able to run this database under its current set of programs The serial number of the Infinity programs must match the database serial number Remedy Answer Yes to change the serial number Question U202 This procedure will completely overwrite your database with a previously backed up copy Are you sure you wish to do this Problem When you Restore Full Database your current database will be completely overwritten Any changes made or sales stored between the time of the backup and now will be lost Full backup also includes copies of schedules and saved report files and changes made to them will also be lost Remedy Answer Yes to complete the restore of the backup Question U203 Do you wish to store configuration settings from to Berg recommends that the destination be empty of all other files Problem Check the destination indicated in the message to make sure this is where you
591. w All Options Click Read Click Yes to confirm the operation Select the name of the Network This is the network you want the ECU to be part of Type in a unique ECU number and select the ECU Type Select the ECU number set in the ECU itself This must be an ECU number unused on the selected network The numbers of any ECUs you ve already set up appear in the Existing ECUs field Click Continue Wait while the software communicates with the ECU The following information cannot be recovered from an ECU and will be lost Sales Stations Interface information PLU recipes stock rooms and ingredient prices It cannot distinquish between Tap Head Flow Meter and Flow Meter Only mode on Tap 1 and for most dispensers may not produce the correct brand or cocktail names August 2010 Read an ECU gt You can add an ECU into a network by reading its current settings This option is for catastrophic failure only where the database has been lost If you have regularly backed up your system you will not likely need to use this option gt Reading an ECU to recover lost data should not be used as a substitute for backups gt The following information cannot be recovered from an ECU and will be lost Sales Stations Interface information PLU recipes stock rooms and ingredient prices It cannot distinquish between Tap Head Flow Meter and Flow Meter Only mode on Tap 1 and for most dispensers may n
592. w meter was detected but dispenser is set for Tap Head Only Check Device Settings Problem You are calibrating a tap which is not supposed to have a flow meter yet flow meter counts were detected Remedy Under Device Settings correct the Dispensing mode of the tap If it is correct then the flow meter likely is not wired correctly Berg recommends that you assign brands before calibrating Problem Calibration is best performed with the brands that you will use Additional help is available from the software if the portions to be used are assigned Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Warning M252 Warning M255 Warning M256 Warning M257 Warning M258 Warning M259 Warning M260 Warning M261 Warning M262 Warning M263 Warning M264 August 2010 Remedy Assign the brand that will be poured before proceeding with calibration Calibration portion range does not include all brand portions Inaccurate pouring may result after this calibration if you attempt to pour at volumes outside the calibration portions X to Y Problem The smallest and largest portions that can be poured including cocktail ingredients have been determined to be much smaller or much larger than the portions used for calibration The calibration process produces the most accurate results when pouring is done within or near the calibration portions Remedy Change the calibration portions to include a wider range You may u
593. wable width of the selected printer Remedy Answer No to stop and change the columns you have selected Answer Yes to continue with view and then change the orientation to landscape Question R251 Any salesin the ECUs will be cleared by this operation Continue Problem An Archive and Clear will clear the sales information in the ECU although it will be saved in the database Archived data can be viewed by using any option other than Current when generating a report You may also be reminded if you have the Calculate Retail Prices box checked Remedy Answer Yes to continue the Archive and Clear Question R252 All order quantities are zero This order will be deleted Are you sure you wish to continue Problem If the order quantities for all the brands listed in this order are zero there is nothing left of the order and it will be deleted This may occur on a new order or when modifying an existing order Note you can use Delete Order to more directly delete an order Remedy If you really do not want any brands listed on this order to remain on order answer Yes Question R253 Do you want to perform an Archive and Clear now Problem When ordering or performing an Inventory Check Report will sometimes recommend running an Archive and Clear operation This question allows you to perform this operation without having to back out of the Inventory Check It may also affect Retail Price per Unit Remedy Answer Yes to run an Archive and Clear now This
594. want the store copy to go This works best if the removable media or the folder indicated is free of all other files Remedy Answer Yes to continue Answer No if the wrong destination appears or you are not sure if any files are located in the destination Question U204 This procedure will overwrite the configuration settings of your database in with a previous stored copy in Are you sure you wish to do this Problem When you reload configuration this means that the configuration portion of your database everything except the archived sales will be overwritten with the stored copy Any changes you have made will be lost Remedy Answer Yes to complete the reload Question U205 If there are errorsin the database this operation may result in loss of data Berg recommends you Backup full database before continuing Do you wish to continue Problem Repair database or emergency rebuild are useful when trying to recover a database with errors However in some cases these operations may result in a worse situation or may need to delete portions of the database To be safe it is best to have a backup of the database before you continue with these functions Do not overwrite backups that may contain good backups made previous to the errors being detected in your database Remedy Answer Yes if you have a backup and want to continue Question U206 You may recover a previous database version by using the store or backup disk in Check the Re
595. when you pick Pour Shift as one of the columns options if you run an advanced Shifts which do not begin and end on the hour will not be supported by report Infinity network ECUs unless they are connected to a Dispenser Network gt You can also create custom REESEN reports using options different Enter minute interval for periods not covered by the range of shift hours from those on the Report This is also useful in lieu of explicit shift hours For example if you want Options screen Hourly Sales to show every half hour enter 30 The default is 60 minutes 1 i gt Intervals other than 60 minutes will not be supported by Infinity network Iau eai escata E ECUs unless they are connected to a Dispenser Network using a Dispenser options in the Options menu Converter the Berg default options are used O N On the Printer Fonts tab select the Font Name and the Font Size Click OK to sawe the entries on all tabs and exit the Report Options screen To use the Berg defaults excluding the business name click Load Defaults Click Close to exit without saving any changes August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help e Export Options To enter export options 1 Pull down the Options menu and click Export Options You can also click Export Options from the Export screen Export Options p i e 2 Select an Export Format gt Export options specify the 3 Type a Column Se
596. will look for a file named rectue txt if Reconciliation is done on Tuesday dd mmm yy txt 130ct06 txt if Reconciliation is done on Oct 13 2006 dd xxx txt dd xxx txt brackets don t match up pos dddd x txt postuesday txt AND postuesday1 txt AND postuesdayabc txt All three of these files will be read Variance The discrepancy between the sales and collected salesfor each brand OR the discrepancy between the Sold pour volume and the collected volume for each brand Volume Drink Volume or Pour Volume Drinks appear on a Sales report Pours on a Usage report Volume Cost The cost to you of the volume poured This is the cost per unit multipled by the Pour Volume Volume Unit Cost Cost per Unit The cost to you of each volume unit Derived from the container cost and container size entered when you set up a brand and set up containers The actual volume units are often shown August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 328 Wait for Release Wait For Release means the ECU sends pour information to the sales terminal and then waits for approval or release before initiating a pour This communication occurs in hundredths of seconds Waiting for release ensures the drink isn t poured without ringing up at the sales terminal ECR terminals do not send an approval so this feature is not available when you re using an ECR compatible driver Weekly Report Data Reports on a business we
597. will upgrade your database detected an error Remedy Restore your previous database reboot and retry Run Repair Database or other database fixing Diagnostics on your old database to fix any indicated errors Diagnosis After restoring your previous database run Utilities to see if there are errors in the database It may not be possible to upgrade all databases with errors in them ERROR S08 Error deleting database work files Problem After converting your database Setup will remove the work folder These files were not able to be deleted The setup will continue Remedy After setup delete the _infwork folder under your Infinity folder ERROR S09 Internal dialog box error Problem Something has gone wrong trying to get install information from the user Remedy Reboot and retry ERROR 10 Unable to get serial number for source disk Problem All setup disks are given a unique serial number for each customer The serial cannot be August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help ERROR S11 ERROR 12 ERROR 13 ERROR S15 ERROR S16 ERROR S17 ERROR S19 ERROR S20 ERROR S21 ERROR S22 ERROR S23 ERROR S24 ERROR S35 August 2010 376 found or read from this set of disks The media may be bad or there may be some system error Remedy Reboot and retry Diagnosis See if the disks load on another machine Display the contents of the setup media DLL Error d Unable to load s Prob
598. wn the Management menu and point to Setup Click ECU Hardware Station 2 Click New To set up a new ECU number for Infinity network ECUs Infinity Tap 1 etc 1 Select the name of the Network Select a network you ve already set up for Infinity network ECUs 2 If you don t know the ECU number click Identify to communicate with the network and determine the next available ECU The next numbered ECU that has not been set up will be identified OR Type the unique ECU number The ECU number must match the number set in the ECU itself The numbers of any ECUs you ve already set up in this network appear in the Existing ECUs field 3 Select the ECU Type 4 Click Continue The New ECU Setup screen displays 5 See New ECU Setup for help setting up the ECU To set up a new number for dispenser network ECUs Tap 2 1 Select the name of the Network Select a network you ve already set up for Dispenser Network ECUs 2 Type the unique ECU number The next available unique number for this network displays by default The numbers of any ECUs you ve already set up on this network appear in the Existing ECUs field 3 Select Dispenser Network as the ECU Type 4 Click Set ECU Number to communicate with the equipment and set this number in the ECU itself 5 Click OK to confirm the message Go to the ECU and cycle power pull the power out and plug it right back in to the power supply Wait for communication to occur which
599. y You should exit the program It is unlikely any other operation will work Remedy Shut down all other programs and retry In some cases memory may have been permanently tied up and you will need to reboot the PC Check that you have the required memory for Infinity and if not add memory to your PC Can t delete database Z records Problem Whenever a clear and archive is done the old last archive Z records must first be cleared For some reason this could not be done and therefore the new records cannot be written This is often a result of corruption in the database Remedy Repair Database if possible under Diagnostics Fix any indicated disk problems Clear sales will clear out all archive records even when this error occurs Diagnosis Check Disk Run Check Database and Repair Database to see if there are any database errors Can t delete out of date archives Problem Whenever a clear and archive is done the program looks for archive records which are past the storage length of the archive records These records are deleted The deletion did not work for some reason Remedy See GE19 You may also be able to get around the problem by changing the storage length in Setup Configuration Unauthorized copy Serial number mismatch Problem The serial number is stamped twice into the database These two numbers are not the same This could be the results of a bad install or an improper restoration of a database backup Remedy Reinstall
600. y also restore the database that was present when the schedule as created Custom report does not exist Problem See SCH10 Auto Run or Recovery of Schedule failed Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 374 Problem You have set up an auto run schedule or a schedule has tried to recover The schedule could not be run This may be because of a mismatch in user name passwords if you have passwords enabled Remedy Check that you have not deleted the user who set up the auto run schedule If so you must save this schedule under a different user If auto run failed otherwise try saving the schedule again To just run the schedule choose Schedule Run ERROR SCH15 Both categories cannot be the same Problem When naming two categories in an operation the two categories must be different Remedy Change one of the categories August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 375 Setup S Error Messages S00 09 10 19 S20 29 S30 39 ERROR S02 You must have full administrator permission to install this software You are not logged in asan administrator Problem Infinity software is set up to be installed under the administrator Administrators have special permissions that are required Remedy Log on as an administrator and reinstall ERROR S03 Unable to create the folder s Problem The destination folder indicated could not be created There may be disk or file system errors
601. y the amount poured is considered close enough to the expected amount You can move on to calibrate the next tap You don t have to perform any calculations to calibrate Infinity does all the calculating When do I calibrate You should calibrate a new system after you ve installed all hardware and software and set up the equipment in the software You should re calibrate a dispenser if you change the brands poured at the dispenser or if you make any adjustments to delivery pressure tubing diameter etc or ifa brand appears to pour inaccurate portions Berg recommends you calibrate All Bottle pourers when the beverage volume is in the middle third of the bottle What if don t calibrate If you don t calibrate a new system unexpected portion sizes often result If you then try to adjust portion size amounts to account for the unexpected portions you ll only create more chances for errors in the system When you call Berg service personnel for help with the errors they ll ask you to calibrate the system before proceeding with anything else August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 155 Align Activator Rings To align All Bottle 7 activator rings y Pull down the Management menu and point to Calibration Click Align Activator Rings The Align Activator Rings screen displays only if you ve already setup an All Bottle 7 dispenser Select the Equipment Name Only All Bottle 7 dispen
602. ying Tequila Standard 3 Type the correct Portion and Portion Price for each Size listed on the Price Level A tab Type 6 for 6 00 fl oz or 2 for 2 00 Repeat for each price level tab you use 4 Click OK to save your entries on all tabs 5 Repeat steps 2 4 for any other brands with price and or portion modifications 6 Click Close to exit the Prices and Portions Setup screen August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help Quick Start Task 7 Assign Brands To assign brands to dispensers 1 Pull down the Pouring menu and click Assign Brands 2 Select the Equipment Name and click OK You can select an ECU ora single dispenser Uptown Grill is assigning brands to the Main Bar ECU we set up 3 If you selected an ECU click a dispenser tab to begin assigning brands Uptown Grill starts with the Main Laser 16 dispenser The cursor automatically points to button 1 4 Click a brand in the list Uptown Grill is using Brandy Standard To quickly jump to a brand in the list click anywhere in the list and type the first letter of the brand name Click lt Assign to place Brandy in the Button 1 position Or drag and drop Brandy to the first line Repeat steps 4 5 for the brands you re assigning to the other Laser 16 buttons When assigning to Laser dispensers be sure to include all ingredients needed in cocktails 7 Click the next dispenser tab e g Main L
603. you only use Regular size you can set small and large to pour the same portions This can also be used for price levels not used If cocktails wont pour make sure that cocktail mode is enabled and that you are in cocktail mode Similarly check the definition of the cocktail for ingredients that have non zero portions for the price level you are using Also check that you are using the correct bank of cocktails 8 Does gun click when you press the button You will need to listen near the solenoids A Yes i Check calibration numbers Cal numbers resulting in an extremely short pour may not allow enough time to dispense any liquid Go to to initialize cal values and change to cal defaults Retry the pour ji Look for mechanical reasons a Nothing pours Air compressor not plugged in air leaks cable crimps air cabling improperly installed check circuit breakers b Single brand doesnt pour Lines crossed clogged lines no line connected out of liquor pump failure pump clogged leak cut in line Check for clogged diffuser screen B No Look for electronic reasons Does gun only pour brands 1 6 or brands 7 16 Yes Bad ground wire in switch pack ii switch pack failure iii Simultaneous pour jumper Special Case 1 Does not pour when calibrating Turn off interface or set to pour without release before calibrating Price level fails to switch All Bottle and Laser If dispenser p
604. you recorded and saved at the time of installation Flow Monitor A dispenser used on the Dispenser network that supports up to 8 flow meters This is flow meter only Flow Rate The default flow rate is 2 fl oz 59 1 ml of beverage per second If you want to estimate the actual flow rate of a tap controller use a stopwatch to pour for exactly 10 seconds into a 20 ounce or larger measuring cup When the foam settles divide the number of fluid ounces poured by 10 This is the estimated flow rate Font Names Font Names include all fonts which are defined for the Windows default printer These may include Arial MS Sans Serif Times New Roman Courier New and Verdana Select the font you prefer for reading your reports You should only change the font if it s necessary to get a good looking report from your printer lf you choose MS Sans Serif the Zoom buttons are disabled on the report View screen The Berg default is Arial Font Size Font Size indicate how large the characters are on your reports Font sizes include 6 through 9 Not all font sizes may be able to be represented with every font Choose a font size that gives the best looking reports The Berg default is 8 Free Pour Free Pour means the dispenser will pour as long as you hold down the button This can be useful during testing cleaning and priming the lines The amount poured is not recorded nor is any PLU ever sent to the POS Therefore you should be careful when enabling fr
605. yword does not match what was requested The response is being ignored Remedy See CM30 Diagnosis See CM30 August 2010 Copyright 2009 2010 Berg Company LLC Infinity Help 351 Database DB Error Messages DB00 09 DB10 19 DB20 29 DB50 59 ERROR DB00 ERROR DB01 ERROR DB02 ERROR DB03 ERROR DB04 ERROR DB05 ERROR DB06 ERROR DB07 ERROR DB08 ERROR DB09 ERROR DB10 ERROR DB11 August 2010 Network name not found Problem Network being used by this operation could not be found in the database This could be a corrupted database or could mean corrupted memory Remedy Reboot Retry Possibly repair database Diagnosis Run Check Database and Repair Database Hardware Station name not found Problem Hardware Station being used by this operation was not found in the database Possible database corruption See DB00 Brand number in brand list not found Problem A Z or archive record refers to a brand that does not exist Possible database corruption Remedy Reboot and retry Fix database if corrupted Or run clear sales to remove all archive records Diagnosis Run Check Database and Repair Database Cocktail information not found Problem A Z or archive record refers to a cocktail that is not defined or assigned Or an assigned cocktail refers to a cocktail which does not exists Possible database corruption Remedy See DB02 Brand information not found Problem A brand assignment recor
606. ze In learn mode you can pour a glass as full as you want and Infinity calculates the number of fluid ounces in the pour and automatically sets up the portion size See How to set up TAP 1 portion sizes using learn mode Level of Accuracy The level of accuracy is the percentage of difference between the calibration amount poured and the amount expected So a lower number means a greater level of accuracy The default level of accuracy is 10 You can change the level of accuracy prior to performing calibration see Calibration Units and Accuracy and Percent Accuracy For further discussion see Calibration Overview Line Spacing Line Spacing determines the space between each line of data in a report Options include Single Spacing One and A Half Lines and Double Spacing The Berg default is One and A Half Lines List Calibration Each Laser gun button All Bottle coded pourer and TAP 1 tap must be calibrated You can speed up the process for Laser and All Bottle dispensers using a copy feature called list calibration List calibration copies the actual timing values for one gun button or coded pourer to other buttons or codes which you select at the dispenser List calibration is similar to dispenser calibration List calibration just gives you a chance to select specific brands to receive the copy After performing list calibration each brand should still be calibrated using brand calibration Load Defaults Use the Load Def

Infinity Help - Berg Liquor Controls

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents